US20080021468A1 - Interspinous process implants and methods of use - Google Patents

Interspinous process implants and methods of use Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20080021468A1
US20080021468A1 US11/806,528 US80652807A US2008021468A1 US 20080021468 A1 US20080021468 A1 US 20080021468A1 US 80652807 A US80652807 A US 80652807A US 2008021468 A1 US2008021468 A1 US 2008021468A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
implant member
implant
end portion
wing
size
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US11/806,528
Inventor
James Zucherman
Ken Hsu
Henry Klyce
Charles Winslow
Sott Yerby
John Flynn
Steven Mitchell
John Markwart
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Medtronic PLC
Original Assignee
Medtronic Spine LLC
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US10/694,103 external-priority patent/US20050075634A1/en
Priority claimed from US10/816,173 external-priority patent/US7549999B2/en
Priority claimed from US11/095,680 external-priority patent/US7909853B2/en
Priority claimed from US11/095,440 external-priority patent/US20060064165A1/en
Priority claimed from US11/234,555 external-priority patent/US8048117B2/en
Priority claimed from US11/378,893 external-priority patent/US8070778B2/en
Priority claimed from US11/378,892 external-priority patent/US8147548B2/en
Priority claimed from US11/384,055 external-priority patent/US20060264939A1/en
Priority claimed from US11/378,108 external-priority patent/US7749252B2/en
Priority claimed from US11/378,894 external-priority patent/US20060271194A1/en
Priority claimed from US11/389,002 external-priority patent/US7959652B2/en
Priority to US11/806,528 priority Critical patent/US20080021468A1/en
Application filed by Medtronic Spine LLC filed Critical Medtronic Spine LLC
Priority to US11/806,526 priority patent/US8221463B2/en
Priority to US11/768,222 priority patent/US8092535B2/en
Priority to US11/768,223 priority patent/US20080065212A1/en
Priority to US11/768,224 priority patent/US20080065213A1/en
Priority to US11/771,087 priority patent/US8894686B2/en
Priority to US11/771,046 priority patent/US20080051899A1/en
Priority to US11/770,943 priority patent/US20080051898A1/en
Priority to US11/770,915 priority patent/US8007537B2/en
Priority to US11/770,931 priority patent/US20080065214A1/en
Priority to US11/770,934 priority patent/US20080221692A1/en
Priority to US11/771,092 priority patent/US8454659B2/en
Priority to US11/770,924 priority patent/US20080046081A1/en
Priority to US11/771,099 priority patent/US7662187B2/en
Assigned to ST. FRANCIS MEDICAL TECHNOLOGIES, INC. reassignment ST. FRANCIS MEDICAL TECHNOLOGIES, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: MARKWART, JOHN A., FLYNN, JOHN J., WINSLOW, CHARLES J., KLYCE, HENRY A., HSU, KEN Y., MITCHELL, STEVEN T., YERBY, SCOTT A., ZUCHERMAN, JAMES F.
Assigned to KYPHON INC. reassignment KYPHON INC. MERGER (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: ST. FRANCIS MEDICAL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Publication of US20080021468A1 publication Critical patent/US20080021468A1/en
Assigned to MEDTRONIC SPINE LLC reassignment MEDTRONIC SPINE LLC CHANGE OF NAME (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: KYPHON INC
Assigned to KYPHON SARL reassignment KYPHON SARL ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: MEDTRONIC SPINE LLC
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B17/00Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
    • A61B17/56Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
    • A61B17/58Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
    • A61B17/68Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
    • A61B17/70Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
    • A61B17/7053Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant with parts attached to bones or to each other by flexible wires, straps, sutures or cables
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B17/00Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
    • A61B17/56Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
    • A61B17/58Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
    • A61B17/68Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
    • A61B17/70Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
    • A61B17/7062Devices acting on, attached to, or simulating the effect of, vertebral processes, vertebral facets or ribs ; Tools for such devices
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B17/00Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
    • A61B17/56Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
    • A61B17/58Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
    • A61B17/68Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
    • A61B17/70Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
    • A61B17/7062Devices acting on, attached to, or simulating the effect of, vertebral processes, vertebral facets or ribs ; Tools for such devices
    • A61B17/7065Devices with changeable shape, e.g. collapsible or having retractable arms to aid implantation; Tools therefor
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B17/00Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
    • A61B17/56Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
    • A61B17/58Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
    • A61B17/68Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
    • A61B17/70Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
    • A61B17/7062Devices acting on, attached to, or simulating the effect of, vertebral processes, vertebral facets or ribs ; Tools for such devices
    • A61B17/7068Devices comprising separate rigid parts, assembled in situ, to bear on each side of spinous processes; Tools therefor
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B17/00Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
    • A61B17/56Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
    • A61B17/58Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
    • A61B17/68Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
    • A61B17/70Spinal positioners or stabilisers ; Bone stabilisers comprising fluid filler in an implant
    • A61B17/7047Clamps comprising opposed elements which grasp one vertebra between them
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B17/00Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
    • A61B17/56Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor
    • A61B17/58Surgical instruments or methods for treatment of bones or joints; Devices specially adapted therefor for osteosynthesis, e.g. bone plates, screws, setting implements or the like
    • A61B17/68Internal fixation devices, including fasteners and spinal fixators, even if a part thereof projects from the skin
    • A61B17/84Fasteners therefor or fasteners being internal fixation devices
    • A61B17/842Flexible wires, bands or straps

Definitions

  • the spinal column is a bio-mechanical structure composed primarily of ligaments, muscles, vertebrae and intervertebral disks.
  • the bio-mechanical functions of the spine include: (1) support of the body, which involves the transfer of the weight and the bending movements of the head, trunk and arms to the pelvis and legs, (2) complex physiological motion between these parts, and (3) protection of the spinal cord and the nerve roots.
  • spinal stenosis including, but not limited to, central canal and lateral stenosis
  • facet arthropathy spinal stenosis
  • Spinal stenosis results in a reduction foraminal area ⁇ i.e., the available space for the passage of nerves and blood vessels) which compresses the cervical nerve roots and causes radicular pain.
  • Pain associated with stenosis can be relieved by medication and/or surgery. It is desirable to eliminate the need for major surgery for all individuals, and in particular, for the elderly.
  • Systems and method in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention can includes an implant comprising a first wing, a spacer extending from the first wing, and a distraction guide.
  • the distraction guide is arranged in a first configuration to pierce and/or distract tissue associated with adjacent spinous processes extending from vertebrae of a targeted motion segment.
  • the implant can be positioned between the adjacent spinous processes and once positioned, the implant can be arranged in a second configuration. When arranged in a second configuration, the distraction guide can act as a second wing.
  • the first wing and the second wing can limit or block movement of the implant along a longitudinal axis of the implant.
  • FIGS. 1 a - 1 f are views of the spacer of the embodiment of the invention of FIG. 1 a.
  • FIG. 1 a is a front plan view of an embodiment of an assembled implant of the invention
  • FIG. 1 b is a left side view of the embodiment of the invention of FIG. 1 a
  • FIG. 1 e is a front plan view of the embodiment of the invention of FIG. 1 a including a spacer, a main body and a first wing
  • FIG. 1 d is a left side view of the second wing of the embodiment of the invention of FIG. 1 a
  • FIG. 1 e is a front plan view of the second wing of the embodiment of the invention of FIG. 1 a
  • FIG. 1 f is an end view of the spacer of the embodiment of the invention of FIG. 1 a.
  • FIG. 2 a is a perspective view of an embodiment of the frame of the tissue expander or distraction guide of the invention.
  • FIG. 2 b is a perspective view of an embodiment of the lead-in tissue expander or distraction guide of the invention.
  • FIGS. 3 a and 3 b are an end and a perspective view of still another embodiment of the spacer of the invention.
  • FIG. 3 c is a front view of the spacer of FIG. 3 a.
  • FIGS. 4 a and 4 b are an end and a perspective view of yet another embodiment of the spacer of the invention.
  • FIGS. 5 a and 5 b are an end and a perspective view of still another embodiment of the spacer of the invention.
  • FIGS. 6 a and 6 b are an end and a perspective view of a further embodiment of the spacer of the invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a perspective view of an embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a spacer, a distraction guide, and a wing with an elliptical cross-section.
  • FIG. 8 is an end view of the implant of FIG. 7 .
  • FIG. 9 is a perspective view of another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a wing with a teardrop-shaped cross-section.
  • FIG. 10 is an end view of a second wing for use with the implant of FIG. 9 .
  • FIG. 11 is a perspective view of an embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a rotatable spacer and a wing with an elliptical cross-section.
  • FIG. 12 is a perspective view of an embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a rotatable spacer with two wings that are teardrop-shaped in cross-section.
  • FIG. 13 depicts the axis of rotation of the implant of FIG. 6 as seen from an end view.
  • FIG. 14 is a perspective view of an embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a wing that is truncated at a posterior end.
  • FIG. 15A is an end view of an embodiment of an implant in accordance the present invention having a wing truncated at a posterior end and a rotatable spacer.
  • FIG. 15B is a truncated second wing for use with the implant of FIG. 15A .
  • FIG. 16 is a plan view of an embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention wherein a screw is used to secure a second wing to the spacer.
  • FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the second wing of FIG. 16 .
  • FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 16 .
  • FIG. 19A is a front view of a second wing for use with some embodiments of implants of the present invention having a flexible hinge mechanism for securing the second wing to an implant.
  • FIG. 19B is a side-sectional view of the second wing of FIG. 19A .
  • FIG. 20A is a plan view of an embodiment of an implant for use with the second wing of FIGS. 19A and 19B .
  • FIG. 20B is a front view of the second wing of FIGS. 19A and 19B .
  • FIG. 21A is a top view of an embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention positioned between the spinous processes of adjacent cervical vertebrae.
  • FIG. 21B is a top view of the implant of FIG. 21A .
  • FIG. 22 is a top view of two such implants of the invention as seen in FIG. 21 , positioned in the cervical spine.
  • FIG. 23 is a side view of two implants of the invention positioned in the cervical spine, with stops or keeps at the distal ends of the spinous processes.
  • FIG. 24 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of an implant for use with systems and methods of the present invention.
  • FIG. 25A is an end view of an implant in accordance with still another embodiment of the present invention having a first part shaped to conform roughly with a contact surface of the spinous process.
  • FIG. 25B is a cross-sectional view of a spacer and a distracting insert in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 25C is a cross-sectional view of a spacer and a distracting insert in accordance with an alternative embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 25D is a cross-sectional view of a spacer and a distracting insert in accordance with still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 26A is a front view of the implant of FIG. 24 inserted between spinous processes.
  • FIG. 26B is a front view of the implant of FIG. 26A having a distracting insert positioned within cavities of the implant.
  • FIG. 27A is a cross-sectional side view of the implant of FIG. 24 showing a distracting insert partially inserted in a cavity of the implant having pins for aligning a first portion with a second portion.
  • FIG. 27B is a top view of the implant of FIG. 27A showing positioning of pins for alignment of the first part and second part.
  • FIG. 28A is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of an implant for use with systems and methods of the present invention, wherein the distracting insert includes a clip.
  • FIG. 28B is a side view of the implant of FIG. 28A showing a distracting insert mated with the implant.
  • FIG. 28C is a side view of an alternative embodiment of an implant mated with an alternative embodiment of a distracting insert.
  • FIG. 28D is a side view of still another embodiment of an implant mated with still another embodiment of a distracting insert.
  • FIG. 29 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a distractible implant in accordance with the present invention having a second wing for limiting or blocking shifting along the longitudinal axis.
  • FIG. 30 illustrates an embodiment of a method for implanting an interspinous implant in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 31 illustrates an alternative embodiment of a method for implanting an interspinous implant in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 32 is a perspective view of an interspinous implant capable of limiting or blocking relative movement of adjacent spinous processes during extension of the spine.
  • FIG. 33A is a posterior view of the implant of FIG. 32 positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional side view of a spacer of the interspinous implant of FIGS. 32 and 33 A positioned between spinous processes.
  • FIG. 33C is a cross-sectional view of the spacer of FIG. 33B during flexion of the spine.
  • FIG. 34A is a side view of an embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a distraction guide, a spacer, a brace, and a binder associated with the brace and fixable in position by a capture device.
  • FIG. 34B is a side view of an alternative embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention including a brace wall having recesses for receiving lobes of a capture device.
  • FIG. 34C is a side view of still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention including a capture device having a spring-loaded cam for securing a binder against a brace wall.
  • FIG. 34D is a side view of a still further embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention including a capture device having dual spring-loaded cams for securing a binder in position.
  • FIG. 35A is an end view of the implant of FIG. 34A positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 35B is an end view of the implant of FIG. 34A positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 35C is an end view of the implant of FIG. 34A positioned between adjacent spinous processes wherein the spinous processes are surgically modified to receive a binder.
  • FIG. 36 is an end view of an alternative embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a binder that varies in shape along the binder's length.
  • FIG. 37A is an end view of the implant of FIG. 36 positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 37B is an opposite end view of the implant of FIG. 37A .
  • FIG. 37C is an end view of still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a cord for a binder.
  • FIG. 38A is a side view of an embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention including a wing associated with the distraction guide to further limit or block movement of the implant.
  • FIG. 38B is a partial cross-sectional side view of an alternative embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention include an extendable wing associated with the distraction guide, the extendable wing being in a retracted position.
  • FIG. 38C is a partial cross-sectional side view of the implant of FIG. 38B wherein the extendable wing is in an extended position.
  • FIG. 38D is a partial cross-sectional side view of still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention including a spring-loaded wing associated with the distraction guide, the wing being in an extended position.
  • FIG. 38E is a partial cross-sectional side view of the implant of FIG. 38D wherein the spring-loaded wing is in a collapsed position.
  • FIG. 39 is a top view of two implants in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention positioned between the spinous processes of adjacent vertebrae, one of the implants having a binder arranged around the adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 40A is a perspective view of a further embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a distraction guide, a spacer, a brace, and a binder associated with the brace and fixable in position by a capture device.
  • FIG. 40B is a perspective view the implant of FIG. 40A wherein the capture device is arranged to secure a binder between the capture device and the brace.
  • FIG. 40C is a side view of the implant of FIGS. 40A and 40B .
  • FIG. 41A is a cross-sectional top view of a binder loosely positioned within the capture device of the implant of FIGS. 40A and 40B .
  • FIG. 41B is a cross-sectional top view of the binder secured to the brace by the capture device of the implant of FIGS. 40A and 40B .
  • FIG. 41C is a cross-sectional top view of a binder loosely positioned within an alternative embodiment of a capture device of the implant of FIGS. 40A and 40B .
  • FIG. 41D is a cross-sectional top view of the binder and capture device of FIG. 41C wherein the binder is secured to the brace.
  • FIG. 42 is an end view of the implant of FIGS. 40A and 40B positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 43 is a block diagram illustrating a method of positioning the implant of FIG. 40A between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 44A is a perspective view of an still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a distraction guide, a spacer, a first wing, and a second wing including a capture device.
  • FIG. 44B is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 44A in accordance with the present invention having a distraction guide, a spacer, a first wing, and a second wing including a capture device.
  • FIG. 45 is a perspective view of an still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a distraction guide, a spacer, a first wing, and a second wing including a capture device.
  • FIG. 46 is a perspective view of an still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a distraction guide, a spacer, a first wing, and a second wing including a capture device.
  • FIG. 47 is a block diagram illustrating a method of positioning the implant of FIGS. 44A-46 between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 48A is a perspective view of an implant including a spacer having a tear-drop shaped cross-section, a distraction guide, a first wing, and a second wing connectable with the distraction guide.
  • FIG. 48B is a perspective view of an implant including a rotatable spacer having an elliptical cross-section, a distraction guide, a first wing, and a second wing connectable with the distraction guide.
  • FIG. 49A is a perspective view of an implant in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention including a main body and an insert, the main body having a distraction guide, a spacer, and a first wing.
  • FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 49A wherein the insert is positioned within the main body, causing the distraction guide associated with the main body to limit or block movement of the implant when positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 50A is a side view of the main body of the implant of FIGS. 49A and 49B positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 50B is a side view of the implant of FIG. 50A wherein the insert is positioned within the main body.
  • FIG. 51 is a perspective view of an implant in accordance with an alternative embodiment wherein the main body includes hooks to limit relative movement of adjacent spinous processes during flexion motion.
  • FIG. 52 is a side view of the implant of FIG. 51 positioned between adjacent spinous processes and arranged so that the hooks confine the adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 53A is a perspective view of still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention, wherein a first section and a second section of a distraction guide are deployable to form a second wing.
  • FIG. 53B is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 53A wherein the insert is positioned within the main body, causing the first section and the second section of the distraction guide to deploy.
  • FIG. 54A is a perspective view of a still further embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention including a rotatable spacer.
  • FIG. 54B is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 54A wherein the insert is positioned within a central body so that the distraction guide deploys as a second wing.
  • FIG. 54C is a cross-sectional side view of distraction guide of FIG. 54A .
  • FIG. 54D is a cross-sectional side view of distraction guide of FIG. 54B .
  • FIG. 55 is a side view of the implant of FIGS. 54A-54D positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 56A is a side view of an alternative embodiment of the implant positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 56B is a partial cross-section side view of the implant of FIG. 56A showing deployable winglets disposed within a distraction guide of the implant.
  • FIG. 56C is a partial cross-sectional side view of the implant of FIG. 56B wherein the winglets deployed.
  • FIG. 57A is a side view of an alternative embodiment of the implant positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 57B is a side view of the implant of FIG. 57A positioned between adjacent spinous processes wherein the winglets deployed.
  • FIG. 57C is a partial cross-sectional end view of the implant of FIG. 57A showing deployable winglets disposed within a distraction guide of the implant.
  • FIG. 57D is a partial cross-sectional end view of the implant of FIGS. 57A-57C showing the winglets deployed so that the winglets extend from the distraction guide of the implant.
  • FIG. 57E is an end view of the implant of FIGS. 57A-57D showing the distraction guide and the deployed winglets relative to the distraction guide.
  • FIG. 58A is a partial cross-sectional end view of an alternative embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention including an alternative actuator arrangement.
  • FIG. 58B is an partial cross-sectional end view of the implant of FIG. 58A showing the winglets deployed so that the winglets extend from the distraction guide of the implant.
  • FIG. 59A is a partial cross-sectional end view of still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having an alternative actuator arrangement wherein the winglets comprise two hinged portions.
  • FIG. 59B is a partial cross-sectional end view of the implant of FIG. 59A showing the winglets deployed so that the winglets extend from the distraction guide of the implant.
  • FIG. 60 is a partial cross-sectional end view of a still further embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention wherein implants are arranged at adjacent motion segments.
  • FIG. 61 illustrates an embodiment of a method for implanting the implant of FIGS. 49A-55 between adjacent spinous processes in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 62 illustrates an embodiment of a method for implanting the interspinous implant of FIGS. 49A-55 between adjacent spinous processes in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 63 illustrates an embodiment of a method for implanting the interspinous implant of FIGS. 56A-60 between adjacent spinous processes in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 64A is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a first wing and a second wing that can be deployed after arranging the implant between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 64B is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 64A in a deployed configuration.
  • FIG. 65A is a posterior view of the implant of FIGS. 64A and 64B positioned between adjacent spinous processes in an undeployed configuration.
  • FIG. 65B is a posterior view of the implant of FIGS. 64A and 64B positioned between adjacent spinous processes in a deployed configuration.
  • FIG. 66A is a perspective view of still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a first wing and a second wing that can be deployed after arranging the implant between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 66A in a deployed configuration.
  • FIG. 67 is a posterior view of the implant of FIGS. 66A and 66B positioned between adjacent spinous processes in a deployed configuration.
  • FIG. 68A is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a first wing and a second wing that can be deployed after arranging the implant between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 68B is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 68A in a partially deployed configuration.
  • FIG. 68C is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 68A in a fully deployed configuration.
  • FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 68A including a cannula within which the implant is disposed for insertion into desired location between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 69A in a partially deployed configuration.
  • FIG. 69C is a perspective close-up view of the implant of FIG. 69A showing hinged structures connected by cords.
  • FIG. 70 illustrates an embodiment of a method for implanting an interspinous implant as shown in FIGS. 7-23 in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 71 illustrates an embodiment of a method for implanting an interspinous implant as shown in FIGS. 64A-67 having deployable first and second wings in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 72 illustrates an alternative embodiment of a method for implanting an interspinous implant as shown in FIGS. 68A-69B having deployable first and second wings by way of a cannula inserted between adjacent spinous processes in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 73A is a perspective view of an implant including a spacer having a tear-drop shaped cross-section, a distraction guide, a first wing, and a second wing connectable with the distraction guide.
  • FIG. 73B is a perspective view of an implant including a rotatable spacer having an elliptical cross-section, a distraction guide, a first wing, and a second wing connectable with the distraction guide.
  • FIG. 74A is a perspective view of a frame of an implant in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 74B is a perspective view of a spacer for use with the frame of FIG. 74A .
  • FIG. 74C is a perspective view of the spacer of FIG. 74B seated within the frame of FIG. 74A .
  • FIG. 75A is a partial cross-sectional posterior view of the frame of the implant of FIGS. 74A-74C positioned adjacent to an interspinous ligament disposed between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 75B partial cross-sectional posterior view of the frame of the implant of FIGS. 74A-74C rotated so that the interspinous ligament is disposed between a portion of the helical shaped second wing and the first wing along a longitudinal axis of the implant.
  • FIG. 75C partial cross-sectional posterior view of the frame of the implant of FIGS. 74A-74C rotated so that the interspinous ligament is disposed between the entire helical shaped second wing and the first wing along the longitudinal axis.
  • FIG. 75D partial cross-sectional posterior view of the frame of the implant of FIGS. 74A-74C wherein a spacer is partially arranged over a central body of the frame so that a portion of the spacer partially distracts the interspinous ligament.
  • FIG. 75E partial cross-sectional posterior view of the frame of the implant of FIGS. 74A-74C wherein the spacer is seated over the central body of the frame so that a portion of the spacer partially distracts the interspinous ligament.
  • FIG. 76A is an end view of the implant of FIG. 75E positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 76B is an front view of the implant of FIG. 75E positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 77A is a perspective view of a frame from an alternative embodiment of an implant in accordance the present invention.
  • FIG. 77B is a perspective view of a spacer for use with the frame of FIG. 77A .
  • FIG. 77C is a perspective view of the spacer of FIG. 77B seated within the frame of FIG. 77A .
  • FIG. 78 is a side view of the implant of FIGS. 77A-77C positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 79A is a perspective view of a frame from a still further embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 79B is a side view of the frame of FIG. 79A positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 79C is a side view of the frame of FIG. 79A positioned between adjacent spinous processes and retracted to collapse the second wing.
  • FIG. 80 is a perspective view of a frame from a still further embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 81 illustrates an embodiment of a method for implanting an interspinous implant between adjacent spinous processes of the cervical region in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 82 is a flowchart of a method for implanting an interspinous implant between adjacent spinous processes of the lumbar region in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 83 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of an implant for use with systems and methods of the present invention, the implant including an distraction piece mated with a initiating piece.
  • FIG. 84A is a perspective view of the initiating piece of the implant of FIG. 83 .
  • FIG. 84B is a perspective view of a proximal end of an insertion tool having prongs positioned within cavities of the initiating piece.
  • FIG. 84C is a perspective view of the prongs arranged in a locked position within the cavities of the initiating piece.
  • FIGS. 85A-85D are posterior views of the initiating piece of FIG. 84A as the initiating piece is urged into position with the interspinous ligament disposed between a lower portion of first wing and a lower portion of the second wing.
  • FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the slide-in distraction piece of the implant of FIG. 83 .
  • FIGS. 87A-87D are posterior views showing the slide-in distraction piece of FIG. 86 mating with the initiating piece positioned as shown in FIG. 85D so that an implant as shown in FIG. 83 is disposed between the adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 88A is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of an implant for use with systems and methods of the present invention, the implant including an distraction piece mated with a initiating piece.
  • FIG. 88B is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 88A , the implant including an distraction piece mated with a initiating piece.
  • FIGS. 89A-89C are posterior views of the initiating piece of FIG. 88A as the initiating piece is urged in position with the interspinous ligament disposed between the first wing and the second wing.
  • FIGS. 89D and 89E are posterior views showing the distraction piece of FIG. 88A urged so that the distraction piece is mated with the initiating piece.
  • FIG. 90 illustrates an embodiment of a method in accordance with the present invention for implanting the interspinous implant of FIG. 83 .
  • FIG. 91 illustrates an embodiment of a method in accordance with the present invention for implanting the interspinous implant of FIG. 88A .
  • FIG. 1 a An embodiment of an implant 100 of the invention is depicted in FIG. 1 a.
  • This implant 100 includes a first wing 104 and a spacer 150 and a lead-in tissue expander or distraction guide 110 .
  • This embodiment further can include, as required, a second wing 132 .
  • a shaft 102 extends from the first wing 104 and is the body that connects the first wing 104 to the tissue expander or distraction guide 110 .
  • the distraction guide 110 in this particular embodiment acts to distract the soft tissue and the spinous processes when the implant 100 is inserted between adjacent spinous processes.
  • the guide 110 has an expanding cross-section from the distal end 111 to the area where the second wing 132 is secured to the guide 110 .
  • the guide 110 is wedge-shaped.
  • the spacer 150 is elliptical-shaped in cross-section.
  • the spacer 150 can have other shapes such as circular, oval, ovoid, football-shaped, and rectangular-shaped with rounded corners and other shapes, and be within the spirit and scope of the invention.
  • the spacer 150 includes a bore 152 which extends the length of the spacer 150 . The spacer 150 is received over the shaft 102 of the implant 100 and can rotate thereon about the shaft 102 .
  • the spacer 150 can have minor and major dimensions as follows: Minor Dimension (116a) Major Dimension (116b) 6 mm 13.7 mm 8 mm 14.2 mm 10 mm 15.2 mm 12 mm 16.3 mm 14 mm 17.8 mm
  • the advantage of the use of the spacer 150 as depicted in the embodiment of FIG. 1 a is that the spacer 150 can be rotated and repositioned with respect to the first wing 104 , in order to more optimally position the implant 100 between spinous processes. It is to be understood that the cortical bone or the outer bone of the spinous processes is stronger at an anterior position adjacent to the vertebral bodies of the vertebra than at a posterior position distally located from the vertebral bodies. Also, biomechanically for load bearing, it is advantageous for the spacer 150 to be close to the vertebral bodies.
  • the spacer 150 rotates relative to the wings, such as wing 104 , so that the spacer 150 is optimally positioned between the spinous processes, and the wing 104 is optimally positioned relative to the spinous processes. Further, the broad upper and lower surfaces of the spacer 150 helps spread the load that the spinous processes place on the spacer 150 .
  • the implant 100 can also include a second wing 132 which fits over the guide 110 and is secured by a bolt 130 placed through an aperture 134 provided in a tongue 136 of second wing 132 .
  • the bolt 130 is received and secured in the threaded bore 112 located in the guide 110 .
  • the first wing 104 is located adjacent to first sides of the spinous processes and the second wing 132 is located adjacent to second sides of the same spinous processes.
  • the spacer 150 has a cross-section with a major dimension and a minor dimension, wherein the major dimension is greater than the minor dimension, and, for example, less than about two times the minor dimension.
  • the spacer 150 can be fabricated from somewhat flexible and/or deflectable material.
  • the spacer is made out of a polymer, more specifically, the polymer is a thermoplastic. Still more specifically, the polymer is a polyketone known as polyetheretherketone (PEEK). Still more specifically, the material is PEEK 450G, which is an unfilled PEEK approved for medical implantation available from Victrex of Lancashire, Great Britain. (Victrex is located at www.matweb.com or see Boedeker www.boedeker. com). Other sources of this material include Gharda located in Panoli, India (www. ghardapolymers.com).
  • the spacer 150 can be formed by extrusion, injection, compression molding and/or machining techniques.
  • the PEEK has appropriate physical and mechanical properties and is suitable for carrying and spreading the physical load between the spinous process. Further in this embodiment, the PEEK has the following additional approximate properties: Property Value Density 1.3 g/cc Rockwell M 99 Rockwell R 126 Tensile Strength 97 MPa Modulus of Elasticity 3.5 GPa Flexural Modulus 4.1 GPa
  • the implant 100 is comprised in part of titanium or other suitable implant material which may be radiopaque and in part of a radiolucent material that does not show up under x-ray or other type of imaging.
  • the first and second wings and the shaft are comprised of such a radiopaque material such as titanium and the spacer and the distraction guide or tissue expander are comprised of a radiolucent material such as, for example, PEEK or PEKK or other radiolucent materials described herein.
  • the implant looks like an “T”.
  • the implant looks like a “H”. This embodiment allows the doctor to have a clearer view of the spine under imaging without the implant interfering as much with the view of the bone structure.
  • the material selected may also be filled.
  • other grades of PEEK are also available and contemplated, such as 30% glass-filled or 30% carbon-filled, provided such materials are cleared for use in implantable devices by the FDA, or other regulatory body.
  • Glass-filled PEEK reduces the expansion rate and increases the flexural modulus of PEEK relative to that which is unfilled.
  • the resulting product is known to be ideal for improved strength, stiffness, or stability.
  • Carbon-filled PEEK is known to enhance the compressive strength and stiffness of PEEK and lower its expansion rate. Carbon-filled PEEK offers wear resistance and load carrying capability.
  • the spacer 150 is manufactured from polyetheretherketone (PEEK), available from Victrex.
  • PEEK polyetheretherketone
  • the spacer can also be comprised of polyetherketoneketone (PEKK).
  • PEK polyetherketone
  • PEKEKK polyetherketoneetherketoneketone
  • PEEKK polyetherketoneketone
  • the spacer can also be made of titanium.
  • thermoplastic materials such as Bionateg, polycarbonate urethane, available from the Polymer Technology Group, Berkeley, Calif., may also be appropriate because of the good oxidative stability, biocompatibility, mechanical strength and abrasion resistance.
  • Other thermoplastic materials and other high molecular weight polymers can be used.
  • FIG. 2 a and FIG. 2 b shown an embodiment of the distraction guide or tissue expander 110 .
  • FIG. 2 a shows a frame 200 for a distraction guide 110 .
  • the frame 200 is typically manufactured from radiopaque material such as titanium.
  • the frame 200 has a first end 202 and a second end 204 .
  • the first end 202 has a shaft 102 which can be threaded with threads 234 at one end to facilitate connection to, for example, a first wing 104 .
  • the remaining end of the shaft connects to a distraction head frame 230 for the distraction guide 110 .
  • the shaft 102 and the distraction head frame 230 can be formed integral to each other.
  • the distraction head frame 230 , the shaft 102 and the first wing 104 can be formed as one unit. Still further in an embodiment with a screw thread 234 formed at one end of the shaft 102 , which thread 234 is received in a threaded bore of the first wing 102 , the thread 234 can be laser welded into the threaded bore of the first wing 102 , if desired.
  • the distraction head frame 230 is formed to take on a relatively low profile because, as described above, it is typically formed of radiopaque material. As shown in FIG. 2 a , distraction head frame 230 has two pairs of parallel sides. The first pair of parallel sides 210 , 212 extends into a pair of flanges 232 , 233 that define a recess 236 . The second pair of parallel sides 214 , 216 are perpendicular to the first pair of parallel sides. One of the second pair of parallel sides 214 abuts the shaft 102 . As will be appreciated by those of skill in the art, neither the first or second pair of parallel sides need be parallel to each other, nor do the first pair of parallel sides need to be perpendicular to the second pair of parallel sides in order to practice the invention.
  • the distraction head frame 230 has an upper surface 218 within the recess 236 with a threaded bore 112 therein.
  • the threaded bore 112 receives, for example, a bolt 130 to secure the second wing 132 to the distraction guide 110 via the tongue 136 on the second wing 132 (shown in more detail with respect to FIG. 1 a ).
  • the profile of the bolt 130 is such that the height of the bolt 130 and the tongue 136 fits within the recess 236 .
  • the lower surface 220 opposing the upper surface 218 can have a first portion 222 that is parallel, or substantially parallel, to the upper surface 218 .
  • a second portion 224 can be angled from the first portion 222 toward one of the second parallel sides 216 .
  • the angled configuration of the lower surface 220 is designed to facilitate the angled profile of the distraction guide.
  • FIG. 2 b shows a perspective view of the distraction guide 110 .
  • the frame 200 as described above, is manufactured from radiopaque material.
  • a cap 260 is formed of radiolucent material, such as a suitable polymer, around the frame 200 .
  • Suitable polymers include, but are not limited to the polyketones discussed above with respect to the spacer configurations. Accordingly, for example, PEEK, PEKK, PEK, PEKEKK and PEEKK can be used as well as the other materials that are suitable for the spacer 150 .
  • the cap 260 can be associated with the frame 200 by a variety of techniques such that the cap 260 is formed to the frame 200 or is adhered to the frame 200 using a suitable method. As illustrated in FIG. 2 b , the cap 260 has a higher profile than the frame 200 and is shaped to facilitate the second end 204 of the distraction guide 110 acting to expand tissue when the distraction guide is implanted between spinous processes or used to distract adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIGS. 3 a - 6 b various embodiments of spacers are depicted.
  • the spacer 350 includes an outer spacer 352 and an inner spacer 354 .
  • Inner spacer 354 has a bore 360 therethrough that enables the spacer 350 to rotate about the shaft 102 of implant 100 shown in FIG. 1 a.
  • Each of the inner and outer spacers of the spacer 350 can have a cross-section that is elliptical, oval, ovoid, football-shaped, circular-shaped, rectangular with rounded ends (where the cross-section has two somewhat flattened surfaces and two rounded surfaces similar to the effect of a flattened ellipse). Further, the inner spacer and outer spacer can have different cross-sectional shapes relative to each other. At least the minor outer diameter of the outer spacer is between 6 mm and 14 mm. Typically, the minor outer dimension is one of 6 mm, 8 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, and 14 mm. The different sizes enable the spacer to accommodate different sized patients.
  • the spacer 350 is a rectangle with rounded ends or a flattened ellipse, as it has two sides that are almost parallel to each other, and the ends connecting the parallel sides are curved, similar to a “race-track.”
  • the two sides or surfaces of the spacer including the upper and the lower spacer, can also be flattened or slightly radiused.
  • the bore 360 is located in the center of the inner spacer 354 and there is a gap 362 between the upper and lower portions of the outer spacer 352 and the inner spacer 354 .
  • a gap 370 is provided between the inner and outer spacers at the rounded ends 356 , 358 .
  • the upper and lower gaps 362 are about 0.012 of an inch or about a quarter of a millimeter each for a total combined gap of about one half of a millimeter.
  • the gaps 370 at the curved ends 356 , 358 are about 0.002 of an inch or slightly less than a tenth of a millimeter each in a preferred embodiment.
  • the gap 370 for all of the other spacers is preferably, as specified above, for the 8 mm spacer. For the 6 millimeter spacer, generally this is made of one piece such as seen in FIG. 1 f.
  • these spacers are preferably made of two pieces as seen for example in FIG. 3 a .
  • the table below sets our preferred dimensions for the combined upper and lower gap dimension for the spacers.
  • the design is made to take repeated loading at 1200 Newtons of force.
  • the outer spacer 352 is movably or slidably mounted on the inner spacer 354
  • the inner spacer 354 is rotatably mounted on the shaft 102 of the implant 100 .
  • the spacer including either the inner spacer or outer spacer, or both, can be made of deflectable and flexible material.
  • suitable material is a polymer such as for example polyetheretherketone (PEEK).
  • PEEK polyetheretherketone
  • Other suitable materials can include those described above.
  • titanium can be used.
  • the deflectable or flexible material can have a graduated stiffness to help gradually distribute the load when the spinous processes place a force upon the exterior surface of the outer spacer 352 . This can be accomplished by forming multiple layers of the deflectable or flexible material with decreasing stiffness or hardness from the center of the spacer 350 outwardly. Alternatively, the material can have a higher stiffness or hardness in the center of the inner spacer.
  • FIGS. 4 a - 6 b can be made of the materials similar to those emphasized in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 a and 3 a.
  • FIGS. 4 a and 4 b again the spacer 450 is depicted as a somewhat flattened ellipse with rounded ends 456 , 458 , where two sides are somewhat parallel to each other and the ends connecting the parallel sides are curved, similar to a “race-track.”
  • the bore 460 is located off-center within the inner spacer 454 . Further, there are gaps 462 , 470 between the outer spacer 452 and the inner spacer 454 . Except for the location of the bore 460 , the dimensions and materials of the embodiment of FIGS. 4 a and 4 b are similar to that of FIG. 3 a and FIG. 3 b.
  • the off-center bore 460 allows a greater portion of the spacer 450 to be positioned close to the vertebral bodies.
  • an ovoid (“egg-shaped”) spacer off-set the bore 460 is preferably close to the bulbous end of the spacer with the more pointed end directed toward the vertebral bodies in order to attain the advantages of the spacer being closer to the vertebral bodies and enhanced distributed load bearing.
  • the spacer 550 is depicted as having a circular cross-section.
  • the bore 560 is located within the inner spacer 554 .
  • the dimensions of the gap would be the same as those discussed with respect to the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 a .
  • the embodiment of FIG. 3 a can have a diameter that is the minor diameter of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 1 a , 3 a , and 4 a.
  • the outer spacer 552 can be movably mounted on the inner spacer 554 and the inner spacer 554 can be rotatably mounted on the shaft 102 of the implant 100 or any other suitable implant.
  • the spacer 650 is depicted as having an outer spacer 652 and an inner spacer 654 of two different cross-sectional shapes.
  • the outer spacer 652 is elliptical and the inner spacer is football-shaped in cross-sections.
  • the bore 660 is located off-center within the inner spacer 654 .
  • the bore 660 can be located centrally within the inner spacer without departing from the scope of the invention.
  • the gaps 662 between the outer spacer 652 and the inner spacer 654 are crescent-shaped as a result of the inner and outer spacers having different cross-sectional shapes.
  • the gap can have a width ranging from approximately between 0.25 mm at the minor diameter (greatest vertical height) to just enough space at the apexes 662 , 664 of the inner spacer 654 so that the outer spacer can slide over the inner spacer.
  • the inner spacer 654 can be rotatably mounted on the shaft 102 of the implant 100 .
  • this implant as well as the several other implants described herein act to limit extension (backward bending) of the spine. These implants, however, do not inhibit the flexion (forward bending) of the spinal column.
  • FIGS. 7 and 8 illustrate an implant 700 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the implant 700 comprises a wing 730 , a spacer 720 , and a lead-in tissue expander (also referred to herein as a distraction guide) 710 .
  • the distraction guide 710 in this particular embodiment is wedge-shaped, i.e., the implant has an expanding cross-section from a proximal end of the implant 740 to a region 750 where the guide 710 joins with the spacer 720 (referencing for the figures is based on the point of insertion of the implant between spinous processes).
  • the distraction guide functions to initiate distraction of the soft tissue and the spinous processes when the implant 700 is surgically inserted between the spinous processes.
  • the distraction guide can be pointed and the like, in order to facilitate insertion of the implant between the spinous processes of adjacent cervical vertebrae. It is advantageous that the insertion technique disturb as little of the bone and surrounding tissue or ligaments as possible in order to reduce trauma to the site and promote early healing, and prevent destabilization of the normal anatomy.
  • FIGS. 7 and 8 there is no requirement to remove any of the bone of the spinous processes and no requirement to sever, or remove from the body, ligaments and tissues immediately associated with the spinous processes. For example, it is unnecessary to sever the ligamentum nuchae, (supraspinous ligament) which partially cushions the spinous processes of the upper cervical vertebrae.
  • the spacer 720 can be teardrop-shaped in cross-section perpendicular to a longitudinal axis 725 of the implant.
  • the shape of the spacer 720 can roughly conform to a wedge-shaped space, or a portion of the space, between adjacent spinous processes within which the implant 700 is to be positioned.
  • the spacer 720 can have alternative shapes such as circular, wedge, oval, ovoid, football-shaped, and rectangular-shaped with rounded corners and other shapes, and be within the spirit and scope of the invention.
  • the shape of the spacer can be selected for a particular patient so that the physician can position the implant as close as possible to the anterior portion of the surface of the spinous process.
  • the shape selected for the spacer 720 can effect the contact surface area of the implant 700 and the spinous processes that are to be subject to distraction. Increasing the contact surface area between the implant and the spinous processes can distribute the force and load between the spinous frame and the implant.
  • the wing 730 in this embodiment 700 is elliptically-shaped in cross-section perpendicular to a longitudinal axis 725 of the spacer 720 and distraction guide 710 .
  • the dimensions of the wing 730 can be larger than that of the spacer 720 , particularly along the axis of the spine, and can limit or block lateral displacement of the implant in the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 725 .
  • the wing 730 can have other cross-sectional shapes, such as teardrop, wedge, circular, oval, ovoid, football-shaped, and rectangular-shaped with rounded corners and other shapes, and be within the spirit and scope of the invention.
  • the wing 730 has an anterior portion 733 and a posterior portion 735 .
  • the implant 700 can have two wings, with a second wing 760 (shown in FIG. 10 ) separate from the distraction guide 710 , spacer 720 and first wing 730 .
  • the second wing can be connected to the proximal end of the spacer 720 .
  • the second wing 760 similar to the first wing 730 , can limit or block lateral displacement of the implant 700 , however displacement is limited or blocked in the direction along the longitudinal axis 725 opposite insertion.
  • both the first wing 730 and second wing 760 are connected with the implant and the implant is positioned between adjacent spinous processes, a portion of the spinous processes can be sandwiched between the first and second wing, limiting any displacement along the longitudinal axis 725 .
  • the second wing 760 can be teardrop-shaped in cross-section.
  • the wider section or end 762 of the teardrop shape is the posterior end of the second wing 760 and the narrower section or end 769 is the anterior end of the second wing 760 .
  • the sides of the second wing 760 define a space 770 with a lip 780 that allows the second wing 760 to pass over the distraction guide 710 to meet and connect with the spacer 720 .
  • the second wing 760 is then secured to the spacer 720 toward the end of the spacer located distally from the first wing 740 .
  • the second wing 760 is connected with the implant after the implant 700 is positioned between the spinous processes.
  • the implant can be made in two pieces.
  • the first piece can include the first wing 730 , the spacer 720 , and the distraction guide 710 .
  • the second piece can include the second wing 760 .
  • Each piece can be manufactured using technique known in the art (e.g., machining, molding, extrusion).
  • Each piece as will be more fully discussed below, can be made of a material that is bio-compatible with the body of the patient.
  • the implants can be made of stainless steel and titanium. Additionally, a shape memory metal such as Nitinol, which is a combination of titanium and nickel, can also be used. Further polymers can also be used.
  • the implant can be formed with multiple pieces and with the pieces appropriately joined together, or alternatively, the implant can be formed as one piece or joined together as one piece.
  • the spacer 810 can be rotatable about the longitudinal axis 840 relative to the first wing 730 , or relative to a first and second wing 730 , 760 where two wings are used.
  • the spacer 810 can be rotatable or fixed relative to the distraction guide 710 .
  • the spacer 810 can include a bore 820 running the length of the longitudinal axis 840 , and a shaft 830 inserted through the bore 820 and connecting the distraction guide 710 with the first wing 730 . It can be advantageous to position any of the implants taught herein as close as possible to the vertebral bodies.
  • the rotatable spacer 810 can rotate to conform to or settle between the bone structures of the cervical spine as the implant is inserted between the spinous processes, so that on average the contact surface area between the spacer 810 and both of the spinous processes can be increased over the contact surface area between a fixed spacer 810 and the spinous processes.
  • the rotatable spacer 810 improves the positioning of the spacer independent of the wings relative to the spinous processes.
  • the embodiment of FIG. 12 has a first wing 730 and if desired, a second wing 760 similar to the wing depicted in the embodiment of FIG. 9 .
  • the shape of the wings in FIGS. 9 and 12 is such that the implants accommodate the twisting of the cervical spine along its axis as, for example, the head of a patient turning from side to side.
  • FIG. 14 is a perspective view and FIG. 15A is an end view of still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention, wherein the posterior portion 735 of the teardrop-shaped first wing 730 is truncated 910 , making the first wing 730 more ovoid in shape.
  • the anterior portion 733 of the first wing 730 can be longer than the truncated posterior end 910 of the first wing 730 .
  • the spacer 810 of such implants 900 can be a rotatable spacer rather than a fixed spacer.
  • FIG. 15B illustrates a second wing for use with such implant 900 having a truncated posterior end 940 .
  • Truncation of the posterior ends 910 , 940 of the first and second wings 730 , 760 can reduce the possibility of interference of implants 900 having such first and second wings 730 , 760 positioned between spinous processes of adjacent pairs of cervical vertebrae, e.g., implants between cervical vertebrae five and six, and between six and seven.
  • each cervical vertebra can rotate relative to the next adjacent cervical vertebra in the general range of about 6°-12°.
  • about 50 percent of the rotational movement of the neck is accomplished by the top two neck vertebrae.
  • the second wing 760 can be designed to be interference-fit onto the spacer 720 (where the spacer is fixed) or a portion of the distraction guide 710 adjacent to the spacer 720 (where the spacer is rotatable). Where the second wing 760 is interference-fit, there is no additional attachment device to fasten the second wing 760 relative to the remainder of the implant.
  • FIGS. 16-17 illustrate an embodiment of an implant 1000 including a teardrop-shaped second wing 1010 having a bore 1020 through a tongue 1030 at the posterior end of the second wing 760 .
  • the bore on the second wing 1020 is brought into alignment with a corresponding bore 1040 on the spacer 720 when the second wing 760 is brought into position by surgical insertion relative to the rest of the implant.
  • a threaded screw 1050 can be inserted through the aligned bores in a posterior-anterior direction to secure the second wing 760 to the spacer 720 .
  • the direction of insertion from a posterior to an anterior direction has the screw engaging the bores and the rest of the implant along a direction that is generally perpendicular to the longitudinal axis 725 . This orientation is most convenient when the surgeon is required to use a screw 1050 to secure the second wing 760 to the rest of the implant.
  • Other securing mechanisms using a member inserted into corresponding bores 1020 , 1040 on the spacer 720 and second wing 760 are within the spirit of the invention.
  • a rotatable spacer 810 also can be accommodated by this embodiment. With a rotatable spacer 810 , the second wing 760 would be attached to a portion of the distraction guide 710 that is located adjacent to the rotatable spacer 810 .
  • FIGS. 19A-19B depict a further embodiment 1100 wherein the second wing 760 is secured to the spacer 720 by a mechanism including a flexible hinge 1115 , with a protrusion 1130 on the end of the hinge 1110 adjacent to the lip 780 of the hole 770 defined by portions of the second wing 760 .
  • the securing mechanism also encompasses an indentation 1140 on the spacer 720 , wherein the indentation accommodates the protrusion 1130 on the end of the flexible hinge 1115 .
  • the second wing 760 is received over the distraction guide 710 and the spacer 720 .
  • the flexible hinge 1115 and its protrusion 1130 deflect until the protrusion 1130 meets and joins with the indentation 1140 in the spacer 720 , securing the second wing 760 to the spacer 720 .
  • the indentation 1140 is located on an end of the distraction guide 710 that is adjacent to 750 the rotatable spacer 810 .
  • this hinge is in a preferred embodiment formed with the second wing 760 and designed in such a way that it can flex as the hinge 1115 is urged over the distraction guide 710 and the spacer 720 and then allow the protrusion 1130 to be deposited into the indentation 1140 .
  • the indentation 1140 can exist in the second wing 760 and the flexible hinge 1115 and the protrusion 1130 can exist on the spacer 720 in order to mate the second wing 760 to the spacer 720 .
  • the flexible hinge 1115 can be replaced with a flexible protrusion that can be flexed into engagement with the indentation 1140 in the embodiment with the indentation 1140 in the spacer 720 or in the embodiment with the indentation 1140 in the second wing 760 .
  • FIGS. 21A-22 illustrate an embodiment of an implant 1200 wherein anterior ends of a first wing 730 and second wing 760 flare out at an angle away from the spacer 720 and away from each other.
  • the cervical spinous processes are themselves wedge-shaped when seen from a top view. That the implant 1200 can roughly conform with the wedge shape so that the implant 1200 can be positioned as close as possible to the vertebral bodies of the spine where the load of the spine is carried.
  • the first 730 and the second wings 760 are positioned relative to the spacer, whether the spacer is fixed 720 or rotatable 810 , so that the wings flare out as the wings approach the vertebral body of the spine.
  • FIG. 21B depicts a top view of the implant 1200 of FIG. 21A .
  • the first wing 730 is aligned at an angle with respect to a line perpendicular to the longitudinal axis.
  • the angle is about 30°, however, the angle ⁇ can range from about 15° to about 45°.
  • other angles of the first wing 730 relative to the spacer 720 outside of this range are contemplated and in accordance with the invention.
  • the second wing 760 can be aligned along a similar, but oppositely varying range of angles relative to the line perpendicular to the longitudinal axis. The first and second wing 730 , 760 thus form an obtuse angle with respect to the spacer 720 in this embodiment.
  • the second wing 760 defines an inner hole 770 which is outlined by the lip 780 .
  • the lip 780 can be provided at an angle relative to the rest of the second wing 760 so that when the lip 780 is urged into contact with the spacer 720 , the second wing 760 has the desired angle relative to the spacer 720 .
  • FIG. 21A depicts a top view of one such implant 1200 placed between the spinous processes of adjacent cervical vertebrae.
  • FIG. 22 is a top view illustrating two layers of distracting implants 1200 with flared wings.
  • FIG. 23 illustrates “stops” (also referred to herein as “keeps”) 1310 , which are rings of flexible biocompatible material, which can be positioned around the spinous processes of adjacent cervical vertebrae and located posteriorly to the implant.
  • the keeps 1310 can prevent posterior displacement of the implants.
  • the keeps can include a ring 1310 having a slit 1320 .
  • the keeps 1310 can be somewhat sprung apart, so that the keep 1310 can be fit over the end of the spinous process and then allowed to spring back together in order to hold a position on the spinous process.
  • the keep 1310 can act as a block to the spacer 720 in order to prevent the implant from movement in a posterior direction.
  • implants in accordance with the present invention can be distractible in situ.
  • FIG. 24 is a perspective view of one such implant.
  • the implant 1800 comprises a body 1801 adapted to be inserted between the spinous processes, and a distracting insert 1806 .
  • the body 1801 can include two substantially mirror parts: a first part 1802 adapted to contact and support an upper spinous process and a second part 1804 adapted to contact and support a lower spinous process.
  • the body 1801 can resemble implants described above in reference to FIGS. 7-23 .
  • the body 1801 can have a shape other than those shown in FIGS. 7-23 .
  • the first part 1802 and second part 1804 can have different shapes, such that when the first part 1802 and second part 1804 align with and abut one another, the body 1801 is nonsymmetrical about the plane of contact.
  • the first part 1802 can have a saddle-like, or concave shape conforming roughly with a shape of a contact surface of the second cervical, while the second part 1804 has a substantially convex shape.
  • the body 1801 can include a wing 1830 having a first and second portion 1832 , 1834 , a spacer 1820 having a first and second portion 1822 , 1824 , and a lead-in tissue expander (also referred to herein as a distraction guide) 1810 having a first and second portion 1812 , 1814 .
  • the distraction guide 1810 as shown is wedge-shaped, i.e., the distraction guide 1810 has an expanding cross-section from the proximal end of the body 1801 to a region where the distraction guide 1810 joins with the spacer 1820 .
  • the distraction guide 1810 functions to initiate distraction of the soft tissue and the spinous processes when the body 1801 is surgically inserted between the spinous processes.
  • the spacer 1820 is teardrop-shaped in a cross-section perpendicular to the spacer's longitudinal axis 1825 .
  • the spacer 1820 can be shaped to roughly conform to a wedge-like space, or a portion of the space, between adjacent spinous processes, for example as between the spinous processes of the fourth and fifth cervical vertebrae.
  • the shape of the spacer 1820 can be selected for a particular patient, and/or a particular pair of adjacent spinous processes, and can vary substantially.
  • the spacer 1820 can have other cross-sectional shapes, such as circular, wedge, oval, ovoid, football-shaped, and rectangular-shaped with rounded corners and other cross-sectional shapes and/or can be custom fabricated for the particular patient and the anatomy of the particular spinal processes between which the implant 1800 is to be placed.
  • the spacer 1820 can have a nonsymmetrical cross-sectional shape, for example where a space between adjacent spinous processes is nonsymmetrical.
  • the ability to select a size and shape of the spacer 1820 to suit a patient allows the physician to choose an implant 1800 that can be placed closer to the vertebral bodies than farther away for additional support.
  • the shape selected for the spacer 1820 can define the contact surface area between the implant 1800 and the spinous processes that are subject to distraction.
  • a teardrop or wedge-shaped spacer 1820 can allow for more load-bearing contact between the spacer 1820 and the spinous processes of the cervical vertebrae, and embodiments having such shapes will be more particularly described.
  • the wing 1830 can be tear-drop shaped in cross-section, although having a minor dimension that is larger than that of the spacer 1820 , and can limit or block lateral displacement of the implant 1800 in the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 1825 .
  • the wing 1830 need not be teardrop shaped.
  • the wing 1830 can have some other shape, for example the wing 1830 can be elliptical, wedge, circular, oval, ovoid, football-shaped, and rectangular-shaped with rounded corners and other shapes, and be within the spirit and scope of the invention.
  • the wing 1830 can have a nonsymmetrical cross-sectional shape. The shape of the wing 1830 can be chosen to most easily fit into place while avoiding obstructions, such as soft tissue or bone, or other implants, while still blocking or limiting lateral displacement.
  • the wing 1830 can include one or more cavities 1852 , 1854 that extend through the wing 1830 and through at least a portion of the spacer 1820 .
  • the one or more cavities 1852 , 1854 should comprise a first groove formed in the first part 1802 and a second groove formed in the second part 1804 , so that the cross-section of the cavity 1852 , 1854 can be expanded during insertion of a distracting insert 1806 , as described below.
  • the body 1801 of FIG. 18 includes a first cavity 1852 and a second cavity 1854 to receive a first insert 1842 and a second insert 1844 of the distracting insert 1806 . Having two or more cavities and corresponding inserts can prevent relative rotation between the body 1801 and the distracting insert 1806 .
  • each cavity has a substantially circular cross-section, and is sized roughly in proportion to the width of the spacer 1820 , so that the first cavity 1852 is larger in diameter than the second cavity 1854 .
  • the cavities need not be shaped as shown.
  • the cavities can be elliptical, dual-lobed, or otherwise shaped.
  • the cavities need not be sized as shown.
  • the cavities can be roughly the same size.
  • the body 1801 can include more than two cavities 1852 , 1854 , 1856 , and each cavity can have similar, or different shape.
  • the body 1801 can include a single cavity 1852 , such as a wedge-shaped cavity roughly corresponding to a shape of the spacer 1820 .
  • Myriad different cavity shapes and cavity configurations can be employed to achieve separation of a body 1801 positioned between spinous processes.
  • the shape of the cavities 1852 , 1854 , 1856 should correspond roughly with the shape of the upper and lower surfaces of the inserts 1842 , 1844 , 1846 of the distracting insert 1806 , so that, as shown in FIG. 25B-25D , a load applied to the body 1801 can be distributed relatively evenly over the surface of the cavities 1852 , 1854 , 1856 .
  • the first and second parts 1802 , 1804 of the body 1801 can be separated, thereby expanding the width of the body 1801 and distracting the adjacent spinous processes.
  • separation of the first and second parts 1802 , 1804 can be accomplished, for example, by positioning the distracting insert 806 within the body 1801 such that the first and second parts 1802 , 1804 are urged apart.
  • the distracting insert 1806 can include one or more inserts associated with the one or more cavities, the one or more inserts being fixedly connected to a cap 1808 . As shown in FIG.
  • the distracting insert 1806 includes a first insert 1842 and a second insert 1844 , each of the inserts being fixedly connected with a cap 1808 having a shape roughly corresponding to a shape of the wing 1830 .
  • Inserts 1842 , 1844 have distracting tips that can initially urge the halves of the implant 1800 apart.
  • the inserts 1842 , 1844 have tips with ever-increasing cross-section so that the tips can be easily inserted in the cavities 1852 , 1854 and the continual movement of the insert 1842 , 1844 urges the halves of the body 1801 apart.
  • the tips of the insert 1842 , 1844 can be smaller than the cavities 1852 , 1854 in order to facilitate initial insertion into the cavities 1852 , 1854 .
  • the one or more inserts 1842 , 1844 , 1846 can be sized such that they have a height larger than a diameter (or height) of the one or more cavities 1852 , 1854 , 1856 , so that when positioning the inserts within the cavities, the first part 1802 and second part 1804 of the body 1801 are separated by the difference in height of the inserts and the diameter (or height) of the cavities (i.e., an additional distraction height).
  • the body 1801 can be inserted between adjacent ⁇ BR> ⁇ BR> spinous processes by piercing and/or displacing the soft tissue (i.e., the interspinous ligament) with the distraction guide 1810 and stretching and/or displacing the tissue so that the spacer 1820 fits between the spinous processes.
  • the height of the first part 1802 and second part 1804 of the body 1801 can be minimized by abutting the first part 1802 and the second part 1804 so that the body 1801 can be positioned between the spinous processes.
  • the shape of the body 1801 can resemble the shape of a space between adjacent spinous processes.
  • the distracting insert 1806 can be inserted into the body 1801 , causing the first part 1802 and second part 1804 to separate, as described above and shown in FIG. 26B .
  • proximal ends of the inserts 1842 , 1844 of the distracting insert 1806 can be tapered to assist in guiding the inserts 1842 , 1844 into the cavities 1852 , 1854 , and to ease separation of the first and second parts 1802 , 1804 .
  • the distracting insert 1806 can have inserts 1842 , 1844 sized to achieve a desired amount of distraction of the spinous processes.
  • a system in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention can comprise a plurality of bodies 1801 , each body 1801 having different shape and/or height.
  • Such a system can further comprise a plurality of distracting inserts 1806 , having inserts corresponding to cavities of the bodies 1801 , and having different heights to achieve different amounts of distraction.
  • Methods in accordance with embodiments of the present invention can apply such systems so that a physician can select implant components appropriate to the patient at the time of surgery, and can further substitute different bodies and/or different distracting inserts based on evaluation or reevaluation during surgery.
  • FIG. 27A is a cross-sectional side view of a distractible implant 1800 in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention positioned between adjacent spinous processes, and having an insert 1842 of the distracting insert 1806 partially inserted within a cavity 1852 of the body 1801 .
  • the first part 1802 of the body 1801 is aligned and abutted with the second part 1804 of the body 1801 .
  • the first part 1802 and second part 1804 should remain aligned while the body 1801 is inserted between the spinous processes, and further should remain aligned while the distracting insert 1806 is mated with the body 1801 .
  • one of the first and second parts 1802 , 1804 can include alignment pins (or protrusions) 2118 that mate with corresponding holes 2119 of the other of the first and second parts 1802 , 1804 .
  • the pins 2118 can be made of the same or different material as the body 1801 , and can be integrally formed or mated with the corresponding part.
  • the pins 2118 can be press fit into the second part 1804 .
  • the pins 2118 are free to slide in and out of the holes 2119 , but are prevented from separating from the holes 2119 by pressure of the spinous processes.
  • the distal end of the body 1801 begins to separate, as shown.
  • the pins 2118 move within the holes 2119 , allowing separation of the first part 1802 and second part 1804 .
  • the pins 2118 prevent relative shifting or sliding along the longitudinal axis or along the length of the spinous process.
  • the pins 2118 (and corresponding holes 2119 ) preferably have a height larger than the maximum distraction height, thereby preventing the pins 2118 from separating from the holes 2119 and allowing relative shifting of the first and second parts 1802 , 1804 .
  • 27B is a top view showing the position of the pins 2118 relative to a first and second cavity 1852 , 1854 .
  • Two pins 2118 are shown extending through holes 2119 of the second part 1802 , however, in other embodiments, any number of pins 2118 or protrusions can be integrally formed or connected with one of the first and second parts 1802 , 1804 .
  • the first part 1802 and second part 1804 of the body 1801 can be bound together by a flexible, artificial ligament or suture material.
  • the material can be a bio-compatible polymer having flexible properties.
  • the artificial ligament or suture material can limit the shifting between the first part 1802 and second part 1804 .
  • some other device can be employed to maintain alignment of the first and second parts 1802 , 1804 . It is intended that in some embodiments of the present invention, it is preferable to maintain alignment of the first and second parts 1802 , 1804 during distraction. As one of ordinary skill in the art can appreciate, many different devices can be employed to maintain alignment between the first and second parts 1802 , 1804 of the body 1801 .
  • the distracting insert 1806 can be secured to the body 1801 by a clip 2260 .
  • the body 1801 as shown in FIGS. 28A-28D is the same as the body 1801 of FIG. 24 . Commonly labeled components are as described above. However, it should be noted that other embodiments of a body 1801 can be used with distracting inserts 1806 described with reference to FIG. 28A-28D .
  • the clip 2260 can include a first tab 2262 and a second tab 2264 . Each tab 2262 , 2264 can extend across at least a portion of the width of the respective portion of the wing 1830 along the longitudinal axis 1825 .
  • the wing 1830 can be interference-fit with the distracting insert 1806 so that the wing 1830 is held between the tabs 2262 , 2264 .
  • the pressure applied to the surfaces of the wing 1830 should create sufficient frictional force to prevent relative movement between the body 1801 and distracting insert 1806 .
  • the clip 2260 can comprise a single lip along a portion of, or the entire periphery of the cap (and wing 1830 ) and can extend across at least a portion of the width of the wing 1830 along the longitudinal axis 1825 .
  • each tab 2262 , 2264 can include a protrusion 2263 , 2265 located at a proximal end of the tab 2262 , 2264 .
  • the wing 1830 can include indentations 2273 , 2275 , or cavities, for receiving each of the protrusions 2263 , 2265 so that when the protrusions are positioned within the respective indentations, the clip 2260 is locked in place.
  • the tab 2262 , 2264 can extend beyond a ledged wing 1830 , so that the clip 2260 can be locked in place when the protrusions 2263 , 2265 clear the wing 1830 .
  • the distracting insert 1806 is mated with the positioned body 1801 by gradually urging the inserts of the distracting insert 1806 along the length of the cavities of the spacer 1820 .
  • the protrusions 2263 , 2265 can be beveled, so that as the protrusions contact an outer lip of the wing 1830 , the tabs 2262 , 2264 deflect upward, allowing the distracting insert 1806 to continue moving into position along the longitudinal axis.
  • the clasp 2260 locks into place and the distracting insert 1806 is mated with the body 1801 .
  • the distracting insert 1806 need not include a clip, but can be mated with the body 1801 using some other device.
  • an insert 1842 can include one or more pegs 2272 , 2274 , and one or more corresponding through-holes 2282 , 2284 (or cavities) within the first wing 1830 .
  • the one or more pegs 2272 , 2274 can be sized such that a feature of the one or more pegs 2272 , 2274 is approximately the same width, or slightly larger than a width, w, of the one or more corresponding through-holes 2282 , 2284 , so that an interference fit is created between the distracting insert 1806 and the body 1801 , holding the distracting insert 1806 seated in place, and limiting the relative movement of the first part 1802 and second part 1804 .
  • the implant 1800 can further include a second wing 2360 , similar to previously described embodiments.
  • the second wing 2360 can be connected to the proximal end of the spacer 1820 so that portions of the adjacent spinous processes are sandwiched between the second wing 2360 and the first wing 1830 .
  • the second wing 2360 like the first wing 1830 , can prevent lateral displacement of the body 1801 relative to the spinous processes.
  • the second wing 2360 can be teardrop-shaped and sized to approximate the shape and size of the first wing 1830 when the distracting insert 1806 is mated with the body 1801 .
  • systems and methods in accordance with the present invention can comprise a plurality of bodies 1801 and a plurality of distracting inserts 1806 to suit a particular patient.
  • systems and methods in accordance with the present invention can further comprise a plurality of second wings 2360 corresponding in size and shape to the plurality of bodies 1801 and the plurality of distracting inserts 1806 .
  • the second wing 2360 can be secured to the spacer 1820 , for example as described above.
  • the second wing 2360 is implanted once the distraction guide 1810 , spacer 1820 , and first wing 1830 are inserted as a unit between the spinous processes of adjacent cervical vertebrae.
  • FIG. 24 can have truncated wings as depicted in other embodiments.
  • implants in accordance with the present invention, and/or portions thereof can be fabricated from somewhat flexible and/or deflectable material.
  • the implant and/or portions thereof can be made out of a polymer, such as a thermoplastic.
  • the implant can be made from polyketone, known as polyetheretherketone (PEEK).
  • PEEK polyetheretherketone
  • the implant can be made from PEEK 450G, which is an unfilled PEEK approved for medical implantation available from Victrex of Lancashire, Great Britain. Other sources of this material include Gharda located in Panoli, India.
  • PEEK has the following approximate properties: Property Value Density 1.3 g/cc Rockwell M 99 Rockwell R 126 Tensile Strength 97 MPa Modulus of Elasticity 3.5 GPa Flexural Modulus 4.1 GPa
  • the material specified has appropriate physical and mechanical properties and is suitable for carrying and spreading a physical load between the adjacent spinous processes.
  • the implant and/or portions thereof can be formed by extrusion, injection, compression molding and/or machining techniques.
  • the implant can comprise, at least in part, titanium or stainless steel, or other suitable implant material which is radiopaque, and at least in part a radiolucent material that does not show up under x-ray or other type of imaging.
  • a first wing, a second wing and a shaft can comprise a radiopaque material (e.g., titanium) and a rotatable spacer and a lead-in tissue expander can comprise a radiolucent material (e.g., PEEK).
  • under imaging the implant looks like an “H”. The physician can have a less obstructed view of the spine under imaging, than with an implant comprising radiopaque materials entirely.
  • the implant need not comprise any radiolucent materials.
  • the material selected can also be filled.
  • other grades of PEEK are also available and contemplated, such as 30% glass-filled or 30% carbon-filled, provided such materials are cleared for use in implantable devices by the FDA, or other regulatory body.
  • Glass-filled PEEK reduces the expansion rate and increases the flexural modulus of PEEK relative to that which is unfilled.
  • the resulting product is known to be ideal for improved strength, stiffness, or stability.
  • Carbon-filled PEEK is known to enhance the compressive strength and stiffness of PEEK and lower its expansion rate. Carbon-filled PEEK offers wear resistance and load carrying capability.
  • the implant is manufactured from PEEK, available from Victrex.
  • PEEK available from Victrex.
  • other suitable similarly biocompatible thermoplastic or thermoplastic polycondensate materials that resist fatigue, have good memory, are flexible, and/or deflectable, have very low moisture absorption, and good wear and/or abrasion resistance, can be used without departing from the scope of the invention.
  • the spacer can also be comprised of polyetherketoneketone (PEKK).
  • PEKK polyetherketoneketone
  • Other material that can be used include polyetherketone (PEK), polyetherketoneetherketoneketone (PEKEKK), and polyetheretherketoneketone (PEEKK), and generally a polyaryletheretherketone.
  • PEK polyetherketone
  • PEKEKK polyetherketoneetherketoneketone
  • PEEKK polyetherketoneketone
  • other polyketones can be used as well as other thermoplastics.
  • Reference to appropriate polymers that can be used in the implant can be made to the following documents, all of which are incorporated herein by reference. These documents include: PCT Publication WO 02/02158 A1, dated Jan. 10, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials;” PCT Publication WO 02/00275 A1, dated Jan.
  • a minimally invasive surgical method for implanting an implant 100 , 1800 in the cervical spine is disclosed and taught herein.
  • a guide wire 2480 is inserted through a placement network 2490 into the neck of the implant recipient.
  • the guide wire 2480 is used to locate where the implant is to be placed relative to the cervical spine, including the spinous processes.
  • an incision is made on the side of the neck so that an implant in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, can be positioned in the neck thorough an incision and along a line that is about perpendicular to the guide wire 2480 and directed at the end of the guide wire 2480 .
  • the implant can be a sized implant 100 (i.e., having a body that is not distractible), such as described above in FIGS. 7-23 and including a distraction guide 710 , a spacer 720 , and a first wing 730 .
  • the implant 700 is inserted into the neck of the patient.
  • the distraction end pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue.
  • a second wing 760 can be optionally inserted along a line that is generally collinear with the line over which the implant 700 is inserted but from the opposite side of the neck.
  • the anatomy of the neck is such that it is most convenient and minimally invasive to enter the neck from the side with respect to the implant 700 and the second wing 760 .
  • the second wing 760 is mated to the implant and in this particular embodiment, the second wing 760 is snapped into engagement with the implant 700 .
  • the second wing 760 is attached to the implant by the use of a fastener, for example by a screw 1050 .
  • the screw 1050 can be positioned using a screw driving mechanism that is directed along a posterior to anterior line somewhat parallel to the guide wire 2480 . This posterior to anterior line aids the physician in viewing and securing the second wing 160 to the implant.
  • the implant can be a distractible implant 1800 , such as described above in FIGS. 24-29 .
  • a guide wire 2580 is inserted through a placement network 2590 into the neck of the implant recipient (as shown and described above).
  • an incision is made on the side of the neck so that a distractible body 1801 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, can be positioned in the neck thorough an incision and along a line that is about perpendicular to the guide wire 880 and directed at the end of the guide wire.
  • the distractible body 1801 can include a distraction guide 1810 , a spacer 1820 , and a first wing 1830 .
  • the body 1801 is inserted into the neck of the patient, between adjacent spinous processes.
  • the distraction guide 1810 pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue, and the body 1801 is positioned so that the spacer 1820 is between the adjacent spinous processes.
  • a distracting insert 1806 is then positioned within the incision and urged into one or more cavities of the body 1801 , distracting the spinous processes between which the body is positioned. As the distracting insert 1806 mates with the body 1801 , the distracting insert 1806 locks in place.
  • a second wing 2360 can optionally be inserted along a line that is generally collinear with the line over which the body 1801 is inserted but from the opposite side of the neck.
  • the anatomy of the neck is such that it is most convenient and minimally invasive to enter the neck from the side with respect to the body 1801 and the second wing 2360 .
  • the second wing 2360 can be mated to the body 1801 through an interference fit, or alternatively by attaching to the body 1801 by the use of a fastener, or by some other device, as described above.
  • the screw can be positioned using a screw driving mechanism that is directed along a posterior to anterior line somewhat parallel to the guide wire. This posterior to anterior line aids the physician in viewing and securing the second wing 2360 to the body 1801 .
  • FIG. 32 is a perspective view of an implant as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,695,842 to Zucherman, et al. and U.S. Pat. No. 6,712,819 to Zucherman et al., both incorporated herein by reference.
  • the implant 3100 has a main body 3101 .
  • the main body 3101 includes a spacer 3102 , a first wing 3108 , a lead-in tissue expander 3106 (also referred to herein as a distraction guide) and an alignment track 3103 .
  • the main body 3101 is inserted between adjacent spinous processes.
  • the main body 3101 remains (where desired) in place without attachment to the bone or ligaments.
  • the distraction guide 3106 includes a tip from which the distraction guide 3106 expands, the tip having a diameter sufficiently small such that the tip can pierce an opening in an interspinous ligament and/or can be inserted into a small initial dilated opening.
  • the diameter and/or cross-sectional area of the distraction guide 3106 then gradually increases until it is substantially similar to the diameter of the main body 3101 and spacer 3102 .
  • the tapered front end eases the ability of a physician to urge the implant 3100 between adjacent spinous processes. When urging the main body 3101 between adjacent spinous processes, the front end of the distraction guide 3106 distracts the adjacent spinous processes and dilates the interspinous ligament so that a space between the adjacent spinous processes is approximately the diameter of the spacer 3102 .
  • the shape of the spacer 3102 is such that for purposes of insertion between the spinous processes, the spinous processes need not be altered or cut away in order to accommodate the spacer 3102 . Additionally, associated ligaments need not be cut away and there is little or no damage to the adjacent or surrounding tissues.
  • the spacer 3102 is elliptically shaped in cross-section, and can swivel about a central body (also referred to herein as a shaft) extending from the first wing 3108 so that the spacer 3102 can self-align relative to the uneven surfaces of the spinous processes. Self-alignment can ensure that compressive loads are distributed across the surface of the bone.
  • the spacer 3102 can have, for example, a diameter of six millimeters, eight millimeters, ten millimeters, twelve millimeters and fourteen millimeters. These diameters refer to the height by which the spacer distracts and maintains apart the spinous process.
  • the selected height i.e., diameter
  • the major dimension is transverse to the alignment of the spinous process, one above the other.
  • the first wing 3108 has a lower portion 3113 and an upper portion 3112 .
  • the upper portion 3112 is shaped to accommodate the anatomical form or contour of spinous processes (and/or laminae) of the L4 (for an L4-L5 placement) or L5 (for an L5-S1 placement) vertebra. The same shape or variations of this shape can be used to accommodate other motion segments.
  • the lower portion 3113 can also be rounded to accommodate the spinous processes.
  • the lower portion 3113 and upper portion 3112 of the first wing 3108 act as a stop mechanism when the implant 3100 is inserted between adjacent spinous processes. The implant 3100 cannot be inserted beyond the surfaces of the first wing 3108 .
  • the first wing 3108 can prevent side-to-side, or posterior-to-anterior movement of the implant 3100 .
  • the first wing 3108 can further include one or more alignment holes 3103 and one or more locking pin holes 3104 for receiving pins of a main body insertion instrument (not shown).
  • the implant 3100 further includes an adjustable wing 3150 (also referred to herein as a second wing).
  • the adjustable wing 3150 has a lower portion 3152 and an upper portion 3153 . Similar to the first wing 3108 , the adjustable wing 3150 is designed to accommodate the anatomical form or contour of the spinous processes and/or lamina.
  • the adjustable wing 3150 is secured to the main body 3101 with a fastener 3154 .
  • the adjustable wing 3150 also has an alignment tab 3158 . When the adjustable wing 3150 is initially placed on the main body 3101 , the alignment tab 3158 engages the alignment track 3103 . The alignment tab 3158 slides within the alignment track 3103 and helps to maintain the adjustable wing 3150 substantially parallel with the first wing 3108 .
  • FIG. 33A illustrates an implant 3100 positioned between adjacent spinous processes extending from vertebrae of the lumbar region.
  • the implant 3100 is positioned between inferior articular processes 10 associated with the upper vertebrae and superior articular processes 12 associated with the lower vertebrae.
  • the superspinous ligament 6 connects the upper and lower spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the implant 3100 can be positioned without severing or otherwise destructively disturbing the superspinous ligament 6 .
  • the spacer 3102 of the implant 3100 of FIG. 33A is shown in cross-section.
  • the spacer 3102 defines a minimum space between adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the spacer 3102 limits or blocks relative movement between the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 , limiting or blocking the collapse of the space between the spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • Such support can alleviate symptoms of degenerative disorders by preventing a reduction of the foraminal area and compression of the nerve roots, or by avoiding aggravation of a herniated disk, or by relieving other problems.
  • the implant 3100 permits flexion, which in some degenerative disorders (for example in cases of spinal stenosis) can relieve some symptoms.
  • the spacer 3102 can float between the spinous processes, held in position by the interspinous ligament 8 , and/or other tissues and structures associated with the spine.
  • the ability to float between the spinous processes 2 , 4 also permits varying degrees of rotation, as well as flexion. Implants as described in Zucherman '842 thus have the advantage that they permit a greater degree of movement when compared with primary and supplementary spinal fusion devices.
  • FIG. 34A an embodiment of an implant 3300 in accordance with the present invention is shown.
  • the implant 3300 includes a distraction guide 3306 , a spacer 3302 , and a brace 3308 .
  • the spacer 3302 is rotatable about a central body 3301 extending from the brace 3302 , although in other embodiments the spacer 3302 can be fixed is position.
  • a binder 3330 can be fixedly connected with the brace 3308 at a proximal end 3332 of the binder 3330 .
  • the binder 3330 is flexible, or semi-flexible, and can be positioned around adjacent spinous processes so that the binder 3308 engages the spinous processes during flexion of the spine. Once positioned around adjacent spinous processes, tension of the binder 3330 can be set when the binder 3330 is secured to the brace 3308 so that relative movement of the adjacent spinous processes during flexion is limited or prevented, as desired.
  • the brace 3308 can include a first end having a slot 3341 through which the proximal end 3332 of the binder 3330 can be threaded and subsequently sutured, knotted or otherwise bound so that the proximal end 3332 of the binder 3330 cannot be drawn through the slot 3341 .
  • the proximal end 3332 can be looped or can include a connector, such as a clasp or other device, and can be fixed to the brace 3308 via a fastener that engages the connector.
  • the brace 3308 can include a height along the spine greater than a height of the spacer 3302 so that movement along a longitudinal axis L in the direction of insertion is limited or blocked by the brace 3308 when the brace 3308 contacts the lateral surfaces of the spinous processes. In this way, the brace 3308 can function similarly to the wing 3108 of the above described implant 3300 .
  • the brace 3308 can have a height greater or smaller than as shown.
  • a free end of the binder 3330 can be secured to the brace 3308 by a capture device 3320 associated with the brace 3308 .
  • the brace 3308 can include a flange 3310 from which the capture device 3320 can extend, hi the embodiment shown in FIG. 34A , the capture device 3320 comprises a rotatable cam 3321 having a fastener 3322 and one or more cut-outs 3324 .
  • a tool can be mated with the cut-outs 3324 and rotated to pivot the rotatable cam 3321 .
  • the eccentric shape of the cam 3321 causes a gap to close between the cam 3321 and a wall 3314 of the brace 3330 from which the flange 3310 extends.
  • the rotation of the cam 3321 can pinch the binder 3330 between the cam 3321 and the wall 3314 , defining a secured end 3336 of the binder 3330 .
  • the fastener 3322 can be screwed (i.e., rotated) so that the fastener 3322 is further seated, tightening against the cam 3321 to fix the cam 3321 in position.
  • one or both of the wall 3314 and the rotatable cam 3321 can include knurls, or some other texture (e.g., teeth) to prevent slippage (i.e., the slipping of the binder 3330 between the cam 3321 and the wall 3314 ).
  • the brace 3308 can further include a guide 3312 , such as a channel or slot (a slot as shown) at a second end of the brace 3308 to align the binder 3330 with the capture device 3320 .
  • the binder 3330 can comprise a strap, ribbon, tether, cord, or some other flexible (or semi-flexible), and preferably threadable structure.
  • the binder 3330 can be made from a biocompatible material, hi an embodiment, the binder 3330 can be made from a braided polyester suture material.
  • Braided polyester suture materials include, for example, Ethibond, Ethiflex, Mersilene, and Dacron, and are nonabsorbable, having high tensile strength, low tissue reactivity and improved handling.
  • the binder 3330 can be made from stainless steel (i.e., surgical steel), which can be braided into a tether or woven into a strap, for example. In still other embodiments, the binder 3330 can be made from some other material (or combination of materials) having similar properties.
  • the distraction guide 3306 can optionally include a slot, bore, cut-out or other cavity 3309 formed in the distraction guide 3306 through which the binder 3330 can be threaded or positioned.
  • a cavity can allow on-axis positioning of the binder 3330 (i.e., the binder can be substantially aligned with the longitudinal axis L of the implant 3300 ).
  • capturing the binder 3330 within a slot or bore can prevent or limit shifting of the distraction guide 3306 relative to the binder 3330 to further secure the implant 3300 between the spinous processes.
  • implants in accordance with the present invention provide significant benefits to a physician by simplifying an implantation procedure and reducing procedure time, while providing an implant that can limit or block flexion and extension of the spine.
  • a physician can position an implant between adjacent spinous processes and can position a binder 3330 connected with the brace 3308 around the spinous processes without requiring the physician to measure an appropriate length of the binder 3330 prior to implantation.
  • the capture device 3320 allows the binder 3330 to be secured to the brace 3308 anywhere along a portion of the binder 3330 , the portion being between a distal end 3334 of the binder 3330 and the proximal end 3332 .
  • the physician can secure the binder 3330 to the brace 3308 to achieve the desired range of movement (if any) of the spinous processes during flexion.
  • the capture device 3320 and brace 3308 can have alternative designs to that shown in FIG. 34A .
  • a side view of an implant 3400 in accordance with an alternative embodiment of the present invention is shown in FIG. 34B , the implant 3400 including a capture device 3420 comprising a cam 3421 positioned within a ring 3426 having one or more lobes 3423 corresponding with one or more recesses 3413 in a wall 3414 of the brace 3408 .
  • the binder 3330 is positioned between the capture device 3420 and the brace 3408 .
  • the fastener 3422 and cam 3421 can be rotated using an appropriate tool, with the cam 3421 forcing the lobes 3423 of the ring 3426 to mate with the recesses 3413 of the brace 3408 , preventing the ring 3426 from shifting in position and defining a secure end 3336 of the binder 3330 .
  • Rotating the fastener 3422 rotates and optionally tightens down the cam 3421 .
  • Such a capture device 3420 can provide a physician a visual indication that the binder 3330 is properly secured to the brace 3408 , as well as preventing slippage.
  • the implant can include a capture device comprising a spring-loaded mechanism.
  • FIG. 34C illustrates an implant 3500 including a capture device 3520 comprising a single spring-loaded cam 3521 pivotally connected with the flange 3310 and biased to rotate in one direction.
  • the distance between the pivot point of the cam 3510 and the wall 3314 is sufficiently narrow that the rotation of the cam 3521 in the direction of bias is blocked (or nearly blocked) by the wall 3314 .
  • the eccentricity of the cam 3521 is large enough that a maximum gap between the wall 3314 and the cam 3521 is sufficiently wide as to allow the binder 3330 to be threaded between the cam 3521 and the wall 3314 .
  • a physician can position the binder 3330 between the cam 3521 and the wall 3514 by overcoming the spring-force of the spring-loaded cam 3521 . Once the binder 3330 is position as desired, the physician need only allow the bias force of the spring-loaded cam 3520 to force the cam 3521 against the wall 3314 , so that the cam 3521 pinches and secures the binder 3330 between the cam 3521 and the wall 3314 .
  • the cam 3521 and the wall 3314 can be knurled or otherwise textured to limit or prevent slippage.
  • FIG. 34D illustrates an implant 3600 including a capture device 3620 comprising dual spring-loaded cams 3621 , the dual spring-loaded cams 3621 being pivotally connected with the flange 3310 .
  • the dual spring-loaded cams 3621 are biased in opposition to one another so that the cams 3621 abut one another, similar to cam cleats commonly used for securing rope lines on boats.
  • the binder 3330 can be loosely positioned around the adjacent spinous processes and threaded between the cams 3621 . Tension can be applied to the binder 3330 , as desired, by drawing the binder 3330 through the cams 3621 . The force of the binder 3330 being pulled through the cams 3621 can overcome the bias force to allow the binder 3330 to be tightened, while releasing the binder 3330 can define a secure end 3336 of the binder 3330 as the cams 3621 swivel together. As above, one or both of the cams 3621 can be knurled or otherwise textured to limit or prevent slippage.
  • FIGS. 34A-34D Embodiments of implants have been described in FIGS. 34A-34D with some level of specificity; however, implants in accordance with the present invention should not be construed as being limited to such embodiments.
  • Any number of different capture devices can be employed to fix a binder to a brace by defining a secure end of the binder, and such capture devices should not be construed as being limited to capture devices including cams, as described above.
  • the capture device need only be a device that allows a physician to fit a binder having a generic size, or estimated size, around adjacent spinous processes with a desired level of precision in tension.
  • the binder 3330 can be threaded through interspinous ligaments associated with motion segments (i.e., pairs of adjacent vertebrae and associated structures and tissues) above and below the targeted motion segment so that the binder 3330 is arranged around the upper and lower spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the binder 3330 can then be threaded through the slot 3312 of the brace 3308 and positioned between the capture device 3320 and the brace wall 3314 .
  • a first tool (not shown) can be inserted into the incision formed to insert the implant 3300 between the spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the spacer 3302 can include a notch, similar to a notch 3190 of the spacer 3102 of FIG.
  • the brace 3308 can include recesses, similar to recesses 103 , 104 of the first wing 3108 of FIG. 32 , that can be engaged by the first tool for grasping and releasing the implant 3300 during insertion. (See U.S. Pat. No. 6,712,819, which is incorporated herein by reference). Alternatively, some other technique for grasping and releasing the implant 3300 can be employed.
  • a second tool such as a forked tool having spaced apart tines, can engage the cam 3321 of the capture device 3320 to rotate the cam 3321 , thereby securing the binder 3330 to the brace 3308 .
  • a hex wrench can tighten down the fastener 3322 if desired.
  • a single tool can be employed to perform both the function of insertion of the implant 3300 and rotation of the cam 3321 , as depicted in the above referenced patent.
  • the binder 3330 can then be trimmed so that the distal end 3334 of the binder 3330 does not extend undesirably away from the brace 3308 .
  • the spacer 3302 is rotated relative to the distraction guide 3306 and the brace 3308 . Because the spacer 3302 can rotate relative to the distraction guide 3306 and the brace 3308 , the brace 3308 can be positioned so that the binder 3330 can be arranged around the upper and lower spinous processes 2 , 4 without twisting the binder 3330 .
  • the binder 3330 is positioned around the lower spinous process 4 , threaded or positioned at least partially within a slot 3309 of the distraction guide 3306 , and positioned around the upper spinous process 2 so that the binder 3330 can be secured to the brace 3308 , as described above.
  • Implants in accordance with the present invention can enable a physician to limit or block flexion and extension in a targeted motion segment while minifying invasiveness of an implantation procedure (relative to implantation procedures of the prior art).
  • implants can also be used where more extensive implantation procedures are desired.
  • FIG. 35C it can be desired that the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 be surgically modified to receive the binder 3330 , thereby insuring that the binder 3330 does not shift or slide relative to the spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the binder 3330 is threaded directly through the respective spinous processes 2 , 4 rather than through the interspinous ligaments of adjacent motion segments.
  • the amount of bone removed from the spinous processes 2 , 4 can be reduced where a cord or tether is used as a binder 3330 rather than a strap. While such applications fall within the contemplated scope of implants and methods of implantation of the present invention, such application may not realize the full benefit that can be achieved using such implants due to the modification of the bone.
  • the binder 3430 can comprise a first portion 3431 formed as a strap for arrangement around one of the upper and lower spinous processes 2 , 4 , and that tapers to a second portion 3433 formed as a cord.
  • the distraction guide 3406 can include a bore 3409 or other cavity for receiving the second portion 3433 .
  • a pad 3436 of biocompatible material can be associated with the binder 3430 , for example by slidably threading the binder 3430 through a portion of the pad 3436 , and the pad 3436 can be arranged between the binder 3430 and the respective spinous process 2 so that a load applied by the binder 3430 is distributed across a portion of the surface of the spinous process 2 .
  • the binder 3330 can be secured by the brace 3708 .
  • the brace 3708 as shown is still another embodiment of a brace for use with implants of the present invention, hi such an embodiment, the brace 3708 includes a capture device 3720 comprising a clip including a spring-loaded button 3721 having a first hole therethrough and a shell 3723 in which the button 3721 is disposed, the shell 3723 having a second hole.
  • a physician depresses the button 3721 so that the first and second holes align.
  • the binder 3430 can then be threaded through the holes, and the button 3721 can be released so that the spring forces the holes to misalign, pinching the binder 3430 and defining a secure end of the binder 3430 .
  • FIG. 37C is an end view of a still further embodiment of an implant 3800 in accordance with the present invention, hi such an embodiment the binder 3530 can comprise a cord.
  • An upper pad 3536 and a lower pad 3538 can be slidably associated with the binder 3530 and arranged so that a load applied by the binder 3530 is distributed across a portion of the upper and lower spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • such an embodiment can include a brace 3808 having a substantially different shape than braces previously described. It should be noted that the brace 3808 of FIG.
  • the footprint of the brace 3808 is reduced by shaping the wall 3814 of the brace 3808 to taper at an upper end to form a guide 3812 for aligning the binder 3530 and to taper at a lower end to an eyelet 3841 for capturing a proximal end 3532 of the binder 3530 .
  • the brace 3808 includes a height from eyelet 3841 to guide 3812 such that movement of the implant 3800 in the direction of insertion is blocked or limited by the brace 3808 .
  • implants in accordance with the present invention can optionally further include a second wing for limiting or blocking movement in the direction opposite insertion. Inclusion of such a structure can ensure that the implant remains in position, for example where the binder slips out of a slot of the distraction guide, or where the binder becomes unsecured.
  • an implant in accordance with an embodiment can include a second wing 3450 connected with the distraction guide 3406 of the implant 3900 by a fastener 3454 .
  • the second wing 3450 is similar to the second wing 3150 described above in reference to FIG. 32 .
  • the second wing 3450 can include an alignment tab 3458 allowing a position of the second wing 3450 to be adjusted along a longitudinal axis L of the implant 3900 , and a fastener 3454 (for example a hex headed bolt) for affixing the second wing 3450 to the implant 3900 in the position along the longitudinal axis L desired.
  • the distraction guide 3406 can include an alignment groove (not shown) corresponding to the alignment tab 3458 .
  • the alignment tab 3458 fits within, and is movable along, the alignment groove so that a contact surface 3455 of the second wing 3450 can be arranged as desired.
  • the second wing 3450 includes a substantially planar contact surface arranged so that the contact surface 3455 of the second wing 3450 is perpendicular to the longitudinal axis L.
  • the contact surface 3455 need not be planar, and can be shaped and oriented to roughly correspond with a contact surface of the upper and lower spinous processes.
  • a contact surface 3315 of the binder 3308 can be shaped and oriented to roughly correspond with a contact surface of the upper and lower spinous processes.
  • the upper portion 3453 and the lower portion 3452 of the second wing 3450 do not extend from the distraction guide 3406 as substantially as the upper portion 3153 and lower portion 3152 of the second wing 3150 of FIG. 32 .
  • the second wing 3450 includes a height H along the spine smaller than that of the second wing 3150 of FIG. 32 . It has been observed that benefits can be gained by including a wing 3450 , though the wing 3450 does not extend from the distraction guide 3406 as significantly as shown in FIG. 32 (i.e., the wing 3450 includes “nubs” extending above and/or below the height of the spacer 3302 ). Such wings 3450 will also be referred to herein as winglets. Including a second wing 3450 having an overall height along the spine smaller than that of FIG. 32 can limit movement along the longitudinal axis without interfering with (or being interfered by) the arrangement of the binder 3330 .
  • implants in accordance with the present invention can include a second wing (or an upper portion and/or lower portion) extendable from the distraction guide.
  • a second wing or an upper portion and/or lower portion
  • implants 1500 in accordance with the present invention can include a distraction guide 3506 having a selectably extendable upper portion 3553 and lower portion 3552 disposed within a cavity of the distraction guide 3506 .
  • the upper and lower portions 3553 , 3552 can be extended by actuating a nut, knob or other mechanism operably associated with a gear 3556 so that the gear 3556 rotates.
  • the teeth of the gear 3556 engage teeth of the upper and lower portions 3553 , 3552 , causing the upper and lower portions 3553 , 3552 to extend sufficiently that the upper and lower portions 3553 , 3552 form winglets for preventing motion of the implant 1500 in a direction opposite insertion (shown in FIG. 38C ). Rotating the gear 3556 in an opposite direction can retract the upper and lower portions 3553 , 3552 .
  • implants 1600 in accordance with the present invention can include spring-loaded upper and/or lower portions 3653 , 3652 such as shown in FIGS. 38D and 38E .
  • the upper and lower portions 3653 , 3652 can be fin-shaped, having sloping forward surfaces 3655 , 3654 and being spring-biased to an extended position, as shown in FIG. 38D .
  • the spinous processes and/or related tissues can contact the forward surface 3655 , 3654 of the upper and lower portions 3653 , 3652 , causing the upper and lower portions 3653 , 3652 to pivot about respective hinge points 3657 , 3656 and collapse into cavities disposed within the distraction guide 3606 , as shown in FIG.
  • the upper and lower portions 3653 , 3652 re-extend out of the distraction guide 3650 .
  • a slot and pin mechanism 3660 , 3661 or other mechanism can lock the upper and lower portion 3653 , 3652 in place once extended, disallowing over-extension of the upper and lower portion 3653 , 3652 in the direction of bias.
  • the extended upper and lower portions 3653 , 3652 limit or block movement of the implant 1600 in an a direction opposite insertion.
  • implants in accordance with the present invention can optionally employ some other additional mechanism for limiting or blocking motion along the longitudinal axis of the implant.
  • Mechanisms shown and described in FIGS. 38A-38E are merely provided as examples of possible mechanisms for use with such implants, and are not intended to be limiting.
  • FIG. 39 is a top-down view of still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention including a brace 3708 arranged at an angle along the spinous process relative to the longitudinal axis L of the implant 1700 .
  • the brace 3708 is arranged at such an angle to roughly correspond to a general shape of the adjacent spinous processes. Such a general shape can commonly be found in spinous processes extending from vertebrae of the cervical and thoracic region, for example.
  • the implant 1700 further includes a second wing 3752 extending from distraction guide 3706 at an angle roughly corresponding to a general shape of the adjacent spinous processes. Identical implants 1700 , one above the other, are shown.
  • the lower implant 1700 includes a binder 3330 arranged around the adjacent spinous processes (only the upper spinous process is shown) and positioned in a slot 3309 of the distraction guide 3706 .
  • the binder 3330 includes a capture device 3320 for securing the binder 3330 to the brace 3708 , and a channel formed by guides 3712 on the brace 3708 for aligning the binder 3330 with the capture device 3320 .
  • the brace wall includes a recess 3717 to accommodate rotation of the rotatable spacer 3302 .
  • the implants can include fixed spacers, for example integrally formed with the brace 3708 and the distraction guide 3706 .
  • FIGS. 40A and 40B are perspective views, and FIG. 40C is a side view of a still further embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention.
  • the implant 2600 includes a distraction guide 806 , a rotatable spacer 3302 , and a brace 3908 .
  • a binder 3330 can be fixedly connected with the brace 3908 at a proximal end 3332 of the binder 3330 .
  • tension of the binder 3330 can be set when the binder 3330 is secured to the brace 3908 so that relative movement of the adjacent spinous processes during flexion is limited or prevented, as desired.
  • the brace 33908 can include a first end having an eyelet 3941 through which the proximal end 3332 of the binder 3330 can be threaded and subsequently sutured, knotted or otherwise bound, or alternatively looped through the eyelet 3941 and secured to itself (e.g., using a clasp) so that the proximal end 3332 of the binder 3330 cannot be drawn through the eyelet 3941 .
  • a clasp e.g., a clasp
  • a free end of the binder 3330 can be secured to the brace 3908 by a capture device 3820 associated with the brace 3908 .
  • the capture device 3820 of FIGS. 40A-42 is arranged at a second end of the brace 3908 opposite the eyelet 3941 , rather than approximately centered along the brace wall 3914 .
  • the brace 3908 can optionally include a locking pin hole 3915 that can be engaged by a locking pin of an insertion instrument (not shown), for example as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,712,819 to Zucherman, et al., incorporated herein by reference.
  • the brace wall 3914 can optionally include one or more holes 3916 (shown in FIG. 42 ) adapted to receive alignment pins of such an insertion instrument, and the spacer 3402 can include a spacer engagement hole 3403 adapted to receive a spacer engagement pin of such an insertion instrument.
  • the spacer 3402 can rotate and/or swivel about a central body 3917 without impedance from the spacer engagement pin.
  • Such an arrangement can provide a physician additional control over the positioning of the implant 2600 , although in other embodiments the spacer 3402 need not include an engagement hole 3403 .
  • Arranging the captured device 3820 at a second end of the brace 3908 can allow an insertion instrument, having a configuration as described in Zucherman '819 or having some other configuration, to releasably engage the implant 2600 to assist in implantation without interference from the capture device 3820 .
  • the distraction guide 3806 of the implant 2600 can be wedge-shaped, as described above, or approximately conical, as shown in FIGS. 40A-40C , and can include a slot 3809 disposed through the distraction guide 3806 and adapted to receive the binder 3330 during implantation.
  • the rotatable spacer 3402 can be elliptical in cross-section, or otherwise shaped, and can rotate relative to the distraction guide 3806 to roughly conform with a contour of a space between the targeted adjacent spinous processes.
  • the capture device 3820 is shown in cross-section in FIGS. 41A and 41B .
  • the capture device 3820 can comprise, for example, two pieces slidably associated with one another by an adjustable fastener 3822 (as shown, the adjustable fastener is a hex screw).
  • a fixed piece 3821 of the capture device can extend from the brace wall 3914 .
  • the fixed piece 3821 can include a beveled surface 3823 that can function as a ramp.
  • a slidable piece 3827 of the capture device can be slidably associated with the fixed piece 3821 , and can likewise included a beveled surface 3829 positioned in opposition to the beveled surface 3823 of the fixed piece 3821 .
  • the slidable piece 3827 is associated with the fixed piece 3821 via an adjustable fastener 3822 .
  • the fastener 3822 can be positioned within slots 3890 , 3892 of the fixed piece 3821 and the slidable piece 3827 and can include a threaded shaft 3880 , a head 3882 , and a nut 3884 .
  • the head 3882 of the fastener 3822 can engage an anterior surface 3894 of the fixed piece 3821 and the nut 3884 can be threaded onto the threaded shaft 3880 so that the nut 3884 can engage a posterior surface 3896 of the slidable piece 3827 .
  • the slidable piece 3827 is free to slide along the beveled surface 3823 of the fixed piece 3821 until both the nut 3884 engages the posterior surface 3896 and the head 3882 engages the anterior surface 3894 , blocking further movement in one direction.
  • the distance between the anterior surface 3894 and the posterior surface 3896 increases or decreases as the slidable piece 3827 slides along the beveled surface 3823 and a distance between a capture surface 3898 of the slidable piece 3827 and the brace wall 3914 likewise increases or decreases.
  • the maximum distance the slidable piece 3827 can travel can be defined by the distance between the nut 3884 and the head 3882 .
  • a physician can adjust the maximum distance by rotating the nut 3884 so that the nut 3884 travels closer to, or farther from the head 3882 along the threaded shaft 3880 , possibly urging the capture surface 3898 toward the brace wall 3914 .
  • the physician can set the maximum distance so that the free end of the binder 3330 can be threaded between the capture surface 3898 and the brace wall 3914 . As shown in FIG.
  • the physician can then adjust the fastener 3822 so that the posterior surface 3896 and the anterior surface 3894 are urged together, the maximum distance decreases and the distance between the capture surface 3898 and the brace wall 3914 decreases, thereby pinching the binder 3330 between the capture surface 3898 and the brace wall 3914 and defining a secure end of the binder 3330 .
  • one or both of the capture surface 3898 and the brace wall 3914 can include texture so that the binder 3330 is further prevented from sliding when the binder 3330 is placed under increasing tension (e.g., during flexion).
  • the slidable piece 3827 can optionally further include a guide 3912 extending from the slidable piece 3827 so that the guide 3912 overlaps a portion of the brace 3908 .
  • the guide 3912 can extend, for example, a distance roughly similar to the maximum distance between the capture surface 3898 and the brace wall 3914 , and can help ensure that the binder 3330 is captured between the capture surface 3898 and the brace wall 3914 .
  • the capture device 3820 of FIGS. 40A-41B can include some other shape or configuration and still fall within the contemplated scope of the invention.
  • the fastener need not include a nut. In one embodiment, shown in FIGS.
  • the fastener 3922 can include a threaded shaft 3980 associated with a sleeve 3984 . As one of the threaded shaft 3980 and the sleeve 3984 is rotated, the distance between a head 3982 of the threaded shaft 3980 and the head 3985 of the sleeve 3984 can decrease or increase. In still other embodiments, the fastener need not include a threaded shaft, but rather can include a smooth shaft having a retaining clip frictionally associated with the smooth shaft.
  • a threaded shaft but rather can include a smooth shaft having a retaining clip frictionally associated with the smooth shaft.
  • FIG. 42 is an end view of the implant 2600 of FIGS. 40A-41D positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • the binder 3530 is a cord, but in other embodiments can have some other geometry.
  • a pad 3536 can be arranged along a contact surface of the respective spinous process so that a load applied to the contact surface by the tension in the binder 3530 can be distributed across a portion of the contact surface wider than the binder 3530 , thereby reducing stress on the portion.
  • the capture device 3820 is arranged so that the slidable piece 3827 is posteriorly located relative to the fixed piece 3821 .
  • a fastener 3822 can be accessed by the physician using a substantially posterior approach.
  • a method of surgically implanting an implant 2600 in accordance with an embodiment as described above in FIGS. 40A-42 of the present invention is shown as a block diagram in FIG. 43 .
  • the method can include forming an incision at the target motion segment, and enlarging the incision to access the target motion segment (Step 2700 ).
  • the interspinous ligament between targeted adjacent spinous processes can then be distracted by piercing or displacing the interspinous ligament with the distraction guide 3106 (Step 2702 ) and urging the implant 2600 between the adjacent spinous processes (Step 2704 ).
  • the spacer 3302 can be positioned between the spinous processes such that the spacer 3302 can rotate to assume a preferred position between the spinous processes (Step 2706 ).
  • the binder 3330 can be threaded between interspinous ligaments of adjacent motion segments so that the targeted adjacent spinous processes are disposed within a loop formed by the binder 3330 (Step 2708 ).
  • the physician can then thread the binder 3330 between the capture surface 3898 of the capture device 3820 and the brace wall 3914 (Step 2710 ).
  • a desired tension of the binder 3330 is applied (Step 2712 )
  • the physician can adjust the fastener 3822 of the capture device 3820 so that the binder 3330 is secured between the captured surface 3898 and the brace wall 3914 (Step 2714 ).
  • the incision can subsequently be closed (Step 2716 ).
  • FIGS. 44A and 44B are perspective views of still another embodiment of an implant 5400 in accordance with the present invention.
  • the implant 5400 can include a main body 3101 similar to the main body 3101 described above in reference to FIG. 32 .
  • the main body 3101 (also referred to herein as a first unit) includes a spacer 3102 , a first wing 3108 , a distraction guide 3106 and an alignment track 3103 .
  • the main body 3101 is inserted between adjacent spinous processes.
  • the main body 3101 remains (where desired) in place without attachment to the bone or ligaments.
  • the alignment track 3103 includes a threaded hole for receiving a fastener.
  • the alignment track 3103 need not include a threaded hole, but rather alternatively can include some other mechanism for fixedly connecting an additional piece (such as a second wing for limiting or blocking movement of an implant along the longitudinal axis).
  • the alignment track 5403 can include a flange so that the second wing 5450 can be slidably received, as shown in FIG. 46 .
  • the implant 5400 includes a second wing 5450 removably connectable with the implant 5400 .
  • the second wing 5450 includes an alignment tab 5458 adapted to be received in the alignment track 3103 of the main body 3101 , the alignment tab 5458 optionally including a slot for receiving the fastener so that the alignment tab 5458 is disposed between the fastener and the alignment track 3103 .
  • the alignment tab 5458 need not include a slot but rather can include some other mechanism for mating with the main body 3101 .
  • the second wing 5450 can include a first end having a slot (or eyelet) 5441 through which the proximal end (also referred to herein as an anchored end) 3332 of a binder 3330 can be threaded and subsequently sutured, knotted or otherwise bound, or alternatively looped through the slot 5441 and secured to itself (e.g., using a clasp) so that the proximal end 3332 of the binder 3330 cannot be withdrawn through the slot 5441 .
  • a slot or eyelet
  • the binder 3330 can be disposed around adjacent spinous processes and a portion of the length of the binder 3330 (the length of the binder being that portion of the binder extending from the proximal end of the binder) can be secured to the second wing 5450 by a capture device 5420 associated with the second wing 5450 .
  • the capture device 3820 of FIGS. 44A and 44B is arranged at a second end of the second wing 5450 opposite the slot 5441 .
  • the capture device 5420 can be substantially similar to capture devices 5420 as described above in reference to FIGS. 41A and 41B , and can comprise, for example, two pieces slidably associated with one another by an adjustable fastener.
  • a fixed piece 5421 of the capture device can extend from the second wing 5450 .
  • the fixed piece 5421 can include a beveled surface that can function as a ramp.
  • a slidable piece 5427 of the capture device can be slidably associated with the fixed piece 5421 (for example, via the adjustable fastener) and can likewise included a beveled surface positioned in opposition to the beveled surface of the fixed piece 5421 .
  • the slidable piece 5427 can optionally further include a guide 5412 extending from the slidable piece 5427 so that the guide 5412 overlaps a portion of the second wing 5450 .
  • the guide 5412 can extend, for example, a distance roughly similar to the maximum distance between the capture surface 5498 and the second wing 5450 , and can help ensure that the binder 3330 is arranged between the capture surface 5498 and the second wing 5450 .
  • a physician can position the binder 3330 so that the binder 3330 is disposed between adjacent spinous processes, threading the binder 3330 between the slidable piece 5427 and the second wing 5450 .
  • the physician can then adjust the fastener 5422 so that the distance between the capture surface 5498 and the second wing 5450 decreases, thereby pinching the binder 3330 between the capture surface 5498 and the second wing 5450 and defining a secure end of the binder 3330 .
  • one or both of the capture surface 5498 and the second wing 5450 can include texture so that the binder 3330 is further prevented from sliding when the binder 3330 is placed under increasing tension (e.g., during flexion).
  • the implant 5400 can further include a binder aligner 5470 selectably connectable with the first wing 3108 of the main body 3101 .
  • the binder aligner 5470 can be connected with the first wing 3108 by fastening the binder aligner 5470 to the locking pin hole 3104 of the first wing 3108 .
  • a fastener 5455 is used to connect the binder aligner 5470 with the first wing 3108 through a hole 5471 in the binder aligner 5470
  • the locking pin hole 3104 can thus be adapted to function as a hole to slidably (and temporarily) receive a locking pin of an insertion tool (not shown), thereby facilitating insertion and positioning of the main body 3101 , and can also be adapted to function to fixedly receive a fastener 5455 for positioning the binder aligner 5470 .
  • the binder aligner 5470 can optionally include pins 5474 corresponding to the alignment holes 3192 of the main body 3101 to further secure the binder aligner 5470 to the main body 3101 and limit undesired movement of the binder aligner 5470 relative to the main body 3101 .
  • the binder aligner 5470 includes a guide 5472 extending from the binder aligner 5470 to limit or block shifting of the binder 3330 in a posterior-anterior direction.
  • the guide 5472 can include a loop, as shown in FIG. 44A , or alternatively some other structure, closed or unclosed, for limiting or blocking shifting of the binder 3330 .
  • Such a structure can prevent undesired relative movement between the binder 3330 and the main body 3101 , and can additionally ease arrangement of the binder 3330 during an implantation procedure, by helping to aid proper positioning of the binder 3330 .
  • the capture device of FIGS. 44A and 44B can include some other shape, configuration, and mechanism and still fall within the contemplated scope of the invention.
  • a flange 5514 can extend from the second wing 5550 , from which a rotatable cam 5521 extends so that the binder 3330 can be captured between the second wing 5550 and the cam 5521 .
  • Such a capture device can resemble capture devices 5520 as described above in FIGS. 34C and 34B . Referring to FIG.
  • a spring-loaded cam 5621 extends from the flange 5514 so that the binder 3330 can be captured between the second wing 5514 and the spring-loaded cam 5621 .
  • a capture device can resemble capture devices 5520 as described above in FIGS. 34C and 34D .
  • some other mechanism can be employed as a capture device associated with the second wing 5550 for securing the length of the binder 3330 , for example as otherwise described in herein, and other obvious variations.
  • One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate the myriad different mechanisms for securing the binder 3330 to the second wing 5450 .
  • a system in accordance with the present invention can comprise a second wing 5450 including a capture device 5420 as described above and optionally a binder aligner 5470 .
  • the system can be used with a main body 3101 in substitution for a second wing 3150 as described above in FIG. 32 .
  • the system can optionally be used to modify a main body 3101 previously implanted in a patient, for example by removing an existing second wing 3150 and replacing the second wing 3150 with the system, to additionally limit flexion as well as extension.
  • Such a system can provide flexibility to a physician by allowing the physician to configure or reconfigure an implant according to the needs of a patient.
  • a method of surgically implanting an implant 5400 in accordance with an embodiment as described above in FIGS. 44A-46 of the present invention is shown as a block diagram in FIG. 47 .
  • the method can include forming an incision at the target motion segment, and enlarging the incision to access the target motion segment (Step 2700 ).
  • the interspinous ligament between targeted adjacent spinous processes can then be distracted by piercing or displacing the interspinous ligament with the distraction guide 106 (Step 2702 ) and urging the implant 5400 between the adjacent spinous processes (Step 2704 ).
  • the spacer 3102 can be positioned between the spinous processes such that the spacer 3102 can rotate to assume a preferred position between the spinous processes (Step 2706 ).
  • the second wing 5450 can be fixedly connected with the distraction guide 3106 (Step 2708 ).
  • a binder 3330 associated with the second wing 5450 can be threaded between interspinous ligaments of adjacent motion segments so that the targeted adjacent spinous processes are disposed within a loop formed by the binder 3330 (Step 2710 ).
  • the physician can then thread the binder 3330 between the capture surface 5498 of the capture device 5420 and the second wing 5450 (Step 2712 ). Once a desired tension of the binder 3330 is applied (Step 2714 ), the physician can adjust the fastener 5422 of the capture device 5420 so that the binder 3330 is secured between the captured surface 5498 and the second wing 5450 (Step 2716 ). The incision can subsequently be closed (Step 2718 ).
  • the implant can be fabricated from medical grade metals such as titanium, stainless steel, cobalt chrome, and alloys thereof, or other suitable implant material having similar high strength and biocompatible properties. Additionally, the implant can be at least partially fabricated from a shape memory metal, for example Nitinol, which is a combination of titanium and nickel. Such materials are typically radiopaque, and appear during x-ray imaging, and other types of imaging. Implants in accordance with the present invention, and/or portions thereof can also be fabricated from somewhat flexible and/or deflectable material, m these embodiments, the implant and/or portions thereof can be fabricated in whole or in part from medical grade biocompatible polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers.
  • medical grade metals such as titanium, stainless steel, cobalt chrome, and alloys thereof, or other suitable implant material having similar high strength and biocompatible properties.
  • the implant can be at least partially fabricated from a shape memory metal, for example Nitinol, which is a combination of titanium and nickel. Such materials are
  • a copolymer is a polymer derived from more than one species of monomer.
  • a polymer composite is a heterogeneous combination of two or more materials, wherein the constituents are not miscible, and therefore exhibit an interface between one another.
  • a polymer blend is a macroscopically homogeneous mixture of two or more different species of polymer.
  • Many polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers are radiolucent and do not appear during x-ray or other types of imaging. Implants comprising such materials can provide a physician with a less obstructed view of the spine under imaging, than with an implant comprising radiopaque materials entirely. However, the implant need not comprise any radiolucent materials.
  • biocompatible polymers is the polyaryletherketone group which has several members including polyetheretherketone (PEEK), and polyetherketoneketone (PEKK).
  • PEEK polyetheretherketone
  • PEKK polyetherketoneketone
  • PEEK is proven as a durable material for implants, and meets the criterion of biocompatibility.
  • Medical grade PEEK is available from Victrex Corporation of Lancashire, Great Britain under the product name PEEK-OPTIMA.
  • Medical grade PEKK is available from Oxford Performance Materials under the name OXPEKK, and also from CoorsTek under the name BioPEKK.
  • These medical grade materials are also available as reinforced polymer resins, such reinforced resins displaying even greater material strength, hi an embodiment, the implant can be fabricated from PEEK 450G, which is an unfilled PEEK approved for medical implantation available from Victrex. Other sources of this material include Gharda located in Panoli, India.
  • PEEK 450G has the following approximate properties: Property Value Density 1.3 g/cc Rockwell M 99 Rockwell R 126 Tensile Strength 97 MPa Modulus of Elasticity 3.5 GPa Flexural Modulus 4.1 GPa
  • PEEK 450G has appropriate physical and mechanical properties and is suitable for carrying and spreading a physical load between the adjacent spinous processes.
  • the implant and/or portions thereof can be formed by extrusion, injection, compression molding and/or machining techniques.
  • Fillers can be added to a polymer, copolymer, polymer blend, or polymer composite to reinforce a polymeric material. Fillers are added to modify properties such as mechanical, optical, and thermal properties. For example, carbon fibers can be added to reinforce polymers mechanically to enhance strength for certain uses, such as for load bearing devices.
  • other grades of PEEK are available and contemplated for use in implants in accordance with the present invention, such as 30% glass-filled or 30% carbon-filled grades, provided such materials are cleared for use in implantable devices by the FDA, or other regulatory body. Glass-filled PEEK reduces the expansion rate and increases the flexural modulus of PEEK relative to unfilled PEEK.
  • Carbon-filled PEEK is known to have enhanced compressive strength and stiffness, and a lower expansion rate relative to unfilled PEEK. Carbon-filled PEEK also offers wear resistance and load carrying capability.
  • the implant can be comprised of polyetherketoneketone (PEKK).
  • PEKK polyetherketoneketone
  • Other material that can be used include polyetherketone (PEK), polyetherketoneetherketoneketone (PEKEKK), polyetheretherketoneketone (PEEKK), and generally a polyaryletheretherketone.
  • PEK polyetherketone
  • PEKEKK polyetherketoneetherketoneketone
  • PEEKK polyetheretherketoneketone
  • other polyketones can be used as well as other thermoplastics.
  • the binder can be made from a biocompatible material.
  • the binder can be made from a braided polyester suture material.
  • Braided polyester suture materials include, for example, Ethibond, Ethiflex, Mersilene, and Dacron, and are nonabsorbable, having high tensile strength, low tissue reactivity and improved handling.
  • the binder can be made from stainless steel (i.e., surgical steel), which can be braided into a tether or woven into a strap, for example.
  • the binder can be made from some other material (or combination of materials) having similar properties.
  • FIG. 48A is a perspective view of an implant as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/850,267, filed May 20, 2004, incorporated herein by reference.
  • the implant 4100 comprises a first wing 4130 , a spacer 4120 , and a lead-in tissue expander (also referred to herein as a distraction guide) 4110 .
  • the distraction guide 4110 in this particular embodiment is wedge-shaped, i.e., the implant has an expanding cross-section from a proximal end of the implant 100 to a region 4150 where the guide 4110 joins with the spacer 4120 (referencing for the figures is based on the point of insertion of the implant between spinous processes).
  • the distraction guide 4110 functions to initiate distraction of the soft tissue and the spinous processes when the implant 4100 is surgically inserted between the spinous processes. It is to be understood that the distraction guide 4110 can be pointed and the like, in order to facilitate insertion of the implant 4100 between the spinous processes of adjacent cervical vertebrae.
  • the insertion technique disturb as little of the bone and surrounding tissue or ligaments as possible in order to reduce trauma to the site and promote early healing, and prevent destabilization of the normal anatomy.
  • the spacer 4120 can be teardrop-shaped in cross-section perpendicular to a longitudinal axis 4125 of the implant 4100 .
  • the shape of the spacer 4120 can roughly conform to a wedge-shaped space, or a portion of the space, between adjacent spinous processes within which the implant 4100 is to be positioned.
  • the spacer 4120 (and the first wing 4108 ) is shaped to accommodate the anatomical form or contour of spinous processes (and/or laminae) of preferably the C6 and C7 vertebra for placement between such spinous processes (i.e., the C6-C7 motion segment).
  • the spacer 4120 can have alternative shapes such as circular, wedge, oval, ovoid, football, and rectangular with rounded corners, and other shapes.
  • the shape of the spacer 4120 can be selected for a particular patient so that the physician can position the implant 4100 as close as possible to the anterior portion of the surface of the spinous process.
  • the shape selected for the spacer 4120 can affect the contact surface area of the implant 4100 and the spinous processes that are to be subject to distraction. Increasing the contact surface area between the implant 4100 and the spinous processes can distribute a load force between the spinous frame and the implant 4100 .
  • the first wing 4130 is likewise teardrop-shaped in cross-section perpendicular to a longitudinal axis 4125 of the spacer 4120 and distraction guide 4110 .
  • the dimensions of the first wing 4130 can be larger than that of the spacer 4120 , particularly along the axis of the spine, and can limit or block lateral displacement of the implant 4100 in the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 4125 .
  • the first wing 4130 can have other cross-sectional shapes, such as elliptical, wedge, circular, oval, ovoid, football, and rectangular with rounded corners and other shapes.
  • the implant 4100 of FIG. 48A further includes an adjustable wing 4160 (also referred to herein as a second wing) separate from the distraction guide 4110 , the spacer 4120 and the first wing 4130 .
  • the second wing 4160 is connectable with the distraction guide 4110 (and/or the spacer 4120 ) once the implant 4100 is positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • the second wing 4160 similar to the first wing 4130 , can limit or block lateral displacement of the implant 4100 , however displacement is limited or blocked in the direction opposite insertion.
  • both the first wing 4130 and the second wing 4160 are connected with the implant 4100 and the implant 4100 is positioned between adjacent spinous processes, a portion of the spinous processes can be sandwiched between the first wing 4130 and the second wing 4160 , limiting displacement along the longitudinal axis 4125 .
  • the second wing 4160 can be teardrop-shaped in cross-section. A lip 4180 defining a space 4170 through the second wing 4160 allows the second wing 4160 to pass over the distraction guide 4110 to meet and connect with the distraction guide 4110 and/or the spacer 4120 . The second wing 4160 is then secured to the distraction guide 4110 and/or the spacer 4120 .
  • the second wing 4160 can be designed to be interference-fit onto the spacer 4120 or a portion of the distraction guide 4110 adjacent to the spacer 4120 . Where the second wing 4160 is interference-fit, there is no additional attachment device to fasten the second wing 4160 relative to the remainder of the implant 4100 .
  • FIG. 48A illustrates an embodiment of an implant 4100 including a teardrop-shaped second wing 4160 having a tongue 4158 at the posterior end of the second wing 4160 .
  • a bore 4155 is disposed through the tongue 4158 , and is aligned with a corresponding bore 4156 on the spacer 4120 when the second wing 4160 is brought into position by surgical insertion relative to the rest of the implant 4100 .
  • a threaded screw 4154 can be inserted through the aligned bores 4155 , 4156 in a posterior-anterior direction to secure the second wing 4160 to the spacer 4120 .
  • the direction of insertion from a posterior to an anterior direction has the screw 4154 engaging the bores 4155 , 4156 and the rest of the implant 4100 along a direction that is generally perpendicular to the longitudinal axis 4125 .
  • This orientation is most convenient when the physician is required to use a screw 4154 to secure the second wing 4160 to the rest of the implant 4100 .
  • the second wing 4160 can further be secured to the spacer 4120 by some other mechanism, for example such as a flexible hinge (not shown) with a protrusion that engages an indentation of one of the distraction guide 4110 and the spacer 4120 .
  • the second wing 4160 can be secured to one of the distraction guide 4110 and the spacer 4120 by still some other mechanism.
  • FIG. 48B is a perspective view of an implant as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,695,842 to Zucherman, et al, incorporated herein by reference.
  • the implant 4200 has a main body that includes a spacer 4220 , a first wing 4230 , a lead-in tissue expander 4210 (also referred to herein as a distraction guide) and an alignment track 4203 .
  • the main body of the implant 4200 is inserted between adjacent spinous processes and remains in place (where desired) without attachment to the bone or ligaments.
  • the distraction guide 4210 includes a tip from which the distraction guide 4210 expands, the tip having a diameter sufficiently small such that the tip can pierce an opening in an interspinous ligament and/or can be inserted into a small initial dilated opening.
  • the diameter and/or cross-sectional area of the distraction guide 4210 gradually increases until it is substantially similar to the diameter of the spacer 4220 .
  • the tapered front end eases the ability of a physician to urge the implant 4200 between adjacent spinous processes. When urging the main body of the implant 4200 between adjacent spinous processes, the front end of the distraction guide 4210 distracts the adjacent spinous processes and dilates the interspinous ligament so that a space between the adjacent spinous processes is approximately the diameter of the spacer 4220 .
  • the spacer 4220 is elliptically shaped in cross-section, and can swivel so that the spacer 4220 can self-align relative to the uneven surfaces of the spinous processes. Self-alignment can ensure that compressive loads are distributed across the surface of the bone.
  • the spacer 4220 can have, for example, a diameter of six millimeters, eight millimeters, ten millimeters, twelve millimeters and fourteen millimeters. These diameters refer to the height by which the spacer 4220 distracts and maintains apart the spinous process.
  • the selected height i.e., diameter
  • the major dimension is transverse to the alignment of the spinous process, one above the other.
  • the first wing 4230 has a lower portion 4231 and an upper portion 4232 .
  • the upper portion 4232 is shaped to accommodate the anatomical form or contour of spinous processes (and/or laminae) of preferably the L4 (for an L4-L5 placement) or L5 (for an L5-S1 placement) vertebra. The same shape or variations of this shape can be used to accommodate other motion segments, such as motion segments in the cervical and thoracic regions.
  • the lower portion 4231 can also be rounded to accommodate the spinous processes.
  • the lower portion 4231 and upper portion 4232 of the first wing 4230 act as a stop mechanism when the implant 4200 is inserted between adjacent spinous processes. The implant 4200 cannot be inserted beyond the surfaces of the first wing 4230 . Additionally, once the implant 4200 is inserted, the first wing 4230 can prevent some side-to-side, or posterior-to-anterior movement of the implant 4200 .
  • the implant 4200 of FIG. 48B further includes a second wing 4260 .
  • the second wing 4260 Similar to the first wing 4230 , the second wing 4260 includes a lower portion 4261 and an upper portion 4262 sized and/or shaped to accommodate the anatomical form or contour of the spinous processes and/or lamina.
  • the second wing 4260 can be secured to the main body of the implant 4200 with a fastener 4254 .
  • the second wing 4260 also has an alignment tab 4268 . When the second wing 4260 is initially placed on the main body of the implant 4200 , the alignment tab 4268 engages the alignment track 4203 .
  • the alignment tab 4268 slides within the alignment track 4203 and helps to maintain the adjustable wing 4260 substantially parallel with the first wing 4230 .
  • displacement along the longitudinal axis 4225 in either the direction of insertion or the direction opposite insertion can be limited or blocked.
  • the second wing 4260 also can prevent some side-to-side, or posterior-to-anterior movement.
  • a procedure for positioning such an implant 4100 , 4200 and subsequently connecting the second wing 4160 , 4260 with the implant 4100 , 4200 can require a bilateral approach wherein a physician must access both sides of the interspinous ligament, a first side to pierce and/or distract the interspinous ligament and position the implant 4100 , 4200 so that the movement in the direction of insertion is satisfactorily limited by the first wing 4130 , 4230 , and a second side to attach the second wing 4160 , 4260 such that movement in the direction opposite insertion is satisfactorily limited by the second wing 4160 , 4260 .
  • implants 4300 and methods for positioning such implants in accordance with the present invention can, in an embodiment, include a deployable second wing 4360 associated with a main body 4301 such that the second wing 4360 can be deployed with a physician needing only to access a first side of spinous processes to limit or block movement along the longitudinal axis 4325 .
  • the implant 4300 includes a main body 301 having a fixed spacer 4320 and a distraction guide 4310 .
  • the distraction guide 4310 comprises a first winglet (also referred to herein as an upper winglet) 4312 and a second winglet (also referred to herein as a lower winglet) 4314 , and when arranged in a first configuration can include a tip from which the distraction guide 4310 expands, the tip having a diameter sufficiently small such that the tip can pierce an opening in an interspinous ligament and between spinous processes and/or can be inserted into a small initial dilated opening.
  • the diameter and/or cross-sectional area of the distraction guide 4310 is then gradually increased until it is substantially similar to the diameter of the spacer 4320 .
  • the 49A can resemble a distraction guide as described above when arranged in the first configuration.
  • the winglets 4312 , 4314 can be hinged or otherwise pivotably connected with the main body 4301 such that the winglets 4312 , 4314 can be arranged in a second configuration ( FIG. 49B ) once the implant 4300 is positioned between spinous processes.
  • a second configuration one or both of the winglets 4312 , 4314 abut at least one of the spinous processes and/or related tissues when urged in a direction opposite from insertion, thereby limiting motion along the longitudinal axis 4325 .
  • the distraction guide 4310 becomes a second wing 4360 , as shown in FIG. 49B .
  • the implant 4300 includes an insert 4370 having an insert body 4372 and a first wing 4330 .
  • the insert 4370 can be mated with the main body 4301 to arrange the distraction guide 4310 of the implant 4300 in the second configuration, thereby deploying the second wing 4360 .
  • the spacer 4320 includes a cavity sized and shaped for receiving the insert body 4372 and accessible from a distal end of the main body 4301 .
  • a portion of the upper winglet 4312 and the lower winglet 4314 can extend at least partially into the cavity so that when the insert body 4372 is received within the cavity, the insert body 4372 displaces the portions, causing the distraction guide 4310 to be arranged in the second configuration.
  • the upper winglet 4312 and the lower winglet 4314 each include a lever 4316 , 4318 comprising a curved protrusion that protrudes into the cavity when the distraction guide 4310 is in the first configuration.
  • the insert body 4372 can optionally have a tapered proximal end 4374 having a first groove 4376 and a second groove 4378 corresponding to the first lever 4316 and the second lever 4318 , respectively.
  • the tapered shape of the proximal end 4374 allows the upper winglet 4312 and lower winglet 4314 to be deployed gradually, fully deploying as the insert body 4372 is fully seated within the cavity.
  • the main body 4301 is shown including a flange 4303 in which is formed notches 4305 to receive an insertion tool (not shown), for example.
  • an upper tab 4332 and a lower tab 4331 of the first wing 4330 seats within cut-outs 4322 of the flange 4303 .
  • the main body 4301 of the implant 4300 is shown positioned between adjacent spinous processes of the targeted motion segment.
  • the motion segment shown is within the lumbar region, but in other embodiments, particularly where a fixed spacer 4320 is used, implants 4300 in accordance with the present convention can be positioned at motion segments of the thoracic and cervical region.
  • the main body 4301 is positioned as shown by initially approaching the interspinous ligament between the upper and lower adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 through an opening to the right of the interspinous ligament, roughly posterior to the right inferior articular facet 6 of the vertebrae from which the upper spinous process 2 extends.
  • the main body 4301 can be associated with one or more insertion tools (not shown), and the distraction guide 4310 can be arranged in the first configuration.
  • the tip of the distraction guide 4310 is positioned roughly adjacent to a point along the interspinous ligament, and the distraction guide 4310 is then urged through the interspinous ligament, piercing the interspinous ligament and/or separating and distracting fibers of the interspinous ligaments.
  • the main body 4301 is then urged through the interspinous ligament until the spacer 4320 is positioned between the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 so that the spacer 4320 supports a load applied by the spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the insertion tools can be removed from the opening and the insert 4370 can be positioned at the distal end of the main body 4301 .
  • the insert body 4372 can be urged into the cavity within the main body 4301 until the proximal end 4374 of the insert body 4372 contacts the first lever 4316 and the second lever 4318 .
  • the insert 4370 can then be further urged along the longitudinal axis 4325 so that the insert body 4372 urges the first lever 4316 and the second lever 4318 away from the insert body 4372 , causing the upper winglet 4312 and the lower winglet 4314 to pivot about the first hinge 4313 and the second hinge 4315 , respectively.
  • the first lever 4316 and the second lever 4318 are displaced from the cavity, the first lever 4316 and the second lever 4318 are guided along corresponding grooves 4376 , 4378 of the tapered proximal end 4374 .
  • the insert body 4372 seats within the cavity of the main body 4301 , the upper winglet 4312 and the lower winglet 4314 deploy as a second wing 4360 .
  • the insertion tool can be removed from the incision once the insert body 4372 is seated within the main body 4301 .
  • a portion of the upper spinous process and a portion of the lower spinous process are sandwiched between the first wing 330 and the second wing 4360 , limiting motion along the longitudinal axis 4325 .
  • Implants and methods for positioning such implants between spinous processes in accordance with the present invention are not meant to be limited to embodiments as described above and otherwise herein, but rather are meant to include any implant having a second wing deployable by urging an insert within a main body positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • the main body 4301 of the implant 4300 of FIGS. 49A through 50B can include a lower winglet 4314 pivotably associated with the main body 4301 while an upper winglet 4312 is fixedly associated with the main body 4301 .
  • An insert 4370 can be adapted to deploy only the lower winglet 4314 when seated within the cavity of the main body 4301 .
  • a first wing 4310 can extend from the main body 4301 rather than, or in addition to, a first wing extending from the insert 4370 .
  • movement of the main body 4301 along the longitudinal axis 4325 can be limited in the direction of insertion.
  • the first wing 4310 can thus act as a hard stop, allowing the main body 4301 to be positioned without requiring a position of the main body 4301 along the spinous processes to be estimated, thereby easing implantation.
  • implants 4400 in accordance with the present invention can include one or both of a first engagement element (also referred to herein as an upper hook) 4480 and a second engagement element (also referred to herein as a lower hook) 4482 for limiting flexion motion in a motion segment.
  • a first engagement element also referred to herein as an upper hook
  • a second engagement element also referred to herein as a lower hook
  • Implants in accordance with the present invention can include such arrangements.
  • connection rods 4484 , 4486 can be fixedly associated with the main body 4401 .
  • the hooks 4480 , 4482 include tapered proximal ends 4481 , 4483 that act as lead-in tissue expanders to distract interspinous ligaments of the motion segments above and below the targeted motion segment. As the main body 4401 is positioned between adjacent spinous processes, the tapered proximal ends 4481 , 4483 of the upper and lower hooks 4480 , 4482 can likewise pierce and/or distract interspinous ligaments so that the upper and lower hooks 4480 , 4482 can be properly positioned to limit or restrain flexion motion of the targeted motion segment when the main body 4401 is in place.
  • the hooks 4480 , 4482 can be pivotably associated with the connection rods 4484 , 4486 so that the hooks 4480 , 4482 can be rotated relative to the connection rods 4484 , 4486 , thereby allowing a physician to improve contact and spread loads between the hooks 4480 , 4482 and corresponding spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the rotatable upper connection rod 4484 and lower connection rod 4486 can provide flexibility in placement, so that where an anatomy varies between patients and varies between motion segments such that the arrangement of a minor dimension and major dimension of the implant 44400 about the longitudinal axis 4425 varies, the implant 4400 can be accommodated.
  • FIG. 52 is a posterior view of the implant 4400 positioned between adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 and having an upper hook 4480 and a lower hook 4482 arranged so that both flexion and extension is limited as desired. Further, the second wing 4460 is deployed to limit movement of the implant 4400 along the longitudinal axis 4425 . The upper hook 4480 and the lower hook 4482 prevent movement along the longitudinal axis 4425 in the direction opposite insertion, making a first wing unnecessary.
  • implants 4500 and methods for positioning such implants 4500 between spinous processes in accordance with the present invention can include a distraction guide 4510 wherein portions of the distraction guide 510 can be extended from the distraction guide 4510 to form an upper winglet 4512 and a lower winglet 4514 , respectively, of a second wing 4560 by positioning an insert 4570 within a cavity of the main body 4501 .
  • a distraction guide 4510 wherein portions of the distraction guide 510 can be extended from the distraction guide 4510 to form an upper winglet 4512 and a lower winglet 4514 , respectively, of a second wing 4560 by positioning an insert 4570 within a cavity of the main body 4501 .
  • the winglet 4512 , 4514 extend out the side of the distraction guide 4510 .
  • the winglet 4512 , 4514 partially form the sides of the distraction guide 4510 .
  • Such embodiments are contemplated to be useful where it is desired that the second wing 4560 have a limited height relative to implants 4300 , 4400 as described above where the entire distraction guide 4310 is deployed (see FIG. 49A through 50B ).
  • implants 4500 are to be positioned at adjacent motion segments, it can be desired that the second wings 4560 of the implants 4500 do not interfere with one another implant, for example during an extension motion when compressive loads are applied to the implants 4500 .
  • FIGS. 53A and 53B the myriad different variations of the implant 4500 of FIGS. 53A and 53B .
  • the upper winglet 4512 and the lower winglet 4514 can have some other shape.
  • the positions of the upper winglet 4512 and lower winglet 4514 are staggered so that implants 4500 positioned at adjacent motion segments can be more easily positioned without interfering with one another. Such staggering can also accommodate anatomies where one of the upper and lower spinal processes is wider than the other.
  • the upper winglet 4512 can be pivotably mounted on the distraction guide 4510 at a position less distant from the distraction end 4511 than the location where the lower winglet 4514 is pivotably mounted on the distraction guide 4510 .
  • the upper winglet 4512 and the lower winglet 4514 can have some other shape. Referring to FIGS.
  • the main body 4601 can include a hollow central body 4605 (shown in FIGS. 54C and 54D ) extending from a first wing 4630 .
  • a rotatable spacer 4620 is disposed about the hollow central body 4605 .
  • the implant 4600 can include a spacer 4620 that resembles spacers, for example, as described above in FIG. 48B .
  • a distraction guide 4610 can extend from the hollow central body 4605 and can include an upper winglet 4612 and a lower winglet 4614 , one or both of which can be pivotably associated with a main portion 4611 of the distraction guide 4610 so that the upper winglet 4612 and/or the lower winglet 4614 can be deployed as a second wing 4660 .
  • a pin 4606 can be inserted into the hollow central body 4605 to deploy the second wing 4630 . Referring to FIG.
  • the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 can be pivoted away from each other so that the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 limit or block motion along the longitudinal axis 4625 in the direction opposite from insertion.
  • the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 thus act as a second wing 4660 .
  • the distraction guide 4610 can include a cup 4616 structure sized and arranged to receive the pin 4606 .
  • Bar structures 4618 , 4619 can be pivotably connected between the cup structure 4616 and one or both of the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 so that when a force is applied to the cup structure 4616 by the pin 4606 , the force is further transferred to the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 , causing the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 to pivot on hinges 4613 , 4615 associated with the main portion 4611 of the distraction guide 4610 so that the second wing 4660 is deployed.
  • the pivot points 4613 , 4615 of the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 are arranged proximally relative to the mount points 4617 , 4619 of the bar structures 4618 , 4619 , causing the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 to pivot away from one another when the mount points 4617 , 4619 are urged together by the insertion of the pin 4606 (as seen in FIG. 54D ).
  • the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 can be caused to pivot away from one another using some other mechanism. Implants in accordance with the present invention are not intended to be limited to such second wing deployment mechanisms as are described in detail herein.
  • the implant 4600 is shown positioned between adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the second wing 4660 as shown is sized such that when arranged in a first configuration (i.e., as a distraction guide 4610 ) the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 do not extend undesirably into the adjacent tissues.
  • the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 can be sized and shaped other than as shown in FIG. 55 .
  • FIGS. 56A through 56C illustrate a further embodiment of an implant 4700 in accordance with the present invention arranged between adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • upper and lower winglets 4712 , 4714 can be disposed within the distraction guide 4710 and can be deployed by actuating an actuator arrangement including a shaft connected with a cam 4707 , the shaft having an engageable head 4706 , or alternatively including some other mechanism such as a gear. As can be seen in FIG.
  • the implant 4700 can be disposed between adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 as described above in reference to FIG. 50 .
  • the distraction guide 4710 of the implant 4700 can be employed to pierce and/or distract an interspinous ligament 6 connected between the adjacent spinous process 2 , 4 .
  • the implant 4700 can then be urged between the spinous processes 2 , 4 so that the distraction guide 4710 further distracts the interspinous ligament 6 to form a space within which a spacer 4220 can be disposed.
  • the spacer 4220 can pivot about a central body extending from the first wing 4230 of the implant 4700 .
  • the first wing 4230 limits and/or blocks movement along a longitudinal axis 4725 of the implant 4700 in the direction of insertion.
  • the actuator arrangement can be actuated to deploy the upper and lower winglets, 4712 , 4714 , thereby forming a second wing 4760 as shown in FIG. 56C .
  • the second wing 4760 limits and/or blocks movement along the longitudinal axis 4725 in a direction opposite the direction of insertion.
  • the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 are at least partially disposed between the wings 4730 , 4760 , preventing the implant 4800 from becoming undesirably dislodged from the space between the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 . As shown in FIG.
  • the first wing 4730 and the second wing 4760 can be arranged sufficiently far apart that the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 can move relative to one another slightly (e.g., laterally—such as during a twisting motion), allowing the patient greater flexibility of movement.
  • FIGS. 56B and 56C are partial cross-sectional posterior views of the implant 4700 shown in FIG. 56A .
  • the deployable winglets 4712 , 4714 can be extended from the distraction guide 4710 using an actuator arrangement comprising a shaft 4707 and cam 4716 .
  • the cam 4716 can be rotated to force the winglets 4712 , 4714 to pivot outward from the distraction guide 4710 .
  • the winglets 4712 , 4714 are at least partially disposed within a cavity of the distraction guide 4710 .
  • FIGS. 56A through 57E illustrate a still further embodiment of an implant 4800 in accordance with the present invention arranged between adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • upper and lower winglets 4812 , 4814 can be disposed within the distraction guide 4810 and can be deployed by actuating an actuator arrangement including a screw 4807 having an engageable head 4806 , or alternatively including some other mechanism such as a gear.
  • the implant 4800 can be disposed between adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 as described above in reference to FIG. 50 .
  • the distraction guide 4810 of the implant 4800 can be employed to pierce and/or distract an interspinous ligament 6 connected between the adjacent spinous process 2 , 4 .
  • the implant 4800 can then be urged between the spinous processes 2 , 4 so that the distraction guide 4810 further distracts the interspinous ligament 6 to form a space within which a spacer 4220 can be disposed.
  • the spacer 4220 can pivot about a central body extending from the first wing 4230 of the implant 4800 .
  • the first wing 4230 limits and/or blocks movement along a longitudinal axis 4825 of the implant 4800 in the direction of insertion.
  • the actuator arrangement can be actuated to deploy the upper and lower winglets, 4812 , 4814 , thereby forming a second wing 4860 as shown in FIG. 56B .
  • the second wing 4860 limits and/or blocks movement along the longitudinal axis 4825 in a direction opposite the direction of insertion.
  • the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 are at least partially disposed between the wings 4830 , 4860 , preventing the implant 4800 from becoming undesirably dislodged from the space between the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 . As shown in FIG.
  • the first wing 4830 and the second wing 4860 can be arranged sufficiently far apart that the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 can move relative to one another slightly (e.g., laterally—such as during a twisting motion), allowing the patient greater flexibility of movement.
  • FIGS. 57C and 57D are partial cross-sectional end views of the implant 4800 shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B .
  • the deployable winglets 4812 , 4814 can be extended from the distraction guide 4810 using an actuator arrangement comprising a screw 4806 and threaded collar 4816 .
  • the threaded collar 4816 can be driven along the screw 4806 to force the winglets 4812 , 4814 to pivot outward from the distraction guide 4810 .
  • the winglets 4812 , 4814 are at least partially disposed within a cavity of the distraction guide 4810 .
  • the winglets 4812 , 4814 are pivotably connected with the threaded collar 4816 at an upper pivot point 4817 and a lower pivot point 4819 .
  • Pins 4813 , 4815 or other obstruction devices can be disposed within the cavity and arranged so that the pins 4813 , 4815 do not interfere with the arrangement of the winglets 4812 , 4814 in a nested, or undeployed, position. However, as the threaded collar 4816 travels along the screw 4806 in a posterior-to-anterior direction, the inner surface of the winglets 4812 , 4814 contact the pins 4813 , 4815 and the winglets 4812 , 4814 pivot away from the distraction guide 4810 . If desired the winglets 4812 , 4814 can be spring biased against the posts 4813 , 4815 such that in the nested positions and in any deployed position the winglets 4812 , 4814 are held against the posts 4813 , 4815 .
  • FIGS. 57D and 57E when the threaded collar 4816 has traveled a distance along the screw 4806 , the winglets 4812 , 4814 are deployed to form a second wing 4860 .
  • the winglets 4812 , 4814 extend along a significant portion of the outer surface of the spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the winglets 4812 , 4814 contact the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 and resist further movement in said direction.
  • FIG. 57E is an end view of the implant 4800 with the second wing 4860 deployed.
  • the screw head 4806 extends from the distraction guide 4810 ; however, when implemented, it is preferable for the screw head 4806 to be either flush with the surface of the distraction guide 4810 or slightly receded from the surface of the distraction guide 4810 so that movement of the implant 4800 is not obstructed during distraction of the interspinous ligament 6 and/or the spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the screw head 4806 is shown extending from the distraction guide 4810 to demonstrate possible arrangement relative to the proximal end of the distraction guide 4810 .
  • FIGS. 58A and 58B illustrate yet another embodiment of the implant 4900 having an alternative actuation arrangement.
  • the winglets 4912 , 4914 can be reversed in arrangement so that the winglets 4912 , 4914 are deployed by urging the threaded collar 4916 toward the screw head 4806 .
  • FIGS. 59A and 59B illustrate a still further embodiment of the implant 5000 having an alternative actuation arrangement.
  • the winglets 5012 , 5014 include two hinged portions, each winglet 5012 , 5014 folding outward to form a portion of a second wing 5060 .
  • the second wing 5060 does not extend as far along the axis of the spine, i.e. the total height of the second wing 5060 along the spine is smaller than previous embodiments.
  • a reduced second wing height can be advantageous where implants are positioned at adjacent motion segments, thereby preventing undesired contact of adjacent implants.
  • the winglets can be deployed from the distraction guide using a mechanism other than a screw and threaded collar.
  • one or more gears can be employed.
  • the upper and lower winglets can have a shape along other than those shapes shown in FIGS. 57A through 57B .
  • the invention is not intended to be limited to winglets having shapes such as shown.
  • the implant 5100 can include only one of the upper and lower winglets.
  • implants are positioned at adjacent motion segments it can be advantageous to have a lower winglet 4814 , thereby preventing undesired contact of adjacent implants 5100 .
  • the implant, and components of the implant can be fabricated from medical grade metals such as titanium, stainless steel, cobalt chrome, and alloys thereof, or other suitable implant material having similar high strength and biocompatible properties.
  • the implant can be at least partially fabricated from a shape memory metal, for example Nitinol, which is a combination of titanium and nickel. Such materials are typically radiopaque, and appear during x-ray imaging, and other types of imaging. Implants in accordance with the present invention, and/or portions thereof can also be fabricated from somewhat flexible and/or deflectable material.
  • the implant and/or portions thereof can be fabricated in whole or in part from medical grade biocompatible polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers.
  • a copolymer is a polymer derived from more than one species of monomer.
  • a polymer composite is a heterogeneous combination of two or more materials, wherein the constituents are not miscible, and therefore exhibit an interface between one another.
  • a polymer blend is a macroscopically homogeneous mixture of two or more different species of polymer.
  • Many polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers are radiolucent and do not appear during x-ray or other types of imaging. Implants comprising such materials can provide a physician with a less obstructed view of the spine under imaging, than with an implant comprising radiopaque materials entirely. However, the implant need not comprise any radiolucent materials.
  • PEEK polyetheretherketone
  • PEKK polyetherketoneketone
  • PEEK is proven as a durable material for implants, and meets the criterion of biocompatibility.
  • Medical grade PEEK is available from Victrex Corporation of Lancashire, Great Britain under the product name PEEK-OPTIMA.
  • Medical grade PEKK is available from Oxford Performance Materials under the name OXPEKK, and also from CoorsTek under the name BioPEKK. These medical grade materials are also available as reinforced polymer resins, such reinforced resins displaying even greater material strength.
  • the implant can be fabricated from PEEK 450G, which is an unfilled PEEK approved for medical implantation available from Victrex. Other sources of this material include Gharda located in Panoli, India.
  • PEEK 450G has the following approximate properties: Property Value Density 1.3 g/cc Rockwell M 99 Rockwell R 126 Tensile Strength 97 MPa Modulus of Elasticity 3.5 GPa Flexural Modulus 4.1 GPa
  • PEEK 450G has appropriate physical and mechanical properties and is suitable for carrying and spreading a physical load between the adjacent spinous processes.
  • the implant and/or portions thereof can be formed by extrusion, injection, compression molding and/or machining techniques. It should be noted that the material selected can also be filled.
  • Fillers can be added to a polymer, copolymer, polymer blend, or polymer composite to reinforce a polymeric material. Fillers are added to modify properties such as mechanical, optical, and thermal properties. For example, carbon fibers can be added to reinforce polymers mechanically to enhance strength for certain uses, such as for load bearing devices.
  • other grades of PEEK are available and contemplated for use in implants in accordance with the present invention, such as 30% glass-filled or 30% carbon-filled grades, provided such materials are cleared for use in implantable devices by the FDA, or other regulatory body.
  • Glass-filled PEEK reduces the expansion rate and increases the flexural modulus of PEEK relative to unfilled PEEK.
  • the resulting product is known to be ideal for improved strength, stiffness, or stability.
  • Carbon-filled PEEK is known to have enhanced compressive strength and stiffness, and a lower expansion rate relative to unfilled PEEK.
  • Carbon-filled PEEK also offers wear resistance and load carrying capability.
  • the implant can be comprised of polyetherketoneketone (PEKK).
  • PEKK polyetherketoneketone
  • Other material that can be used include polyetherketone (PEK), polyetherketoneetherketoneketone (PEKEKK), polyetheretherketoneketone (PEEKK)5 and generally a polyaryletheretherketone.
  • PEK polyetherketone
  • PEKEKK polyetherketoneetherketoneketone
  • PEEKK polyetherketoneketone
  • other polyketones can be used as well as other thermoplastics.
  • a minimally invasive surgical method for implanting an implant 4300 as shown in FIGS. 49A-55 in the cervical spine is disclosed and taught herein.
  • a guide wire 4780 is inserted through a placement network 4790 into the neck of the implant recipient.
  • the guide wire 4780 is used to locate where the implant 4300 is to be placed relative to the cervical spine, including the spinous processes.
  • an incision is made on the side of the neck so that an implant 4300 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, can be positioned in the neck thorough an incision and along a line that is about perpendicular to the guide wire 4780 and directed at the end of the guide wire 4780 .
  • the main body 4301 of the implant 4300 is inserted into the neck of the patient.
  • the distraction guide 4310 pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue.
  • an insert 4370 can be positioned within a cavity of the main body 4301 , causing the distraction guide 4310 of the main body 4301 to be arranged in a second configuration so that at least a portion of the distraction guide 4310 forms a second wing.
  • the insert 4370 can be inserted along a line that is generally collinear with the line over which the main body 4301 is inserted.
  • the anatomy of the neck is such that it is most convenient and minimally invasive to enter the neck from the side with respect to the main body 4301 and the insert 4370 .
  • a minimally invasive surgical method for implanting an implant as described in FIGS. 49A-55 in the lumbar spine is disclosed and taught herein.
  • a unilateral incision or opening can be made using a posterior-anterior approach (Step 2802 ).
  • the unilateral incision can be made, for example, at a location some distance to the left of an axis along the spinous process.
  • the incision or opening can be enlarged, and a distraction tool can be positioned within the incision so that the proximal end of the distraction tool (Step 2804 ) can access an exposed side of the interspinous ligament.
  • the distraction tool can be urged through the interspinous ligament, thereby distracting the interspinous ligament so as to receive the implant (Step 2806 ). Once the interspinous ligament is sufficiently distracted, the distraction tool can be disengaged and removed from the incision (Step 2808 ).
  • the implant can be positioned at the dilated opening, and the distraction guide of the implant can be urged through the dilated opening (Step 2810 ).
  • the implant can be further urged through the opening until the spacer is positioned as desired between the adjacent spinous processes of the targeted motion segment (Step 2812 ).
  • the spacer is free to rotate so that the load is distributed more evenly over the surface of the spinous processes.
  • the implant can be urged through the dilated opening until the first wing contacts the adjacent spinous processes, thereby blocking further movement in the direction of insertion.
  • the insert can be positioned at the distal end of the implant so that the insert can be urged into and through the hollow cavity of the hollow central body (Step 2814 ).
  • the distraction guide splits, and the upper winglet and the lower winglet deploy as a second wing.
  • the remaining tools can be removed from the incision, and the incision can be closed (Step 2816 ).
  • the distraction end pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue.
  • a minimally invasive surgical method for implanting an implant as shown in FIGS. 56A-60 in the lumbar spine is disclosed and taught herein. In this method, as shown in the flowchart of FIG.
  • an incision or opening can be made using a posterior-anterior approach (Step 2852 ).
  • the incision or opening can be enlarged, and a distraction tool can be positioned within the incision so that the proximal end of the distraction tool (Step 2854 ) can access an exposed side of the interspinous ligament.
  • the distraction guide can be urged through the interspinous ligament and distracted, thereby distracting the interspinous ligament so as to receive the implant (Step 2856 ). Once the interspinous ligament is sufficiently distracted, the distraction tool can be disengaged and removed from the incision (Step 2858 ).
  • the implant can be positioned at the dilated opening, and the distraction guide of the implant can be urged through the dilated opening (Step 2860 ).
  • the implant can be further urged through the opening until the spacer is positioned as desired between the adjacent spinous processes of the targeted motion segment (Step 2862 ).
  • the spacer is free to rotate so that the load is distributed more evenly over the surface of the spinous processes.
  • the implant can be urged through the dilated opening until the first wing contacts the adjacent spinous processes, thereby blocking further movement in the direction of insertion.
  • an actuation tool can be inserted within the incision at an opposite side of the adjacent spinous processes from the point of insertion (Step 2864 ).
  • the actuation tool can engage the actuation arrangement, and can actuate the actuation arrangement so that the upper winglet and the lower winglet deploy as a second wing, as described above (Step 2866 ).
  • the remaining tools can be removed from the incision, and the incision can be closed (Step 2868 ).
  • the distraction end pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue.
  • implants in accordance with the present invention can comprise a “matchbox”-like structure having a first configuration (as shown in FIG. 64A ) and a second, deployed configuration (as shown in FIG. 64B ). Arranged in the first configuration, such implants 6700 can have a substantially flat profile having an approximately uniform thickness.
  • the uniform thickness approximates the thickness of a spacer 6720 of the implant 6700 .
  • the implant 6700 can comprise a distraction guide 6710 at a proximal end of the implant, the distraction guide 6710 having a slightly rounded or tapered shape to pierce and/or distract a space between adjacent spinous processes.
  • the implant 6700 can further comprise a plurality of hinged structures 6750 - 6757 , the hinged structures 6750 - 6757 being collapsed so as to facilitate the substantially flat profile.
  • the hinged structures 6750 - 6757 are pivotally connected with the spacer 6720 and extend from both sides of the spacer 6720 . As shown in FIG.
  • a support structure 6722 extends from the spacer 6720 toward the distal end of the implant 6700 .
  • a rod 6715 (or alternatively some other mechanism such as a tab) can be connected with the proximal end of the implant 6700 and can extend through the hinged structures 6750 - 6753 , through the spacer 66720 , and through the support structure 6722 so that the rod 6715 is accessible.
  • the rod 6715 can be drawn in a direction opposite the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 6725 so that the hinged structures 6750 - 6757 fold outward to form a first wing 6730 and a second wing 6760 between which is arranged the spacer 6720 and a portion of the spinous processes.
  • the second wing 6760 includes four hinged structures 6750 - 6753 : an upper first structure 6750 connected by a hinge to an upper second structure 6752 , and a lower first structure 6751 connected by a hinge to a lower second structure 6753 .
  • the hinged structures 6750 - 6753 pivot outward to form an upper end 6762 of the second wing and a lower end 6764 of the second wing.
  • the first wing 6730 includes four hinged structures 6754 - 6757 : an upper first structure 6754 connected by a hinge to an upper second structure 6756 , and a lower first structure 6755 connected by a hinge to a lower second structure 6757 .
  • the first wing 6730 is (effectively) bisected by the support structure 6722 so that the first wing 6730 comprises four winglets 6731 - 6734 .
  • the hinged structures 6754 - 6757 pivot outward to form upper winglets 6731 , 6732 of the first wing and lower winglets 6733 , 6734 of the first wing.
  • the support structure 6722 extends from the spacer 6720 toward the distal end of the implant 6700 .
  • the spacer 6720 and the support structure 6722 include a bore or other cavity through which the rod 6715 can travel. Applying resistive force to the support structure 6722 can fix the spacer 6720 in place between spinous processes when drawing the rod 6715 through the bore.
  • the hinged structures 6752 , 6753 with which the proximal end of the rod 6715 is connected are drawn with the rod 6715 .
  • the hinged structures 6752 , 6753 are drawn toward the spacer 6720 .
  • the hinged structures 6750 - 6753 pivot outward to accommodate the relative movement between the rod 6715 and the spacer 66720 . Accordingly, the second wing 6760 has been satisfactorily deployed.
  • the hinged structures 6756 , 6757 of the first wing 6730 can cause deployment of the first wing 6730 by applying resistive force to the hinged structures 6756 , 6757 while drawing the spacer 6720 (via the support structure 6722 ), or by urging the hinged structures 6756 , 6757 toward the spacer 6720 .
  • the resistive force or urging can be applied by a second stop 6784 that can fit around the support structure 6722 and can be interference fit or otherwise selectively fixed with the support structure 6722 .
  • the hinged structures 6754 - 6757 pivot outward to accommodate the relative movement between the second stop 6784 and the spacer 6720 . Accordingly, the first wing 6730 has been satisfactorily deployed.
  • FIGS. 65A and 65B are posterior views of the implant 6700 positioned between adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 demonstrating an embodiment of a method for deploying the implant 6700 between the spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the implant 6700 can be positioned so that a distraction guide 6710 of the implant 6700 is arranged at a space between the spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the implant 6700 can then be urged between the spinous processes 2 , 4 so that the spacer 6720 is positioned as desired.
  • the substantially flat profile of the implant 6700 can ease positioning of the spacer 6720 by reducing potential obstructing surfaces that can resist movement of the implant 6700 during implantation.
  • the second wing 6760 and the first wing 6730 can then be deployed to limit movement of the implant 6700 .
  • the rod 6715 is drawn in a direction opposite the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 6725 .
  • the upper end 6762 and lower end 6764 of the second wing extend outward as described above.
  • the rod 6715 can be fixed in position relative to the spacer 6720 . This can be accomplished using myriad different mechanisms. For example, as shown a first stop 6782 can be interference fit to the rod 6715 and positioned against the support structure 6722 along the rod 6715 .
  • the first stop 6782 can grip the rod 6715 , as with a friction fit between the first stop 6782 and the rod 6715 , so that the rod 6715 is prevented from moving through the bore of the support structure 6722 by interference between the first stop 6782 and the support structure 6722 .
  • some other mechanism can be used, such as a pin (e.g., a cotter pin), a latch system, etc.
  • the upper second structure 6756 and the lower second structure 6757 can be urged toward the spacer 6720 in the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 6725 using a second stop 6784 as described above, causing the upper winglets 6731 , 6732 and lower winglets 6733 , 6734 to extend outward to form the first wing 6730 .
  • the hinged structures 6754 - 6757 can be fixed in position using the second stop 6784 or some other mechanism.
  • the second stop 6784 can grip the support structure 6722 , as with a friction fit or pin, and resist movement of the hinged structures 6754 - 6757 , thereby preventing collapse.
  • the rod 6715 can optionally be trimmed or otherwise partially detached to decrease a space required to accommodate the implant 6700 , 6800 within the patient's spine.
  • the structure of the rod 6715 can be beveled or otherwise weakened near a distal end of the rod 6715 to allow the rod 6715 to be snapped off when the first and second wings 6730 , 6760 , 6830 , 6860 are deployed and the rod 6715 is fixed in place.
  • a tool (not shown) can be used to cut the rod 6715 after the first and second wings 6730 , 6760 , 6830 , 6860 are deployed and the rod 6715 is fixed in place.
  • the rod 6715 need not comprise a rigid structure, but rather alternatively can include a tether, string, or similarly flexible structure that can be placed in tension to retain the second wing 6760 , 6860 and/or first wing 6730 , 6830 in a deployed position.
  • a flexible strap 6890 can be connected between pairs of hinged structures (i.e., 6850 and 6852 , 6851 and 6853 , 6854 and 6856 , 6855 and 6857 ).
  • the flexible strap 6890 can limit the relative movement of the hinged structures 6850 - 6857 so that first wing 6830 and second wing 6860 have increased rigidity when fully deployed.
  • the implant 6800 need not include the support structure 6722 of the previous embodiment.
  • a resistive force can be applied to the hinged structures 6856 , 6857 so that as the rod 6715 is drawn in a direction opposite the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 6825 the resistive force causes the hinged structures 6854 - 6857 to extend outward to form the first wing 6830 .
  • the flexible strap 6890 connected opposite the hinge unfolds.
  • the flexible strap 6890 becomes taut and resists further extension, locking the first wing 6830 in place.
  • the flexible straps 6890 can provide the first wing 6830 with sufficient rigidity to resist movement of the spacer 6720 , so that as the rod 6715 is further drawn the rod 6715 moves through the spacer 6720 and the hinged structures 6852 , 6853 connected with the rod 6715 are drawn toward the spacer 6720 . As the hinged structures 6852 , 6853 connected with the rod 6715 are drawn toward the spacer 6720 , all of the hinged structures 6850 - 6853 extend outward to deploy the second wing 6860 .
  • the flexible strap 6890 connected opposite the hinge, unfolds.
  • the flexible straps 6890 can be made from a biocompatible material. In an embodiment, the flexible straps 6890 can be made from a braided polyester suture material.
  • Braided polyester suture materials include, for example, Ethibond, Ethiflex, Mersilene, and Dacron, and are non-absorbable, having high tensile strength, low tissue reactivity and improved handling.
  • the flexible straps 6890 can be made from stainless steel (i.e., surgical steel), which can be woven into a strap, for example.
  • flexible straps 6890 can be made from some other material (or combination of materials) having similar properties.
  • FIG. 67 is a posterior view of the implant 6800 positioned between adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 demonstrating an embodiment of a method for deploying the implant 6800 between the spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the first wing 6830 can be deployed to limit movement of the implant 6800 relative to the spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the rod 6715 can be held fixed in position or urged in a direction opposite the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 6825 while a force is applied to the hinged structures 6854 - 6857 ( FIG.
  • the rod 6715 can be further urged in the direction opposite the direction of insertion so that the proximal end of the rod 6715 pivotably connected with the hinged structures 6852 , 6853 that comprise the distraction guide 6710 , is drawn toward the spacer 6720 , causing the upper end 6862 of the spacer, and the lower end 6864 of the spacer to extend away from the rod 6715 .
  • the rod 6715 can be fixed in position relative to the spacer 6720 . As above, this can be accomplished using myriad different mechanisms. For example, as shown a first stop 6882 can be interference fit to the rod 6715 and positioned against the first wing 6830 along the rod 6715 . The first stop 6882 can grip the rod 6715 so that the rod 6715 is prevented from moving by a friction fit between the first stop 6882 and the rod 6715 . In other embodiments, some other mechanism can be used, such as a pin (e.g., a cotter pin), a latch system, etc.
  • a pin e.g., a cotter pin
  • implants in accordance with the present invention can comprise a “matchbox”-like structure having a rounded, collapsed first configuration and a second, deployed configuration.
  • implants 6900 can have a shape allowing the implant 6900 to be more naturally inserted through a cannula.
  • a shape includes a substantially circular cross-section, though in other embodiments the implant can have an ovoid or elliptical cross-section, thereby allowing a spacer shape to be employed that generally accommodates a space between adjacent spinous processes.
  • an implant 6900 having a circular cross-section can most efficiently use the space of a cannula, where the cannula includes a circular cross-section; therefore, it may be preferable to employ an implant 6900 having a circular cross-section where a physician desired to minify the diameter of the cannula inserted into the surgical site.
  • the cross-section of the implant 6900 in a first configuration is generally consistent along the implant's length, having a diameter generally the thickness of a spacer 6920 of the implant 6900 .
  • the implant 6900 can comprise a distraction guide 6910 at a proximal end of the implant 6900 , the distraction guide 6910 having a rounded (as shown) or tapered shape to pierce and/or distract a space between adjacent spinous processes.
  • the implant 6900 can optionally include a distraction guide 6910 at the proximal end.
  • the surgical site, and associated tissues and structures can be distracted and repositioned by the cannula, allowing substantially unobstructed access to the surgical site by the implant 6900 . In such circumstance a distraction guide 6910 may not be necessary.
  • the implant 6900 can further comprise a plurality of hinged structures 6950 - 6957 , the hinged structures 6950 - 6957 being collapsed so as to facilitate the substantially collapsed profile.
  • the hinged structures 6950 - 6957 are pivotally connected with the spacer 6920 and extend from both sides of the spacer 6920 .
  • a rod 6915 (or alternatively some other mechanism such as a tab) can be connected with the proximal end of the implant 900 and can extend through the hinged structures 6950 - 6953 , and through the spacer 6920 so that the rod 6915 is accessible to a physician. Referring to FIGS.
  • the rod 6915 can be drawn in a direction opposite the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 6925 so that the hinged structures 6950 - 6957 fold outward to form a first wing 6930 and a second wing 6960 between which is arranged the spacer 6920 and a portion of the spinous processes.
  • the second wing 6960 includes four hinged structures 6950 - 6953 : an upper first structure 6950 connected by a hinge to an upper second structure 6952 , and a lower first structure 6951 connected by a hinge to a lower second structure 6953 .
  • the hinged structures 6950 - 6953 pivot outward to form an upper end 6962 of the second wing and a lower end 6964 of the second wing.
  • the first wing 6930 includes four hinged structures 6954 - 6957 : an upper first structure 6954 connected by a hinge to an upper second structure 6956 , and a lower first structure 6955 connected by a hinge to a lower second structure 6957 .
  • Embodiments as described above in reference to FIGS. 64A and 64B included a support structure 6722 extending from the spacer 6720 .
  • a support structure can optionally extend from the spacer 6920 of the cannula delivered implant 6900 .
  • such a structure need not be necessary where the first wing 6930 is prevented from deploying during deployment of the second wing 6960 by the cannula 6995 itself (see FIG. 69B ).
  • the implant 6900 can be urged through the cannula so that the hinged structures 6950 - 6953 are clear of the cannula.
  • the rod 6915 can then be urged in an opposite direction (relative to insertion) along the longitudinal axis 6925 to deploy the second wing 6960 .
  • the hinged structures 6952 , 6953 are drawn toward the spacer 6920 .
  • the hinged structures 6950 - 6953 pivot outward to accommodate the relative movement between the rod 6915 and the spacer 6920 . Accordingly, the second wing 6960 has been satisfactorily deployed.
  • the cannula 6995 can be retracted from the surgical site, thereby allowing the hinged structures 6956 , 6957 of the first wing 6930 to deploy by urging the hinged structures 6956 , 6957 toward the spacer 6920 .
  • the urging can be applied by a stop 6982 that can fit around the rod 6915 and can be interference fit or otherwise selectively fixed with the rod 6915 .
  • the hinged structures 6954 - 6957 pivot outward to accommodate the relative movement between the stop 6982 and the spacer 6920 . Accordingly, the first wing 6930 has been satisfactorily deployed.
  • the rod 6915 can be fixed in position relative to the spacer 6920 . As above, this can be accomplished using myriad different mechanisms. For example, as shown a stop 6982 can be interference fit to the rod 6915 and positioned against the first wing 6930 along the rod 6915 . The stop 6982 can grip the rod 6915 so that the rod 6915 is prevented from moving by a friction fit between the stop 6982 and the rod 6915 . In other embodiments, some other mechanism can be used, such as a pin (e.g., a cotter pin), a latch system, etc.
  • a pin e.g., a cotter pin
  • the rod 6915 can optionally be trimmed or otherwise partially detached to decrease a space required to accommodate the implant 6900 within the patient's spine.
  • the structure of the rod 6915 can be beveled or otherwise weakened near a distal end of the rod 6915 to allow the rod 6915 to be snapped off when the first and second wings 6930 , 6960 are deployed and the rod 6915 is fixed in place.
  • a tool (not shown) can be used to cut the rod 6915 after the first and second wings 6930 , 6960 are deployed and the rod 6915 is fixed in place.
  • the rod 6915 need not comprise a rigid structure, but rather alternatively can include a tether, string, or similarly flexible structure that can be placed in tension to retain the second wing 6960 and/or first wing 6930 in a deployed position.
  • the implant 6900 is shown having operably connected “hinged” structures 6950 - 6957 .
  • Such structures can be hinged in any way that permits relative movement.
  • the structures may be hinged by way of flexible straps, for example as described above in reference to FIG. 66B .
  • the structures can be hinged using some other technique.
  • one or a pair of cords 6996 can connect pairs of hinged structures so that relative movement is restricted, thereby permitting hinging motion, while resisting separation of the structures.
  • some other mechanism can be employed to define a range of movement of the hinged structures 6950 - 6957 .
  • One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate the myriad different techniques for defining a range of motion of two mechanical parts.
  • the cord 6996 can be made from a biocompatible material.
  • the cord 996 can be made from a braided polyester suture material.
  • Braided polyester suture materials include, for example, Ethibond, Ethiflex, Mersilene, and Dacron, and are non-absorbable, having high tensile strength, low tissue reactivity and improved handling.
  • the cords 6996 can be made from stainless steel (i.e., surgical steel), which can be woven into a strap, for example.
  • the cords 6996 can be made from some other material (or combination of materials) having similar properties.
  • the implant can be fabricated from medical grade metals such as titanium, stainless steel, cobalt chrome, and alloys thereof, or other suitable implant material having similar high strength and biocompatible properties. Additionally, the implant can be at least partially fabricated from a shape memory metal, for example Nitinol, which is a combination of titanium and nickel. Such materials are typically radiopaque, and appear during x-ray imaging, and other types of imaging. Implants in accordance with the present invention, and/or portions thereof can also be fabricated from somewhat flexible and/or deflectable material. In these embodiments, the implant and/or portions thereof can be fabricated in whole or in part from medical grade biocompatible polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers.
  • a copolymer is a polymer derived from more than one species of monomer.
  • a polymer composite is a heterogeneous combination of two or more materials, wherein the constituents are not miscible, and therefore exhibit an interface between one another.
  • a polymer blend is a macroscopically homogeneous mixture of two or more different species of polymer.
  • Many polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers are radiolucent and do not appear during x-ray or other types of imaging. Implants comprising such materials can provide a physician with a less obstructed view of the spine under imaging, than with an implant comprising radiopaque materials entirely. However, the implant need not comprise any radiolucent materials.
  • biocompatible polymers are the polyaryl ester ketones which has several members including polyetheretherketone (PEEK), and polyetherketoneketone (PEKK).
  • PEEK is proven as a durable material for implants, and meets the criterion of biocompatibility.
  • Medical grade PEEK is available from Victrex Corporation of Lancashire, Great Britain under the product name PEEK-OPTIMA.
  • Medical grade PEKK is available from Oxford Performance Materials under the name OXPEKK, and also from CoorsTek under the name BioPEKK. These medical grade materials are also available as reinforced polymer resins, such reinforced resins displaying even greater material strength.
  • the implant can be fabricated from PEEK 450G, which is an unfilled PEEK approved for medical implantation available from Victrex. Other sources of this material include Gharda located in Panoli, India.
  • PEEK 450G has the following approximate properties: Property Value Density 1.3 g/cc Rockwell M 99 Rockwell R 126 Tensile Strength 97 MPa Modulus of Elasticity 3.5 GPa Flexural Modulus 4.1 GPa
  • PEEK 450G has appropriate physical and mechanical properties and is suitable for carrying and spreading a physical load between the adjacent spinous processes.
  • the implant and/or portions thereof can be formed by extrusion, injection, compression molding and/or machining techniques.
  • Fillers can be added to a polymer, copolymer, polymer blend, or polymer composite to reinforce a polymeric material. Fillers are added to modify properties such as mechanical, optical, and thermal properties. For example, carbon fibers can be added to reinforce polymers mechanically to enhance strength for certain uses, such as for load bearing devices.
  • other grades of PEEK are available and contemplated for use in implants in accordance with the present invention, such as 30% glass-filled or 30% carbon-filled grades, provided such materials are cleared for use in implantable devices by the FDA, or other regulatory body. Glass-filled PEEK reduces the expansion rate and increases the flexural modulus of PEEK relative to unfilled PEEK.
  • Carbon-filled PEEK is known to have enhanced compressive strength and stiffness, and a lower expansion rate relative to unfilled PEEK. Carbon-filled PEEK also offers wear resistance and load carrying capability.
  • the implant can be comprised of polyetherketoneketone (PEKK).
  • PEKK polyetherketoneketone
  • Other material that can be used include polyetherketone (PEK), polyetherketoneetherketoneketone (PEKEKK), polyetheretherketoneketone (PEEKK), and generally a polyaryletheretherketone.
  • PEK polyetherketone
  • PEKEKK polyetherketoneetherketoneketone
  • PEEKK polyetheretherketoneketone
  • other polyketones can be used as well as other thermoplastics.
  • the binder can be made from a biocompatible material.
  • the binder can be made from a braided polyester suture material.
  • Braided polyester suture materials include, for example, Ethibond, Ethiflex, Mersilene, and Dacron, and are nonabsorbable, having high tensile strength, low tissue reactivity and improved handling.
  • the binder can be made from stainless steel (i.e., surgical steel), which can be braided into a tether or woven into a strap, for example.
  • the binder can be made from some other material (or combination of materials) having similar properties. It is to be understood that embodiments in accordance with the present invention can be constructed without a pliant material. It is also to be understood that the embodiments in accordance with the present invention can have other dimensions.
  • a minimally invasive surgical method for implanting an implant 6400 in the cervical spine is disclosed and taught herein.
  • a guide wire 80 is inserted through a placement network or guide 90 into the neck of the implant recipient.
  • the guide wire 80 is used to locate where the implant is to be placed relative to the cervical spine, including the spinous processes.
  • an incision is made on the side of the neck so that an implant in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, can be positioned in the neck thorough an incision and along a line that is about perpendicular to the guide wire 80 and directed at the end of the guide wire 80 .
  • the implant can be a sized implant 400 (i.e., having a body that is not distractible), such as described above in FIGS. 7-23 and including a distraction guide 6410 , a spacer 6420 , and a first wing 6430 .
  • the implant 6400 is inserted into the neck of the patient.
  • the distraction guide 6410 pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue.
  • a second wing 6460 can be optionally inserted along a line that is generally collinear with the line over which the implant 6400 is inserted but from the opposite side of the neck.
  • the anatomy of the neck is such that it is most convenient and minimally invasive to enter the neck from the side with respect to the implant 6400 and the second wing 6460 .
  • the second wing 6460 is mated to the implant and in this particular embodiment, the second wing 6460 is attached to the implant 6400 by the use of a fastener, for example by a screw 6442 . Where a screw is used, the screw 6442 can be positioned using a screw driving mechanism that is directed along a posterior to anterior line somewhat parallel to the guide wire 80 .
  • the second wing 6460 is positioned so that a bore 6463 formed in a lip 6461 of the second wing 6460 is aligned with a bore 6440 of the implant 6400 , as described above.
  • the screw 6442 is positioned within both bores and secured, at least, to the bore 6440 of the implant 6400 .
  • the second wing can be interference fit with the implant, as described above, or fastened using some other mechanism, such as a flexible hinge and protrusion.
  • a minimally invasive surgical method for implanting an alternative embodiment of an implant 6700 in the cervical spine is disclosed and taught herein.
  • a guide wire 80 is inserted through a placement network or guide 90 into the neck of the implant recipient.
  • the guide wire 80 is used to locate where the implant 6700 is to be placed relative to the cervical spine, including the spinous processes.
  • an incision is made on the side of the neck so that an implant 700 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, can be positioned in the neck thorough an incision and along a line that is about perpendicular to the guide wire 80 and directed at the end of the guide wire 80 .
  • the implant 6700 can include a distraction guide 6710 , a spacer 6720 , a rod 6715 extending through the spacer 6720 , and deployable first and second wings 6730 , 6760 .
  • the implant 6700 can have a substantially flat profile to ease implantation, as described above.
  • the implant 6700 is inserted into the neck of the patient.
  • the distraction guide 6710 pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue.
  • the first wing 6730 and the second wing 6760 can be deployed.
  • the second wing 6760 can be deployed by urging the rod 6715 in a direction opposite the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 6725 .
  • hinged structures 6750 - 6753 contact the spacer 66720 , buckle and extend away from the rod 6715 two form an upper end 6762 of the second wing and a lower end 6764 of the second wing.
  • the rod 6715 can be fixed in place relative to the spacer 6720 using a first stop 6782 , a pin, or some other mechanism.
  • the first wing 6730 can be deployed by urging the hinged structures 6754 - 6757 toward the spacer 6720 , causing the hinged structures 6754 - 6757 to buckle and extend away from one another to form an upper end 6732 of the second wing and a lower end 6734 of the second wing.
  • the anatomy of the neck is such that it is most convenient and minimally invasive to enter the neck from the side with respect to the implant 6700 .
  • a minimally invasive surgical method for implanting an alternative embodiment of an implant 6900 in the cervical spine is disclosed and taught herein. In this method, as shown in FIG. 72 , preferably a guide wire 80 is inserted through a placement network or guide 90 into the neck of the implant recipient.
  • the guide wire 80 is used to locate where the implant 6900 is to be placed relative to the cervical spine, including the spinous processes. Once the guide wire 80 is positioned with the aid of imaging techniques, an incision is made on the side of the neck along a line that is about perpendicular to the guide wire 80 and directed at the end of the guide wire 80 . The cannula 6995 is fed through the incision and positioned between the targeted adjacent spinous processes.
  • the implant 6900 can include a distraction guide 6910 , a spacer 6920 , a rod 6915 extending through the spacer 6920 , and deployable first and second wings 6930 , 6960 .
  • the implant 6900 can have a substantially circular cross-section to roughly conform with an inside surface of the cannula 6995 .
  • the implant 6900 is urged through the cannula 6995 and into position between the adjacent spinous processes so that the second wing 6960 hinge structures are clear of the cannula 6995 , as described above in reference to FIG. 68B .
  • the second wing 6960 is then deployed by urging the rod 6915 in a direction opposite the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 6925 .
  • hinged structures 6950 - 6953 contact the spacer 6920 , buckle and extend away from the rod 6915 two form an upper end 6962 of the second wing and a lower end 6964 of the second wing.
  • the cannula 6995 can be retracted to expose the hinged structures 6954 - 6957 of the first wing 6930 .
  • the first wing 6930 can be deployed by urging the hinged structures 6954 - 6957 toward the spacer 6920 , causing the hinged structures 6954 - 6957 to buckle and extend away from one another to form an upper end 6932 of the second wing and a lower end 6934 of the second wing.
  • the rod 6915 can optionally be shortened, and the cannula 6995 can be withdrawn from the incision. The incision can then be closed.
  • FIG. 73A is a perspective view of an implant as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/850,267, filed May 20, 2004, incorporated herein by reference.
  • the implant 7100 comprises a first wing 7130 , a spacer 7120 , and a lead-in tissue expander (also referred to herein as a distraction guide) 7110 .
  • the distraction guide 7110 in this particular embodiment is wedge-shaped, i.e., the implant has an expanding cross-section from a proximal end of the implant 7100 to a region 7150 where the guide 7110 joins with the spacer 7120 (referencing for the figures is based on the point of insertion of the implant between spinous processes).
  • the distraction guide 7110 functions to initiate distraction of the soft tissue and the spinous processes when the implant 7100 is surgically inserted between the spinous processes. It is to be understood that the distraction guide 7110 can be pointed and the like, in order to facilitate insertion of the implant 7100 between the spinous processes of adjacent cervical vertebrae. It is advantageous that the insertion technique disturb as little of the bone and surrounding tissue or ligaments as possible in order to reduce trauma to the site and promote early healing, and prevent destabilization of the normal anatomy. For embodiments such as those of FIGS. 73A and 73B , there is no requirement to remove any of the bone of the spinous processes and no requirement to sever, or remove from the body, ligaments and tissues immediately associated with the spinous processes.
  • the spacer 7120 can be teardrop-shaped in cross-section perpendicular to a longitudinal axis 7125 of the implant 7100 .
  • the shape of the spacer 7120 can roughly conform to a wedge-shaped space, or a portion of the space, between adjacent spinous processes within which the implant 7100 is to be positioned. As shown in FIG.
  • the spacer 7120 (and the first wing 7108 ) is shaped to accommodate the anatomical form or contour of spinous processes (and/or laminae) of the C6 and C7 vertebra for placement between such spinous processes (i.e., the C6-C7 motion segment).
  • the same shape or variations of this shape can be used to accommodate other motion segments, for example in the thoracic or lumbar regions.
  • the spacer 7120 can have alternative shapes such as circular, wedge, oval, ovoid, football, and rectangular with rounded corners, and other shapes.
  • the shape of the spacer 7120 can be selected for a particular patient so that the physician can position the implant 7100 as close as possible to the anterior portion of the surface of the spinous process.
  • the shape selected for the spacer 7120 can affect the contact surface area of the implant 7100 and the spinous processes that are to be subject to distraction. Increasing the contact surface area between the implant 7100 and the spinous processes can distribute a load force between the spinous frame and the implant 7100 .
  • the first wing 7130 is likewise teardrop-shaped in cross-section perpendicular to a longitudinal axis 7125 of the spacer 7120 and distraction guide 7110 .
  • the dimensions of the first wing 7130 can be larger than that of the spacer 7120 , particularly along the axis of the spine, and can limit or block lateral displacement of the implant 7100 in the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 7125 .
  • the first wing 7130 can have other cross-sectional shapes, such as elliptical, wedge, circular, oval, ovoid, football, and rectangular with rounded corners and other shapes.
  • the implant 7100 of FIG. 73A further includes an adjustable wing 7160 (also referred to herein as a second wing) separate from the distraction guide 7110 , the spacer 7120 and the first wing 7130 .
  • the second wing 7160 is connectable with the distraction guide 7110 (and/or the spacer 7120 ) once the implant 7100 is positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • the second wing 7160 similar to the first wing 7130 , can limit or block lateral displacement of the implant 7100 , however displacement is limited or blocked in the direction opposite insertion.
  • both the first wing 7130 and the second wing 7160 are connected with the implant 7100 and the implant 7100 is positioned between adjacent spinous processes, a portion of the spinous processes can be sandwiched between the first wing 7130 and the second wing 7160 , limiting displacement along the longitudinal axis 7125 .
  • the second wing 7160 can be teardrop-shaped in cross-section.
  • a lip 7180 defining a space 7170 through the second wing 7160 allows the second wing 7160 to pass over the distraction guide 7110 to meet and connect with the distraction guide 7110 and/or the spacer 7120 .
  • the second wing 7160 is then secured to the distraction guide 7110 and/or the spacer 7120 .
  • the second wing 7160 can be designed to be interference-fit onto the spacer 7120 or a portion of the distraction guide 7110 adjacent to the spacer 7120 . Where the second wing 7160 is interference-fit, there is no additional attachment device to fasten the second wing 7160 relative to the remainder of the implant 7100 .
  • FIG. 73A illustrates an embodiment of an implant 7100 including a teardrop-shaped second wing 7160 having a tongue 7158 at the posterior end of the second wing 7160 .
  • a bore 7155 is disposed through the tongue 7158 , and is aligned with a corresponding bore 7156 on the spacer 7120 when the second wing 7160 is brought into position by surgical insertion relative to the rest of the implant 7100 .
  • a threaded screw 7154 can be inserted through the aligned bores 7155 , 7156 in a posterior-anterior direction to secure the second wing 7160 to the spacer 7120 .
  • the direction of insertion from a posterior to an anterior direction has the screw 7154 engaging the bores 7155 , 7156 and the rest of the implant 7100 along a direction that is generally perpendicular to the longitudinal axis 7125 .
  • This orientation is most convenient when the physician is required to use a screw 7154 to secure the second wing 7160 to the rest of the implant 7100 .
  • the second wing 7160 can further be secured to the spacer 7120 by some other mechanism, for example such as a flexible hinge (not shown) with a protrusion that engages an indentation of one of the distraction guide 7110 and the spacer 7120 .
  • the second wing 7160 can be secured to one of the distraction guide 7110 and the spacer 7120 by still some other mechanism.
  • FIG. 73B is a perspective view of an implant as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,695,842 to Zucherman, et al, incorporated herein by reference.
  • the implant 7200 has a main body that includes a spacer 7220 , a first wing 7230 , a lead-in tissue expander 7210 (also referred to herein as a distraction guide) and an alignment track 7203 .
  • the main body of the implant 7200 is inserted between adjacent spinous processes and remains in place (where desired) without attachment to the bone or ligaments.
  • the distraction guide 7210 includes a tip from which the distraction guide 7210 expands, the tip having a diameter sufficiently small such that the tip can pierce an opening in an interspinous ligament and/or can be inserted into a small initial dilated opening.
  • the diameter and/or cross-sectional area of the distraction guide 7210 gradually increases until it is substantially similar to the diameter of the spacer 7220 .
  • the tapered front end eases the ability of a physician to urge the implant 7200 between adjacent spinous processes. When urging the main body of the implant 7200 between adjacent spinous processes, the front end of the distraction guide 7210 distracts the adjacent spinous processes and dilates the interspinous ligament so that a space between the adjacent spinous processes is approximately the diameter of the spacer 7220 .
  • the spacer 7220 is elliptically shaped in cross-section, and can swivel so that the spacer 7220 can self-align relative to the uneven surfaces of the spinous processes. Self-alignment can ensure that compressive loads are distributed across the surface of the bone.
  • the spacer 7220 can have, for example, a diameter of six millimeters, eight millimeters, ten millimeters, twelve millimeters and fourteen millimeters. These diameters refer to the height by which the spacer 7220 distracts and maintains apart the spinous process.
  • the selected height i.e., diameter
  • the major dimension is transverse to the alignment of the spinous process, one above the other.
  • the first wing 7230 has a lower portion 7231 and an upper portion 7232 .
  • the upper portion 7232 is shaped to accommodate the anatomical form or contour of spinous processes (and/or laminae) of the L4 (for an L4-L5 placement) or L5 (for an L5-S 1 placement) vertebra. The same shape or variations of this shape can be used to accommodate other motion segments, such as motion segments in the cervical and thoracic regions.
  • the lower portion 7231 can also be rounded to accommodate the spinous processes.
  • the lower portion 7231 and upper portion 7232 of the first wing 7230 act as a stop mechanism when the implant 7200 is inserted between adjacent spinous processes. The implant 7200 cannot be inserted beyond the surfaces of the first wing 7230 .
  • the first wing 7230 can prevent some side-to-side, or posterior-to-anterior movement of the implant 7200 .
  • the implant 7200 of FIG. 73B further includes a second wing 7260 .
  • the second wing 7260 includes a lower portion 7261 and an upper portion 7262 sized and/or shaped to accommodate the anatomical form or contour of the spinous processes and/or lamina.
  • the second wing 7260 can be secured to the main body of the implant 7200 with a fastener 7254 .
  • the second wing 7260 also has an alignment tab 7268 .
  • the alignment tab 7268 engages the alignment track 7203 .
  • the alignment tab 7268 slides within the alignment track 7203 and helps to maintain the adjustable wing 7260 substantially parallel with the first wing 7230 .
  • the second wing 7260 also can prevent some side-to-side, or posterior-to-anterior movement.
  • a procedure for positioning such an implant 7100 , 7200 and subsequently connecting the second wing 7160 , 7260 with the implant 7100 , 7200 can require a bilateral approach wherein a physician must access both sides of the interspinous ligament, a first side to pierce and/or distract the interspinous ligament and position the implant 7100 , 7200 so that the movement in the direction of insertion is satisfactorily limited by the first wing 7130 , 7230 , and a second side to attach the second wing 7160 , 7260 such that movement in the direction opposite insertion is satisfactorily limited by the second wing 7160 , 7260 .
  • implants 7300 and methods for positioning such implants in accordance with the present invention can include, in an embodiment, a frame 7302 having a central body 7304 extending along a longitudinal axis 7325 of the implant 7300 .
  • the central body 7304 can include a distraction guide 7306 at a proximal end of the central body 7304 .
  • the distraction guide 7306 can have a tapered shape so that the distraction guide 7306 can pierce and/or distract an interspinous ligament associated with the targeted motion segment.
  • a first wing 7330 extends from a distal end of the central body 7304 and acts to limit or block movement of the implant 7300 along the longitudinal axis 7325 in the direction of insertion.
  • a substantially thread-shaped lead-in screw (also referred to herein as a second wing) 7360 extends from the periphery of the central body 7304 distally located relative to the distraction guide 7306 .
  • the second wing can be helical shaped, wherein a helical shape is generally a three-dimensional curve that lies on a cylinder or a cone, so that its angle to a plane perpendicular to the axis is constant.
  • Helical shapes as described herein need not lie along a constant angle, but rather can lie along an angle that varies.
  • a helical shape need only include a curve that has a gap 7361 (also referred to herein as a groove) between overlapping surfaces such that structures related to the adjacent spinous processes and the spinous processes can pass within the groove 7361 .
  • a lead-in screw shape other than helical is within the spirit and scope of the invention.
  • a shape with a constant diameter thread, or with different or constant thread pitches can be used.
  • the second wing 7360 can have an outer diameter that steadily increases from near the proximal end of the central body 7304 distally toward the first wing 7330 .
  • the second wing 7360 terminates so that a spacer 7320 ( FIG.
  • the helical shape of the second wing 7360 can facilitate implantation between adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 (shown in FIGS. 75A-75E ) from one or more incisions formed on one side of an interspinous ligament 6 extending between the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • Implantation can be accomplished in such embodiments as described above by initially piercing or distracting the interspinous ligament 6 with the distraction guide 7306 , and subsequently rotating the central body 7304 .
  • One or both of the interspinous ligament 6 and the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 slip within the groove 7361 of the helically shaped second wing 7360 as the central body 7304 is rotated and the central body 7304 is drawn or urged along the longitudinal axis 7325 in the direction of insertion.
  • the interspinous ligament 6 and/or associated spinous processes 2 , 4 travels along the groove 7361 and therefore along the central body 7304 , causing the second wing 7360 to be positioned, when the implant 7300 is seated, at an opposite side of the interspinous ligament 6 from the first wing 7330 such that the interspinous ligament 6 is disposed between the first wing 7330 and the second wing 7360 along the longitudinal axis 7325 .
  • Arranging the interspinous ligament 6 , and/or the associated spinous processes 2 , 4 between the first wing 7330 and the second wing 7360 limits or blocks movement along the longitudinal axis 7325 .
  • the distraction guide 7306 can have a generally conical shape, rather than a wedge-shape as described above in reference to FIGS. 73A and 73B .
  • rotation of the central body 7304 can cause the distraction guide 7306 to distract the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 and/or interspinous ligament 6 a distance according to the major dimension of the distraction guide 7306 .
  • the first wing 7330 has a rounded shape, having substantially the same minor and major dimension. The first wing 7330 is shaped so that the first wing 7330 can rotate along with the central body 7304 while minifying interference from surrounding structures.
  • the rounded shape of the first wing 7330 can accommodate slots as described below, while providing a surface to contact the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 during implantation, thereby limiting movement along the longitudinal axis 7325 in the direction of insertion.
  • the first wing 7330 need not have a rounded shape.
  • the first wing 7330 can include one or more slots to receive a spacer 7320 so that the spacer 7320 can be arranged over the central body 7304 between the second wing 7360 and the first wing 7330 .
  • the first wing 7330 includes two slots 7332 , 7334 having a substantially arced shape, and arranged in opposition to one another.
  • the maximum distance between the peripheries of the slots 7332 , 7334 can substantially define a minor (or alternatively a major) dimension of the spacer 7320 .
  • the slots 7332 , 7334 preferably have inner surfaces that transition to the outer surface of the central body 7304 , so that when a spacer 7320 is urged through the slots 7332 , 7334 , the spacer 7320 abuts the central body 7304 , thereby allowing a portion of a load to be transferred to the central body 7304 .
  • one or more slots can be disposed through the first wing 7330 and can be shaped as desired, such that the one or more slots having the same or different geometries.
  • FIG. 74B is a perspective view of the spacer 7320 having a geometry adapted to be received over the frame 7302 described above.
  • the spacer 7320 includes a top portion 7322 and a bottom portion 7324 .
  • top and bottom components are referred to herein as “top” and “bottom” components; however, positional modifiers are attached merely to distinguish between similar components and are not meant to limit use of the invention.
  • the top portion 7322 and the bottom portion 7324 have outer surfaces that support a respective adjacent spinous process 2 , 4 and inner surfaces that abut the central body 7304 .
  • a portion of the inner surfaces of the top portion 7322 and the bottom portion 7324 are grooved so as to approximately conform with a shape of the central body 7304 , thereby spreading a load across the outer surface of the central body 7304 .
  • the outer surfaces are arced, and generally shaped to resemble the outer periphery of the slots 7332 , 7334 of the first wing 7330 .
  • the top portion 7322 , bottom portion 7324 , and corresponding slots 7332 , 7334 can be similarly shaped to accommodate the central body 7304 .
  • the central body 7304 can have an irregular or non-symmetrical shape to prevent incorrect mating of the spacer 7320 with the frame 7302 .
  • One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate the myriad variations with which the structures can be shaped.
  • the top portion 7322 and the bottom portion 7324 include respective lead-in tissue expanders 7321 , 7323 (also referred to herein as a distraction guides).
  • the distraction guide 7321 , 7323 for the top portion 7322 and the bottom portion 7324 can taper at the proximal end of the spacer 7320 , thereby allowing the distraction guide 7306 to distract one or both of the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 and/or interspinous ligament 6 .
  • the top portion 7322 and the bottom portion 7324 taken together in cross-section perpendicular to a longitudinal axis 7325 , can have a split teardrop shape, similar to a cross-section of the spacer 7120 of FIG. 73A .
  • the shape of the spacer 7320 can roughly conform to a wedge-shaped space, or a portion of the space, between adjacent spinous processes within which the implant 7300 is to be positioned.
  • the same shape or variations of this shape can be used to accommodate different motion segments and/or different patients, as described above.
  • the spacer 7320 can have alternative shapes such as circular, elliptical, wedge, oval, ovoid, football, and rectangular with rounded corners, and other shapes.
  • the shape of the spacer 7320 can be selected for a particular patient so that the physician can position the implant 7300 as close as possible to the anterior portion of the surface of the spinous process.
  • the shape selected for the spacer 7320 can affect the contact surface area of the implant 7300 and the spinous processes that are to be subject to distraction. Increasing the contact surface area between the implant 7300 and the spinous processes can distribute a load force between the spinous frame and the implant 7300 .
  • the top portion 7322 and the bottom portion 7324 extend from a base 7326 and are fixed in relative position by the base 7326 . As can be seen, the bottom portion 7324 extends farther than the top portion 7322 . As will be described in further detail below, the top portion 7322 is truncated in length along the longitudinal axis 7325 relative to the bottom portion 7324 to avoid contacting the second wing 7360 which in the embodiment shown in FIG. 74A spirals to a termination point at the upper surface of the central body 7304 .
  • the base 7326 can have a length along the longitudinal axis 7325 as desired, and preferably having a length sufficient to support the top portion 7322 and the bottom portion 7324 in an at least semi-rigid position relative to one another.
  • the base 7326 can include a cavity 7329 for receiving one or both of an insertion tool and a fastener (not shown).
  • the cavity 7329 can correspond to a threaded cavity 7309 disposed in the central body 7304 so that, for example, the frame 7302 and the spacer 7320 can be fixedly attached, with by way of example only a screw, once the spacer 7320 is seated.
  • FIG. 74C is a perspective view of the implant 7300 wherein the spacer 7320 is seated within the frame 7302 and arranged over the central body 7304 .
  • the bottom portion 7324 of the spacer 7320 extends further than the top portion 7322 , and is unobstructed by the second wing 7360 , which spirals partially above the bottom portion 7324 .
  • the first wing 7330 and the second wing 7360 have major dimensions approximately along the axis of the spine that are larger than the major dimension of the spacer 7320 , thereby blocking or limiting movement of the implant 7300 along the longitudinal axis 7325 .
  • FIGS. 75A through 75E are partial cross-sectional posterior views illustrating the implant 7300 being positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 75A illustrates the distraction guide of the frame 7302 positioned adjacent to the interspinous ligament 6 of the targeted motion segment.
  • the frame 7302 can be urged against the interspinous ligament 6 to pierce and/or distract the interspinous ligament 6 .
  • the frame 7302 can further be urged into the interspinous ligament 6 along the longitudinal axis 7325 until the second wing 7360 contacts the interspinous ligament 6 . Referring to FIG.
  • the frame 7302 can then be rotated and urged toward the interspinous ligament 6 so that the second wing 7360 passes through the interspinous ligament 6 , which is thereby positioned between a portion of the second wing 7360 and the first wing 7330 along the longitudinal axis 7325 .
  • the interspinous ligament 6 and the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 are substantially disposed within a groove 7361 between the surfaces of the second wing 7360 that overlap along the longitudinal axis 7325 .
  • the frame 7302 can be further rotated and urged into the interspinous ligament 6 until the entire second wing 7360 is substantially arranged so that the interspinous ligament 6 is disposed between the first wing 7330 and the second wing 7360 .
  • the frame 7302 can be further rotated so that the slots 7332 , 7334 are arranged to receive the spacer 7320 such that a load applied to the spacer 7320 is sufficiently distributed across the surface of the spacer 7320 (i.e., the spacer 7320 approximately conforms to a space between the contact surfaces of adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 of the targeted motion segment).
  • the top portion 7322 and the bottom portion 7324 can be positioned within the corresponding slots 7332 , 7334 and urged over the central body 7304 so that the top portion 7322 and bottom portion 7324 further distract the interspinous ligament 6 and/or the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the spacer 7320 can be urged in the direction of insertion until the base 7326 is seated against the first wing 7330 .
  • the top portion 7322 and the bottom portion 7324 can be arranged so that the top portion 7322 and bottom portion 7324 are approximately in contact or near-contact with the second wing 7360 , so that the spacer 7320 fully supports a load applied by the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 , without slippage.
  • FIG. 76A is an end view of the implant 7300 positioned between the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 of the targeted motion segment.
  • the base 7326 is arranged at a slight angle relative to the axis of the spine.
  • the upper spinous process 2 includes a lower contact surface that arcs slightly downward
  • the lower spinous process 4 includes an upper contact surface that also arcs slightly downward.
  • Arranging the implant 7300 as shown can increase the overall contact surface between the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 and the spacer 7320 over, for example, inserting the implant 7300 so that the base 7326 is aligned perpendicular to the axis of the spine.
  • Increasing overall contact surface can reduce the stress applied from the motion segment to the spacer 7320 , and from the spacer to the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the base 7326 can include a cavity 7329 that in an embodiment is a bore having a diameter larger than a diameter of a corresponding cavity 7309 of the first wing 7330 .
  • a cavity 7329 can be receive an insertion tool (not shown) for assisting in implantation, or such a feature can receive a fastener (not shown), such as a screw or bolt to secure the spacer 7320 to the frame 7302 .
  • a bore 7329 having a larger diameter than the cavity 7309 of the frame 7302 can allow a head of the fastener to be received so that the head does not extend beyond a distal face of the base 7326 .
  • the base 7326 can include one or more additional cavities for receiving lock pins, or other features of an insertion tool (not shown), for example as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,712,819, entitled “Mating Insertion Instruments for Spinal Implants and Methods of Use,” issued Mar. 30, 2004 to Zucherman, et al.
  • FIG. 76B is a front view of the implant 7300 positioned between the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 of the targeted motion segment.
  • the second wing 7360 is helical in shape and can limit or block motion in a direction opposite insertion by contacting the upper spinous process 2 .
  • the second wing 7360 can contact the lower spinous process 4 .
  • the second wing 7360 as shown includes a helical shape somewhat similar to that of a conch shell, in other embodiments the second wing 7360 can have a shape that varies from the shape shown.
  • the distal end of the second wing 7360 can overlap the proximal end of the second wing 7360 more or less than as shown.
  • the second wing 7360 can be formed in two or more broken sections, rather than an unbroken spiral.
  • the second wing 7360 can include slots for receiving a proximal piece of the upper and lower portions 7322 , 7324 of the spacer 7320 .
  • Implants in accordance with the present invention are not intended to be limited to those described and shown herein, but rather apply to all such implants that utilize a wing having a major dimension larger than a major dimension of a space between spinous processes, wherein the wing can be appropriately positioned by rotating the implant while urging the implant in a direction of insertion.
  • FIG. 77A is a perspective view of the frame 7402 including a central body 7404 having a distraction guide 7406 at a proximal end, and an alignment protrusion 7408 at a distal end.
  • the second wing 7460 is similar to the second wing 7460 described above.
  • the alignment protrusion 7408 extends from the central body 7404 to align a spacer 7420 as the spacer 7420 is arranged over the central body 7404 , and to prevent the spacer 7420 from subsequently rotating relative to the frame 7402 once implanted.
  • the alignment protrusion 7408 corresponds to a notch 7427 within the spacer 7420 within which the central body 7404 is partially disposed.
  • FIG. 77B is a perspective view of the spacer 7420 .
  • the spacer 7420 includes a bore 7428 disposed at least partially through the spacer 7420 , and including a notch 7427 along the length of the bore 7428 to receive the alignment protrusion 7408 of the frame 7402 .
  • the proximal end of the spacer 7420 can be tapered to form a distraction guide 7426 to distract the interspinous ligament 6 and/or the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 of the motion segment.
  • the implant 7400 can be further rotated or adjusted to distribute a load once the spacer 7420 is positioned over the frame 7404 and between the spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the spacer 7420 can have a cross-section perpendicular to the longitudinal axis 7425 that is teardrop-shaped, similar to a cross-section of the spacer 7120 , 7320 of FIGS. 73A and 74A . In this way, the shape of the spacer 7420 can roughly conform to a wedge-shaped space, or a portion of the space, between adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 within which the implant 7400 is to be positioned.
  • the spacer 7420 can have alternative shapes such as circular, elliptical, wedge, oval, ovoid, football, and rectangular with rounded corners, and other shapes.
  • the shape of the spacer 7420 can be selected for a particular patient so that the physician can position the implant 7400 as close as possible to the anterior portion of the surface of the spinous process 2 , 4 .
  • the shape selected for the spacer 7420 can affect the contact surface area of the implant 7400 and the spinous processes 2 , 4 that are to be subject to distraction. Increasing the contact surface area between the implant 7400 and the spinous processes 2 , 4 can distribute a load force between the spinous frame and the implant 7400 .
  • the spacer 7420 of FIG. 77B extends from a first wing 7430 integrally formed or connected with the spacer 7420 .
  • a proximal end of the spacer 7420 varies in length, extending farther near the bottom section of the spacer 7420 to correspond roughly with the helical shape of the second wing 7460 , thereby avoiding contacting the second wing 7460 which in the embodiment shown in FIG. 77A spirals to a termination point at the upper surface of the central body 7404 .
  • the spacer 7420 can be positioned over the central body 404 and urged over the central body 7404 so that the spacer 7420 further distracts the interspinous ligament and/or the adjacent spinous processes.
  • the spacer 7320 can be urged in the direction of insertion until the central body 7404 is seated within the bore 7428 .
  • the shape of the proximal end of the spacer 7420 is shaped such that when seated, the proximal end is approximately in contact or near-contact with the second wing 7460 , so that the spacer 7420 fully supports a load applied by the adjacent spinous processes, without slippage.
  • the first wing 7430 can have a depth along the longitudinal axis 7425 as desired, and a width such that the first wing 7430 can contact one or both of the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 , thereby limiting or blocking moving of the implant 7400 in the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 7425 .
  • the first wing 7430 has a rounded shape, having substantially the same minor and major dimension.
  • the first wing 7430 need not rotate to properly arrange the second wing 7460 , therefore the first wing 7430 need not have a round shape, where it is desired that the second wing 7460 have some other shape.
  • the first wing 7430 can include a shape similar to that shown in FIG. 73B .
  • the first wing 7430 can include a cavity 7429 for receiving one or both of an insertion tool (not shown).
  • the central body 7404 can optionally include a cavity 7409 so that, for example, the frame 7402 , the spacer 7420 , and the first wing 7430 can be fixedly attached once the spacer 7420 is seated.
  • FIG. 77C is a perspective view of the implant 7400 wherein the spacer 7420 is positioned to be seated on the frame 7402 and arranged over the central body 7404 .
  • the first wing 7430 and the second wing 7460 have major dimensions approximately along the axis of the spine that are larger than the major dimension of the spacer 7420 , thereby blocking or limiting movement of the implant 7400 along the longitudinal axis 7425 .
  • FIG. 78 is a posterior view of an implant 7400 as described in FIGS. 77A-77C disposed between the adjacent spinous processes.
  • multiple different spacers 7320 , 7420 can be selectively associated with a single frame 7302 , 7402 so that a physician can choose an appropriately sized and shaped spacer 7320 , 7420 to accommodate a patient's anatomy.
  • the distance between the outer peripheries of the two slots 7332 , 7334 can correspond to a maximum spacer size (e.g., 14 mm).
  • a series of spacer 7420 can have varying dimensions and/or shapes, and can have similarly sized cavities 7428 to receive the central body 7404 .
  • a system in accordance with embodiments of the present invention can include a frame 7302 , 7402 and a plurality of spacers 7320 , 7420 having varying sizes and/or shapes.
  • implants, and systems and methods for positioning such implants between spinous processes in accordance with the present invention are not meant to be limited to embodiments as described above and otherwise herein, but rather are meant to include all such implants that utilize a wing having a major dimension larger than a major dimension of a space between spinous processes, wherein the wing can be appropriately positioned by rotating the implant while urging the implant in a direction of insertion.
  • a wing having a major dimension larger than a major dimension of a space between spinous processes, wherein the wing can be appropriately positioned by rotating the implant while urging the implant in a direction of insertion.
  • Myriad different variations may be readily apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art. For example, as shown in FIGS.
  • the frame 7502 can include an inner central body 7504 disposed within an outer central body 7505 , with a proximal portion of a second wing 7560 being connected with, or extending from the inner central body 7504 , and the distal portion of the second wing 7560 being connected with, or extending from the outer central body 7505 .
  • the inner central body 7504 can be shifted to a position more fully received in the outer central body 7505 so that the second wing 7560 collapses, reducing the space occupied by the second wing 7560 .
  • the second wing 7560 can be made from a more ductile material so that the second wing 7560 can be readily collapsed.
  • the second wing 7560 can be made from a shape memory material, for example such as Nitinol, so that once the frame is positioned the second wing 7560 collapses, urging the inner central body 7504 to shift within the outer central body 7505 .
  • the second wing 7560 can be made in two parts, one part fastened to the inner central body 7504 , and one part fastened to the outer central body 7505 . When the inner central body 7504 is more fully received into the outer central body 7505 , the portion of the second wing 7560 secure to the inner central body 7504 becomes nested in the portion of the second wing 7560 connected to the outer central body 7505 .
  • an implant 7600 in accordance with the present invention can include a distraction guide 7606 that tapers more gradually, so that the adjacent spinous processes and/or related tissues are distracted as the lead-in screw 7660 is rotated and urged toward a direction of insertion, as described above.
  • the spacer need not be fixed, but rather can be rotatably disposed over the central body.
  • the spacer can include an alignment notch, as described above with reference to FIG. 73B , so that when the central body is rotated, thereby threading the adjacent spinous processes and related structures within the groove of the thread-shaped wing and positioning the thread-shaped wing on an opposite side of the adjacent spinous processes, the spacer can be held in a fixed positioned.
  • the spacer can be arranged as desired between the adjacent spinous processes. Once the implant is positioned between adjacent spinous processes, the rotatable spacer can be released to conform within the space between spinous processes.
  • the implant, and components of the implant can be fabricated from medical grade metals such as titanium, stainless steel, cobalt chrome, and alloys thereof, or other suitable implant material having similar high strength and biocompatible properties.
  • the implant can be at least partially fabricated from a shape memory metal, for example Nitinol, which is a combination of titanium and nickel. Such materials are typically radiopaque, and appear during x-ray imaging, and other types of imaging. Implants in accordance with the present invention, and/or portions thereof can also be fabricated from somewhat flexible and/or deflectable material.
  • the implant and/or portions thereof can be fabricated in whole or in part from medical grade biocompatible polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers.
  • a copolymer is a polymer derived from more than one species of monomer.
  • a polymer composite is a heterogeneous combination of two or more materials, wherein the constituents are not miscible, and therefore exhibit an interface between one another.
  • a polymer blend is a macroscopically homogeneous mixture of two or more different species of polymer.
  • Many polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers are radiolucent and do not appear during x-ray or other types of imaging. Implants comprising such materials can provide a physician with a less obstructed view of the spine under imaging, than with an implant comprising radiopaque materials entirely. However, the implant need not comprise any radiolucent materials.
  • PEEK polyetheretherketone
  • PEKK polyetherketoneketone
  • the implant can be fabricated from PEEK 450G, which is an unfilled PEEK approved for medical implantation available from Victrex. Other sources of this material include Gharda located in Panoli, India.
  • PEEK 450G has the following approximate properties: Property Value Density 1.3 g/cc Rockwell M 99 Rockwell R 126 Tensile Strength 97 MPa Modulus of Elasticity 3.5 GPa Flexural Modulus 4.1 GPa
  • PEEK 450G has appropriate physical and mechanical properties and is suitable for carrying and spreading a physical load between the adjacent spinous processes.
  • the implant and/or portions thereof can be formed by extrusion, injection, compression molding and/or machining techniques.
  • Fillers can be added to a polymer, copolymer, polymer blend, or polymer composite to reinforce a polymeric material. Fillers are added to modify properties such as mechanical, optical, and thermal properties. For example, carbon fibers can be added to reinforce polymers mechanically to enhance strength for certain uses, such as for load bearing devices.
  • other grades of PEEK are available and contemplated for use in implants in accordance with the present invention, such as 30% glass-filled or 30% carbon-filled grades, provided such materials are cleared for use in implantable devices by the FDA, or other regulatory body. Glass-filled PEEK reduces the expansion rate and increases the flexural modulus of PEEK relative to unfilled PEEK.
  • Carbon-filled PEEK is known to have enhanced compressive strength and stiffness, and a lower expansion rate relative to unfilled PEEK. Carbon-filled PEEK also offers wear resistance and load carrying capability.
  • the implant can be comprised of polyetherketoneketone (PEKK).
  • PEKK polyetherketoneketone
  • Other material that can be used include polyetherketone (PEK), polyetherketoneetherketoneketone (PEKEKK), polyetheretherketoneketone (PEEKK), and generally a polyaryletheretherketone.
  • PEK polyetherketone
  • PEKEKK polyetherketoneetherketoneketone
  • PEEKK polyetheretherketoneketone
  • other polyketones can be used as well as other thermoplastics.
  • a minimally invasive surgical method for implanting an implant 7300 in the cervical spine is disclosed and taught herein.
  • a guide wire 7680 is inserted through a placement network 7690 into the neck of the implant recipient.
  • the guide wire 7680 is used to locate where the implant 7300 is to be placed relative to the cervical spine, including the spinous processes.
  • an incision is made on the side of the neck so that an implant 7300 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, can be positioned in the neck thorough an incision and along a line that is about perpendicular to the guide wire 7680 and directed at the end of the guide wire 7680 .
  • a frame 7302 of the implant 7300 is inserted into the neck of the patient.
  • the frame 7302 includes a distraction guide 7306 extending from the proximal end of a central body 7304 and a first wing 7330 extending from the distal end of the central body 7304 .
  • the frame 7302 further includes a helical-shaped second wing 7360 extending distally from the distraction guide 7306 some distance along the central body 7304 .
  • the distraction guide 7306 pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue.
  • the frame 7302 can be arranged so that the second wing 7360 extending from the central body 7304 is in contact or near contact with the interspinous ligament.
  • the frame 7302 is then rotated in a direction so that the spiraling extension of the second wing 7360 “grows” and the frame 7302 is urged forward such that the adjacent spinous processes fit within a groove between spiraled surfaces of the second wing 7360 .
  • the frame 7302 is continuously rotated until the second wing 7360 has passed the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the frame 7302 can be further rotated until slots 7332 , 7334 of the first wing 7330 are arranged as desired between the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 of the targeted motion segment.
  • a spacer 7320 can be mated with the frame 7302 so that an upper portion 7322 and a lower portion 7324 of the spacer 7320 is received through the respective slot 7332 , 7334 of the first wing 7330 (or simply received over the central body 7304 for example where the first wing 7330 extends from the spacer 7320 rather than extending form the central body 7304 ).
  • the spacer 7320 can be inserted along a line that is generally collinear with the line over which the frame 7302 is inserted.
  • the anatomy of the neck is such that it is most convenient and minimally invasive to enter the neck from the side with respect to the frame 7302 and the spacer 7320 .
  • a minimally invasive surgical method for implanting an implant 7300 in the lumbar spine is disclosed and taught herein.
  • a unilateral incision can be made using a posterior-anterior approach.
  • the unilateral incision can be made, for example, at a location some distance to the right of an axis along the spinous process 2 , 4 (Step 7702 ).
  • the incision can be enlarged, and a distraction tool can be positioned within the incision so that the proximal end of the distraction tool can access an exposed side of the interspinous ligament 6 .
  • the distraction tool can be urged through the interspinous ligament 6 and distracted, thereby distracting the interspinous ligament 6 so as to receive the implant 7300 (Step 7704 ). Once the interspinous ligament 6 is sufficiently distracted, the distraction tool can be disengaged and removed from the incision.
  • the frame 7302 can be positioned at the dilated opening, and the distraction guide 7306 of the frame 7302 can be urged through the dilated opening (Step 7706 ).
  • the frame 7302 can be arranged so that the second wing 7360 extending from the central body 7304 is in near contact with the interspinous ligament 6 .
  • the frame 7302 is then rotated in direction so that the spiraling extension of the second wing 7360 “grows”, and the frame 7302 urged forward such that the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 fit within a groove between surface of the second wing 7360 (Step 7708 ).
  • the frame 7302 is continuously rotated until the second wing 7360 has passed the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the frame 7300 can be further rotated until the slots 7332 , 7334 are arranged as desired between the adjacent spinous processes of the targeted motion segment.
  • the frame 7302 is free to rotate so that the load can be distributed more evenly over the surface of the spinous processes.
  • a spacer 7320 can be inserted with slots 7322 , 7324 of a first wing 7330 extending from the distal end of the central body 7304 (or simply received over the central body for example where the first wing extends from the spacer).
  • the spacer 7320 can be inserted along a line that is generally collinear with the line over which the frame 7302 is inserted (Step 7710 ).
  • the remaining tools can be removed from the incision, and the incision can be closed.
  • the distraction end pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue (Step 7712 ).
  • FIG. 83 is a perspective end view of an alternative embodiment of an implant 8700 in accordance with the present invention.
  • the implant 8700 can include an initiating piece 8704 and a slide-in distraction piece 8702 adapted to be slidably coupled with the initiating piece 8704 .
  • the initiating piece 8704 and the slide-in distraction piece 8702 when positioned between adjacent spinous processes and coupled together, can resemble implants 7100 as described above with reference to FIGS. 7-23 .
  • the implant 8700 of FIG. 83 includes a first wing 8730 at a distal end of the implant 8700 , a fixed spacer 8720 extending from the first wing 8730 , a second wing 8760 extending from the spacer 8720 so that the spacer 8720 is disposed between the first wing 8730 and the second wing 8760 , and a distraction guide 8710 at a proximal end 8716 of the implant 8700 .
  • FIG. 84A is a perspective view of the initiating piece 8704 .
  • the initiating piece 8704 includes a slot 8784 within a lower sliding surface 8794 that extends through a substantial portion of the length of the initiating piece 8704 , the slot 8784 being adapted to receive a rail 8782 of the slide-in distraction piece 8702 .
  • the slot 8784 extends a length at least as long as the rail 8782 and preferably does not extend through the entire initiating piece 8704 so that the distraction piece 8702 is prevented from sliding out of position in the direction of insertion.
  • the slot 8784 includes a flange 8785 along the periphery of the slot 8784 to retain the rail 8782 within the slot 8784 .
  • the slot 8784 is thus shaped to substantially conform with a “T” shaped cross-section of the rail 8782 so that when the slide-in distraction piece 8702 is mated with the initiating piece 8704 and the rail 8782 is seated within the slot 8784 , relative movement between the distraction piece 8702 and the initiating piece 8704 is limited or substantially blocked, except along the longitudinal axis 8725 in a direction opposite the direction of insertion.
  • the slot 8784 can include a recess 8787 adapted to receive a catch 8781 of the rail 8782 so that when the catch 8781 passes over the recess 8787 , the catch 8781 is extended, locking the distraction piece 8702 in place, and limiting or blocking movement in a direction opposite insertion.
  • the catch 8781 can be extendably associated with the slot 8784 , while the recess 8787 is formed within the rail 8782 for receiving the catch 8781 .
  • the initiating piece 8704 includes a lower distraction element 8714 having a contact surface that tapers to the proximal end 8716 from above as well as below the proximal end 8716 so that the lower distraction element 8714 has a “V” shape in cross-section along an axis of the spine.
  • a geometry can ease implantation when compared with a distraction element 8714 that tapers to the proximal end only from below (or above) the proximal end 8716 by more evenly distributing a load force applied to the lower distraction element 8714 by the interspinous ligament 6 during initial piercing and/or distraction of the interspinous ligament 6 .
  • the initiating piece 8704 further includes a lower portion 8734 of the first wing, a lower portion 8764 of the second wing, and a lower portion 8724 of the spacer.
  • the lower portions 8734 , 8764 , 8724 can be integrally formed as the lower distraction element 8714 , thereby avoiding discontinuities in a lower sliding surface 8794 of the initiation piece 8704 .
  • the lower sliding surface 8794 of the initiating piece 8704 is substantially flat and preferably smooth to ease receipt of the rail 8782 within the slot 8784 .
  • the lower sliding surface 8794 slopes upward relative to the longitudinal axis 8725 from the distal end of the initiating piece 8704 to the proximal end of the initiating piece 8704 .
  • the slope of the lower sliding surface 8794 causes variation in thickness of the lower portion 8724 of the spacer from the distal end of the spacer to the proximal end of the spacer. This slope aids in the distraction of the spinous processes upon insertion of the distraction piece 8702 .
  • the contact surfaces of the implant 8700 include relatively smooth transitions from the distraction guide 8710 to the second wing 8760 , and from the second wing 8760 to the spacer 8720 .
  • the initiating piece 8704 and the distraction piece 8702 are positioned as separate, single pieces.
  • a relatively continuous surface with smooth transitions improves ease of implantation and minifies obstruction of the initiating piece 8704 and the distraction piece 8702 by the adjacent spinous processes and/or related tissues.
  • the lower portion 8734 of the first wing can further optionally include one or more cavities 8770 for receiving prongs of an insertion tool.
  • the initiating piece 8704 includes two cavities 8770 extending from the distal end of the initiating piece 8704 toward the proximal end 8716 , with one cavity 8770 being arranged on each side of the lower portion 8734 of the first wing.
  • Each cavity 8770 can be sized to receive a prong of the insertion tool.
  • the cavity 8770 can further include a groove 8772 extending perpendicular to the cavity 8770 . Referring to FIGS.
  • a prong 8795 of an insertion tool 8794 can include, in an embodiment, a protrusion 8796 that fits within the groove 8772 .
  • the prong is “locked” within the cavity 8770 .
  • the implant 8700 can be releasably guided into position between the adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 85A is a posterior view of the initiating piece 8704 positioned adjacent to the interspinous ligament 6 .
  • the initiating piece 8704 has a maximum thickness T from the lower sliding surface 8794 to the lower portion 8764 of the second wing.
  • the maximum thickness T of the initiating piece 8704 is approximately the same as, or less than the thickness of the spacer 8720 when the initiating piece 8704 and the distraction piece 8702 are mated and the implant 8700 is positioned between the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the lower distraction element 8714 pierces and/or distracts the fibers of the interspinous ligament 6 .
  • the initiating piece 8704 is further urged through the interspinous ligament 6 so that the lower portion 8764 of the second wing passes between the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 but preferably does not distract the space between the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 beyond the maximum distraction height of the spacer 8720 .
  • the initiating piece 8704 is further urged through the interspinous ligament 6 so that the lower portion 8724 of the spacer is approximately positioned between the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the maximum thickness T from the lower sliding surface 8794 to the lower portion 8764 of the second wing can be greater than the ultimate thickness of the spacer 8720 so that when the initiating piece 8704 is positioned between adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 , the space between the spinous processes 2 , 4 is distracted to a height greater than the distraction height of the spacer 8720 .
  • the second wing 8760 can potentially provide greater range of flexion motion (wherein the space between adjacent spinous processes increases) while assuring that the movement of the implant 8700 will be limited or blocked in a direction opposite insertion by the second wing 8760 .
  • FIG. 86 is a flipped perspective end view of the slide-in distraction piece 8702 .
  • the distraction piece 8702 includes a rail 8782 extending over a substantial portion of the length of the distraction piece 8702 , roughly corresponding to a length of the slot 8784 of the initiating piece 8704 , within which the rail 8782 is adapted to be received.
  • the height of the rail 8782 from the upper sliding surface 8792 to the flange 8783 of the rail 8782 approximately corresponds to the depth of the slot 8784 from the lower sliding surface 8794 to the bottom of the flange 8785 of the slot, so that when the rail 8782 is received within the slot 8784 , the upper sliding surface 8792 of the distraction piece 8702 is substantially flush with the lower sliding surface 8794 .
  • a gap can exist between the upper sliding surface 8792 and the lower sliding surface 8794 .
  • the surface of the rail 8782 includes a catch 8781 arranged along the length of the rail 8782 so that the catch 8781 roughly corresponds to the recess 8787 disposed within the slot 8784 .
  • the catch 8781 can have a sloped leading edge (from the proximal end to a distal end of the catch 8781 ) and can be spring loaded, or otherwise biased so that the catch 8781 collapses when the distraction piece 8702 slides along the lower sliding surface 8794 of the initiating piece 8704 and extends when passing over the recess 8787 .
  • the catch 8781 can have a trailing edge substantially perpendicular to the slot 8784 so that the catch 8781 resists movement of the distraction piece 8702 in a direction opposite insertion.
  • the catch 8781 can be some other mechanism.
  • the catch 8781 can be a flexible hinge and protrusion similar in operation to that described in FIGS. 19A-20B .
  • the pieces 8702 , 8704 can be flexible enough that the catch 8781 is molded into the piece 8702 , 8704 and can snap into the recess 8787 in the other piece 8702 , 8704 .
  • the upper sliding surface 8792 slopes upward relative to the longitudinal axis 8725 from the distal end of the distracting piece 8702 to the proximal end of the distraction piece 8702 , the slope of the upper sliding surface 8792 being substantially similar to the slope of the lower sliding surface 8794 so that the two surfaces 8792 , 8794 are substantially parallel, and mate when the rail 8782 is positioned within the slot 8784 .
  • the slope of the upper sliding surface 8792 causes variation in thickness of the upper portion 8722 of the spacer from the distal end of the spacer to the proximal end of the spacer so that the upper portion 8722 of the spacer is thicker at the distal end.
  • FIGS. 87A through 87D are a series of posterior views of the distraction piece 8702 mating with the initiating piece 8704 so that the implant 8700 is positioned between adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 to support a load applied by the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 during an extension motion.
  • the distraction piece 8702 is positioned so that the proximal end of the rail flange 8783 fits within the slot 8784 .
  • the distraction piece 8702 can then be urged toward the interspinous ligament 6 so that the rail 8782 is further received within the slot 8784 .
  • the thickness of the implant 8700 increases as the initiating piece 8704 is mated with the distraction piece 8702 .
  • FIG. 87B illustrates the distraction piece 8702 arranged so that the upper distraction element 8782 is adjacent to the interspinous ligament 6 .
  • the upper distraction element 8782 wedges between the lower sliding surface 8794 and the interspinous ligament 6 and/or the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 , gradually distracting the interspinous ligament 6 and the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 as the distraction piece 8702 is further urged in the direction of insertion.
  • FIG. 87C as the upper portion 8762 of the second wing passes between the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 , the space between the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 is distracted beyond the maximum distraction height of the spacer 8720 .
  • the distraction piece 8702 is further urged in the direction of insertion until the rail 8782 is seated within the slot 8784 and the upper portion 8762 of the second wing is arranged so that the interspinous ligament 6 and/or adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 are disposed between the upper portion 8762 of the second wing and the upper portion 8732 of the first wing (see FIG. 87D ).
  • the catch 8781 passes over the recess 8787 , the catch 8781 extends into the recess 8787 , locking the distraction piece 8702 in position, mated with the initiation piece 8704 .
  • FIGS. 88A and 88B are perspective end views of an alternative embodiment of an implant 8800 in accordance with the present invention.
  • the implant 8800 can include an initiating piece 8804 and a slide-in distraction piece 8802 that can be slidably coupled with the initiating piece 8804 .
  • the initiating piece 8804 and the slide-in distraction piece 8802 when positioned between adjacent spinous processes and coupled together as shown in FIG. 88B , has a saddle shape including a first wing 8830 and a second wing 8860 that straddle one of the adjacent spinous processes.
  • the implant 8800 approximates implants as shown above in FIGS. 7-23 .
  • the implant 8800 includes the first wing 8830 at a distal end of the implant 8800 , a fixed spacer 8820 extending from the first wing 8830 , the second wing 8860 extending from the spacer 8820 so that the spacer 8820 is disposed between the first wing 8830 and the second wing 8860 , and a distraction guide 8810 at a proximal end 8816 of the implant 8800 .
  • the initiating piece 8804 includes a slot 8884 within a lower sliding surface 8886 that extends through a substantial portion of the length of the initiating piece 8804 , the slot 8884 being adapted to receive a rail 8882 of the slide-in distraction piece 8802 .
  • the slot 8884 can optionally include a flange or some other structure to retain the rail 8882 within the slot 8884 .
  • One of the slot 8884 and the rail 8882 can further optionally include a recess (not shown) adapted to receive a catch (not shown) of the other of the slot 8884 and the rail 8882 so that when the catch passes over the recess, the catch is extended, locking the distraction piece 8802 in place, and limiting or blocking movement along the longitudinal axis 8825 .
  • the initiating piece 8804 includes a first tab 8894 extending from the first wing 8834 , the first tab 8894 including a first perforation 8893 .
  • the distraction piece 8802 likewise includes a second tab 8892 including a second perforation 8891 adapted to be aligned with the first perforation 8893 so that when the slide-in distraction piece 8802 is mated with the initiating piece 8804 and the rail 8882 is seated within the slot 8884 , the first perforation 8893 and the second perforation 8891 are aligned and can be pegged together so that relative movement between the distraction piece 8802 and the initiating piece 8804 is limited or substantially blocked, hi other embodiments, the initiating piece 8804 and distraction piece 8802 need not include tabs 8892 , 8894 , for example where a catch and recess of the slot and rail is employed.
  • the distraction piece 8802 can include a slot for receiving the tab 8894 , rather than a second tab 8892 abutting the first tab 8894 .
  • tabs having myriad different shapes and sizes can extend from one or both of the initiating piece 8804 and the distraction piece 8802 , and perforations having myriad different shapes and sizes can be formed within such tabs to limit relative movement between the initiating piece 8804 and the distraction piece 8802 .
  • implants 8800 in accordance with the present invention are not intended to be limited to those arrangements shown in FIGS. 88A-89E .
  • the initiating piece 8804 includes a lower distraction element 8814 having a contact surface that tapers to the proximal end 8816 from above as well as below the proximal end 8816 so that the lower distraction element 8814 has a “V” shape in cross-section along an axis of the spine.
  • the initiating piece 8804 further includes a first portion 8834 of the first wing, the second wing 8860 , and a lower portion 8824 of the spacer.
  • the lower portions 8824 , 8834 and the second wing 8860 can be integrally formed with the lower distraction element 8814 , thereby avoiding discontinuities in a lower sliding surface 8888 of the initiating piece 8804 .
  • a relatively continuous sliding surface 8888 with smooth transitions improves ease of implantation and minifies obstruction of the initiating piece 8804 by the adjacent spinous processes and/or related tissues. It is preferable that the initiating piece 8804 include smooth transitions between the lower distraction element 8814 , the second wing 8860 , and the lower portion 8824 of the spacer, as such transitions can increase obstruction of implant movement during implantation.
  • the lower sliding surface 8888 of the initiating piece 8804 is substantially flat and preferably smooth to ease receipt of the rail 8882 within the slot 8884 .
  • the slide-in distraction piece 8802 includes the rail 8882 extending over a substantial portion of the length of the distraction piece 8802 , roughly corresponding to a length of the slot 8884 of the initiating piece 8804 within which the rail 8882 is adapted to be received.
  • the height of the rail 8882 from the upper sliding surface 8886 approximately corresponds to the depth of the slot 8884 so that when the rail 8882 is received within the slot 8884 , the upper sliding surface 8886 of the distraction piece 8802 is substantially flush with the lower sliding surface 8888 .
  • a gap can exist between the upper sliding surface 8886 and the lower sliding surface 8888 .
  • the surface of the rail 8882 can include a catch (or a recess) arranged along the length of the rail 8882 so that the catch (or recess) roughly corresponds to the recess (or catch) disposed within the slot 8884 .
  • the rail 8882 and slot 8884 need not include a catch and recess arrangement, but rather the initiating piece 8804 and the distraction piece 8802 can be held in relative position along the longitudinal axis 8825 when the first and second holes 8891 , 8893 are pegged together.
  • some other mechanism can be used to limit or block relative movement of the initiating piece 8804 and the distraction piece 8802 .
  • the distraction piece 8802 further includes an upper distraction element 8812 , a second portion 8832 of the first wing and an upper portion 8822 of the spacer.
  • the upper distraction element 8812 has a contact surface that tapers at a proximal end of the distraction piece 8802 so that the upper distraction element 8812 has a ramp shape.
  • the second portion 8832 of the first wing can have a shape that roughly conforms to the shape of the first portion 8834 of the first wing so that when the distraction piece 8802 is coupled to the initiating piece 8804 , the first and second portions 8832 , 8834 form a first wing 8830 , as shown in FIG. 88B .
  • the upper portion 8822 of the spacer can have a thickness greater or less than that of the lower portion 8824 of the spacer. As shown, the upper portion 8822 is thicker than the lower portion 8824 .
  • distraction of the adjacent spinous processes during implantation of the initiation piece 8804 can be minified to cause less distraction at the surgical site by the second wing 8860 as the second wing 8860 is urged between the adjacent spinous processes.
  • a plurality of distraction pieces 8802 can be provided each having an upper portion 8822 of the spacer having a different thickness. Thus the doctor can select the appropriate distraction piece 8802 for the amount of distraction desired.
  • the upper sliding surface 8886 of the distraction piece 8802 is substantially flat and preferably smooth to ease positioning of the rail 8882 within the slot 8884 .
  • Embodiments of systems in accordance with the present invention can include a initiating piece 8804 and a plurality of distraction pieces 8802 , the distraction pieces 8802 having a variety of thicknesses.
  • a distraction piece 8802 can be chosen so that the overall spacer 8820 thickness is suitable for the patient and the motion segment targeted.
  • FIG. 89A is a posterior view of the initiating piece 8804 positioned adjacent to the interspinous ligament 6 .
  • the initiating piece 8804 has a maximum thickness from the lower sliding surface 8888 to the second wing 8860 .
  • the lower distraction element 8814 pierces and/or distracts the fibers of the interspinous ligament 6 .
  • the initiating piece 8804 is further urged through the interspinous ligament 6 so that the second wing 8860 passes between the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 and can distract the space between the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 to accommodate the second wing 8860 .
  • the distraction of the space between the adjacent spinous processes is reduced by positioning the initiating piece 8804 prior to coupling the distraction piece 8802 to the initiating piece 8804 .
  • the initiating piece 8804 is further urged through the interspinous ligament 6 so that the lower portion 8824 of the spacer is positioned between the adjacent spinous processes 2 , 4 .
  • the second wing 8860 and the first portion 8834 of the first wing straddle the lower spinous process 4 .
  • the rail 8882 of the distracting piece 8802 can be positioned within the distal end of the slot 8884 , as shown in FIG. 89D .
  • the distraction piece 8804 can then be urged along the lower sliding surface 8888 so that the upper distraction element 8812 distracts the space between the adjacent spinous processes. As shown in FIG. 89E , the initiating piece 8804 is further urged along the lower sliding surface 8888 until the distraction piece 8802 is mated with the initiating piece 8804 .
  • the implant can be fabricated from medical grade metals such as titanium, stainless steel, cobalt chrome, and alloys thereof, or other suitable implant material having similar high strength and biocompatible properties. Additionally, the implant can be at least partially fabricated from a shape memory metal, for example Nitinol, which is a combination of titanium and nickel. Such materials are typically radiopaque, and appear during x-ray imaging, and other types of imaging. Implants in accordance with the present invention, and/or portions thereof can also be fabricated from somewhat flexible and/or deflectable material. In these embodiments, the implant and/or portions thereof can be fabricated in whole or in part from medical grade biocompatible polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers.
  • a copolymer is a polymer derived from more than one species of monomer.
  • a polymer composite is a heterogeneous combination of two or more materials, wherein the constituents are not miscible, and therefore exhibit an interface between one another.
  • a polymer blend is a macroscopically homogeneous mixture of two or more different species of polymer.
  • Many polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers are radiolucent and do not appear during x-ray or other types of imaging. Implants comprising such materials can provide a physician with a less obstructed view of the spine under imaging, than with an implant comprising radiopaque materials entirely. However, the implant need not comprise any radiolucent materials.
  • PEEK polyetheretherketone
  • PEKK polyetherketoneketone
  • PEEK is proven as a durable material for implants, and meets the criterion of biocompatibility.
  • Medical grade PEEK is available from Victrex Corporation of Lancashire, Great Britain under the product name PEEK-OPTIMA.
  • Medical grade PEKK is available from Oxford Performance Materials under the name OXPEKK, and also from CoorsTek under the name BioPEKK. These medical grade materials are also available as reinforced polymer resins, such reinforced resins displaying even greater material strength.
  • the implant can be fabricated from PEEK 450G, which is an unfilled PEEK approved for medical implantation available from Victrex. Other sources of this material include Gharda located in Panoli, India.
  • PEEK 450G has the following approximate properties: Property Value Density 1.3 g/cc Rockwell M 99 Rockwell R 126 Tensile Strength 97 MPa Modulus of Elasticity 3.5 GPa Flexural Modulus 4.1 GPa
  • PEEK 450G has appropriate physical and mechanical properties and is suitable for carrying and spreading a physical load between the adjacent spinous processes.
  • the implant and/or portions thereof can be formed by extrusion, injection, compression molding and/or machining techniques. It should be noted that the material selected can also be filled. Fillers can be added to a polymer, copolymer, polymer blend, or polymer composite to reinforce a polymeric material. Fillers are added to modify properties such as mechanical, optical, and thermal properties.
  • carbon fibers can be added to reinforce polymers mechanically to enhance strength for certain uses, such as for load bearing devices, hi some embodiments, other grades of PEEK are available and contemplated for use in implants in accordance with the present invention, such as 30% glass-filled or 30% carbon-filled grades, provided such materials are cleared for use in implantable devices by the FDA, or other regulatory body.
  • Glass-filled PEEK reduces the expansion rate and increases the flexural modulus of PEEK relative to unfilled PEEK.
  • the resulting product is known to be ideal for improved strength, stiffness, or stability.
  • Carbon-filled PEEK is known to have enhanced compressive strength and stiffness, and a lower expansion rate relative to unfilled PEEK. Carbon-filled PEEK also offers wear resistance and load carrying capability.
  • the implant can be comprised of polyetherketoneketone (PEKK).
  • PEKK polyetherketoneketone
  • Other material that can be used include polyetherketone (PEK), polyetherketoneetherketoneketone (PEKEKK), polyetheretherketoneketone (PEEKK), and generally a polyaryletheretherketone.
  • PEK polyetherketone
  • PEKEKK polyetherketoneetherketoneketone
  • PEEKK polyetheretherketoneketone
  • other polyketones can be used as well as other thermoplastics.
  • embodiments in accordance with the present invention can be constructed without a pliant material. It is also to be understood that the embodiments in accordance with the present invention can have other dimensions
  • the implant can include an initiating piece 8704 and a distraction piece 8702 , such as described above in FIGS. 83-87D .
  • a guide wire 80 is inserted through a placement network or guide 90 into the neck of the implant recipient (as shown and described above). Once the guide wire 80 is positioned with the aid of imaging techniques, an incision is made on the side of the neck so that an initiating piece 8704 of the implant 8700 can be positioned in the neck thorough an incision and along a line that is about perpendicular to the guide wire 80 and directed at the end of the guide wire.
  • the initiating piece 8704 can include a lower distraction element 8714 , a lower portion 8764 of the second wing, a lower portion 8724 of the spacer, and a lower portion 8734 of the first wing.
  • the implant 8700 is inserted into the neck of the patient, between adjacent spinous processes.
  • the lower distraction element 8714 pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue, and the implant 8700 is positioned so that the upper portion 8724 of the spacer is disposed between the adjacent spinous processes.
  • a distracting piece 8702 can be inserted along a line that is approximately collinear with the line over which the initiating piece 8704 is inserted, but positioned so that a rail 8782 of the distracting piece 8702 mates with a slot 8784 of the initiating piece 8704 .
  • the anatomy of the neck is such that it is most convenient and minimally invasive to enter the neck from the side with respect to the implant 8700 .
  • the distracting piece 8702 can be mated to the initiating piece 8704 through an interference fit, or using a catch 8781 and recess 8787 as described above, alternatively by connecting the distracting piece 8704 with the initiating piece 8702 using a fastener, or by some other device, as described above. It is to be understood that the embodiment described herein can be used between any of the spinous processes of the spine.
  • the implant can include an initiating piece 8804 and a distraction piece 8802 , such as described above in FIGS. 88A-89E .
  • a guide wire 80 is inserted through a placement network or guide 90 into the neck of the implant recipient (as shown and described above). Once the guide wire 80 is positioned with the aid of imaging techniques, an incision is made on the side of the neck so that an initiating piece 8804 of the implant 8800 can be positioned in the neck thorough an incision and along a line that is about perpendicular to the guide wire 80 and directed at the end of the guide wire.
  • the initiating piece 8804 can include a lower distraction element 8814 , the second wing 8860 , a lower portion 8824 of the spacer, and a lower portion 8834 of the first wing.
  • the implant 8800 is inserted into the neck of the patient, between adjacent spinous processes.
  • the lower distraction element 8814 pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue, and the implant 8800 is positioned so that the upper portion 8824 of the spacer is disposed between the adjacent spinous processes.
  • a distracting piece 8802 can be inserted along a line that is approximately collinear with the line over which the initiating piece 8804 is inserted, but positioned so that a rail 8882 of the distracting piece 8802 mates with a slot 8884 of the initiating piece 8804 .
  • the anatomy of the neck is such that it is most convenient and minimally invasive to enter the neck from the side with respect to the implant 8800 .
  • the distracting piece 8802 can be mated to the initiating piece 8804 , by pegging the first and second perforations 8891 , 8893 , through an interference fit, or using a catch 8881 and recess 8887 as described above, or, alternatively by connecting the distracting piece 8804 with the initiating piece 8802 using a fastener, or by some other device, as described above.

Abstract

Systems and method in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention can includes an implant comprising a first wing, a spacer extending from the first wing, and a distraction guide. The distraction guide is arranged in a first configuration to pierce and/or distract tissue associated with adjacent spinous processes extending from vertebrae of a targeted motion segment. The implant can be positioned between the adjacent spinous processes and once positioned, the implant can be arranged in a second configuration. When arranged in a second configuration, the distraction guide can act as a second wing. The first wing and the second wing can limit or block movement of the implant along a longitudinal axis of the implant.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/694,103, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant with Radiolucent Spacer and Lead-in Tissue Expander,” filed Oct. 27, 2003, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/421,915, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant with Radiolucent Spacer and Lead-in Tissue Expander,” filed Oct. 29, 2002; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/234,555, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant and Method of Implantation,” filed Sep. 23, 2005, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/612,582, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant and Method of Implantation,” filed Sep. 23, 2004 and which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/850,267, entitled “Distractible Interspinous Process Implant and Method of Implantation,” filed May 20, 2004, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/472,817, entitled “Cervical Interspinous Process Implant and Method of Implantation,” filed May 22, 2003; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/378,893, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant with Slide-in Distraction Piece and Method of Implantation,” filed Mar. 17, 2006, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/664,311, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant with Slide-in Distraction Piece and Method of Implantation,” filed Mar. 22, 2005 and which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/850,267, entitled “Distractible Interspinous Process Implant and Method of Implantation,” filed May 20, 2004, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/472,817, entitled “Cervical Interspinous Process Implant and Method of Implantation,” filed May 22, 2003; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/384,055, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant with Slide-in Distraction Piece and Method of Implantation,” filed Mar. 17, 2006, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/664,049, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant with Slide-in Distraction Piece and Method of Implantation,” filed Mar. 22, 2005 and which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/850,267, entitled “Distractible Interspinous Process Implant and Method of Implantation,” filed May 20, 2004, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/472,817, entitled “Cervical Interspinous Process Implant and Method of Implantation,” filed May 22, 2003; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/816,173, entitled “Cervical Interspinous Process Implant and Method of Implantation,” filed Apr. 1, 2004, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/472,817, entitled “Cervical Interspinous Process Implant and Method of Implantation,” filed May 22, 2003; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/095,440, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant Including a Binder and Method of Implantation,” filed Mar. 31, 2005, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/612,465, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant Including a Binder and Method of Implantation,” filed Sep. 23, 2004; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/095,680, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant Including a Binder and Method of Implantation,” filed Mar. 31, 2005, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/612,465, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant Including a Binder and Method of Implantation,” filed Sep. 23, 2004; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/378,108, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant Having Deployable Wing and Method of Implantation,” filed Mar. 17, 2006, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/663,918, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant Having Deployable Wing and Method of Implantation,” filed Mar. 21, 2005; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/377,971, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant Having Deployable Wing and Method of Implantation,” filed Mar. 17, 2006, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/663,885, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant Having Deployable Wing and Method of Implantation,” filed Mar. 21, 2005; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/378,894, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant Having Deployable Wing and Method of Implantation,” filed Mar. 17, 2006, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/664,076, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant Having Deployable Wing and Method of Implantation,” filed Mar. 22, 2005; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/389,002, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant Having Deployable Wings and Method of Implantation,” filed Mar. 24, 2006, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/672,402, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant Having Deployable Wings and Method of Implantation,” filed Apr. 18, 2005; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/378,892, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant Having A Thread-Shaped Wing and Method of Implantation,” filed Mar. 17, 2006, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/663,922, entitled “Interspinous Process Implant Having Deployable Wings and Method of Implantation,” filed Mar. 21, 2005; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • BACKGROUND
  • The spinal column is a bio-mechanical structure composed primarily of ligaments, muscles, vertebrae and intervertebral disks. The bio-mechanical functions of the spine include: (1) support of the body, which involves the transfer of the weight and the bending movements of the head, trunk and arms to the pelvis and legs, (2) complex physiological motion between these parts, and (3) protection of the spinal cord and the nerve roots.
  • As the present society ages, it is anticipated that there will be an increase in adverse spinal conditions which are characteristic of older people. By way of example only, with aging comes an increase in spinal stenosis (including, but not limited to, central canal and lateral stenosis), and facet arthropathy. Spinal stenosis results in a reduction foraminal area {i.e., the available space for the passage of nerves and blood vessels) which compresses the cervical nerve roots and causes radicular pain. Humpreys, S. C. et al, Flexion and traction effect on C5-C6 foraminal space, Arch. Phys. Med. Rehabil., vol. 79 at 1105 (September 1998). Another symptom of spinal stenosis is myelopathy, which results in neck pain and muscle weakness. Id. Extension and ipsilateral rotation of the neck further reduces the foraminal area and contributes to pain, nerve root compression and neural injury. Id.; Yoo, J. U. et al., Effect of cervical spine motion on the neuroforaminal dimensions of human cervical spine, Spine, vol. 17 at 1131 (Nov. 10, 1992). In contrast, neck flexion increases the foraminal area. Humpreys, S. C. et al, at 1105.
  • Pain associated with stenosis can be relieved by medication and/or surgery. It is desirable to eliminate the need for major surgery for all individuals, and in particular, for the elderly.
  • Accordingly, a need exists to develop spine implants that alleviate pain caused by spinal stenosis and other such conditions caused by damage to, or degeneration of, the spine. Such implants would distract, or increase the space between, the vertebrae to increase the foraminal area and reduce pressure on the nerves and blood vessels of the spine. A further need exists for development of a minimally invasive surgical implantation method for spine implants that preserves the physiology of the spine.
  • Further, a need exists for an implant that accommodates the distinct anatomical structures of the spine, minimizes further trauma to the spine, and obviates the need for invasive methods of surgical implantation. Additionally, a need exists to address adverse spinal conditions that are exacerbated by spinal extension and/or flexion.
  • SUMMARY
  • Systems and method in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention can includes an implant comprising a first wing, a spacer extending from the first wing, and a distraction guide. The distraction guide is arranged in a first configuration to pierce and/or distract tissue associated with adjacent spinous processes extending from vertebrae of a targeted motion segment. The implant can be positioned between the adjacent spinous processes and once positioned, the implant can be arranged in a second configuration. When arranged in a second configuration, the distraction guide can act as a second wing. The first wing and the second wing can limit or block movement of the implant along a longitudinal axis of the implant.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIGS. 1 a-1 f. FIG. 1 a is a front plan view of an embodiment of an assembled implant of the invention; FIG. 1 b is a left side view of the embodiment of the invention of FIG. 1 a; FIG. 1 e is a front plan view of the embodiment of the invention of FIG. 1 a including a spacer, a main body and a first wing; FIG. 1 d is a left side view of the second wing of the embodiment of the invention of FIG. 1 a; FIG. 1 e is a front plan view of the second wing of the embodiment of the invention of FIG. 1 a; FIG. 1 f is an end view of the spacer of the embodiment of the invention of FIG. 1 a.
  • FIG. 2 a is a perspective view of an embodiment of the frame of the tissue expander or distraction guide of the invention. FIG. 2 b is a perspective view of an embodiment of the lead-in tissue expander or distraction guide of the invention.
  • FIGS. 3 a and 3 b are an end and a perspective view of still another embodiment of the spacer of the invention. FIG. 3 c is a front view of the spacer of FIG. 3 a.
  • FIGS. 4 a and 4 b are an end and a perspective view of yet another embodiment of the spacer of the invention.
  • FIGS. 5 a and 5 b are an end and a perspective view of still another embodiment of the spacer of the invention.
  • FIGS. 6 a and 6 b are an end and a perspective view of a further embodiment of the spacer of the invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a perspective view of an embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a spacer, a distraction guide, and a wing with an elliptical cross-section.
  • FIG. 8 is an end view of the implant of FIG. 7.
  • FIG. 9 is a perspective view of another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a wing with a teardrop-shaped cross-section.
  • FIG. 10 is an end view of a second wing for use with the implant of FIG. 9.
  • FIG. 11 is a perspective view of an embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a rotatable spacer and a wing with an elliptical cross-section.
  • FIG. 12 is a perspective view of an embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a rotatable spacer with two wings that are teardrop-shaped in cross-section.
  • FIG. 13 depicts the axis of rotation of the implant of FIG. 6 as seen from an end view.
  • FIG. 14 is a perspective view of an embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a wing that is truncated at a posterior end.
  • FIG. 15A is an end view of an embodiment of an implant in accordance the present invention having a wing truncated at a posterior end and a rotatable spacer.
  • FIG. 15B is a truncated second wing for use with the implant of FIG. 15A.
  • FIG. 16 is a plan view of an embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention wherein a screw is used to secure a second wing to the spacer.
  • FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the second wing of FIG. 16.
  • FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 16.
  • FIG. 19A is a front view of a second wing for use with some embodiments of implants of the present invention having a flexible hinge mechanism for securing the second wing to an implant.
  • FIG. 19B is a side-sectional view of the second wing of FIG. 19A.
  • FIG. 20A is a plan view of an embodiment of an implant for use with the second wing of FIGS. 19A and 19B.
  • FIG. 20B is a front view of the second wing of FIGS. 19A and 19B.
  • FIG. 21A is a top view of an embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention positioned between the spinous processes of adjacent cervical vertebrae.
  • FIG. 21B is a top view of the implant of FIG. 21A.
  • FIG. 22 is a top view of two such implants of the invention as seen in FIG. 21, positioned in the cervical spine.
  • FIG. 23 is a side view of two implants of the invention positioned in the cervical spine, with stops or keeps at the distal ends of the spinous processes.
  • FIG. 24 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of an implant for use with systems and methods of the present invention.
  • FIG. 25A is an end view of an implant in accordance with still another embodiment of the present invention having a first part shaped to conform roughly with a contact surface of the spinous process.
  • FIG. 25B is a cross-sectional view of a spacer and a distracting insert in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 25C is a cross-sectional view of a spacer and a distracting insert in accordance with an alternative embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 25D is a cross-sectional view of a spacer and a distracting insert in accordance with still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 26A is a front view of the implant of FIG. 24 inserted between spinous processes.
  • FIG. 26B is a front view of the implant of FIG. 26A having a distracting insert positioned within cavities of the implant.
  • FIG. 27A is a cross-sectional side view of the implant of FIG. 24 showing a distracting insert partially inserted in a cavity of the implant having pins for aligning a first portion with a second portion.
  • FIG. 27B is a top view of the implant of FIG. 27A showing positioning of pins for alignment of the first part and second part.
  • FIG. 28A is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of an implant for use with systems and methods of the present invention, wherein the distracting insert includes a clip.
  • FIG. 28B is a side view of the implant of FIG. 28A showing a distracting insert mated with the implant.
  • FIG. 28C is a side view of an alternative embodiment of an implant mated with an alternative embodiment of a distracting insert.
  • FIG. 28D is a side view of still another embodiment of an implant mated with still another embodiment of a distracting insert.
  • FIG. 29 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a distractible implant in accordance with the present invention having a second wing for limiting or blocking shifting along the longitudinal axis.
  • FIG. 30 illustrates an embodiment of a method for implanting an interspinous implant in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 31 illustrates an alternative embodiment of a method for implanting an interspinous implant in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 32 is a perspective view of an interspinous implant capable of limiting or blocking relative movement of adjacent spinous processes during extension of the spine.
  • FIG. 33A is a posterior view of the implant of FIG. 32 positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional side view of a spacer of the interspinous implant of FIGS. 32 and 33A positioned between spinous processes.
  • FIG. 33C is a cross-sectional view of the spacer of FIG. 33B during flexion of the spine.
  • FIG. 34A is a side view of an embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a distraction guide, a spacer, a brace, and a binder associated with the brace and fixable in position by a capture device.
  • FIG. 34B is a side view of an alternative embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention including a brace wall having recesses for receiving lobes of a capture device.
  • FIG. 34C is a side view of still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention including a capture device having a spring-loaded cam for securing a binder against a brace wall.
  • FIG. 34D is a side view of a still further embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention including a capture device having dual spring-loaded cams for securing a binder in position.
  • FIG. 35A is an end view of the implant of FIG. 34A positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 35B is an end view of the implant of FIG. 34A positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 35C is an end view of the implant of FIG. 34A positioned between adjacent spinous processes wherein the spinous processes are surgically modified to receive a binder.
  • FIG. 36 is an end view of an alternative embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a binder that varies in shape along the binder's length.
  • FIG. 37A is an end view of the implant of FIG. 36 positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 37B is an opposite end view of the implant of FIG. 37A.
  • FIG. 37C is an end view of still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a cord for a binder.
  • FIG. 38A is a side view of an embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention including a wing associated with the distraction guide to further limit or block movement of the implant.
  • FIG. 38B is a partial cross-sectional side view of an alternative embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention include an extendable wing associated with the distraction guide, the extendable wing being in a retracted position.
  • FIG. 38C is a partial cross-sectional side view of the implant of FIG. 38B wherein the extendable wing is in an extended position.
  • FIG. 38D is a partial cross-sectional side view of still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention including a spring-loaded wing associated with the distraction guide, the wing being in an extended position.
  • FIG. 38E is a partial cross-sectional side view of the implant of FIG. 38D wherein the spring-loaded wing is in a collapsed position.
  • FIG. 39 is a top view of two implants in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention positioned between the spinous processes of adjacent vertebrae, one of the implants having a binder arranged around the adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 40A is a perspective view of a further embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a distraction guide, a spacer, a brace, and a binder associated with the brace and fixable in position by a capture device.
  • FIG. 40B is a perspective view the implant of FIG. 40A wherein the capture device is arranged to secure a binder between the capture device and the brace.
  • FIG. 40C is a side view of the implant of FIGS. 40A and 40B.
  • FIG. 41A is a cross-sectional top view of a binder loosely positioned within the capture device of the implant of FIGS. 40A and 40B.
  • FIG. 41B is a cross-sectional top view of the binder secured to the brace by the capture device of the implant of FIGS. 40A and 40B.
  • FIG. 41C is a cross-sectional top view of a binder loosely positioned within an alternative embodiment of a capture device of the implant of FIGS. 40A and 40B.
  • FIG. 41D is a cross-sectional top view of the binder and capture device of FIG. 41C wherein the binder is secured to the brace.
  • FIG. 42 is an end view of the implant of FIGS. 40A and 40B positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 43 is a block diagram illustrating a method of positioning the implant of FIG. 40A between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 44A is a perspective view of an still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a distraction guide, a spacer, a first wing, and a second wing including a capture device.
  • FIG. 44B is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 44A in accordance with the present invention having a distraction guide, a spacer, a first wing, and a second wing including a capture device.
  • FIG. 45 is a perspective view of an still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a distraction guide, a spacer, a first wing, and a second wing including a capture device.
  • FIG. 46 is a perspective view of an still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a distraction guide, a spacer, a first wing, and a second wing including a capture device.
  • FIG. 47 is a block diagram illustrating a method of positioning the implant of FIGS. 44A-46 between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 48A is a perspective view of an implant including a spacer having a tear-drop shaped cross-section, a distraction guide, a first wing, and a second wing connectable with the distraction guide.
  • FIG. 48B is a perspective view of an implant including a rotatable spacer having an elliptical cross-section, a distraction guide, a first wing, and a second wing connectable with the distraction guide.
  • FIG. 49A is a perspective view of an implant in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention including a main body and an insert, the main body having a distraction guide, a spacer, and a first wing.
  • FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 49A wherein the insert is positioned within the main body, causing the distraction guide associated with the main body to limit or block movement of the implant when positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 50A is a side view of the main body of the implant of FIGS. 49A and 49B positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 50B is a side view of the implant of FIG. 50A wherein the insert is positioned within the main body.
  • FIG. 51 is a perspective view of an implant in accordance with an alternative embodiment wherein the main body includes hooks to limit relative movement of adjacent spinous processes during flexion motion.
  • FIG. 52 is a side view of the implant of FIG. 51 positioned between adjacent spinous processes and arranged so that the hooks confine the adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 53A is a perspective view of still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention, wherein a first section and a second section of a distraction guide are deployable to form a second wing.
  • FIG. 53B is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 53A wherein the insert is positioned within the main body, causing the first section and the second section of the distraction guide to deploy.
  • FIG. 54A is a perspective view of a still further embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention including a rotatable spacer.
  • FIG. 54B is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 54A wherein the insert is positioned within a central body so that the distraction guide deploys as a second wing.
  • FIG. 54C is a cross-sectional side view of distraction guide of FIG. 54A.
  • FIG. 54D is a cross-sectional side view of distraction guide of FIG. 54B.
  • FIG. 55 is a side view of the implant of FIGS. 54A-54D positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 56A is a side view of an alternative embodiment of the implant positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 56B is a partial cross-section side view of the implant of FIG. 56A showing deployable winglets disposed within a distraction guide of the implant.
  • FIG. 56C is a partial cross-sectional side view of the implant of FIG. 56B wherein the winglets deployed.
  • FIG. 57A is a side view of an alternative embodiment of the implant positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 57B is a side view of the implant of FIG. 57A positioned between adjacent spinous processes wherein the winglets deployed.
  • FIG. 57C is a partial cross-sectional end view of the implant of FIG. 57A showing deployable winglets disposed within a distraction guide of the implant.
  • FIG. 57D is a partial cross-sectional end view of the implant of FIGS. 57A-57C showing the winglets deployed so that the winglets extend from the distraction guide of the implant.
  • FIG. 57E is an end view of the implant of FIGS. 57A-57D showing the distraction guide and the deployed winglets relative to the distraction guide.
  • FIG. 58A is a partial cross-sectional end view of an alternative embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention including an alternative actuator arrangement.
  • FIG. 58B is an partial cross-sectional end view of the implant of FIG. 58A showing the winglets deployed so that the winglets extend from the distraction guide of the implant.
  • FIG. 59A is a partial cross-sectional end view of still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having an alternative actuator arrangement wherein the winglets comprise two hinged portions.
  • FIG. 59B is a partial cross-sectional end view of the implant of FIG. 59A showing the winglets deployed so that the winglets extend from the distraction guide of the implant.
  • FIG. 60 is a partial cross-sectional end view of a still further embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention wherein implants are arranged at adjacent motion segments.
  • FIG. 61 illustrates an embodiment of a method for implanting the implant of FIGS. 49A-55 between adjacent spinous processes in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 62 illustrates an embodiment of a method for implanting the interspinous implant of FIGS. 49A-55 between adjacent spinous processes in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 63 illustrates an embodiment of a method for implanting the interspinous implant of FIGS. 56A-60 between adjacent spinous processes in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 64A is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a first wing and a second wing that can be deployed after arranging the implant between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 64B is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 64A in a deployed configuration.
  • FIG. 65A is a posterior view of the implant of FIGS. 64A and 64B positioned between adjacent spinous processes in an undeployed configuration.
  • FIG. 65B is a posterior view of the implant of FIGS. 64A and 64B positioned between adjacent spinous processes in a deployed configuration.
  • FIG. 66A is a perspective view of still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a first wing and a second wing that can be deployed after arranging the implant between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 66A in a deployed configuration.
  • FIG. 67 is a posterior view of the implant of FIGS. 66A and 66B positioned between adjacent spinous processes in a deployed configuration.
  • FIG. 68A is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention having a first wing and a second wing that can be deployed after arranging the implant between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 68B is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 68A in a partially deployed configuration.
  • FIG. 68C is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 68A in a fully deployed configuration.
  • FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 68A including a cannula within which the implant is disposed for insertion into desired location between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 69A in a partially deployed configuration.
  • FIG. 69C is a perspective close-up view of the implant of FIG. 69A showing hinged structures connected by cords.
  • FIG. 70 illustrates an embodiment of a method for implanting an interspinous implant as shown in FIGS. 7-23 in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 71 illustrates an embodiment of a method for implanting an interspinous implant as shown in FIGS. 64A-67 having deployable first and second wings in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 72 illustrates an alternative embodiment of a method for implanting an interspinous implant as shown in FIGS. 68A-69B having deployable first and second wings by way of a cannula inserted between adjacent spinous processes in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 73A is a perspective view of an implant including a spacer having a tear-drop shaped cross-section, a distraction guide, a first wing, and a second wing connectable with the distraction guide.
  • FIG. 73B is a perspective view of an implant including a rotatable spacer having an elliptical cross-section, a distraction guide, a first wing, and a second wing connectable with the distraction guide.
  • FIG. 74A is a perspective view of a frame of an implant in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 74B is a perspective view of a spacer for use with the frame of FIG. 74A.
  • FIG. 74C is a perspective view of the spacer of FIG. 74B seated within the frame of FIG. 74A.
  • FIG. 75A is a partial cross-sectional posterior view of the frame of the implant of FIGS. 74A-74C positioned adjacent to an interspinous ligament disposed between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 75B partial cross-sectional posterior view of the frame of the implant of FIGS. 74A-74C rotated so that the interspinous ligament is disposed between a portion of the helical shaped second wing and the first wing along a longitudinal axis of the implant.
  • FIG. 75C partial cross-sectional posterior view of the frame of the implant of FIGS. 74A-74C rotated so that the interspinous ligament is disposed between the entire helical shaped second wing and the first wing along the longitudinal axis.
  • FIG. 75D partial cross-sectional posterior view of the frame of the implant of FIGS. 74A-74C wherein a spacer is partially arranged over a central body of the frame so that a portion of the spacer partially distracts the interspinous ligament.
  • FIG. 75E partial cross-sectional posterior view of the frame of the implant of FIGS. 74A-74C wherein the spacer is seated over the central body of the frame so that a portion of the spacer partially distracts the interspinous ligament.
  • FIG. 76A is an end view of the implant of FIG. 75E positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 76B is an front view of the implant of FIG. 75E positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 77A is a perspective view of a frame from an alternative embodiment of an implant in accordance the present invention.
  • FIG. 77B is a perspective view of a spacer for use with the frame of FIG. 77A.
  • FIG. 77C is a perspective view of the spacer of FIG. 77B seated within the frame of FIG. 77A.
  • FIG. 78 is a side view of the implant of FIGS. 77A-77C positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 79A is a perspective view of a frame from a still further embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 79B is a side view of the frame of FIG. 79A positioned between adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 79C is a side view of the frame of FIG. 79A positioned between adjacent spinous processes and retracted to collapse the second wing.
  • FIG. 80 is a perspective view of a frame from a still further embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 81 illustrates an embodiment of a method for implanting an interspinous implant between adjacent spinous processes of the cervical region in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 82 is a flowchart of a method for implanting an interspinous implant between adjacent spinous processes of the lumbar region in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 83 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of an implant for use with systems and methods of the present invention, the implant including an distraction piece mated with a initiating piece.
  • FIG. 84A is a perspective view of the initiating piece of the implant of FIG. 83.
  • FIG. 84B is a perspective view of a proximal end of an insertion tool having prongs positioned within cavities of the initiating piece.
  • FIG. 84C is a perspective view of the prongs arranged in a locked position within the cavities of the initiating piece.
  • FIGS. 85A-85D are posterior views of the initiating piece of FIG. 84A as the initiating piece is urged into position with the interspinous ligament disposed between a lower portion of first wing and a lower portion of the second wing.
  • FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the slide-in distraction piece of the implant of FIG. 83.
  • FIGS. 87A-87D are posterior views showing the slide-in distraction piece of FIG. 86 mating with the initiating piece positioned as shown in FIG. 85D so that an implant as shown in FIG. 83 is disposed between the adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 88A is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of an implant for use with systems and methods of the present invention, the implant including an distraction piece mated with a initiating piece.
  • FIG. 88B is a perspective view of the implant of FIG. 88A, the implant including an distraction piece mated with a initiating piece.
  • FIGS. 89A-89C are posterior views of the initiating piece of FIG. 88A as the initiating piece is urged in position with the interspinous ligament disposed between the first wing and the second wing.
  • FIGS. 89D and 89E are posterior views showing the distraction piece of FIG. 88A urged so that the distraction piece is mated with the initiating piece.
  • FIG. 90 illustrates an embodiment of a method in accordance with the present invention for implanting the interspinous implant of FIG. 83.
  • FIG. 91 illustrates an embodiment of a method in accordance with the present invention for implanting the interspinous implant of FIG. 88A.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • The following description is presented to enable any person skilled in the art to make and use the invention. Various modifications to the embodiments described will be readily apparent to those skilled in the art, and the principles defined herein can be applied to other embodiments and applications without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention as defined by the appended claims. Thus, the present invention is not intended to be limited to the embodiments shown, but is to be accorded the widest scope consistent with the principles and features disclosed herein. To the extent necessary to achieve a complete understanding of the invention disclosed, the specification and drawings of all patents and patent applications cited in this application are incorporated herein by reference.
  • An embodiment of an implant 100 of the invention is depicted in FIG. 1 a.
  • This implant 100 includes a first wing 104 and a spacer 150 and a lead-in tissue expander or distraction guide 110. This embodiment further can include, as required, a second wing 132. As can be seen in FIG. 1 a, a shaft 102 extends from the first wing 104 and is the body that connects the first wing 104 to the tissue expander or distraction guide 110. Also, as can be seen in FIGS. 1 a and 1 b, the distraction guide 110 in this particular embodiment acts to distract the soft tissue and the spinous processes when the implant 100 is inserted between adjacent spinous processes. In this particular embodiment, the guide 110 has an expanding cross-section from the distal end 111 to the area where the second wing 132 is secured to the guide 110. In this embodiment the guide 110 is wedge-shaped.
  • Additionally, as can be seen in FIGS. 1 a and 1 f, the spacer 150 is elliptical-shaped in cross-section. The spacer 150 can have other shapes such as circular, oval, ovoid, football-shaped, and rectangular-shaped with rounded corners and other shapes, and be within the spirit and scope of the invention. In this preferred embodiment, the spacer 150 includes a bore 152 which extends the length of the spacer 150. The spacer 150 is received over the shaft 102 of the implant 100 and can rotate thereon about the shaft 102. In these embodiments, the spacer 150 can have minor and major dimensions as follows:
    Minor Dimension (116a) Major Dimension (116b)
     6 mm 13.7 mm
     8 mm 14.2 mm
    10 mm 15.2 mm
    12 mm 16.3 mm
    14 mm 17.8 mm
  • The advantage of the use of the spacer 150 as depicted in the embodiment of FIG. 1 a, is that the spacer 150 can be rotated and repositioned with respect to the first wing 104, in order to more optimally position the implant 100 between spinous processes. It is to be understood that the cortical bone or the outer bone of the spinous processes is stronger at an anterior position adjacent to the vertebral bodies of the vertebra than at a posterior position distally located from the vertebral bodies. Also, biomechanically for load bearing, it is advantageous for the spacer 150 to be close to the vertebral bodies. In order to facilitate this and to accommodate the anatomical form of the bone structures, as the implant is inserted between the spinous processes and/or urged toward the vertebral bodies, the spacer 150 rotates relative to the wings, such as wing 104, so that the spacer 150 is optimally positioned between the spinous processes, and the wing 104 is optimally positioned relative to the spinous processes. Further, the broad upper and lower surfaces of the spacer 150 helps spread the load that the spinous processes place on the spacer 150.
  • As may be required for positioning the implant 100 between the spinous processes, the implant 100 can also include a second wing 132 which fits over the guide 110 and is secured by a bolt 130 placed through an aperture 134 provided in a tongue 136 of second wing 132. The bolt 130 is received and secured in the threaded bore 112 located in the guide 110. As implanted, the first wing 104 is located adjacent to first sides of the spinous processes and the second wing 132 is located adjacent to second sides of the same spinous processes.
  • In another embodiment, the spacer 150 has a cross-section with a major dimension and a minor dimension, wherein the major dimension is greater than the minor dimension, and, for example, less than about two times the minor dimension.
  • It is to be understood that the spacer 150 can be fabricated from somewhat flexible and/or deflectable material.
  • In this embodiment the spacer is made out of a polymer, more specifically, the polymer is a thermoplastic. Still more specifically, the polymer is a polyketone known as polyetheretherketone (PEEK). Still more specifically, the material is PEEK 450G, which is an unfilled PEEK approved for medical implantation available from Victrex of Lancashire, Great Britain. (Victrex is located at www.matweb.com or see Boedeker www.boedeker. com). Other sources of this material include Gharda located in Panoli, India (www. ghardapolymers.com). The spacer 150 can be formed by extrusion, injection, compression molding and/or machining techniques. This material has appropriate physical and mechanical properties and is suitable for carrying and spreading the physical load between the spinous process. Further in this embodiment, the PEEK has the following additional approximate properties:
    Property Value
    Density 1.3 g/cc
    Rockwell M 99
    Rockwell R 126
    Tensile Strength 97 MPa
    Modulus of Elasticity 3.5 GPa
    Flexural Modulus 4.1 GPa
  • In a preferred embodiment, the implant 100 is comprised in part of titanium or other suitable implant material which may be radiopaque and in part of a radiolucent material that does not show up under x-ray or other type of imaging. In a preferred embodiment, the first and second wings and the shaft are comprised of such a radiopaque material such as titanium and the spacer and the distraction guide or tissue expander are comprised of a radiolucent material such as, for example, PEEK or PEKK or other radiolucent materials described herein. In an embodiment which includes the first wing, the spacer and the tissue expander, under imaging, the implant looks like an “T”. In an embodiment which includes both a first and a second wing, the spacer and the tissue expander, under imaging, the implant looks like a “H”. This embodiment allows the doctor to have a clearer view of the spine under imaging without the implant interfering as much with the view of the bone structure.
  • It should be noted that the material selected may also be filled. For example, other grades of PEEK are also available and contemplated, such as 30% glass-filled or 30% carbon-filled, provided such materials are cleared for use in implantable devices by the FDA, or other regulatory body. Glass-filled PEEK reduces the expansion rate and increases the flexural modulus of PEEK relative to that which is unfilled. The resulting product is known to be ideal for improved strength, stiffness, or stability. Carbon-filled PEEK is known to enhance the compressive strength and stiffness of PEEK and lower its expansion rate. Carbon-filled PEEK offers wear resistance and load carrying capability.
  • In this embodiment, as described above, the spacer 150 is manufactured from polyetheretherketone (PEEK), available from Victrex. As will be appreciated, other suitable similarly biocompatible thermoplastic or thermoplastic polycondensate materials that resist fatigue, have good memory, are flexible, and/or deflectable, have very low moisture absorption, and good wear and/or abrasion resistance, can be used without departing from the scope of the invention. The spacer can also be comprised of polyetherketoneketone (PEKK).
  • Other material that can be used include polyetherketone (PEK), polyetherketoneetherketoneketone (PEKEKK), and polyetheretherketoneketone (PEEKK), and generally a polyaryletheretherketone. Further, other polyketones can be used as well as other thermoplastics. The spacer can also be made of titanium.
  • Reference to appropriate polymers that can be used in the spacer can be made to the following documents, all of which are incorporated herein by reference. These documents include: PCT Publication WO 02/02158 A1, dated Jan. 10, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials;” PCT Publication WO 02/00275 A1, dated Jan. 3, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials;” and, PCT Publication WO 02/00270 A1, dated Jan. 3, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials.”
  • Other materials such as Bionateg, polycarbonate urethane, available from the Polymer Technology Group, Berkeley, Calif., may also be appropriate because of the good oxidative stability, biocompatibility, mechanical strength and abrasion resistance. Other thermoplastic materials and other high molecular weight polymers can be used.
  • FIG. 2 a and FIG. 2 b shown an embodiment of the distraction guide or tissue expander 110. FIG. 2 a shows a frame 200 for a distraction guide 110. The frame 200 is typically manufactured from radiopaque material such as titanium. The frame 200 has a first end 202 and a second end 204. The first end 202 has a shaft 102 which can be threaded with threads 234 at one end to facilitate connection to, for example, a first wing 104. The remaining end of the shaft connects to a distraction head frame 230 for the distraction guide 110. Alternatively, the shaft 102 and the distraction head frame 230 can be formed integral to each other.
  • Further, the distraction head frame 230, the shaft 102 and the first wing 104 can be formed as one unit. Still further in an embodiment with a screw thread 234 formed at one end of the shaft 102, which thread 234 is received in a threaded bore of the first wing 102, the thread 234 can be laser welded into the threaded bore of the first wing 102, if desired.
  • The distraction head frame 230 is formed to take on a relatively low profile because, as described above, it is typically formed of radiopaque material. As shown in FIG. 2 a, distraction head frame 230 has two pairs of parallel sides. The first pair of parallel sides 210,212 extends into a pair of flanges 232,233 that define a recess 236. The second pair of parallel sides 214,216 are perpendicular to the first pair of parallel sides. One of the second pair of parallel sides 214 abuts the shaft 102. As will be appreciated by those of skill in the art, neither the first or second pair of parallel sides need be parallel to each other, nor do the first pair of parallel sides need to be perpendicular to the second pair of parallel sides in order to practice the invention.
  • With respect to the frame 200 in FIG. 2 a, the distraction head frame 230 has an upper surface 218 within the recess 236 with a threaded bore 112 therein. The threaded bore 112 receives, for example, a bolt 130 to secure the second wing 132 to the distraction guide 110 via the tongue 136 on the second wing 132 (shown in more detail with respect to FIG. 1 a). The profile of the bolt 130 is such that the height of the bolt 130 and the tongue 136 fits within the recess 236.
  • The lower surface 220 opposing the upper surface 218 can have a first portion 222 that is parallel, or substantially parallel, to the upper surface 218.
  • Additionally, a second portion 224 can be angled from the first portion 222 toward one of the second parallel sides 216. The angled configuration of the lower surface 220 is designed to facilitate the angled profile of the distraction guide.
  • FIG. 2 b shows a perspective view of the distraction guide 110. The frame 200, as described above, is manufactured from radiopaque material. A cap 260 is formed of radiolucent material, such as a suitable polymer, around the frame 200.
  • Suitable polymers include, but are not limited to the polyketones discussed above with respect to the spacer configurations. Accordingly, for example, PEEK, PEKK, PEK, PEKEKK and PEEKK can be used as well as the other materials that are suitable for the spacer 150. As will be appreciated by those of skill in the art, the cap 260 can be associated with the frame 200 by a variety of techniques such that the cap 260 is formed to the frame 200 or is adhered to the frame 200 using a suitable method. As illustrated in FIG. 2 b, the cap 260 has a higher profile than the frame 200 and is shaped to facilitate the second end 204 of the distraction guide 110 acting to expand tissue when the distraction guide is implanted between spinous processes or used to distract adjacent spinous processes.
  • Referring now to FIGS. 3 a-6 b, various embodiments of spacers are depicted.
  • In FIGS. 3 a, 3 b and 3 c, the spacer 350 includes an outer spacer 352 and an inner spacer 354. Inner spacer 354 has a bore 360 therethrough that enables the spacer 350 to rotate about the shaft 102 of implant 100 shown in FIG. 1 a.
  • Each of the inner and outer spacers of the spacer 350 can have a cross-section that is elliptical, oval, ovoid, football-shaped, circular-shaped, rectangular with rounded ends (where the cross-section has two somewhat flattened surfaces and two rounded surfaces similar to the effect of a flattened ellipse). Further, the inner spacer and outer spacer can have different cross-sectional shapes relative to each other. At least the minor outer diameter of the outer spacer is between 6 mm and 14 mm. Typically, the minor outer dimension is one of 6 mm, 8 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, and 14 mm. The different sizes enable the spacer to accommodate different sized patients.
  • As depicted in FIG. 3 a, the spacer 350 is a rectangle with rounded ends or a flattened ellipse, as it has two sides that are almost parallel to each other, and the ends connecting the parallel sides are curved, similar to a “race-track.” Thus, in this and other embodiments, the two sides or surfaces of the spacer, including the upper and the lower spacer, can also be flattened or slightly radiused. The bore 360 is located in the center of the inner spacer 354 and there is a gap 362 between the upper and lower portions of the outer spacer 352 and the inner spacer 354. A gap 370 is provided between the inner and outer spacers at the rounded ends 356,358. In a preferred embodiment, for about an 8 millimeter spacer 350, the upper and lower gaps 362 are about 0.012 of an inch or about a quarter of a millimeter each for a total combined gap of about one half of a millimeter. The gaps 370 at the curved ends 356,358 are about 0.002 of an inch or slightly less than a tenth of a millimeter each in a preferred embodiment. The gap 370 for all of the other spacers is preferably, as specified above, for the 8 mm spacer. For the 6 millimeter spacer, generally this is made of one piece such as seen in FIG. 1 f.
  • However, for the other spacers, these spacers are preferably made of two pieces as seen for example in FIG. 3 a. The table below sets our preferred dimensions for the combined upper and lower gap dimension for the spacers.
    Spacer Minor Dimension Total Combined Gap Dimension
     6 mm n/a
     8 mm 0.020 in (0.51 mm)
    10 mm 0.025 in (0.64 mm)
    12 mm 0.030 in (0.76 mm)
    14 mm 0.035 in (0.89 mm)
  • The gap 362 closed and the inner and outer spacers touch each other when the spacer is loaded with 800 Newtons of force. The design is made to take repeated loading at 1200 Newtons of force.
  • In the above embodiment, the outer spacer 352 is movably or slidably mounted on the inner spacer 354, and the inner spacer 354 is rotatably mounted on the shaft 102 of the implant 100.
  • As discussed above, the spacer, including either the inner spacer or outer spacer, or both, can be made of deflectable and flexible material. As discussed above, suitable material is a polymer such as for example polyetheretherketone (PEEK). Other suitable materials can include those described above. Further, titanium can be used.
  • Further, the deflectable or flexible material can have a graduated stiffness to help gradually distribute the load when the spinous processes place a force upon the exterior surface of the outer spacer 352. This can be accomplished by forming multiple layers of the deflectable or flexible material with decreasing stiffness or hardness from the center of the spacer 350 outwardly. Alternatively, the material can have a higher stiffness or hardness in the center of the inner spacer.
  • Persons of skill in the art will appreciate that the embodiments shown in FIGS. 4 a-6 b, can be made of the materials similar to those emphasized in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 a and 3 a.
  • Now referring to FIGS. 4 a and 4 b, again the spacer 450 is depicted as a somewhat flattened ellipse with rounded ends 456,458, where two sides are somewhat parallel to each other and the ends connecting the parallel sides are curved, similar to a “race-track.” The bore 460 is located off-center within the inner spacer 454. Further, there are gaps 462,470 between the outer spacer 452 and the inner spacer 454. Except for the location of the bore 460, the dimensions and materials of the embodiment of FIGS. 4 a and 4 b are similar to that of FIG. 3 a and FIG. 3 b.
  • The off-center bore 460 allows a greater portion of the spacer 450 to be positioned close to the vertebral bodies. With an ovoid (“egg-shaped”) spacer, off-set the bore 460 is preferably close to the bulbous end of the spacer with the more pointed end directed toward the vertebral bodies in order to attain the advantages of the spacer being closer to the vertebral bodies and enhanced distributed load bearing.
  • Turning now to FIG. 5, the spacer 550 is depicted as having a circular cross-section. The bore 560 is located within the inner spacer 554. Further, there are gaps 562,570 between the outer spacer 552 and the inner spacer 554. The dimensions of the gap would be the same as those discussed with respect to the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 a. The embodiment of FIG. 3 a can have a diameter that is the minor diameter of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 1 a, 3 a, and 4 a.
  • Also, as will be appreciated by those in skill in the art, the outer spacer 552 can be movably mounted on the inner spacer 554 and the inner spacer 554 can be rotatably mounted on the shaft 102 of the implant 100 or any other suitable implant.
  • In FIGS. 6 a and 6 b, the spacer 650 is depicted as having an outer spacer 652 and an inner spacer 654 of two different cross-sectional shapes. In this embodiment, the outer spacer 652 is elliptical and the inner spacer is football-shaped in cross-sections. The bore 660 is located off-center within the inner spacer 654. However, as will be appreciated by those of skill in the art, the bore 660 can be located centrally within the inner spacer without departing from the scope of the invention.
  • The gaps 662 between the outer spacer 652 and the inner spacer 654 are crescent-shaped as a result of the inner and outer spacers having different cross-sectional shapes. Thus, the gap can have a width ranging from approximately between 0.25 mm at the minor diameter (greatest vertical height) to just enough space at the apexes 662,664 of the inner spacer 654 so that the outer spacer can slide over the inner spacer. The inner spacer 654 can be rotatably mounted on the shaft 102 of the implant 100.
  • The embodiment of this implant as well as the several other implants described herein act to limit extension (backward bending) of the spine. These implants, however, do not inhibit the flexion (forward bending) of the spinal column.
  • The foregoing description of embodiments of the present invention has been provided for the purposes of illustration and description. It is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations will be apparent to the practitioner skilled in the art.
  • The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the invention and its practical application, thereby enabling others skilled in the art to understand the invention and the various embodiments and with various modifications that are suited to the particular use contemplated. It is intended that the scope of the invention be defined by the following claims and its equivalence.
  • Interspinous Implants
  • FIGS. 7 and 8 illustrate an implant 700 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. The implant 700 comprises a wing 730, a spacer 720, and a lead-in tissue expander (also referred to herein as a distraction guide) 710. The distraction guide 710 in this particular embodiment is wedge-shaped, i.e., the implant has an expanding cross-section from a proximal end of the implant 740 to a region 750 where the guide 710 joins with the spacer 720 (referencing for the figures is based on the point of insertion of the implant between spinous processes). As such, the distraction guide functions to initiate distraction of the soft tissue and the spinous processes when the implant 700 is surgically inserted between the spinous processes. It is to be understood that the distraction guide can be pointed and the like, in order to facilitate insertion of the implant between the spinous processes of adjacent cervical vertebrae. It is advantageous that the insertion technique disturb as little of the bone and surrounding tissue or ligaments as possible in order to reduce trauma to the site and promote early healing, and prevent destabilization of the normal anatomy. In the embodiment of FIGS. 7 and 8, there is no requirement to remove any of the bone of the spinous processes and no requirement to sever, or remove from the body, ligaments and tissues immediately associated with the spinous processes. For example, it is unnecessary to sever the ligamentum nuchae, (supraspinous ligament) which partially cushions the spinous processes of the upper cervical vertebrae.
  • As can be seen in FIGS. 7-9, the spacer 720 can be teardrop-shaped in cross-section perpendicular to a longitudinal axis 725 of the implant. In this way, the shape of the spacer 720 can roughly conform to a wedge-shaped space, or a portion of the space, between adjacent spinous processes within which the implant 700 is to be positioned. In other embodiments, the spacer 720, can have alternative shapes such as circular, wedge, oval, ovoid, football-shaped, and rectangular-shaped with rounded corners and other shapes, and be within the spirit and scope of the invention. The shape of the spacer can be selected for a particular patient so that the physician can position the implant as close as possible to the anterior portion of the surface of the spinous process. The shape selected for the spacer 720 can effect the contact surface area of the implant 700 and the spinous processes that are to be subject to distraction. Increasing the contact surface area between the implant and the spinous processes can distribute the force and load between the spinous frame and the implant.
  • As can be seen in FIGS. 7 and 8, the wing 730 in this embodiment 700 is elliptically-shaped in cross-section perpendicular to a longitudinal axis 725 of the spacer 720 and distraction guide 710. The dimensions of the wing 730 can be larger than that of the spacer 720, particularly along the axis of the spine, and can limit or block lateral displacement of the implant in the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 725. As illustrated in the embodiment of FIG. 9, the wing 730 can have other cross-sectional shapes, such as teardrop, wedge, circular, oval, ovoid, football-shaped, and rectangular-shaped with rounded corners and other shapes, and be within the spirit and scope of the invention. The wing 730 has an anterior portion 733 and a posterior portion 735.
  • In other embodiments, the implant 700 can have two wings, with a second wing 760 (shown in FIG. 10) separate from the distraction guide 710, spacer 720 and first wing 730. The second wing can be connected to the proximal end of the spacer 720. The second wing 760, similar to the first wing 730, can limit or block lateral displacement of the implant 700, however displacement is limited or blocked in the direction along the longitudinal axis 725 opposite insertion. When both the first wing 730 and second wing 760 are connected with the implant and the implant is positioned between adjacent spinous processes, a portion of the spinous processes can be sandwiched between the first and second wing, limiting any displacement along the longitudinal axis 725.
  • As can be seen in FIG. 10, the second wing 760 can be teardrop-shaped in cross-section. The wider section or end 762 of the teardrop shape is the posterior end of the second wing 760 and the narrower section or end 769 is the anterior end of the second wing 760. Unlike the first wing 730, however, the sides of the second wing 760 define a space 770 with a lip 780 that allows the second wing 760 to pass over the distraction guide 710 to meet and connect with the spacer 720. The second wing 760 is then secured to the spacer 720 toward the end of the spacer located distally from the first wing 740. The second wing 760 is connected with the implant after the implant 700 is positioned between the spinous processes.
  • It is to be understood that the implant can be made in two pieces. The first piece can include the first wing 730, the spacer 720, and the distraction guide 710. The second piece can include the second wing 760. Each piece can be manufactured using technique known in the art (e.g., machining, molding, extrusion). Each piece, as will be more fully discussed below, can be made of a material that is bio-compatible with the body of the patient. For example the implants can be made of stainless steel and titanium. Additionally, a shape memory metal such as Nitinol, which is a combination of titanium and nickel, can also be used. Further polymers can also be used. The implant can be formed with multiple pieces and with the pieces appropriately joined together, or alternatively, the implant can be formed as one piece or joined together as one piece.
  • Further embodiments of implants in accordance with the present invention are depicted in FIGS. 11-13. In such embodiments, the spacer 810 can be rotatable about the longitudinal axis 840 relative to the first wing 730, or relative to a first and second wing 730,760 where two wings are used. The spacer 810 can be rotatable or fixed relative to the distraction guide 710. Where the spacer 810 is rotatable, the spacer 810 can include a bore 820 running the length of the longitudinal axis 840, and a shaft 830 inserted through the bore 820 and connecting the distraction guide 710 with the first wing 730. It can be advantageous to position any of the implants taught herein as close as possible to the vertebral bodies. The rotatable spacer 810 can rotate to conform to or settle between the bone structures of the cervical spine as the implant is inserted between the spinous processes, so that on average the contact surface area between the spacer 810 and both of the spinous processes can be increased over the contact surface area between a fixed spacer 810 and the spinous processes. Thus, the rotatable spacer 810 improves the positioning of the spacer independent of the wings relative to the spinous processes. The embodiment of FIG. 12 has a first wing 730 and if desired, a second wing 760 similar to the wing depicted in the embodiment of FIG. 9. As discussed below, the shape of the wings in FIGS. 9 and 12 is such that the implants accommodate the twisting of the cervical spine along its axis as, for example, the head of a patient turning from side to side.
  • FIG. 14 is a perspective view and FIG. 15A is an end view of still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention, wherein the posterior portion 735 of the teardrop-shaped first wing 730 is truncated 910, making the first wing 730 more ovoid in shape. In this configuration, the anterior portion 733 of the first wing 730 can be longer than the truncated posterior end 910 of the first wing 730. As in previous embodiments, the spacer 810 of such implants 900 can be a rotatable spacer rather than a fixed spacer. FIG. 15B illustrates a second wing for use with such implant 900 having a truncated posterior end 940. Truncation of the posterior ends 910,940 of the first and second wings 730,760 can reduce the possibility of interference of implants 900 having such first and second wings 730,760 positioned between spinous processes of adjacent pairs of cervical vertebrae, e.g., implants between cervical vertebrae five and six, and between six and seven.
  • During rotation of the neck, the spinous process move past each other in a scissor-like motion. Each cervical vertebra can rotate relative to the next adjacent cervical vertebra in the general range of about 6°-12°. In addition, about 50 percent of the rotational movement of the neck is accomplished by the top two neck vertebrae. Thus, such embodiments can accommodate neck rotation without adjacent embodiments interfering with each other.
  • With respect to the prior embodiments which have first and second wings, the second wing 760, can be designed to be interference-fit onto the spacer 720 (where the spacer is fixed) or a portion of the distraction guide 710 adjacent to the spacer 720 (where the spacer is rotatable). Where the second wing 760 is interference-fit, there is no additional attachment device to fasten the second wing 760 relative to the remainder of the implant.
  • Alternatively, various fasteners can be used to secure the second wing 760 relative to the remainder of the implant. For example, FIGS. 16-17 illustrate an embodiment of an implant 1000 including a teardrop-shaped second wing 1010 having a bore 1020 through a tongue 1030 at the posterior end of the second wing 760. The bore on the second wing 1020 is brought into alignment with a corresponding bore 1040 on the spacer 720 when the second wing 760 is brought into position by surgical insertion relative to the rest of the implant. A threaded screw 1050 can be inserted through the aligned bores in a posterior-anterior direction to secure the second wing 760 to the spacer 720. The direction of insertion from a posterior to an anterior direction has the screw engaging the bores and the rest of the implant along a direction that is generally perpendicular to the longitudinal axis 725. This orientation is most convenient when the surgeon is required to use a screw 1050 to secure the second wing 760 to the rest of the implant. Other securing mechanisms using a member inserted into corresponding bores 1020,1040 on the spacer 720 and second wing 760 are within the spirit of the invention.
  • It should be understood that a rotatable spacer 810 also can be accommodated by this embodiment. With a rotatable spacer 810, the second wing 760 would be attached to a portion of the distraction guide 710 that is located adjacent to the rotatable spacer 810.
  • FIGS. 19A-19B depict a further embodiment 1100 wherein the second wing 760 is secured to the spacer 720 by a mechanism including a flexible hinge 1115, with a protrusion 1130 on the end of the hinge 1110 adjacent to the lip 780 of the hole 770 defined by portions of the second wing 760. The securing mechanism also encompasses an indentation 1140 on the spacer 720, wherein the indentation accommodates the protrusion 1130 on the end of the flexible hinge 1115. During surgery, after insertion of the distraction guide 710, spacer 720, and first wing 730, the second wing 760 is received over the distraction guide 710 and the spacer 720. As the second wing 760 is received by the spacer 720, the flexible hinge 1115 and its protrusion 1130 deflect until the protrusion 1130 meets and joins with the indentation 1140 in the spacer 720, securing the second wing 760 to the spacer 720. Again in embodiments where the spacer can rotate, the indentation 1140 is located on an end of the distraction guide 710 that is adjacent to 750 the rotatable spacer 810. With respect to the flexible hinge 1115, this hinge is in a preferred embodiment formed with the second wing 760 and designed in such a way that it can flex as the hinge 1115 is urged over the distraction guide 710 and the spacer 720 and then allow the protrusion 1130 to be deposited into the indentation 1140.
  • Alternatively, it can be appreciated that the indentation 1140 can exist in the second wing 760 and the flexible hinge 1115 and the protrusion 1130 can exist on the spacer 720 in order to mate the second wing 760 to the spacer 720. Still alternatively, the flexible hinge 1115 can be replaced with a flexible protrusion that can be flexed into engagement with the indentation 1140 in the embodiment with the indentation 1140 in the spacer 720 or in the embodiment with the indentation 1140 in the second wing 760.
  • FIGS. 21A-22 illustrate an embodiment of an implant 1200 wherein anterior ends of a first wing 730 and second wing 760 flare out at an angle away from the spacer 720 and away from each other. The cervical spinous processes are themselves wedge-shaped when seen from a top view. That the implant 1200 can roughly conform with the wedge shape so that the implant 1200 can be positioned as close as possible to the vertebral bodies of the spine where the load of the spine is carried. Thus the first 730 and the second wings 760 are positioned relative to the spacer, whether the spacer is fixed 720 or rotatable 810, so that the wings flare out as the wings approach the vertebral body of the spine. FIG. 21B depicts a top view of the implant 1200 of FIG. 21A. As is evident from FIG. 21B, the first wing 730 is aligned at an angle with respect to a line perpendicular to the longitudinal axis. In one embodiment, the angle is about 30°, however, the angle Θ can range from about 15° to about 45°. In other embodiments, other angles of the first wing 730 relative to the spacer 720 outside of this range are contemplated and in accordance with the invention. Likewise, the second wing 760 can be aligned along a similar, but oppositely varying range of angles relative to the line perpendicular to the longitudinal axis. The first and second wing 730,760 thus form an obtuse angle with respect to the spacer 720 in this embodiment. The second wing 760 defines an inner hole 770 which is outlined by the lip 780. As is evident, the lip 780 can be provided at an angle relative to the rest of the second wing 760 so that when the lip 780 is urged into contact with the spacer 720, the second wing 760 has the desired angle relative to the spacer 720. As discussed above, there are various ways that the second wing 760 is secured to the spacer 720. FIG. 21A depicts a top view of one such implant 1200 placed between the spinous processes of adjacent cervical vertebrae. FIG. 22 is a top view illustrating two layers of distracting implants 1200 with flared wings.
  • Systems and methods in accordance with the present invention can include devices that can be used in cooperation with implants of the present invention. FIG. 23 illustrates “stops” (also referred to herein as “keeps”) 1310, which are rings of flexible biocompatible material, which can be positioned around the spinous processes of adjacent cervical vertebrae and located posteriorly to the implant. The keeps 1310 can prevent posterior displacement of the implants. In one embodiment, the keeps can include a ring 1310 having a slit 1320. The keeps 1310 can be somewhat sprung apart, so that the keep 1310 can be fit over the end of the spinous process and then allowed to spring back together in order to hold a position on the spinous process. The keep 1310 can act as a block to the spacer 720 in order to prevent the implant from movement in a posterior direction.
  • Distractible Interspinous Implants
  • In still other embodiments, implants in accordance with the present invention can be distractible in situ. FIG. 24 is a perspective view of one such implant. The implant 1800 comprises a body 1801 adapted to be inserted between the spinous processes, and a distracting insert 1806. The body 1801 can include two substantially mirror parts: a first part 1802 adapted to contact and support an upper spinous process and a second part 1804 adapted to contact and support a lower spinous process. When positioned such that the first and second parts 1802,1804 align with and abut one another, the body 1801 can resemble implants described above in reference to FIGS. 7-23. In other embodiments, the body 1801 can have a shape other than those shown in FIGS. 7-23. Further, in some embodiments the first part 1802 and second part 1804 can have different shapes, such that when the first part 1802 and second part 1804 align with and abut one another, the body 1801 is nonsymmetrical about the plane of contact. For example, as shown in FIG. 25A, the first part 1802 can have a saddle-like, or concave shape conforming roughly with a shape of a contact surface of the second cervical, while the second part 1804 has a substantially convex shape.
  • The body 1801 can include a wing 1830 having a first and second portion 1832,1834, a spacer 1820 having a first and second portion 1822,1824, and a lead-in tissue expander (also referred to herein as a distraction guide) 1810 having a first and second portion 1812,1814. The distraction guide 1810 as shown is wedge-shaped, i.e., the distraction guide 1810 has an expanding cross-section from the proximal end of the body 1801 to a region where the distraction guide 1810 joins with the spacer 1820. As such, the distraction guide 1810 functions to initiate distraction of the soft tissue and the spinous processes when the body 1801 is surgically inserted between the spinous processes.
  • The spacer 1820, as shown, is teardrop-shaped in a cross-section perpendicular to the spacer's longitudinal axis 1825. The spacer 1820 can be shaped to roughly conform to a wedge-like space, or a portion of the space, between adjacent spinous processes, for example as between the spinous processes of the fourth and fifth cervical vertebrae. The shape of the spacer 1820 can be selected for a particular patient, and/or a particular pair of adjacent spinous processes, and can vary substantially. Thus, in other embodiments, the spacer 1820 can have other cross-sectional shapes, such as circular, wedge, oval, ovoid, football-shaped, and rectangular-shaped with rounded corners and other cross-sectional shapes and/or can be custom fabricated for the particular patient and the anatomy of the particular spinal processes between which the implant 1800 is to be placed.
  • In still other embodiments, the spacer 1820 can have a nonsymmetrical cross-sectional shape, for example where a space between adjacent spinous processes is nonsymmetrical.
  • The ability to select a size and shape of the spacer 1820 to suit a patient allows the physician to choose an implant 1800 that can be placed closer to the vertebral bodies than farther away for additional support. The shape selected for the spacer 1820 can define the contact surface area between the implant 1800 and the spinous processes that are subject to distraction.
  • Increasing the contact surface area between the implant 1800 and the spinous processes distributes the force and load between the spinous frame and the implant 1800. Generally, a teardrop or wedge-shaped spacer 1820 can allow for more load-bearing contact between the spacer 1820 and the spinous processes of the cervical vertebrae, and embodiments having such shapes will be more particularly described.
  • As shown, the wing 1830 can be tear-drop shaped in cross-section, although having a minor dimension that is larger than that of the spacer 1820, and can limit or block lateral displacement of the implant 1800 in the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 1825. However, the wing 1830 need not be teardrop shaped. In other embodiments, the wing 1830 can have some other shape, for example the wing 1830 can be elliptical, wedge, circular, oval, ovoid, football-shaped, and rectangular-shaped with rounded corners and other shapes, and be within the spirit and scope of the invention. Further, as with the spacer 1820, the wing 1830 can have a nonsymmetrical cross-sectional shape. The shape of the wing 1830 can be chosen to most easily fit into place while avoiding obstructions, such as soft tissue or bone, or other implants, while still blocking or limiting lateral displacement.
  • The wing 1830 can include one or more cavities 1852,1854 that extend through the wing 1830 and through at least a portion of the spacer 1820. The one or more cavities 1852,1854 should comprise a first groove formed in the first part 1802 and a second groove formed in the second part 1804, so that the cross-section of the cavity 1852,1854 can be expanded during insertion of a distracting insert 1806, as described below. The body 1801 of FIG. 18 includes a first cavity 1852 and a second cavity 1854 to receive a first insert 1842 and a second insert 1844 of the distracting insert 1806. Having two or more cavities and corresponding inserts can prevent relative rotation between the body 1801 and the distracting insert 1806. In the embodiment shown in cross-section in FIG. 25B, each cavity has a substantially circular cross-section, and is sized roughly in proportion to the width of the spacer 1820, so that the first cavity 1852 is larger in diameter than the second cavity 1854.
  • However, in other embodiments, the cavities need not be shaped as shown. For example, the cavities can be elliptical, dual-lobed, or otherwise shaped. Further, the cavities need not be sized as shown. For example, the cavities can be roughly the same size. As shown in FIG. 25C, in still further embodiments, the body 1801 can include more than two cavities 1852,1854, 1856, and each cavity can have similar, or different shape. As shown in FIG. 25D, in still other embodiments the body 1801 can include a single cavity 1852, such as a wedge-shaped cavity roughly corresponding to a shape of the spacer 1820. Myriad different cavity shapes and cavity configurations can be employed to achieve separation of a body 1801 positioned between spinous processes. However, it can be preferable that the shape of the cavities 1852,1854, 1856 should correspond roughly with the shape of the upper and lower surfaces of the inserts 1842,1844, 1846 of the distracting insert 1806, so that, as shown in FIG. 25B-25D, a load applied to the body 1801 can be distributed relatively evenly over the surface of the cavities 1852,1854, 1856.
  • Once the body 1801 is positioned between adjacent spinous processes, the first and second parts 1802,1804 of the body 1801 can be separated, thereby expanding the width of the body 1801 and distracting the adjacent spinous processes. In one embodiment, separation of the first and second parts 1802,1804 can be accomplished, for example, by positioning the distracting insert 806 within the body 1801 such that the first and second parts 1802,1804 are urged apart. As mentioned above, the distracting insert 1806 can include one or more inserts associated with the one or more cavities, the one or more inserts being fixedly connected to a cap 1808. As shown in FIG. 24, the distracting insert 1806 includes a first insert 1842 and a second insert 1844, each of the inserts being fixedly connected with a cap 1808 having a shape roughly corresponding to a shape of the wing 1830. Inserts 1842,1844 have distracting tips that can initially urge the halves of the implant 1800 apart. In other words, the inserts 1842,1844 have tips with ever-increasing cross-section so that the tips can be easily inserted in the cavities 1852,1854 and the continual movement of the insert 1842,1844 urges the halves of the body 1801 apart. Thus, the tips of the insert 1842,1844 can be smaller than the cavities 1852,1854 in order to facilitate initial insertion into the cavities 1852,1854. As shown in FIGS. 25B-D, the one or more inserts 1842,1844, 1846 can be sized such that they have a height larger than a diameter (or height) of the one or more cavities 1852,1854, 1856, so that when positioning the inserts within the cavities, the first part 1802 and second part 1804 of the body 1801 are separated by the difference in height of the inserts and the diameter (or height) of the cavities (i.e., an additional distraction height).
  • As shown in FIG. 26A, the body 1801 can be inserted between adjacent <BR> <BR> spinous processes by piercing and/or displacing the soft tissue (i.e., the interspinous ligament) with the distraction guide 1810 and stretching and/or displacing the tissue so that the spacer 1820 fits between the spinous processes. The height of the first part 1802 and second part 1804 of the body 1801 can be minimized by abutting the first part 1802 and the second part 1804 so that the body 1801 can be positioned between the spinous processes.
  • As described above, and as can be seen in FIG. 26A, the shape of the body 1801 can resemble the shape of a space between adjacent spinous processes. With the body 1801 in place, the distracting insert 1806 can be inserted into the body 1801, causing the first part 1802 and second part 1804 to separate, as described above and shown in FIG. 26B. As discussed above, proximal ends of the inserts 1842, 1844 of the distracting insert 1806 can be tapered to assist in guiding the inserts 1842,1844 into the cavities 1852,1854, and to ease separation of the first and second parts 1802,1804. The distracting insert 1806 can have inserts 1842,1844 sized to achieve a desired amount of distraction of the spinous processes.
  • As with the body 1801, multiple distracting inserts 1806 can be made available to a physician, the physician choosing a distracting insert 1806 sized to suit a particular patient. A system in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention can comprise a plurality of bodies 1801, each body 1801 having different shape and/or height.
  • Such a system can further comprise a plurality of distracting inserts 1806, having inserts corresponding to cavities of the bodies 1801, and having different heights to achieve different amounts of distraction. Methods in accordance with embodiments of the present invention can apply such systems so that a physician can select implant components appropriate to the patient at the time of surgery, and can further substitute different bodies and/or different distracting inserts based on evaluation or reevaluation during surgery.
  • FIG. 27A is a cross-sectional side view of a distractible implant 1800 in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention positioned between adjacent spinous processes, and having an insert 1842 of the distracting insert 1806 partially inserted within a cavity 1852 of the body 1801. As described above, when inserted between spinous processes, the first part 1802 of the body 1801 is aligned and abutted with the second part 1804 of the body 1801. The first part 1802 and second part 1804 should remain aligned while the body 1801 is inserted between the spinous processes, and further should remain aligned while the distracting insert 1806 is mated with the body 1801. In order to maintain proper alignment, one of the first and second parts 1802,1804 can include alignment pins (or protrusions) 2118 that mate with corresponding holes 2119 of the other of the first and second parts 1802,1804. The pins 2118 can be made of the same or different material as the body 1801, and can be integrally formed or mated with the corresponding part. For example, where the pins 2118 are made of titanium, and the body 1801 is made of a biocompatible thermoplastic, the pins 2118 can be press fit into the second part 1804. The pins 2118 are free to slide in and out of the holes 2119, but are prevented from separating from the holes 2119 by pressure of the spinous processes. As an insert 1842 enters a cavity 1852 of the body 1801, the distal end of the body 1801 begins to separate, as shown. As the spinous processes are distracted, the pins 2118 move within the holes 2119, allowing separation of the first part 1802 and second part 1804. The pins 2118 prevent relative shifting or sliding along the longitudinal axis or along the length of the spinous process. The pins 2118 (and corresponding holes 2119) preferably have a height larger than the maximum distraction height, thereby preventing the pins 2118 from separating from the holes 2119 and allowing relative shifting of the first and second parts 1802,1804. FIG. 27B is a top view showing the position of the pins 2118 relative to a first and second cavity 1852,1854. Two pins 2118 are shown extending through holes 2119 of the second part 1802, however, in other embodiments, any number of pins 2118 or protrusions can be integrally formed or connected with one of the first and second parts 1802,1804.
  • In an alternative embodiment (not shown), the first part 1802 and second part 1804 of the body 1801 can be bound together by a flexible, artificial ligament or suture material. For example, the material can be a bio-compatible polymer having flexible properties. The artificial ligament or suture material can limit the shifting between the first part 1802 and second part 1804. In still other embodiments, some other device can be employed to maintain alignment of the first and second parts 1802,1804. It is intended that in some embodiments of the present invention, it is preferable to maintain alignment of the first and second parts 1802,1804 during distraction. As one of ordinary skill in the art can appreciate, many different devices can be employed to maintain alignment between the first and second parts 1802,1804 of the body 1801.
  • As shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, the distracting insert 1806 can be secured to the body 1801 by a clip 2260. The body 1801 as shown in FIGS. 28A-28D is the same as the body 1801 of FIG. 24. Commonly labeled components are as described above. However, it should be noted that other embodiments of a body 1801 can be used with distracting inserts 1806 described with reference to FIG. 28A-28D. In one embodiment, the clip 2260 can include a first tab 2262 and a second tab 2264. Each tab 2262,2264 can extend across at least a portion of the width of the respective portion of the wing 1830 along the longitudinal axis 1825. When the distracting insert 1806 is mated with the body 1801, the wing 1830 can be interference-fit with the distracting insert 1806 so that the wing 1830 is held between the tabs 2262,2264. The pressure applied to the surfaces of the wing 1830 should create sufficient frictional force to prevent relative movement between the body 1801 and distracting insert 1806. In other embodiments, the clip 2260 can comprise a single lip along a portion of, or the entire periphery of the cap (and wing 1830) and can extend across at least a portion of the width of the wing 1830 along the longitudinal axis 1825.
  • As shown in FIG. 28C, in still other embodiments, each tab 2262,2264 can include a protrusion 2263,2265 located at a proximal end of the tab 2262,2264. The wing 1830 can include indentations 2273,2275, or cavities, for receiving each of the protrusions 2263,2265 so that when the protrusions are positioned within the respective indentations, the clip 2260 is locked in place. Alternatively, the tab 2262,2264 can extend beyond a ledged wing 1830, so that the clip 2260 can be locked in place when the protrusions 2263,2265 clear the wing 1830. As described above, the distracting insert 1806 is mated with the positioned body 1801 by gradually urging the inserts of the distracting insert 1806 along the length of the cavities of the spacer 1820. The protrusions 2263,2265 can be beveled, so that as the protrusions contact an outer lip of the wing 1830, the tabs 2262,2264 deflect upward, allowing the distracting insert 1806 to continue moving into position along the longitudinal axis. When the protrusions 2263,2265 find the indentations 2273,2275 of the wing 1830 (or alternatively, when the protrusions clear the ledge), the clasp 2260 locks into place and the distracting insert 1806 is mated with the body 1801.
  • In still further embodiments, the distracting insert 1806 need not include a clip, but can be mated with the body 1801 using some other device. For example, as shown in FIG. 28D, an insert 1842 can include one or more pegs 2272,2274, and one or more corresponding through-holes 2282,2284 (or cavities) within the first wing 1830. The one or more pegs 2272,2274 can be sized such that a feature of the one or more pegs 2272,2274 is approximately the same width, or slightly larger than a width, w, of the one or more corresponding through- holes 2282,2284, so that an interference fit is created between the distracting insert 1806 and the body 1801, holding the distracting insert 1806 seated in place, and limiting the relative movement of the first part 1802 and second part 1804.
  • Referring to FIG. 29, the implant 1800 can further include a second wing 2360, similar to previously described embodiments. The second wing 2360 can be connected to the proximal end of the spacer 1820 so that portions of the adjacent spinous processes are sandwiched between the second wing 2360 and the first wing 1830. The second wing 2360, like the first wing 1830, can prevent lateral displacement of the body 1801 relative to the spinous processes. The second wing 2360 can be teardrop-shaped and sized to approximate the shape and size of the first wing 1830 when the distracting insert 1806 is mated with the body 1801. Likewise, the sides of the second wing 2360 define a space 2370 with a lip 2380 that allows the second wing 2360 to pass over the distraction guide 1810 to meet and connect with the spacer 1820. The space 2370 defined within the second wing 2360 should correspond with the distracted height of the body 1801. As described above, systems and methods in accordance with the present invention can comprise a plurality of bodies 1801 and a plurality of distracting inserts 1806 to suit a particular patient. Likewise, systems and methods in accordance with the present invention can further comprise a plurality of second wings 2360 corresponding in size and shape to the plurality of bodies 1801 and the plurality of distracting inserts 1806. The second wing 2360 can be secured to the spacer 1820, for example as described above. The second wing 2360 is implanted once the distraction guide 1810, spacer 1820, and first wing 1830 are inserted as a unit between the spinous processes of adjacent cervical vertebrae.
  • It is to be understood that the various features of the various embodiments can be combined with other embodiments of the invention and be within the spirit and scope of the invention. Thus, for example only, the embodiment of FIG. 24 can have truncated wings as depicted in other embodiments.
  • Materials for Use in Implants of the Present Invention
  • It is to be understood that implants in accordance with the present invention, and/or portions thereof can be fabricated from somewhat flexible and/or deflectable material.
  • In these embodiments, the implant and/or portions thereof can be made out of a polymer, such as a thermoplastic. For example, in one embodiment, the implant can be made from polyketone, known as polyetheretherketone (PEEK). Still more specifically, the implant can be made from PEEK 450G, which is an unfilled PEEK approved for medical implantation available from Victrex of Lancashire, Great Britain. Other sources of this material include Gharda located in Panoli, India. PEEK has the following approximate properties:
    Property Value
    Density 1.3 g/cc
    Rockwell M 99
    Rockwell R 126
    Tensile Strength 97 MPa
    Modulus of Elasticity 3.5 GPa
    Flexural Modulus 4.1 GPa
  • The material specified has appropriate physical and mechanical properties and is suitable for carrying and spreading a physical load between the adjacent spinous processes. The implant and/or portions thereof can be formed by extrusion, injection, compression molding and/or machining techniques.
  • In some embodiments, the implant can comprise, at least in part, titanium or stainless steel, or other suitable implant material which is radiopaque, and at least in part a radiolucent material that does not show up under x-ray or other type of imaging. For example, in one embodiment, a first wing, a second wing and a shaft can comprise a radiopaque material (e.g., titanium) and a rotatable spacer and a lead-in tissue expander can comprise a radiolucent material (e.g., PEEK). In such an embodiment, under imaging the implant looks like an “H”. The physician can have a less obstructed view of the spine under imaging, than with an implant comprising radiopaque materials entirely. However, the implant need not comprise any radiolucent materials.
  • It should be noted that the material selected can also be filled. For example, other grades of PEEK are also available and contemplated, such as 30% glass-filled or 30% carbon-filled, provided such materials are cleared for use in implantable devices by the FDA, or other regulatory body. Glass-filled PEEK reduces the expansion rate and increases the flexural modulus of PEEK relative to that which is unfilled. The resulting product is known to be ideal for improved strength, stiffness, or stability. Carbon-filled PEEK is known to enhance the compressive strength and stiffness of PEEK and lower its expansion rate. Carbon-filled PEEK offers wear resistance and load carrying capability.
  • In this embodiment, as described above, the implant is manufactured from PEEK, available from Victrex. As will be appreciated, other suitable similarly biocompatible thermoplastic or thermoplastic polycondensate materials that resist fatigue, have good memory, are flexible, and/or deflectable, have very low moisture absorption, and good wear and/or abrasion resistance, can be used without departing from the scope of the invention.
  • The spacer can also be comprised of polyetherketoneketone (PEKK). Other material that can be used include polyetherketone (PEK), polyetherketoneetherketoneketone (PEKEKK), and polyetheretherketoneketone (PEEKK), and generally a polyaryletheretherketone. Further, other polyketones can be used as well as other thermoplastics. Reference to appropriate polymers that can be used in the implant can be made to the following documents, all of which are incorporated herein by reference. These documents include: PCT Publication WO 02/02158 A1, dated Jan. 10, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials;” PCT Publication WO 02/00275 A1, dated Jan. 3, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials;” and, PCT Publication WO 02/00270 A1, dated Jan. 3, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials.” Other materials such as Bionate®, polycarbonate urethane, available from the Polymer Technology Group, Berkeley, Calif., may also be appropriate because of the good oxidative stability, biocompatibility, mechanical strength and abrasion resistance. Other thermoplastic materials and other high molecular weight polymers can be used.
  • Methods for Implanting Interspinous Implants
  • A minimally invasive surgical method for implanting an implant 100,1800 in the cervical spine is disclosed and taught herein. In this method, as shown in FIG. 30, preferably a guide wire 2480 is inserted through a placement network 2490 into the neck of the implant recipient. The guide wire 2480 is used to locate where the implant is to be placed relative to the cervical spine, including the spinous processes. Once the guide wire 2480 is positioned with the aid of imaging techniques, an incision is made on the side of the neck so that an implant in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, can be positioned in the neck thorough an incision and along a line that is about perpendicular to the guide wire 2480 and directed at the end of the guide wire 2480. In one embodiment, the implant can be a sized implant 100 (i.e., having a body that is not distractible), such as described above in FIGS. 7-23 and including a distraction guide 710, a spacer 720, and a first wing 730. The implant 700 is inserted into the neck of the patient. Preferably during insertion, the distraction end pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue.
  • Once the implant 700 is satisfactorily positioned, a second wing 760 can be optionally inserted along a line that is generally collinear with the line over which the implant 700 is inserted but from the opposite side of the neck. The anatomy of the neck is such that it is most convenient and minimally invasive to enter the neck from the side with respect to the implant 700 and the second wing 760. The second wing 760 is mated to the implant and in this particular embodiment, the second wing 760 is snapped into engagement with the implant 700. In an alternative embodiment, the second wing 760 is attached to the implant by the use of a fastener, for example by a screw 1050. Where a screw is used, the screw 1050 can be positioned using a screw driving mechanism that is directed along a posterior to anterior line somewhat parallel to the guide wire 2480. This posterior to anterior line aids the physician in viewing and securing the second wing 160 to the implant.
  • In other embodiments of methods in accordance with the present invention, the implant can be a distractible implant 1800, such as described above in FIGS. 24-29. In such embodiments, as shown in FIG. 31, preferably a guide wire 2580 is inserted through a placement network 2590 into the neck of the implant recipient (as shown and described above). Once the guide wire 2580 is positioned with the aid of imaging techniques, an incision is made on the side of the neck so that a distractible body 1801 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, can be positioned in the neck thorough an incision and along a line that is about perpendicular to the guide wire 880 and directed at the end of the guide wire. The distractible body 1801 can include a distraction guide 1810, a spacer 1820, and a first wing 1830. The body 1801 is inserted into the neck of the patient, between adjacent spinous processes. Preferably during insertion, the distraction guide 1810 pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue, and the body 1801 is positioned so that the spacer 1820 is between the adjacent spinous processes. A distracting insert 1806 is then positioned within the incision and urged into one or more cavities of the body 1801, distracting the spinous processes between which the body is positioned. As the distracting insert 1806 mates with the body 1801, the distracting insert 1806 locks in place.
  • Once the distractible implant 1800 is satisfactorily positioned and distracted, a second wing 2360 can optionally be inserted along a line that is generally collinear with the line over which the body 1801 is inserted but from the opposite side of the neck. The anatomy of the neck is such that it is most convenient and minimally invasive to enter the neck from the side with respect to the body 1801 and the second wing 2360. The second wing 2360 can be mated to the body 1801 through an interference fit, or alternatively by attaching to the body 1801 by the use of a fastener, or by some other device, as described above. For example, where a screw is employed, the screw can be positioned using a screw driving mechanism that is directed along a posterior to anterior line somewhat parallel to the guide wire. This posterior to anterior line aids the physician in viewing and securing the second wing 2360 to the body 1801.
  • The foregoing description of the present invention have been presented for purposes of illustration and description. It is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations will be apparent to practitioners skilled in this art. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the invention and its practical application, thereby enabling others skilled in the art to understand the invention for various embodiments and with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated. It is intended that the scope of the invention be defined by the following claims and their equivalents.
  • FIG. 32 is a perspective view of an implant as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,695,842 to Zucherman, et al. and U.S. Pat. No. 6,712,819 to Zucherman et al., both incorporated herein by reference. The implant 3100 has a main body 3101. The main body 3101 includes a spacer 3102, a first wing 3108, a lead-in tissue expander 3106 (also referred to herein as a distraction guide) and an alignment track 3103. The main body 3101 is inserted between adjacent spinous processes. Preferably, the main body 3101 remains (where desired) in place without attachment to the bone or ligaments.
  • The distraction guide 3106 includes a tip from which the distraction guide 3106 expands, the tip having a diameter sufficiently small such that the tip can pierce an opening in an interspinous ligament and/or can be inserted into a small initial dilated opening. The diameter and/or cross-sectional area of the distraction guide 3106 then gradually increases until it is substantially similar to the diameter of the main body 3101 and spacer 3102. The tapered front end eases the ability of a physician to urge the implant 3100 between adjacent spinous processes. When urging the main body 3101 between adjacent spinous processes, the front end of the distraction guide 3106 distracts the adjacent spinous processes and dilates the interspinous ligament so that a space between the adjacent spinous processes is approximately the diameter of the spacer 3102.
  • The shape of the spacer 3102 is such that for purposes of insertion between the spinous processes, the spinous processes need not be altered or cut away in order to accommodate the spacer 3102. Additionally, associated ligaments need not be cut away and there is little or no damage to the adjacent or surrounding tissues. As shown in FIG. 32, the spacer 3102 is elliptically shaped in cross-section, and can swivel about a central body (also referred to herein as a shaft) extending from the first wing 3108 so that the spacer 3102 can self-align relative to the uneven surfaces of the spinous processes. Self-alignment can ensure that compressive loads are distributed across the surface of the bone. As contemplated in Zucherman '842, the spacer 3102 can have, for example, a diameter of six millimeters, eight millimeters, ten millimeters, twelve millimeters and fourteen millimeters. These diameters refer to the height by which the spacer distracts and maintains apart the spinous process. For an elliptically shaped spacer, the selected height (i.e., diameter) is the minor dimension measurement across the ellipse. The major dimension is transverse to the alignment of the spinous process, one above the other.
  • The first wing 3108 has a lower portion 3113 and an upper portion 3112. As shown in FIG. 32, the upper portion 3112 is shaped to accommodate the anatomical form or contour of spinous processes (and/or laminae) of the L4 (for an L4-L5 placement) or L5 (for an L5-S1 placement) vertebra. The same shape or variations of this shape can be used to accommodate other motion segments. The lower portion 3113 can also be rounded to accommodate the spinous processes. The lower portion 3113 and upper portion 3112 of the first wing 3108 act as a stop mechanism when the implant 3100 is inserted between adjacent spinous processes. The implant 3100 cannot be inserted beyond the surfaces of the first wing 3108. Additionally, once the implant 3100 is inserted, the first wing 3108 can prevent side-to-side, or posterior-to-anterior movement of the implant 3100. The first wing 3108 can further include one or more alignment holes 3103 and one or more locking pin holes 3104 for receiving pins of a main body insertion instrument (not shown).
  • The implant 3100 further includes an adjustable wing 3150 (also referred to herein as a second wing). The adjustable wing 3150 has a lower portion 3152 and an upper portion 3153. Similar to the first wing 3108, the adjustable wing 3150 is designed to accommodate the anatomical form or contour of the spinous processes and/or lamina. The adjustable wing 3150 is secured to the main body 3101 with a fastener 3154. The adjustable wing 3150 also has an alignment tab 3158. When the adjustable wing 3150 is initially placed on the main body 3101, the alignment tab 3158 engages the alignment track 3103. The alignment tab 3158 slides within the alignment track 3103 and helps to maintain the adjustable wing 3150 substantially parallel with the first wing 3108. When the main body 3101 is inserted into the patient and the adjustable wing 3150 has been attached, the adjustable wing 3150 also can prevent side-to-side, or posterior-to-anterior movement. FIG. 33A illustrates an implant 3100 positioned between adjacent spinous processes extending from vertebrae of the lumbar region. The implant 3100 is positioned between inferior articular processes 10 associated with the upper vertebrae and superior articular processes 12 associated with the lower vertebrae. The superspinous ligament 6 connects the upper and lower spinous processes 2,4. The implant 3100 can be positioned without severing or otherwise destructively disturbing the superspinous ligament 6.
  • Referring to FIG. 33B, the spacer 3102 of the implant 3100 of FIG. 33A is shown in cross-section. The spacer 3102 defines a minimum space between adjacent spinous processes 2,4.
  • During extension the spacer 3102 limits or blocks relative movement between the adjacent spinous processes 2,4, limiting or blocking the collapse of the space between the spinous processes 2,4. Such support can alleviate symptoms of degenerative disorders by preventing a reduction of the foraminal area and compression of the nerve roots, or by avoiding aggravation of a herniated disk, or by relieving other problems. However, as shown in FIG. 33C, the implant 3100 permits flexion, which in some degenerative disorders (for example in cases of spinal stenosis) can relieve some symptoms. As can be seen, during flexion the spacer 3102 can float between the spinous processes, held in position by the interspinous ligament 8, and/or other tissues and structures associated with the spine. The ability to float between the spinous processes 2,4 also permits varying degrees of rotation, as well as flexion. Implants as described in Zucherman '842 thus have the advantage that they permit a greater degree of movement when compared with primary and supplementary spinal fusion devices.
  • In some circumstances, for example where a patient develops spondylosis or other degenerative disorder that makes both flexion and extension painful and uncomfortable, it can be desired that the spinous processes be further immobilized, while providing the same ease of implantation as provided with implants described above. Referring to FIG. 34A, an embodiment of an implant 3300 in accordance with the present invention is shown. The implant 3300 includes a distraction guide 3306, a spacer 3302, and a brace 3308. As shown, the spacer 3302 is rotatable about a central body 3301 extending from the brace 3302, although in other embodiments the spacer 3302 can be fixed is position. A binder 3330 can be fixedly connected with the brace 3308 at a proximal end 3332 of the binder 3330. The binder 3330 is flexible, or semi-flexible, and can be positioned around adjacent spinous processes so that the binder 3308 engages the spinous processes during flexion of the spine. Once positioned around adjacent spinous processes, tension of the binder 3330 can be set when the binder 3330 is secured to the brace 3308 so that relative movement of the adjacent spinous processes during flexion is limited or prevented, as desired.
  • As can be seen in FIG. 34A, in an embodiment the brace 3308 can include a first end having a slot 3341 through which the proximal end 3332 of the binder 3330 can be threaded and subsequently sutured, knotted or otherwise bound so that the proximal end 3332 of the binder 3330 cannot be drawn through the slot 3341. In other embodiments (not shown), the proximal end 3332 can be looped or can include a connector, such as a clasp or other device, and can be fixed to the brace 3308 via a fastener that engages the connector. One of ordinary skill in the art can appreciate the myriad different ways in which the proximal end 3332 of the binder 3330 can be associated with the brace 3308 so that tension can be applied to the binder 3330, and implants in accordance with the present invention are not intended to be limited to those schemes described in detail herein. The brace 3308 can include a height along the spine greater than a height of the spacer 3302 so that movement along a longitudinal axis L in the direction of insertion is limited or blocked by the brace 3308 when the brace 3308 contacts the lateral surfaces of the spinous processes. In this way, the brace 3308 can function similarly to the wing 3108 of the above described implant 3300. In other embodiments, the brace 3308 can have a height greater or smaller than as shown. Once the binder 3330 is positioned around the spinous processes and secured, movement of the implant 3300 relative to the spinous processes is limited by the binder 3330 along the longitudinal axis as well as along the spinous processes (i.e., anterior-to-posterior movement).
  • A free end of the binder 3330 can be secured to the brace 3308 by a capture device 3320 associated with the brace 3308. The brace 3308 can include a flange 3310 from which the capture device 3320 can extend, hi the embodiment shown in FIG. 34A, the capture device 3320 comprises a rotatable cam 3321 having a fastener 3322 and one or more cut-outs 3324. A tool can be mated with the cut-outs 3324 and rotated to pivot the rotatable cam 3321. When the cam 3321 is rotated, the eccentric shape of the cam 3321 causes a gap to close between the cam 3321 and a wall 3314 of the brace 3330 from which the flange 3310 extends. When the binder 3330 is positioned between the cam 3321 and the wall 3314, the rotation of the cam 3321 can pinch the binder 3330 between the cam 3321 and the wall 3314, defining a secured end 3336 of the binder 3330. Optionally, the fastener 3322 can be screwed (i.e., rotated) so that the fastener 3322 is further seated, tightening against the cam 3321 to fix the cam 3321 in position. Further, optionally, one or both of the wall 3314 and the rotatable cam 3321 can include knurls, or some other texture (e.g., teeth) to prevent slippage (i.e., the slipping of the binder 3330 between the cam 3321 and the wall 3314). The brace 3308 can further include a guide 3312, such as a channel or slot (a slot as shown) at a second end of the brace 3308 to align the binder 3330 with the capture device 3320. The binder 3330 can comprise a strap, ribbon, tether, cord, or some other flexible (or semi-flexible), and preferably threadable structure. The binder 3330 can be made from a biocompatible material, hi an embodiment, the binder 3330 can be made from a braided polyester suture material. Braided polyester suture materials include, for example, Ethibond, Ethiflex, Mersilene, and Dacron, and are nonabsorbable, having high tensile strength, low tissue reactivity and improved handling. In other embodiments, the binder 3330 can be made from stainless steel (i.e., surgical steel), which can be braided into a tether or woven into a strap, for example. In still other embodiments, the binder 3330 can be made from some other material (or combination of materials) having similar properties.
  • The distraction guide 3306 can optionally include a slot, bore, cut-out or other cavity 3309 formed in the distraction guide 3306 through which the binder 3330 can be threaded or positioned. Such a cavity can allow on-axis positioning of the binder 3330 (i.e., the binder can be substantially aligned with the longitudinal axis L of the implant 3300). Further, capturing the binder 3330 within a slot or bore can prevent or limit shifting of the distraction guide 3306 relative to the binder 3330 to further secure the implant 3300 between the spinous processes.
  • As will be readily apparent to one of skill in the art, implants in accordance with the present invention provide significant benefits to a physician by simplifying an implantation procedure and reducing procedure time, while providing an implant that can limit or block flexion and extension of the spine. A physician can position an implant between adjacent spinous processes and can position a binder 3330 connected with the brace 3308 around the spinous processes without requiring the physician to measure an appropriate length of the binder 3330 prior to implantation. The capture device 3320 allows the binder 3330 to be secured to the brace 3308 anywhere along a portion of the binder 3330, the portion being between a distal end 3334 of the binder 3330 and the proximal end 3332. The physician can secure the binder 3330 to the brace 3308 to achieve the desired range of movement (if any) of the spinous processes during flexion.
  • The capture device 3320 and brace 3308 can have alternative designs to that shown in FIG. 34A. A side view of an implant 3400 in accordance with an alternative embodiment of the present invention is shown in FIG. 34B, the implant 3400 including a capture device 3420 comprising a cam 3421 positioned within a ring 3426 having one or more lobes 3423 corresponding with one or more recesses 3413 in a wall 3414 of the brace 3408. The binder 3330 is positioned between the capture device 3420 and the brace 3408. Once the binder 3330 is positioned as desired, the fastener 3422 and cam 3421 can be rotated using an appropriate tool, with the cam 3421 forcing the lobes 3423 of the ring 3426 to mate with the recesses 3413 of the brace 3408, preventing the ring 3426 from shifting in position and defining a secure end 3336 of the binder 3330. Rotating the fastener 3422 rotates and optionally tightens down the cam 3421. Such a capture device 3420 can provide a physician a visual indication that the binder 3330 is properly secured to the brace 3408, as well as preventing slippage.
  • Referring to FIGS. 34C and 34D, in still other embodiments, the implant can include a capture device comprising a spring-loaded mechanism. FIG. 34C illustrates an implant 3500 including a capture device 3520 comprising a single spring-loaded cam 3521 pivotally connected with the flange 3310 and biased to rotate in one direction. The distance between the pivot point of the cam 3510 and the wall 3314 is sufficiently narrow that the rotation of the cam 3521 in the direction of bias is blocked (or nearly blocked) by the wall 3314. The eccentricity of the cam 3521 is large enough that a maximum gap between the wall 3314 and the cam 3521 is sufficiently wide as to allow the binder 3330 to be threaded between the cam 3521 and the wall 3314. A physician can position the binder 3330 between the cam 3521 and the wall 3514 by overcoming the spring-force of the spring-loaded cam 3521. Once the binder 3330 is position as desired, the physician need only allow the bias force of the spring-loaded cam 3520 to force the cam 3521 against the wall 3314, so that the cam 3521 pinches and secures the binder 3330 between the cam 3521 and the wall 3314. Optionally, one or both of the cam 3521 and the wall 3314 can be knurled or otherwise textured to limit or prevent slippage. Further, the wall 3314 can optionally include a recess (not shown) to receive the cam 3521 so that the binder 3330 is pinched within the recess (similar to the lobe and recess arrangement of FIG. 34B), thereby further limiting slippage. FIG. 34D illustrates an implant 3600 including a capture device 3620 comprising dual spring-loaded cams 3621, the dual spring-loaded cams 3621 being pivotally connected with the flange 3310. The dual spring-loaded cams 3621 are biased in opposition to one another so that the cams 3621 abut one another, similar to cam cleats commonly used for securing rope lines on boats. During surgery, the binder 3330 can be loosely positioned around the adjacent spinous processes and threaded between the cams 3621. Tension can be applied to the binder 3330, as desired, by drawing the binder 3330 through the cams 3621. The force of the binder 3330 being pulled through the cams 3621 can overcome the bias force to allow the binder 3330 to be tightened, while releasing the binder 3330 can define a secure end 3336 of the binder 3330 as the cams 3621 swivel together. As above, one or both of the cams 3621 can be knurled or otherwise textured to limit or prevent slippage.
  • Embodiments of implants have been described in FIGS. 34A-34D with some level of specificity; however, implants in accordance with the present invention should not be construed as being limited to such embodiments. Any number of different capture devices can be employed to fix a binder to a brace by defining a secure end of the binder, and such capture devices should not be construed as being limited to capture devices including cams, as described above. The capture device need only be a device that allows a physician to fit a binder having a generic size, or estimated size, around adjacent spinous processes with a desired level of precision in tension.
  • FIGS. 35A and 35B are an opposite end views of the implant of FIG. 34A positioned between adjacent spinous processes extending from vertebrae of the lumbar region. The contours of a space between adjacent spinous processes can vary between patients, and between motion segments. A rotatable spacer 3302 can rotate to best accommodate the shape of the space so that the implant 3300 can be positioned as desired along the spinous processes. For example, it can be desirable to position the spacer 3302 as close to the vertebral bodies as possible (or as close to the vertebral bodies as practicable) to provide improved support. Once the implant 3300 is positioned as desired, the binder 3330 can be threaded through interspinous ligaments associated with motion segments (i.e., pairs of adjacent vertebrae and associated structures and tissues) above and below the targeted motion segment so that the binder 3330 is arranged around the upper and lower spinous processes 2,4. The binder 3330 can then be threaded through the slot 3312 of the brace 3308 and positioned between the capture device 3320 and the brace wall 3314. A first tool (not shown) can be inserted into the incision formed to insert the implant 3300 between the spinous processes 2,4. Though not shown, the spacer 3302 can include a notch, similar to a notch 3190 of the spacer 3102 of FIG. 32, and the brace 3308 can include recesses, similar to recesses 103,104 of the first wing 3108 of FIG. 32, that can be engaged by the first tool for grasping and releasing the implant 3300 during insertion. (See U.S. Pat. No. 6,712,819, which is incorporated herein by reference). Alternatively, some other technique for grasping and releasing the implant 3300 can be employed. Once the implant 3300 is positioned and the binder 3330 is arranged as desired, a second tool (not shown), such as a forked tool having spaced apart tines, can engage the cam 3321 of the capture device 3320 to rotate the cam 3321, thereby securing the binder 3330 to the brace 3308. A hex wrench can tighten down the fastener 3322 if desired. Alternatively, a single tool can be employed to perform both the function of insertion of the implant 3300 and rotation of the cam 3321, as depicted in the above referenced patent. Optionally, the binder 3330 can then be trimmed so that the distal end 3334 of the binder 3330 does not extend undesirably away from the brace 3308.
  • As can be seen, the spacer 3302 is rotated relative to the distraction guide 3306 and the brace 3308. Because the spacer 3302 can rotate relative to the distraction guide 3306 and the brace 3308, the brace 3308 can be positioned so that the binder 3330 can be arranged around the upper and lower spinous processes 2,4 without twisting the binder 3330. The binder 3330 is positioned around the lower spinous process 4, threaded or positioned at least partially within a slot 3309 of the distraction guide 3306, and positioned around the upper spinous process 2 so that the binder 3330 can be secured to the brace 3308, as described above.
  • Implants in accordance with the present invention can enable a physician to limit or block flexion and extension in a targeted motion segment while minifying invasiveness of an implantation procedure (relative to implantation procedures of the prior art). However, such implants can also be used where more extensive implantation procedures are desired. For example, as shown in FIG. 35C, it can be desired that the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 be surgically modified to receive the binder 3330, thereby insuring that the binder 3330 does not shift or slide relative to the spinous processes 2,4. The binder 3330 is threaded directly through the respective spinous processes 2,4 rather than through the interspinous ligaments of adjacent motion segments. The amount of bone removed from the spinous processes 2,4 can be reduced where a cord or tether is used as a binder 3330 rather than a strap. While such applications fall within the contemplated scope of implants and methods of implantation of the present invention, such application may not realize the full benefit that can be achieved using such implants due to the modification of the bone.
  • Still another embodiment of an implant 3700 in accordance with the present invention is shown in the end view of FIG. 36. In such an embodiment the binder 3430 can comprise a first portion 3431 formed as a strap for arrangement around one of the upper and lower spinous processes 2,4, and that tapers to a second portion 3433 formed as a cord. The distraction guide 3406 can include a bore 3409 or other cavity for receiving the second portion 3433. As can be seen in FIG. 37A, once the binder 3430 is threaded through the distraction guide 3406, a pad 3436 of biocompatible material can be associated with the binder 3430, for example by slidably threading the binder 3430 through a portion of the pad 3436, and the pad 3436 can be arranged between the binder 3430 and the respective spinous process 2 so that a load applied by the binder 3430 is distributed across a portion of the surface of the spinous process 2. Referring to FIG. 37B, once the binder 3430 is arranged as desired relative to the adjacent spinous processes 2,4, the binder 3330 can be secured by the brace 3708. The brace 3708 as shown is still another embodiment of a brace for use with implants of the present invention, hi such an embodiment, the brace 3708 includes a capture device 3720 comprising a clip including a spring-loaded button 3721 having a first hole therethrough and a shell 3723 in which the button 3721 is disposed, the shell 3723 having a second hole. A physician depresses the button 3721 so that the first and second holes align. The binder 3430 can then be threaded through the holes, and the button 3721 can be released so that the spring forces the holes to misalign, pinching the binder 3430 and defining a secure end of the binder 3430.
  • FIG. 37C is an end view of a still further embodiment of an implant 3800 in accordance with the present invention, hi such an embodiment the binder 3530 can comprise a cord. An upper pad 3536 and a lower pad 3538 can be slidably associated with the binder 3530 and arranged so that a load applied by the binder 3530 is distributed across a portion of the upper and lower spinous processes 2,4. As can be seen, such an embodiment can include a brace 3808 having a substantially different shape than braces previously described. It should be noted that the brace 3808 of FIG. 37C is shown, in part, to impress upon one of ordinary skill in the art that a brace and capture device for use with implants of the present invention can include myriad different shapes, mechanisms and arrangements, and that the present invention is meant to include all such variations. As shown, the footprint of the brace 3808 is reduced by shaping the wall 3814 of the brace 3808 to taper at an upper end to form a guide 3812 for aligning the binder 3530 and to taper at a lower end to an eyelet 3841 for capturing a proximal end 3532 of the binder 3530. The brace 3808 includes a height from eyelet 3841 to guide 3812 such that movement of the implant 3800 in the direction of insertion is blocked or limited by the brace 3808.
  • Use of a binder to limit or prevent flexion can provide an additional benefit of limiting movement along the longitudinal axis L (shown in FIG. 34A). However, implants in accordance with the present invention can optionally further include a second wing for limiting or blocking movement in the direction opposite insertion. Inclusion of such a structure can ensure that the implant remains in position, for example where the binder slips out of a slot of the distraction guide, or where the binder becomes unsecured.
  • Referring to FIG. 38A, an implant in accordance with an embodiment can include a second wing 3450 connected with the distraction guide 3406 of the implant 3900 by a fastener 3454. The second wing 3450 is similar to the second wing 3150 described above in reference to FIG. 32. The second wing 3450 can include an alignment tab 3458 allowing a position of the second wing 3450 to be adjusted along a longitudinal axis L of the implant 3900, and a fastener 3454 (for example a hex headed bolt) for affixing the second wing 3450 to the implant 3900 in the position along the longitudinal axis L desired. The distraction guide 3406 can include an alignment groove (not shown) corresponding to the alignment tab 3458. The alignment tab 3458 fits within, and is movable along, the alignment groove so that a contact surface 3455 of the second wing 3450 can be arranged as desired. As shown, the second wing 3450 includes a substantially planar contact surface arranged so that the contact surface 3455 of the second wing 3450 is perpendicular to the longitudinal axis L. However, in other embodiments, the contact surface 3455 need not be planar, and can be shaped and oriented to roughly correspond with a contact surface of the upper and lower spinous processes. Likewise, a contact surface 3315 of the binder 3308 can be shaped and oriented to roughly correspond with a contact surface of the upper and lower spinous processes. As shown, the upper portion 3453 and the lower portion 3452 of the second wing 3450 do not extend from the distraction guide 3406 as substantially as the upper portion 3153 and lower portion 3152 of the second wing 3150 of FIG. 32. As such, the second wing 3450 includes a height H along the spine smaller than that of the second wing 3150 of FIG. 32. It has been observed that benefits can be gained by including a wing 3450, though the wing 3450 does not extend from the distraction guide 3406 as significantly as shown in FIG. 32 (i.e., the wing 3450 includes “nubs” extending above and/or below the height of the spacer 3302). Such wings 3450 will also be referred to herein as winglets. Including a second wing 3450 having an overall height along the spine smaller than that of FIG. 32 can limit movement along the longitudinal axis without interfering with (or being interfered by) the arrangement of the binder 3330.
  • In other embodiments, implants in accordance with the present invention can include a second wing (or an upper portion and/or lower portion) extendable from the distraction guide. In this way an implant and a device for limiting or blocking movement along a longitudinal axis of the implant can be included in a single piece, possibly simplifying implantation. Referring to FIGS. 38B and 38C, implants 1500 in accordance with the present invention can include a distraction guide 3506 having a selectably extendable upper portion 3553 and lower portion 3552 disposed within a cavity of the distraction guide 3506. The upper and lower portions 3553,3552 can be extended by actuating a nut, knob or other mechanism operably associated with a gear 3556 so that the gear 3556 rotates. The teeth of the gear 3556 engage teeth of the upper and lower portions 3553,3552, causing the upper and lower portions 3553,3552 to extend sufficiently that the upper and lower portions 3553,3552 form winglets for preventing motion of the implant 1500 in a direction opposite insertion (shown in FIG. 38C). Rotating the gear 3556 in an opposite direction can retract the upper and lower portions 3553,3552.
  • In an alternative embodiment, implants 1600 in accordance with the present invention can include spring-loaded upper and/or lower portions 3653,3652 such as shown in FIGS. 38D and 38E. In such an embodiment the upper and lower portions 3653,3652 can be fin-shaped, having sloping forward surfaces 3655,3654 and being spring-biased to an extended position, as shown in FIG. 38D. As the implant 1600 is positioned between adjacent spinous processes, the spinous processes and/or related tissues can contact the forward surface 3655,3654 of the upper and lower portions 3653,3652, causing the upper and lower portions 3653,3652 to pivot about respective hinge points 3657,3656 and collapse into cavities disposed within the distraction guide 3606, as shown in FIG. 38E. Once the implant 1600 clears the obstruction, the upper and lower portions 3653,3652 re-extend out of the distraction guide 3650. A slot and pin mechanism 3660,3661 or other mechanism can lock the upper and lower portion 3653,3652 in place once extended, disallowing over-extension of the upper and lower portion 3653,3652 in the direction of bias. The extended upper and lower portions 3653,3652 limit or block movement of the implant 1600 in an a direction opposite insertion.
  • In still further embodiments, implants in accordance with the present invention can optionally employ some other additional mechanism for limiting or blocking motion along the longitudinal axis of the implant. Mechanisms shown and described in FIGS. 38A-38E are merely provided as examples of possible mechanisms for use with such implants, and are not intended to be limiting.
  • FIG. 39 is a top-down view of still another embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention including a brace 3708 arranged at an angle along the spinous process relative to the longitudinal axis L of the implant 1700. The brace 3708 is arranged at such an angle to roughly correspond to a general shape of the adjacent spinous processes. Such a general shape can commonly be found in spinous processes extending from vertebrae of the cervical and thoracic region, for example. The implant 1700 further includes a second wing 3752 extending from distraction guide 3706 at an angle roughly corresponding to a general shape of the adjacent spinous processes. Identical implants 1700, one above the other, are shown. The lower implant 1700 includes a binder 3330 arranged around the adjacent spinous processes (only the upper spinous process is shown) and positioned in a slot 3309 of the distraction guide 3706. The binder 3330 includes a capture device 3320 for securing the binder 3330 to the brace 3708, and a channel formed by guides 3712 on the brace 3708 for aligning the binder 3330 with the capture device 3320. Unlike previously illustrated embodiments, the brace wall includes a recess 3717 to accommodate rotation of the rotatable spacer 3302. Alternatively, the implants can include fixed spacers, for example integrally formed with the brace 3708 and the distraction guide 3706.
  • FIGS. 40A and 40B are perspective views, and FIG. 40C is a side view of a still further embodiment of an implant in accordance with the present invention. The implant 2600 includes a distraction guide 806, a rotatable spacer 3302, and a brace 3908. As above, a binder 3330 can be fixedly connected with the brace 3908 at a proximal end 3332 of the binder 3330. Once positioned around adjacent spinous processes, tension of the binder 3330 can be set when the binder 3330 is secured to the brace 3908 so that relative movement of the adjacent spinous processes during flexion is limited or prevented, as desired.
  • As can be seen in FIG. 40A, the brace 33908 can include a first end having an eyelet 3941 through which the proximal end 3332 of the binder 3330 can be threaded and subsequently sutured, knotted or otherwise bound, or alternatively looped through the eyelet 3941 and secured to itself (e.g., using a clasp) so that the proximal end 3332 of the binder 3330 cannot be drawn through the eyelet 3941. One of ordinary skill in the art can appreciate the myriad different ways in which the proximal end 3332 of the binder 3330 can be associated with the brace 3908 so that tension can be applied to the binder 3330. As in previous embodiments, a free end of the binder 3330 can be secured to the brace 3908 by a capture device 3820 associated with the brace 3908. The capture device 3820 of FIGS. 40A-42 is arranged at a second end of the brace 3908 opposite the eyelet 3941, rather than approximately centered along the brace wall 3914. The brace 3908 can optionally include a locking pin hole 3915 that can be engaged by a locking pin of an insertion instrument (not shown), for example as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,712,819 to Zucherman, et al., incorporated herein by reference. Further, similar to implants described in Zucherman '819, the brace wall 3914 can optionally include one or more holes 3916 (shown in FIG. 42) adapted to receive alignment pins of such an insertion instrument, and the spacer 3402 can include a spacer engagement hole 3403 adapted to receive a spacer engagement pin of such an insertion instrument. When a spacer engagement pin engages the spacer engagement hole 3403, rotation of the spacer 3402 can be limited or blocked. Once the spacer engagement pin is released from the spacer engagement hole 3403, the spacer 3402 can rotate and/or swivel about a central body 3917 without impedance from the spacer engagement pin. Such an arrangement can provide a physician additional control over the positioning of the implant 2600, although in other embodiments the spacer 3402 need not include an engagement hole 3403. Arranging the captured device 3820 at a second end of the brace 3908 can allow an insertion instrument, having a configuration as described in Zucherman '819 or having some other configuration, to releasably engage the implant 2600 to assist in implantation without interference from the capture device 3820.
  • The distraction guide 3806 of the implant 2600 can be wedge-shaped, as described above, or approximately conical, as shown in FIGS. 40A-40C, and can include a slot 3809 disposed through the distraction guide 3806 and adapted to receive the binder 3330 during implantation. Also as described above, the rotatable spacer 3402 can be elliptical in cross-section, or otherwise shaped, and can rotate relative to the distraction guide 3806 to roughly conform with a contour of a space between the targeted adjacent spinous processes.
  • The capture device 3820 is shown in cross-section in FIGS. 41A and 41B. The capture device 3820 can comprise, for example, two pieces slidably associated with one another by an adjustable fastener 3822 (as shown, the adjustable fastener is a hex screw). A fixed piece 3821 of the capture device can extend from the brace wall 3914. The fixed piece 3821 can include a beveled surface 3823 that can function as a ramp. A slidable piece 3827 of the capture device can be slidably associated with the fixed piece 3821, and can likewise included a beveled surface 3829 positioned in opposition to the beveled surface 3823 of the fixed piece 3821. As shown, the slidable piece 3827 is associated with the fixed piece 3821 via an adjustable fastener 3822. The fastener 3822 can be positioned within slots 3890,3892 of the fixed piece 3821 and the slidable piece 3827 and can include a threaded shaft 3880, a head 3882, and a nut 3884. The head 3882 of the fastener 3822 can engage an anterior surface 3894 of the fixed piece 3821 and the nut 3884 can be threaded onto the threaded shaft 3880 so that the nut 3884 can engage a posterior surface 3896 of the slidable piece 3827. The slidable piece 3827 is free to slide along the beveled surface 3823 of the fixed piece 3821 until both the nut 3884 engages the posterior surface 3896 and the head 3882 engages the anterior surface 3894, blocking further movement in one direction. The distance between the anterior surface 3894 and the posterior surface 3896 increases or decreases as the slidable piece 3827 slides along the beveled surface 3823 and a distance between a capture surface 3898 of the slidable piece 3827 and the brace wall 3914 likewise increases or decreases. The maximum distance the slidable piece 3827 can travel can be defined by the distance between the nut 3884 and the head 3882. A physician can adjust the maximum distance by rotating the nut 3884 so that the nut 3884 travels closer to, or farther from the head 3882 along the threaded shaft 3880, possibly urging the capture surface 3898 toward the brace wall 3914. Thus, when the implant 2600 is positioned between spinous processes, the physician can set the maximum distance so that the free end of the binder 3330 can be threaded between the capture surface 3898 and the brace wall 3914. As shown in FIG. 41B, the physician can then adjust the fastener 3822 so that the posterior surface 3896 and the anterior surface 3894 are urged together, the maximum distance decreases and the distance between the capture surface 3898 and the brace wall 3914 decreases, thereby pinching the binder 3330 between the capture surface 3898 and the brace wall 3914 and defining a secure end of the binder 3330. In some embodiments, one or both of the capture surface 3898 and the brace wall 3914 can include texture so that the binder 3330 is further prevented from sliding when the binder 3330 is placed under increasing tension (e.g., during flexion).
  • The slidable piece 3827 can optionally further include a guide 3912 extending from the slidable piece 3827 so that the guide 3912 overlaps a portion of the brace 3908. The guide 3912 can extend, for example, a distance roughly similar to the maximum distance between the capture surface 3898 and the brace wall 3914, and can help ensure that the binder 3330 is captured between the capture surface 3898 and the brace wall 3914. In other embodiments, the capture device 3820 of FIGS. 40A-41B can include some other shape or configuration and still fall within the contemplated scope of the invention. For example, the fastener need not include a nut. In one embodiment, shown in FIGS. 41C and 41D, the fastener 3922 can include a threaded shaft 3980 associated with a sleeve 3984. As one of the threaded shaft 3980 and the sleeve 3984 is rotated, the distance between a head 3982 of the threaded shaft 3980 and the head 3985 of the sleeve 3984 can decrease or increase. In still other embodiments, the fastener need not include a threaded shaft, but rather can include a smooth shaft having a retaining clip frictionally associated with the smooth shaft. One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate the myriad different devices that can be employed to selectively close a gap between a capture surface 3898 and the brace wall 3914.
  • FIG. 42 is an end view of the implant 2600 of FIGS. 40A-41D positioned between adjacent spinous processes. As shown, the binder 3530 is a cord, but in other embodiments can have some other geometry. As described above in reference to previous embodiments, where a cord, a tether, or the like is used as a binder, a pad 3536 can be arranged along a contact surface of the respective spinous process so that a load applied to the contact surface by the tension in the binder 3530 can be distributed across a portion of the contact surface wider than the binder 3530, thereby reducing stress on the portion. The capture device 3820 is arranged so that the slidable piece 3827 is posteriorly located relative to the fixed piece 3821. A fastener 3822 can be accessed by the physician using a substantially posterior approach.
  • A method of surgically implanting an implant 2600 in accordance with an embodiment as described above in FIGS. 40A-42 of the present invention is shown as a block diagram in FIG. 43. The method can include forming an incision at the target motion segment, and enlarging the incision to access the target motion segment (Step 2700). The interspinous ligament between targeted adjacent spinous processes can then be distracted by piercing or displacing the interspinous ligament with the distraction guide 3106 (Step 2702) and urging the implant 2600 between the adjacent spinous processes (Step 2704). As the interspinous ligament is displaced, the spacer 3302 can be positioned between the spinous processes such that the spacer 3302 can rotate to assume a preferred position between the spinous processes (Step 2706).
  • Once the implant 2600 is positioned, the binder 3330 can be threaded between interspinous ligaments of adjacent motion segments so that the targeted adjacent spinous processes are disposed within a loop formed by the binder 3330 (Step 2708). The physician can then thread the binder 3330 between the capture surface 3898 of the capture device 3820 and the brace wall 3914 (Step 2710). Once a desired tension of the binder 3330 is applied (Step 2712), the physician can adjust the fastener 3822 of the capture device 3820 so that the binder 3330 is secured between the captured surface 3898 and the brace wall 3914 (Step 2714). The incision can subsequently be closed (Step 2716).
  • FIGS. 44A and 44B are perspective views of still another embodiment of an implant 5400 in accordance with the present invention. In such an embodiment, the implant 5400 can include a main body 3101 similar to the main body 3101 described above in reference to FIG. 32. As above, the main body 3101 (also referred to herein as a first unit) includes a spacer 3102, a first wing 3108, a distraction guide 3106 and an alignment track 3103. The main body 3101 is inserted between adjacent spinous processes. Preferably, the main body 3101 remains (where desired) in place without attachment to the bone or ligaments.
  • The alignment track 3103 includes a threaded hole for receiving a fastener. The alignment track 3103 need not include a threaded hole, but rather alternatively can include some other mechanism for fixedly connecting an additional piece (such as a second wing for limiting or blocking movement of an implant along the longitudinal axis). For example, in an alternative embodiment, the alignment track 5403 can include a flange so that the second wing 5450 can be slidably received, as shown in FIG. 46.
  • As further shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B, the implant 5400 includes a second wing 5450 removably connectable with the implant 5400. The second wing 5450 includes an alignment tab 5458 adapted to be received in the alignment track 3103 of the main body 3101, the alignment tab 5458 optionally including a slot for receiving the fastener so that the alignment tab 5458 is disposed between the fastener and the alignment track 3103. In alternative embodiments, the alignment tab 5458 need not include a slot but rather can include some other mechanism for mating with the main body 3101. The second wing 5450 can include a first end having a slot (or eyelet) 5441 through which the proximal end (also referred to herein as an anchored end) 3332 of a binder 3330 can be threaded and subsequently sutured, knotted or otherwise bound, or alternatively looped through the slot 5441 and secured to itself (e.g., using a clasp) so that the proximal end 3332 of the binder 3330 cannot be withdrawn through the slot 5441. One of ordinary skill in the art can appreciate the myriad different ways in which the proximal end 3332 of the binder 3330 can be associated with the second wing 5450 so that tension can be applied to the binder 3330. The binder 3330 can be disposed around adjacent spinous processes and a portion of the length of the binder 3330 (the length of the binder being that portion of the binder extending from the proximal end of the binder) can be secured to the second wing 5450 by a capture device 5420 associated with the second wing 5450.
  • The capture device 3820 of FIGS. 44A and 44B is arranged at a second end of the second wing 5450 opposite the slot 5441. The capture device 5420 can be substantially similar to capture devices 5420 as described above in reference to FIGS. 41A and 41B, and can comprise, for example, two pieces slidably associated with one another by an adjustable fastener. As above, a fixed piece 5421 of the capture device can extend from the second wing 5450. The fixed piece 5421 can include a beveled surface that can function as a ramp. A slidable piece 5427 of the capture device can be slidably associated with the fixed piece 5421 (for example, via the adjustable fastener) and can likewise included a beveled surface positioned in opposition to the beveled surface of the fixed piece 5421. As the slidable piece 5427 slides along the beveled surface of the fixed piece 5421, a distance between a capture surface 5498 of the slidable piece 5427 and the second wing 5450 increases or decreases. As above, the slidable piece 5427 can optionally further include a guide 5412 extending from the slidable piece 5427 so that the guide 5412 overlaps a portion of the second wing 5450. The guide 5412 can extend, for example, a distance roughly similar to the maximum distance between the capture surface 5498 and the second wing 5450, and can help ensure that the binder 3330 is arranged between the capture surface 5498 and the second wing 5450. A physician can position the binder 3330 so that the binder 3330 is disposed between adjacent spinous processes, threading the binder 3330 between the slidable piece 5427 and the second wing 5450. The physician can then adjust the fastener 5422 so that the distance between the capture surface 5498 and the second wing 5450 decreases, thereby pinching the binder 3330 between the capture surface 5498 and the second wing 5450 and defining a secure end of the binder 3330. In some embodiments, one or both of the capture surface 5498 and the second wing 5450 can include texture so that the binder 3330 is further prevented from sliding when the binder 3330 is placed under increasing tension (e.g., during flexion).
  • The implant 5400 can further include a binder aligner 5470 selectably connectable with the first wing 3108 of the main body 3101. The binder aligner 5470 can be connected with the first wing 3108 by fastening the binder aligner 5470 to the locking pin hole 3104 of the first wing 3108. In such embodiments where a fastener 5455 is used to connect the binder aligner 5470 with the first wing 3108 through a hole 5471 in the binder aligner 5470, it is desirable that the locking pin hole 3104 be threaded, or otherwise adapted to receive the fastener 5455. The locking pin hole 3104 can thus be adapted to function as a hole to slidably (and temporarily) receive a locking pin of an insertion tool (not shown), thereby facilitating insertion and positioning of the main body 3101, and can also be adapted to function to fixedly receive a fastener 5455 for positioning the binder aligner 5470. The binder aligner 5470 can optionally include pins 5474 corresponding to the alignment holes 3192 of the main body 3101 to further secure the binder aligner 5470 to the main body 3101 and limit undesired movement of the binder aligner 5470 relative to the main body 3101.
  • The binder aligner 5470 includes a guide 5472 extending from the binder aligner 5470 to limit or block shifting of the binder 3330 in a posterior-anterior direction. The guide 5472 can include a loop, as shown in FIG. 44A, or alternatively some other structure, closed or unclosed, for limiting or blocking shifting of the binder 3330. Such a structure can prevent undesired relative movement between the binder 3330 and the main body 3101, and can additionally ease arrangement of the binder 3330 during an implantation procedure, by helping to aid proper positioning of the binder 3330.
  • In other embodiments, the capture device of FIGS. 44A and 44B can include some other shape, configuration, and mechanism and still fall within the contemplated scope of the invention. For example, referring to FIG. 45, in other embodiments, a flange 5514 can extend from the second wing 5550, from which a rotatable cam 5521 extends so that the binder 3330 can be captured between the second wing 5550 and the cam 5521. Such a capture device can resemble capture devices 5520 as described above in FIGS. 34C and 34B. Referring to FIG. 46, in still other embodiments, a spring-loaded cam 5621 extends from the flange 5514 so that the binder 3330 can be captured between the second wing 5514 and the spring-loaded cam 5621. Such a capture device can resemble capture devices 5520 as described above in FIGS. 34C and 34D. In still further embodiments in accordance with the present invention, some other mechanism can be employed as a capture device associated with the second wing 5550 for securing the length of the binder 3330, for example as otherwise described in herein, and other obvious variations. One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate the myriad different mechanisms for securing the binder 3330 to the second wing 5450. A system in accordance with the present invention can comprise a second wing 5450 including a capture device 5420 as described above and optionally a binder aligner 5470. The system can be used with a main body 3101 in substitution for a second wing 3150 as described above in FIG. 32. Alternatively, the system can optionally be used to modify a main body 3101 previously implanted in a patient, for example by removing an existing second wing 3150 and replacing the second wing 3150 with the system, to additionally limit flexion as well as extension. Such a system can provide flexibility to a physician by allowing the physician to configure or reconfigure an implant according to the needs of a patient. Further, such a system can reduce costs by reducing the variety of components that need be manufactured to accommodate different procedures and different treatment goals. A method of surgically implanting an implant 5400 in accordance with an embodiment as described above in FIGS. 44A-46 of the present invention is shown as a block diagram in FIG. 47. The method can include forming an incision at the target motion segment, and enlarging the incision to access the target motion segment (Step 2700). The interspinous ligament between targeted adjacent spinous processes can then be distracted by piercing or displacing the interspinous ligament with the distraction guide 106 (Step 2702) and urging the implant 5400 between the adjacent spinous processes (Step 2704). As the interspinous ligament is displaced, the spacer 3102 can be positioned between the spinous processes such that the spacer 3102 can rotate to assume a preferred position between the spinous processes (Step 2706).
  • Once the implant 5400 is positioned, the second wing 5450 can be fixedly connected with the distraction guide 3106 (Step 2708). A binder 3330 associated with the second wing 5450 can be threaded between interspinous ligaments of adjacent motion segments so that the targeted adjacent spinous processes are disposed within a loop formed by the binder 3330 (Step 2710).
  • The physician can then thread the binder 3330 between the capture surface 5498 of the capture device 5420 and the second wing 5450 (Step 2712). Once a desired tension of the binder 3330 is applied (Step 2714), the physician can adjust the fastener 5422 of the capture device 5420 so that the binder 3330 is secured between the captured surface 5498 and the second wing 5450 (Step 2716). The incision can subsequently be closed (Step 2718).
  • Material for Use in Implants of the Present Invention
  • In some embodiments, the implant can be fabricated from medical grade metals such as titanium, stainless steel, cobalt chrome, and alloys thereof, or other suitable implant material having similar high strength and biocompatible properties. Additionally, the implant can be at least partially fabricated from a shape memory metal, for example Nitinol, which is a combination of titanium and nickel. Such materials are typically radiopaque, and appear during x-ray imaging, and other types of imaging. Implants in accordance with the present invention, and/or portions thereof can also be fabricated from somewhat flexible and/or deflectable material, m these embodiments, the implant and/or portions thereof can be fabricated in whole or in part from medical grade biocompatible polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers. A copolymer is a polymer derived from more than one species of monomer. A polymer composite is a heterogeneous combination of two or more materials, wherein the constituents are not miscible, and therefore exhibit an interface between one another. A polymer blend is a macroscopically homogeneous mixture of two or more different species of polymer. Many polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers are radiolucent and do not appear during x-ray or other types of imaging. Implants comprising such materials can provide a physician with a less obstructed view of the spine under imaging, than with an implant comprising radiopaque materials entirely. However, the implant need not comprise any radiolucent materials.
  • One group of biocompatible polymers is the polyaryletherketone group which has several members including polyetheretherketone (PEEK), and polyetherketoneketone (PEKK).
  • PEEK is proven as a durable material for implants, and meets the criterion of biocompatibility. Medical grade PEEK is available from Victrex Corporation of Lancashire, Great Britain under the product name PEEK-OPTIMA. Medical grade PEKK is available from Oxford Performance Materials under the name OXPEKK, and also from CoorsTek under the name BioPEKK. These medical grade materials are also available as reinforced polymer resins, such reinforced resins displaying even greater material strength, hi an embodiment, the implant can be fabricated from PEEK 450G, which is an unfilled PEEK approved for medical implantation available from Victrex. Other sources of this material include Gharda located in Panoli, India. PEEK 450G has the following approximate properties:
    Property Value
    Density 1.3 g/cc
    Rockwell M 99
    Rockwell R 126
    Tensile Strength 97 MPa
    Modulus of Elasticity 3.5 GPa
    Flexural Modulus 4.1 GPa
  • PEEK 450G has appropriate physical and mechanical properties and is suitable for carrying and spreading a physical load between the adjacent spinous processes. The implant and/or portions thereof can be formed by extrusion, injection, compression molding and/or machining techniques.
  • It should be noted that the material selected can also be filled. Fillers can be added to a polymer, copolymer, polymer blend, or polymer composite to reinforce a polymeric material. Fillers are added to modify properties such as mechanical, optical, and thermal properties. For example, carbon fibers can be added to reinforce polymers mechanically to enhance strength for certain uses, such as for load bearing devices. In some embodiments, other grades of PEEK are available and contemplated for use in implants in accordance with the present invention, such as 30% glass-filled or 30% carbon-filled grades, provided such materials are cleared for use in implantable devices by the FDA, or other regulatory body. Glass-filled PEEK reduces the expansion rate and increases the flexural modulus of PEEK relative to unfilled PEEK. The resulting product is known to be ideal for improved strength, stiffness, or stability. Carbon-filled PEEK is known to have enhanced compressive strength and stiffness, and a lower expansion rate relative to unfilled PEEK. Carbon-filled PEEK also offers wear resistance and load carrying capability.
  • As will be appreciated, other suitable similarly biocompatible thermoplastic or thermoplastic polycondensate materials that resist fatigue, have good memory, are flexible, and/or deflectable, have very low moisture absorption, and good wear and/or abrasion resistance, can be used without departing from the scope of the invention. As mentioned, the implant can be comprised of polyetherketoneketone (PEKK). Other material that can be used include polyetherketone (PEK), polyetherketoneetherketoneketone (PEKEKK), polyetheretherketoneketone (PEEKK), and generally a polyaryletheretherketone. Further, other polyketones can be used as well as other thermoplastics. Reference to appropriate polymers that can be used in the implant can be made to the following documents, all of which are incorporated herein by reference. These documents include: PCT Publication WO 02/02158 A1, dated Jan. 10, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials;” PCT Publication WO 02/00275 A1, dated Jan. 3, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials;” and, PCT Publication WO 02/00270 A1, dated Jan. 3, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials.” Other materials such as Bionate®, polycarbonate urethane, available from the Polymer Technology Group, Berkeley, Calif., may also be appropriate because of the good oxidative stability, biocompatibility, mechanical strength and abrasion resistance. Other thermoplastic materials and other high molecular weight polymers can be used.
  • As described above, the binder can be made from a biocompatible material. In an embodiment, the binder can be made from a braided polyester suture material. Braided polyester suture materials include, for example, Ethibond, Ethiflex, Mersilene, and Dacron, and are nonabsorbable, having high tensile strength, low tissue reactivity and improved handling. In other embodiments, the binder can be made from stainless steel (i.e., surgical steel), which can be braided into a tether or woven into a strap, for example. In still other embodiments, the binder can be made from some other material (or combination of materials) having similar properties. The foregoing description of the present invention have been presented for purposes of illustration and description. It is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations will be apparent to practitioners skilled in this art. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the invention and its practical application, thereby enabling others skilled in the art to understand the invention for various embodiments and with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated. It is intended that the scope of the invention be defined by the following claims and their equivalents.
  • Interspinous Implants
  • FIG. 48A is a perspective view of an implant as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/850,267, filed May 20, 2004, incorporated herein by reference. The implant 4100 comprises a first wing 4130, a spacer 4120, and a lead-in tissue expander (also referred to herein as a distraction guide) 4110.
  • The distraction guide 4110 in this particular embodiment is wedge-shaped, i.e., the implant has an expanding cross-section from a proximal end of the implant 100 to a region 4150 where the guide 4110 joins with the spacer 4120 (referencing for the figures is based on the point of insertion of the implant between spinous processes). As such, the distraction guide 4110 functions to initiate distraction of the soft tissue and the spinous processes when the implant 4100 is surgically inserted between the spinous processes. It is to be understood that the distraction guide 4110 can be pointed and the like, in order to facilitate insertion of the implant 4100 between the spinous processes of adjacent cervical vertebrae. It is advantageous that the insertion technique disturb as little of the bone and surrounding tissue or ligaments as possible in order to reduce trauma to the site and promote early healing, and prevent destabilization of the normal anatomy. For embodiments such as those of FIGS. 48A and 48B, there is no requirement to remove any of the bone of the spinous processes and no requirement to sever, or remove from the body, ligaments and tissues immediately associated with the spinous processes. For example, it is unnecessary to sever the supraspinal ligament of the lower vertebrae or the ligamentum nuchae (which corresponds to the supraspinal ligament) which partially cushions the spinous processes of the upper cervical vertebrae.
  • As can be seen, the spacer 4120 can be teardrop-shaped in cross-section perpendicular to a longitudinal axis 4125 of the implant 4100. In this way, the shape of the spacer 4120 can roughly conform to a wedge-shaped space, or a portion of the space, between adjacent spinous processes within which the implant 4100 is to be positioned. As shown in FIG. 48A, the spacer 4120 (and the first wing 4108) is shaped to accommodate the anatomical form or contour of spinous processes (and/or laminae) of preferably the C6 and C7 vertebra for placement between such spinous processes (i.e., the C6-C7 motion segment). The same shape or variations of this shape can be used to accommodate other motion segments, for example in the thoracic or lumbar regions. In other embodiments the spacer 4120 can have alternative shapes such as circular, wedge, oval, ovoid, football, and rectangular with rounded corners, and other shapes. The shape of the spacer 4120 can be selected for a particular patient so that the physician can position the implant 4100 as close as possible to the anterior portion of the surface of the spinous process. The shape selected for the spacer 4120 can affect the contact surface area of the implant 4100 and the spinous processes that are to be subject to distraction. Increasing the contact surface area between the implant 4100 and the spinous processes can distribute a load force between the spinous frame and the implant 4100.
  • The first wing 4130 is likewise teardrop-shaped in cross-section perpendicular to a longitudinal axis 4125 of the spacer 4120 and distraction guide 4110. The dimensions of the first wing 4130 can be larger than that of the spacer 4120, particularly along the axis of the spine, and can limit or block lateral displacement of the implant 4100 in the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 4125. As with the spacer 4120, the first wing 4130 can have other cross-sectional shapes, such as elliptical, wedge, circular, oval, ovoid, football, and rectangular with rounded corners and other shapes.
  • The implant 4100 of FIG. 48A further includes an adjustable wing 4160 (also referred to herein as a second wing) separate from the distraction guide 4110, the spacer 4120 and the first wing 4130. The second wing 4160 is connectable with the distraction guide 4110 (and/or the spacer 4120) once the implant 4100 is positioned between adjacent spinous processes. The second wing 4160, similar to the first wing 4130, can limit or block lateral displacement of the implant 4100, however displacement is limited or blocked in the direction opposite insertion. When both the first wing 4130 and the second wing 4160 are connected with the implant 4100 and the implant 4100 is positioned between adjacent spinous processes, a portion of the spinous processes can be sandwiched between the first wing 4130 and the second wing 4160, limiting displacement along the longitudinal axis 4125. As can be seen, the second wing 4160 can be teardrop-shaped in cross-section. A lip 4180 defining a space 4170 through the second wing 4160 allows the second wing 4160 to pass over the distraction guide 4110 to meet and connect with the distraction guide 4110 and/or the spacer 4120. The second wing 4160 is then secured to the distraction guide 4110 and/or the spacer 4120. The second wing 4160, can be designed to be interference-fit onto the spacer 4120 or a portion of the distraction guide 4110 adjacent to the spacer 4120. Where the second wing 4160 is interference-fit, there is no additional attachment device to fasten the second wing 4160 relative to the remainder of the implant 4100.
  • Alternatively, various fasteners can be used to secure the second wing 4160 relative to the remainder of the implant 4100. For example, FIG. 48A illustrates an embodiment of an implant 4100 including a teardrop-shaped second wing 4160 having a tongue 4158 at the posterior end of the second wing 4160. A bore 4155 is disposed through the tongue 4158, and is aligned with a corresponding bore 4156 on the spacer 4120 when the second wing 4160 is brought into position by surgical insertion relative to the rest of the implant 4100. A threaded screw 4154 can be inserted through the aligned bores 4155,4156 in a posterior-anterior direction to secure the second wing 4160 to the spacer 4120. The direction of insertion from a posterior to an anterior direction has the screw 4154 engaging the bores 4155,4156 and the rest of the implant 4100 along a direction that is generally perpendicular to the longitudinal axis 4125. This orientation is most convenient when the physician is required to use a screw 4154 to secure the second wing 4160 to the rest of the implant 4100. The second wing 4160 can further be secured to the spacer 4120 by some other mechanism, for example such as a flexible hinge (not shown) with a protrusion that engages an indentation of one of the distraction guide 4110 and the spacer 4120. Alternatively, the second wing 4160 can be secured to one of the distraction guide 4110 and the spacer 4120 by still some other mechanism.
  • FIG. 48B is a perspective view of an implant as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,695,842 to Zucherman, et al, incorporated herein by reference. The implant 4200 has a main body that includes a spacer 4220, a first wing 4230, a lead-in tissue expander 4210 (also referred to herein as a distraction guide) and an alignment track 4203. The main body of the implant 4200 is inserted between adjacent spinous processes and remains in place (where desired) without attachment to the bone or ligaments. The distraction guide 4210 includes a tip from which the distraction guide 4210 expands, the tip having a diameter sufficiently small such that the tip can pierce an opening in an interspinous ligament and/or can be inserted into a small initial dilated opening. The diameter and/or cross-sectional area of the distraction guide 4210 gradually increases until it is substantially similar to the diameter of the spacer 4220. The tapered front end eases the ability of a physician to urge the implant 4200 between adjacent spinous processes. When urging the main body of the implant 4200 between adjacent spinous processes, the front end of the distraction guide 4210 distracts the adjacent spinous processes and dilates the interspinous ligament so that a space between the adjacent spinous processes is approximately the diameter of the spacer 4220.
  • As shown in FIG. 48B, the spacer 4220 is elliptically shaped in cross-section, and can swivel so that the spacer 4220 can self-align relative to the uneven surfaces of the spinous processes. Self-alignment can ensure that compressive loads are distributed across the surface of the bone. As contemplated in Zucherman '842, the spacer 4220 can have, for example, a diameter of six millimeters, eight millimeters, ten millimeters, twelve millimeters and fourteen millimeters. These diameters refer to the height by which the spacer 4220 distracts and maintains apart the spinous process. For an elliptically shaped spacer 4220, the selected height (i.e., diameter) is the minor dimension measurement across the ellipse. The major dimension is transverse to the alignment of the spinous process, one above the other.
  • The first wing 4230 has a lower portion 4231 and an upper portion 4232. The upper portion 4232 is shaped to accommodate the anatomical form or contour of spinous processes (and/or laminae) of preferably the L4 (for an L4-L5 placement) or L5 (for an L5-S1 placement) vertebra. The same shape or variations of this shape can be used to accommodate other motion segments, such as motion segments in the cervical and thoracic regions. The lower portion 4231 can also be rounded to accommodate the spinous processes. The lower portion 4231 and upper portion 4232 of the first wing 4230 act as a stop mechanism when the implant 4200 is inserted between adjacent spinous processes. The implant 4200 cannot be inserted beyond the surfaces of the first wing 4230. Additionally, once the implant 4200 is inserted, the first wing 4230 can prevent some side-to-side, or posterior-to-anterior movement of the implant 4200.
  • As with the implant 4100 of FIG. 48A, the implant 4200 of FIG. 48B further includes a second wing 4260. Similar to the first wing 4230, the second wing 4260 includes a lower portion 4261 and an upper portion 4262 sized and/or shaped to accommodate the anatomical form or contour of the spinous processes and/or lamina. The second wing 4260 can be secured to the main body of the implant 4200 with a fastener 4254. The second wing 4260 also has an alignment tab 4268. When the second wing 4260 is initially placed on the main body of the implant 4200, the alignment tab 4268 engages the alignment track 4203. The alignment tab 4268 slides within the alignment track 4203 and helps to maintain the adjustable wing 4260 substantially parallel with the first wing 4230. When the main body of the implant 4200 is inserted into the patient and the second wing 4260 has been attached, displacement along the longitudinal axis 4225 in either the direction of insertion or the direction opposite insertion can be limited or blocked.
  • Further, the second wing 4260 also can prevent some side-to-side, or posterior-to-anterior movement.
  • For both the implant 4100 of FIG. 48A and the implant 4200 of FIG. 48B, where a second wing 4160,4260 is connected with the implant 4100,4200 after the implant 4100,4200 is positioned between the spinous processes, a procedure for positioning such an implant 4100,4200 and subsequently connecting the second wing 4160,4260 with the implant 4100,4200 can require a bilateral approach wherein a physician must access both sides of the interspinous ligament, a first side to pierce and/or distract the interspinous ligament and position the implant 4100,4200 so that the movement in the direction of insertion is satisfactorily limited by the first wing 4130,4230, and a second side to attach the second wing 4160,4260 such that movement in the direction opposite insertion is satisfactorily limited by the second wing 4160,4260.
  • Implants Having Deployable Second Wing
  • Referring to FIGS. 49A through 49B, implants 4300 and methods for positioning such implants in accordance with the present invention can, in an embodiment, include a deployable second wing 4360 associated with a main body 4301 such that the second wing 4360 can be deployed with a physician needing only to access a first side of spinous processes to limit or block movement along the longitudinal axis 4325. As shown in FIG. 49A, the implant 4300 includes a main body 301 having a fixed spacer 4320 and a distraction guide 4310. The distraction guide 4310 comprises a first winglet (also referred to herein as an upper winglet) 4312 and a second winglet (also referred to herein as a lower winglet) 4314, and when arranged in a first configuration can include a tip from which the distraction guide 4310 expands, the tip having a diameter sufficiently small such that the tip can pierce an opening in an interspinous ligament and between spinous processes and/or can be inserted into a small initial dilated opening. The diameter and/or cross-sectional area of the distraction guide 4310 is then gradually increased until it is substantially similar to the diameter of the spacer 4320. In this respect, the distraction guide 4310 of FIG. 49A can resemble a distraction guide as described above when arranged in the first configuration. The winglets 4312,4314 can be hinged or otherwise pivotably connected with the main body 4301 such that the winglets 4312,4314 can be arranged in a second configuration (FIG. 49B) once the implant 4300 is positioned between spinous processes. In a second configuration one or both of the winglets 4312,4314 abut at least one of the spinous processes and/or related tissues when urged in a direction opposite from insertion, thereby limiting motion along the longitudinal axis 4325. Thus when arranged in a second configuration, the distraction guide 4310 becomes a second wing 4360, as shown in FIG. 49B.
  • The implant 4300 includes an insert 4370 having an insert body 4372 and a first wing 4330. As shown in FIG. 49B, the insert 4370 can be mated with the main body 4301 to arrange the distraction guide 4310 of the implant 4300 in the second configuration, thereby deploying the second wing 4360. To facilitate mating of the main body 4301 and the insert 4370, the spacer 4320 includes a cavity sized and shaped for receiving the insert body 4372 and accessible from a distal end of the main body 4301. A portion of the upper winglet 4312 and the lower winglet 4314 can extend at least partially into the cavity so that when the insert body 4372 is received within the cavity, the insert body 4372 displaces the portions, causing the distraction guide 4310 to be arranged in the second configuration. In the embodiment shown, the upper winglet 4312 and the lower winglet 4314 each include a lever 4316,4318 comprising a curved protrusion that protrudes into the cavity when the distraction guide 4310 is in the first configuration. As the insert body 4372 of the insert 4370 fills the cavity, the insert body 4372 contacts the first lever 4316 and the second lever 4318, applying a force to the first lever 4316 and the second lever 4318 which translates into a pivoting motion of the hinged upper winglet 4312 and the hinged lower winglet 4314. The insert body 4372 can optionally have a tapered proximal end 4374 having a first groove 4376 and a second groove 4378 corresponding to the first lever 4316 and the second lever 4318, respectively. The tapered shape of the proximal end 4374 allows the upper winglet 4312 and lower winglet 4314 to be deployed gradually, fully deploying as the insert body 4372 is fully seated within the cavity. The main body 4301 is shown including a flange 4303 in which is formed notches 4305 to receive an insertion tool (not shown), for example. As the insert body 4372 is seated within the cavity, an upper tab 4332 and a lower tab 4331 of the first wing 4330 seats within cut-outs 4322 of the flange 4303.
  • Referring to FIG. 50A, the main body 4301 of the implant 4300 is shown positioned between adjacent spinous processes of the targeted motion segment. The motion segment shown is within the lumbar region, but in other embodiments, particularly where a fixed spacer 4320 is used, implants 4300 in accordance with the present convention can be positioned at motion segments of the thoracic and cervical region. The main body 4301 is positioned as shown by initially approaching the interspinous ligament between the upper and lower adjacent spinous processes 2,4 through an opening to the right of the interspinous ligament, roughly posterior to the right inferior articular facet 6 of the vertebrae from which the upper spinous process 2 extends. The main body 4301 can be associated with one or more insertion tools (not shown), and the distraction guide 4310 can be arranged in the first configuration. The tip of the distraction guide 4310 is positioned roughly adjacent to a point along the interspinous ligament, and the distraction guide 4310 is then urged through the interspinous ligament, piercing the interspinous ligament and/or separating and distracting fibers of the interspinous ligaments. The main body 4301 is then urged through the interspinous ligament until the spacer 4320 is positioned between the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 so that the spacer 4320 supports a load applied by the spinous processes 2,4.
  • Referring to FIG. 50B, once the implant 4300 is positioned as desired, the insertion tools can be removed from the opening and the insert 4370 can be positioned at the distal end of the main body 4301. The insert body 4372 can be urged into the cavity within the main body 4301 until the proximal end 4374 of the insert body 4372 contacts the first lever 4316 and the second lever 4318. The insert 4370 can then be further urged along the longitudinal axis 4325 so that the insert body 4372 urges the first lever 4316 and the second lever 4318 away from the insert body 4372, causing the upper winglet 4312 and the lower winglet 4314 to pivot about the first hinge 4313 and the second hinge 4315, respectively. As the first lever 4316 and the second lever 4318 are displaced from the cavity, the first lever 4316 and the second lever 4318 are guided along corresponding grooves 4376,4378 of the tapered proximal end 4374. As the insert body 4372 seats within the cavity of the main body 4301, the upper winglet 4312 and the lower winglet 4314 deploy as a second wing 4360. The insertion tool can be removed from the incision once the insert body 4372 is seated within the main body 4301. As can be seen a portion of the upper spinous process and a portion of the lower spinous process are sandwiched between the first wing 330 and the second wing 4360, limiting motion along the longitudinal axis 4325. Implants and methods for positioning such implants between spinous processes in accordance with the present invention are not meant to be limited to embodiments as described above and otherwise herein, but rather are meant to include any implant having a second wing deployable by urging an insert within a main body positioned between adjacent spinous processes. Myriad different variations maybe readily apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art. For example, in an alternative embodiment, the main body 4301 of the implant 4300 of FIGS. 49A through 50B can include a lower winglet 4314 pivotably associated with the main body 4301 while an upper winglet 4312 is fixedly associated with the main body 4301. An insert 4370 can be adapted to deploy only the lower winglet 4314 when seated within the cavity of the main body 4301.
  • In other embodiments, a first wing 4310 can extend from the main body 4301 rather than, or in addition to, a first wing extending from the insert 4370. When the main body 4301 is initially positioned between the adjacent spinous processes, movement of the main body 4301 along the longitudinal axis 4325 can be limited in the direction of insertion. As the first wing 4310 extending from the main body 4301 contacts one or both of the adjacent spinous processes, further movement of the main body 4301 in the direction of insertion can be limited or blocked. The first wing 4310 can thus act as a hard stop, allowing the main body 4301 to be positioned without requiring a position of the main body 4301 along the spinous processes to be estimated, thereby easing implantation.
  • Referring to FIG. 51, in still further embodiments implants 4400 in accordance with the present invention can include one or both of a first engagement element (also referred to herein as an upper hook) 4480 and a second engagement element (also referred to herein as a lower hook) 4482 for limiting flexion motion in a motion segment. For example, similar hooks have been described in greater detail in U.S. Pat. No. 6,451,019 issued Sep. 17, 2002 to Zucherman et al. and U.S. Pat. No. 6,652,527 issued Nov. 25, 2003 to Zucherman et al., both incorporated herein by reference. Implants in accordance with the present invention can include such arrangements. The implant 4400 shown in FIGS. 51 and 52 includes an upper hook 4480 extending from an upper connection rod 4484 rotatably associated with the main body 4401 and a lower hook 4482 extending from a lower connection rod 4486 rotatably associated with the main body 4401. Alternatively, the connection rods 4484,4486 can be fixedly associated with the main body 4401.
  • The hooks 4480,4482 include tapered proximal ends 4481,4483 that act as lead-in tissue expanders to distract interspinous ligaments of the motion segments above and below the targeted motion segment. As the main body 4401 is positioned between adjacent spinous processes, the tapered proximal ends 4481,4483 of the upper and lower hooks 4480,4482 can likewise pierce and/or distract interspinous ligaments so that the upper and lower hooks 4480,4482 can be properly positioned to limit or restrain flexion motion of the targeted motion segment when the main body 4401 is in place. As shown, the hooks 4480,4482 can be pivotably associated with the connection rods 4484,4486 so that the hooks 4480,4482 can be rotated relative to the connection rods 4484,4486, thereby allowing a physician to improve contact and spread loads between the hooks 4480,4482 and corresponding spinous processes 2,4. The rotatable upper connection rod 4484 and lower connection rod 4486 can provide flexibility in placement, so that where an anatomy varies between patients and varies between motion segments such that the arrangement of a minor dimension and major dimension of the implant 44400 about the longitudinal axis 4425 varies, the implant 4400 can be accommodated.
  • FIG. 52 is a posterior view of the implant 4400 positioned between adjacent spinous processes 2,4 and having an upper hook 4480 and a lower hook 4482 arranged so that both flexion and extension is limited as desired. Further, the second wing 4460 is deployed to limit movement of the implant 4400 along the longitudinal axis 4425. The upper hook 4480 and the lower hook 4482 prevent movement along the longitudinal axis 4425 in the direction opposite insertion, making a first wing unnecessary.
  • Referring to FIGS. 53A and 53B, in still other embodiments implants 4500 and methods for positioning such implants 4500 between spinous processes in accordance with the present invention can include a distraction guide 4510 wherein portions of the distraction guide 510 can be extended from the distraction guide 4510 to form an upper winglet 4512 and a lower winglet 4514, respectively, of a second wing 4560 by positioning an insert 4570 within a cavity of the main body 4501. This is in contrast to the above embodiment where the entire distraction guide is formed by the winglets. In this embodiment, the winglet 4512,4514 extend out the side of the distraction guide 4510. When not extended, as seen in FIG. 53A, the winglet 4512,4514 partially form the sides of the distraction guide 4510. Such embodiments are contemplated to be useful where it is desired that the second wing 4560 have a limited height relative to implants 4300,4400 as described above where the entire distraction guide 4310 is deployed (see FIG. 49A through 50B). For example, where implants 4500 are to be positioned at adjacent motion segments, it can be desired that the second wings 4560 of the implants 4500 do not interfere with one another implant, for example during an extension motion when compressive loads are applied to the implants 4500. As with implants described above, one of ordinary skill in the art can appreciate the myriad different variations of the implant 4500 of FIGS. 53A and 53B. For example, in alternative embodiments the upper winglet 4512 and the lower winglet 4514 can have some other shape. For example, the positions of the upper winglet 4512 and lower winglet 4514 are staggered so that implants 4500 positioned at adjacent motion segments can be more easily positioned without interfering with one another. Such staggering can also accommodate anatomies where one of the upper and lower spinal processes is wider than the other. With staggering, for example, the upper winglet 4512 can be pivotably mounted on the distraction guide 4510 at a position less distant from the distraction end 4511 than the location where the lower winglet 4514 is pivotably mounted on the distraction guide 4510. In still other embodiments, the upper winglet 4512 and the lower winglet 4514 can have some other shape. Referring to FIGS. 54A through 55, in still further embodiments of implants 4600 in accordance with the present invention, the main body 4601 can include a hollow central body 4605 (shown in FIGS. 54C and 54D) extending from a first wing 4630. A rotatable spacer 4620 is disposed about the hollow central body 4605. The implant 4600 can include a spacer 4620 that resembles spacers, for example, as described above in FIG. 48B. A distraction guide 4610 can extend from the hollow central body 4605 and can include an upper winglet 4612 and a lower winglet 4614, one or both of which can be pivotably associated with a main portion 4611 of the distraction guide 4610 so that the upper winglet 4612 and/or the lower winglet 4614 can be deployed as a second wing 4660. A pin 4606 can be inserted into the hollow central body 4605 to deploy the second wing 4630. Referring to FIG. 54B, once the pin 4606 is seated within the main body 4601, the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 can be pivoted away from each other so that the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 limit or block motion along the longitudinal axis 4625 in the direction opposite from insertion. The upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 thus act as a second wing 4660.
  • Referring to the partial cross-sections of FIGS. 54C and 54D, in an embodiment the distraction guide 4610 can include a cup 4616 structure sized and arranged to receive the pin 4606. Bar structures 4618,4619 can be pivotably connected between the cup structure 4616 and one or both of the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 so that when a force is applied to the cup structure 4616 by the pin 4606, the force is further transferred to the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614, causing the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 to pivot on hinges 4613,4615 associated with the main portion 4611 of the distraction guide 4610 so that the second wing 4660 is deployed. As can be seen, the pivot points 4613,4615 of the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 are arranged proximally relative to the mount points 4617,4619 of the bar structures 4618,4619, causing the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 to pivot away from one another when the mount points 4617,4619 are urged together by the insertion of the pin 4606 (as seen in FIG. 54D). In other embodiments, the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 can be caused to pivot away from one another using some other mechanism. Implants in accordance with the present invention are not intended to be limited to such second wing deployment mechanisms as are described in detail herein.
  • Referring to FIG. 55, the implant 4600 is shown positioned between adjacent spinous processes 2,4. The second wing 4660 as shown is sized such that when arranged in a first configuration (i.e., as a distraction guide 4610) the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 do not extend undesirably into the adjacent tissues. However, the upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 can be sized and shaped other than as shown in FIG. 55. The upper winglet 4612 and the lower winglet 4614 need only be sized and shaped such that when arranged in a second configuration, the upper and lower winglets 4612,4614 limit or block movement along the longitudinal axis 4625 in a direction opposite from insertion. FIGS. 56A through 56C illustrate a further embodiment of an implant 4700 in accordance with the present invention arranged between adjacent spinous processes 2,4. In such an embodiment, upper and lower winglets 4712,4714 can be disposed within the distraction guide 4710 and can be deployed by actuating an actuator arrangement including a shaft connected with a cam 4707, the shaft having an engageable head 4706, or alternatively including some other mechanism such as a gear. As can be seen in FIG. 56A the implant 4700 can be disposed between adjacent spinous processes 2,4 as described above in reference to FIG. 50. The distraction guide 4710 of the implant 4700 can be employed to pierce and/or distract an interspinous ligament 6 connected between the adjacent spinous process 2,4. The implant 4700 can then be urged between the spinous processes 2,4 so that the distraction guide 4710 further distracts the interspinous ligament 6 to form a space within which a spacer 4220 can be disposed. In the embodiment shown, the spacer 4220 can pivot about a central body extending from the first wing 4230 of the implant 4700. The first wing 4230 limits and/or blocks movement along a longitudinal axis 4725 of the implant 4700 in the direction of insertion.
  • Once the implant 4700 is arranged as desired, the actuator arrangement can be actuated to deploy the upper and lower winglets, 4712,4714, thereby forming a second wing 4760 as shown in FIG. 56C. The second wing 4760 limits and/or blocks movement along the longitudinal axis 4725 in a direction opposite the direction of insertion. With the second wing 4760 deployed, the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 are at least partially disposed between the wings 4730,4760, preventing the implant 4800 from becoming undesirably dislodged from the space between the adjacent spinous processes 2,4. As shown in FIG. 56C, the first wing 4730 and the second wing 4760 can be arranged sufficiently far apart that the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 can move relative to one another slightly (e.g., laterally—such as during a twisting motion), allowing the patient greater flexibility of movement.
  • FIGS. 56B and 56C are partial cross-sectional posterior views of the implant 4700 shown in FIG. 56A. m an embodiment, the deployable winglets 4712,4714 can be extended from the distraction guide 4710 using an actuator arrangement comprising a shaft 4707 and cam 4716. The cam 4716 can be rotated to force the winglets 4712,4714 to pivot outward from the distraction guide 4710. As shown, the winglets 4712,4714 are at least partially disposed within a cavity of the distraction guide 4710.
  • FIGS. 56A through 57E illustrate a still further embodiment of an implant 4800 in accordance with the present invention arranged between adjacent spinous processes 2,4. In such an embodiment, upper and lower winglets 4812,4814 can be disposed within the distraction guide 4810 and can be deployed by actuating an actuator arrangement including a screw 4807 having an engageable head 4806, or alternatively including some other mechanism such as a gear. As can be seen in FIG. 57A the implant 4800 can be disposed between adjacent spinous processes 2,4 as described above in reference to FIG. 50. The distraction guide 4810 of the implant 4800 can be employed to pierce and/or distract an interspinous ligament 6 connected between the adjacent spinous process 2,4. The implant 4800 can then be urged between the spinous processes 2,4 so that the distraction guide 4810 further distracts the interspinous ligament 6 to form a space within which a spacer 4220 can be disposed. In the embodiment shown, the spacer 4220 can pivot about a central body extending from the first wing 4230 of the implant 4800. The first wing 4230 limits and/or blocks movement along a longitudinal axis 4825 of the implant 4800 in the direction of insertion.
  • Once the implant 4800 is arranged as desired, the actuator arrangement can be actuated to deploy the upper and lower winglets, 4812,4814, thereby forming a second wing 4860 as shown in FIG. 56B. The second wing 4860 limits and/or blocks movement along the longitudinal axis 4825 in a direction opposite the direction of insertion. With the second wing 4860 deployed, the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 are at least partially disposed between the wings 4830,4860, preventing the implant 4800 from becoming undesirably dislodged from the space between the adjacent spinous processes 2,4. As shown in FIG. 56B, the first wing 4830 and the second wing 4860 can be arranged sufficiently far apart that the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 can move relative to one another slightly (e.g., laterally—such as during a twisting motion), allowing the patient greater flexibility of movement.
  • FIGS. 57C and 57D are partial cross-sectional end views of the implant 4800 shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B. In an embodiment, the deployable winglets 4812,4814 can be extended from the distraction guide 4810 using an actuator arrangement comprising a screw 4806 and threaded collar 4816. The threaded collar 4816 can be driven along the screw 4806 to force the winglets 4812,4814 to pivot outward from the distraction guide 4810. As shown, the winglets 4812,4814 are at least partially disposed within a cavity of the distraction guide 4810. The winglets 4812,4814 are pivotably connected with the threaded collar 4816 at an upper pivot point 4817 and a lower pivot point 4819. Pins 4813,4815 or other obstruction devices can be disposed within the cavity and arranged so that the pins 4813,4815 do not interfere with the arrangement of the winglets 4812,4814 in a nested, or undeployed, position. However, as the threaded collar 4816 travels along the screw 4806 in a posterior-to-anterior direction, the inner surface of the winglets 4812,4814 contact the pins 4813,4815 and the winglets 4812,4814 pivot away from the distraction guide 4810. If desired the winglets 4812,4814 can be spring biased against the posts 4813,4815 such that in the nested positions and in any deployed position the winglets 4812,4814 are held against the posts 4813,4815.
  • As shown in FIGS. 57D and 57E, when the threaded collar 4816 has traveled a distance along the screw 4806, the winglets 4812,4814 are deployed to form a second wing 4860. The winglets 4812,4814 extend along a significant portion of the outer surface of the spinous processes 2,4. When urged along the longitudinal axis 4825 in a direction opposite the direction of insertion, the winglets 4812,4814 contact the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 and resist further movement in said direction. FIG. 57E is an end view of the implant 4800 with the second wing 4860 deployed. As shown, the screw head 4806 extends from the distraction guide 4810; however, when implemented, it is preferable for the screw head 4806 to be either flush with the surface of the distraction guide 4810 or slightly receded from the surface of the distraction guide 4810 so that movement of the implant 4800 is not obstructed during distraction of the interspinous ligament 6 and/or the spinous processes 2,4. The screw head 4806 is shown extending from the distraction guide 4810 to demonstrate possible arrangement relative to the proximal end of the distraction guide 4810.
  • FIGS. 58A and 58B illustrate yet another embodiment of the implant 4900 having an alternative actuation arrangement. In such an embodiment, the winglets 4912,4914 can be reversed in arrangement so that the winglets 4912,4914 are deployed by urging the threaded collar 4916 toward the screw head 4806. FIGS. 59A and 59B illustrate a still further embodiment of the implant 5000 having an alternative actuation arrangement. In such embodiments, the winglets 5012,5014 include two hinged portions, each winglet 5012,5014 folding outward to form a portion of a second wing 5060. The second wing 5060 does not extend as far along the axis of the spine, i.e. the total height of the second wing 5060 along the spine is smaller than previous embodiments. A reduced second wing height can be advantageous where implants are positioned at adjacent motion segments, thereby preventing undesired contact of adjacent implants.
  • As mentioned above, in other embodiments in accordance with the present invention, the winglets can be deployed from the distraction guide using a mechanism other than a screw and threaded collar. For example, one or more gears can be employed. Further, in still other embodiments the upper and lower winglets can have a shape along other than those shapes shown in FIGS. 57A through 57B. The invention is not intended to be limited to winglets having shapes such as shown. In still further embodiments, such as shown in FIG. 60, the implant 5100 can include only one of the upper and lower winglets. For example, where implants are positioned at adjacent motion segments it can be advantageous to have a lower winglet 4814, thereby preventing undesired contact of adjacent implants 5100. As will be obvious to one of ordinary skill in the art, myriad different actuation arrangements can be employed to form a second wing. Implants in accordance with the present invention are not intended to be limited to those described in detail herein.
  • Materials for Use in Implants of the Present Invention
  • In some embodiments, the implant, and components of the implant (i.e., the spacer, the distraction guide, etc.) can be fabricated from medical grade metals such as titanium, stainless steel, cobalt chrome, and alloys thereof, or other suitable implant material having similar high strength and biocompatible properties. Additionally, the implant can be at least partially fabricated from a shape memory metal, for example Nitinol, which is a combination of titanium and nickel. Such materials are typically radiopaque, and appear during x-ray imaging, and other types of imaging. Implants in accordance with the present invention, and/or portions thereof can also be fabricated from somewhat flexible and/or deflectable material. In these embodiments, the implant and/or portions thereof can be fabricated in whole or in part from medical grade biocompatible polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers. A copolymer is a polymer derived from more than one species of monomer. A polymer composite is a heterogeneous combination of two or more materials, wherein the constituents are not miscible, and therefore exhibit an interface between one another. A polymer blend is a macroscopically homogeneous mixture of two or more different species of polymer. Many polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers are radiolucent and do not appear during x-ray or other types of imaging. Implants comprising such materials can provide a physician with a less obstructed view of the spine under imaging, than with an implant comprising radiopaque materials entirely. However, the implant need not comprise any radiolucent materials.
  • One group of biocompatible polymers is the polyaryletherketone group which has several members including polyetheretherketone (PEEK), and polyetherketoneketone (PEKK). PEEK is proven as a durable material for implants, and meets the criterion of biocompatibility. Medical grade PEEK is available from Victrex Corporation of Lancashire, Great Britain under the product name PEEK-OPTIMA. Medical grade PEKK is available from Oxford Performance Materials under the name OXPEKK, and also from CoorsTek under the name BioPEKK. These medical grade materials are also available as reinforced polymer resins, such reinforced resins displaying even greater material strength. In an embodiment, the implant can be fabricated from PEEK 450G, which is an unfilled PEEK approved for medical implantation available from Victrex. Other sources of this material include Gharda located in Panoli, India. PEEK 450G has the following approximate properties:
    Property Value
    Density 1.3 g/cc
    Rockwell M 99
    Rockwell R 126
    Tensile Strength 97 MPa
    Modulus of Elasticity 3.5 GPa
    Flexural Modulus 4.1 GPa
  • PEEK 450G has appropriate physical and mechanical properties and is suitable for carrying and spreading a physical load between the adjacent spinous processes. The implant and/or portions thereof can be formed by extrusion, injection, compression molding and/or machining techniques. It should be noted that the material selected can also be filled. Fillers can be added to a polymer, copolymer, polymer blend, or polymer composite to reinforce a polymeric material. Fillers are added to modify properties such as mechanical, optical, and thermal properties. For example, carbon fibers can be added to reinforce polymers mechanically to enhance strength for certain uses, such as for load bearing devices. In some embodiments, other grades of PEEK are available and contemplated for use in implants in accordance with the present invention, such as 30% glass-filled or 30% carbon-filled grades, provided such materials are cleared for use in implantable devices by the FDA, or other regulatory body. Glass-filled PEEK reduces the expansion rate and increases the flexural modulus of PEEK relative to unfilled PEEK. The resulting product is known to be ideal for improved strength, stiffness, or stability. Carbon-filled PEEK is known to have enhanced compressive strength and stiffness, and a lower expansion rate relative to unfilled PEEK. Carbon-filled PEEK also offers wear resistance and load carrying capability.
  • As will be appreciated, other suitable similarly biocompatible thermoplastic or thermoplastic polycondensate materials that resist fatigue, have good memory, are flexible, and/or deflectable, have very low moisture absorption, and good wear and/or abrasion resistance, can be used without departing from the scope of the invention. As mentioned, the implant can be comprised of polyetherketoneketone (PEKK). Other material that can be used include polyetherketone (PEK), polyetherketoneetherketoneketone (PEKEKK), polyetheretherketoneketone (PEEKK)5 and generally a polyaryletheretherketone. Further, other polyketones can be used as well as other thermoplastics. Reference to appropriate polymers that can be used in the implant can be made to the following documents, all of which are incorporated herein by reference. These documents include: PCT Publication WO 02/02158 A1, dated Jan. 10, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials;” PCT Publication WO 02/00275 A1, dated Jan. 3, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials;” and, PCT Publication WO 02/00270 A13 dated Jan. 3, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials.” Other materials such as Bionate®, polycarbonate urethane, available from the Polymer Technology Group, Berkeley, Calif., may also be appropriate because of the good oxidative stability, biocompatibility, mechanical strength and abrasion resistance. Other thermoplastic materials and other high molecular weight polymers can be used.
  • Methods for Implanting Interspinous Implants
  • A minimally invasive surgical method for implanting an implant 4300 as shown in FIGS. 49A-55 in the cervical spine is disclosed and taught herein. In this method, as shown in FIG. 61, preferably a guide wire 4780 is inserted through a placement network 4790 into the neck of the implant recipient. The guide wire 4780 is used to locate where the implant 4300 is to be placed relative to the cervical spine, including the spinous processes. Once the guide wire 4780 is positioned with the aid of imaging techniques, an incision is made on the side of the neck so that an implant 4300 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, can be positioned in the neck thorough an incision and along a line that is about perpendicular to the guide wire 4780 and directed at the end of the guide wire 4780. The main body 4301 of the implant 4300 is inserted into the neck of the patient. Preferably during insertion, the distraction guide 4310 pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue. Once the main body 4301 is satisfactorily positioned, an insert 4370 can be positioned within a cavity of the main body 4301, causing the distraction guide 4310 of the main body 4301 to be arranged in a second configuration so that at least a portion of the distraction guide 4310 forms a second wing. The insert 4370 can be inserted along a line that is generally collinear with the line over which the main body 4301 is inserted. The anatomy of the neck is such that it is most convenient and minimally invasive to enter the neck from the side with respect to the main body 4301 and the insert 4370.
  • Further, a minimally invasive surgical method for implanting an implant as described in FIGS. 49A-55 in the lumbar spine is disclosed and taught herein. In this method, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 62, preferably a unilateral incision or opening can be made using a posterior-anterior approach (Step 2802). The unilateral incision can be made, for example, at a location some distance to the left of an axis along the spinous process. The incision or opening can be enlarged, and a distraction tool can be positioned within the incision so that the proximal end of the distraction tool (Step 2804) can access an exposed side of the interspinous ligament. The distraction tool can be urged through the interspinous ligament, thereby distracting the interspinous ligament so as to receive the implant (Step 2806). Once the interspinous ligament is sufficiently distracted, the distraction tool can be disengaged and removed from the incision (Step 2808).
  • Once the distraction tool has been removed from the incision, the implant can be positioned at the dilated opening, and the distraction guide of the implant can be urged through the dilated opening (Step 2810). The implant can be further urged through the opening until the spacer is positioned as desired between the adjacent spinous processes of the targeted motion segment (Step 2812). The spacer is free to rotate so that the load is distributed more evenly over the surface of the spinous processes. Optionally, the implant can be urged through the dilated opening until the first wing contacts the adjacent spinous processes, thereby blocking further movement in the direction of insertion. Once the implant is properly arranged, the insert can be positioned at the distal end of the implant so that the insert can be urged into and through the hollow cavity of the hollow central body (Step 2814). As the insert is seated inside of the cavity, the distraction guide splits, and the upper winglet and the lower winglet deploy as a second wing. The remaining tools can be removed from the incision, and the incision can be closed (Step 2816). Preferably during insertion, the distraction end pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue. Further, a minimally invasive surgical method for implanting an implant as shown in FIGS. 56A-60 in the lumbar spine is disclosed and taught herein. In this method, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 63, an incision or opening can be made using a posterior-anterior approach (Step 2852). The incision or opening can be enlarged, and a distraction tool can be positioned within the incision so that the proximal end of the distraction tool (Step 2854) can access an exposed side of the interspinous ligament. The distraction guide can be urged through the interspinous ligament and distracted, thereby distracting the interspinous ligament so as to receive the implant (Step 2856). Once the interspinous ligament is sufficiently distracted, the distraction tool can be disengaged and removed from the incision (Step 2858).
  • Once the distraction guide has been removed from the incision, the implant can be positioned at the dilated opening, and the distraction guide of the implant can be urged through the dilated opening (Step 2860). The implant can be further urged through the opening until the spacer is positioned as desired between the adjacent spinous processes of the targeted motion segment (Step 2862). The spacer is free to rotate so that the load is distributed more evenly over the surface of the spinous processes. Optionally, the implant can be urged through the dilated opening until the first wing contacts the adjacent spinous processes, thereby blocking further movement in the direction of insertion. Once the implant is properly arranged, an actuation tool can be inserted within the incision at an opposite side of the adjacent spinous processes from the point of insertion (Step 2864). The actuation tool can engage the actuation arrangement, and can actuate the actuation arrangement so that the upper winglet and the lower winglet deploy as a second wing, as described above (Step 2866). The remaining tools can be removed from the incision, and the incision can be closed (Step 2868). Preferably during insertion, the distraction end pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue.
  • The foregoing description of the present invention have been presented for purposes of illustration and description. It is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations will be apparent to practitioners skilled in this art. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the invention and its practical application, thereby enabling others skilled in the art to understand the invention for various embodiments and with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated. It is intended that the scope of the invention be defined by the following claims and their equivalents.
  • Implants Having Deployable Wings
  • In other embodiments, implants in accordance with the present invention can comprise a “matchbox”-like structure having a first configuration (as shown in FIG. 64A) and a second, deployed configuration (as shown in FIG. 64B). Arranged in the first configuration, such implants 6700 can have a substantially flat profile having an approximately uniform thickness.
  • The uniform thickness approximates the thickness of a spacer 6720 of the implant 6700. The implant 6700 can comprise a distraction guide 6710 at a proximal end of the implant, the distraction guide 6710 having a slightly rounded or tapered shape to pierce and/or distract a space between adjacent spinous processes. The implant 6700 can further comprise a plurality of hinged structures 6750-6757, the hinged structures 6750-6757 being collapsed so as to facilitate the substantially flat profile. The hinged structures 6750-6757 are pivotally connected with the spacer 6720 and extend from both sides of the spacer 6720. As shown in FIG. 64A, a support structure 6722 extends from the spacer 6720 toward the distal end of the implant 6700. A rod 6715 (or alternatively some other mechanism such as a tab) can be connected with the proximal end of the implant 6700 and can extend through the hinged structures 6750-6753, through the spacer 66720, and through the support structure 6722 so that the rod 6715 is accessible.
  • Referring to FIG. 64B, once the implant 6700 is positioned as desired between adjacent spinous processes, the rod 6715 can be drawn in a direction opposite the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 6725 so that the hinged structures 6750-6757 fold outward to form a first wing 6730 and a second wing 6760 between which is arranged the spacer 6720 and a portion of the spinous processes. As the hinged structures 6750-6757 fold outward, the height of the first and second wings 6730,6760 increases from approximately the same as the thickness of the spacer 6720 to a height such that the first and second wing 6730,6760 can limit or block movement of the implant 6700 along the longitudinal axis 6725 when positioned between adjacent spinous processes. As can be seen, the second wing 6760 includes four hinged structures 6750-6753: an upper first structure 6750 connected by a hinge to an upper second structure 6752, and a lower first structure 6751 connected by a hinge to a lower second structure 6753. The hinged structures 6750-6753 pivot outward to form an upper end 6762 of the second wing and a lower end 6764 of the second wing. Likewise, the first wing 6730 includes four hinged structures 6754-6757: an upper first structure 6754 connected by a hinge to an upper second structure 6756, and a lower first structure 6755 connected by a hinge to a lower second structure 6757. However, unlike the second wing 6760, the first wing 6730 is (effectively) bisected by the support structure 6722 so that the first wing 6730 comprises four winglets 6731-6734. The hinged structures 6754-6757 pivot outward to form upper winglets 6731,6732 of the first wing and lower winglets 6733,6734 of the first wing.
  • As mentioned above, the support structure 6722 extends from the spacer 6720 toward the distal end of the implant 6700. The spacer 6720 and the support structure 6722 include a bore or other cavity through which the rod 6715 can travel. Applying resistive force to the support structure 6722 can fix the spacer 6720 in place between spinous processes when drawing the rod 6715 through the bore. As the rod 6715 is drawn through the bore, the hinged structures 6752,6753 with which the proximal end of the rod 6715 is connected are drawn with the rod 6715. As the rod 6715 is drawn through the spacer 6720, the hinged structures 6752,6753 are drawn toward the spacer 6720. The hinged structures 6750-6753 pivot outward to accommodate the relative movement between the rod 6715 and the spacer 66720. Accordingly, the second wing 6760 has been satisfactorily deployed.
  • The hinged structures 6756,6757 of the first wing 6730 can cause deployment of the first wing 6730 by applying resistive force to the hinged structures 6756,6757 while drawing the spacer 6720 (via the support structure 6722), or by urging the hinged structures 6756,6757 toward the spacer 6720. The resistive force or urging can be applied by a second stop 6784 that can fit around the support structure 6722 and can be interference fit or otherwise selectively fixed with the support structure 6722. As the second stop 6784 is pushed along the longitudinal axis 6725, along the support structure 6722, the hinged structures 6754-6757 pivot outward to accommodate the relative movement between the second stop 6784 and the spacer 6720. Accordingly, the first wing 6730 has been satisfactorily deployed.
  • FIGS. 65A and 65B are posterior views of the implant 6700 positioned between adjacent spinous processes 2,4 demonstrating an embodiment of a method for deploying the implant 6700 between the spinous processes 2,4. The implant 6700 can be positioned so that a distraction guide 6710 of the implant 6700 is arranged at a space between the spinous processes 2,4. The implant 6700 can then be urged between the spinous processes 2,4 so that the spacer 6720 is positioned as desired. The substantially flat profile of the implant 6700 can ease positioning of the spacer 6720 by reducing potential obstructing surfaces that can resist movement of the implant 6700 during implantation. The second wing 6760 and the first wing 6730 can then be deployed to limit movement of the implant 6700. To deploy the second wing 6760 the rod 6715 is drawn in a direction opposite the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 6725. The upper end 6762 and lower end 6764 of the second wing extend outward as described above. Once the second wing 6760 is deployed, the rod 6715 can be fixed in position relative to the spacer 6720. This can be accomplished using myriad different mechanisms. For example, as shown a first stop 6782 can be interference fit to the rod 6715 and positioned against the support structure 6722 along the rod 6715. The first stop 6782 can grip the rod 6715, as with a friction fit between the first stop 6782 and the rod 6715, so that the rod 6715 is prevented from moving through the bore of the support structure 6722 by interference between the first stop 6782 and the support structure 6722. In other embodiments, some other mechanism can be used, such as a pin (e.g., a cotter pin), a latch system, etc. One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate the myriad different mechanisms for fixing a rod 6715 in position relative to the spacer 6720. The upper second structure 6756 and the lower second structure 6757 can be urged toward the spacer 6720 in the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 6725 using a second stop 6784 as described above, causing the upper winglets 6731,6732 and lower winglets 6733,6734 to extend outward to form the first wing 6730. Once the first wing 6730 is deployed, the hinged structures 6754-6757 can be fixed in position using the second stop 6784 or some other mechanism. The second stop 6784 can grip the support structure 6722, as with a friction fit or pin, and resist movement of the hinged structures 6754-6757, thereby preventing collapse. As above, one of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate the myriad different mechanisms for fixing the first wing 6730 in a deployed position. With the first wing 6730 and the second wing 6760 deployed, movement of the implant 6700 along the longitudinal axis 6725 can be limited or blocked, thereby resisting undesirable displacement of the implant 6700.
  • It should be noted that with implants as described above in reference to FIGS. 64A-67 the rod 6715 can optionally be trimmed or otherwise partially detached to decrease a space required to accommodate the implant 6700,6800 within the patient's spine. For example, the structure of the rod 6715 can be beveled or otherwise weakened near a distal end of the rod 6715 to allow the rod 6715 to be snapped off when the first and second wings 6730,6760,6830,6860 are deployed and the rod 6715 is fixed in place. In other embodiments, a tool (not shown) can be used to cut the rod 6715 after the first and second wings 6730,6760,6830,6860 are deployed and the rod 6715 is fixed in place. Still further, the rod 6715 need not comprise a rigid structure, but rather alternatively can include a tether, string, or similarly flexible structure that can be placed in tension to retain the second wing 6760,6860 and/or first wing 6730,6830 in a deployed position.
  • Referring to FIGS. 66A and 66B, a still further embodiment of an implant 6800 in accordance with the present invention is shown. In such an embodiment, a flexible strap 6890 can be connected between pairs of hinged structures (i.e., 6850 and 6852, 6851 and 6853, 6854 and 6856, 6855 and 6857). The flexible strap 6890 can limit the relative movement of the hinged structures 6850-6857 so that first wing 6830 and second wing 6860 have increased rigidity when fully deployed. The implant 6800 need not include the support structure 6722 of the previous embodiment. A resistive force can be applied to the hinged structures 6856,6857 so that as the rod 6715 is drawn in a direction opposite the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 6825 the resistive force causes the hinged structures 6854-6857 to extend outward to form the first wing 6830. As the hinged structures 6854-6857 extend outward the flexible strap 6890 connected opposite the hinge unfolds. Once the hinged structures 6854-6857 reach a maximum extension, the flexible strap 6890 becomes taut and resists further extension, locking the first wing 6830 in place. The flexible straps 6890 can provide the first wing 6830 with sufficient rigidity to resist movement of the spacer 6720, so that as the rod 6715 is further drawn the rod 6715 moves through the spacer 6720 and the hinged structures 6852,6853 connected with the rod 6715 are drawn toward the spacer 6720. As the hinged structures 6852,6853 connected with the rod 6715 are drawn toward the spacer 6720, all of the hinged structures 6850-6853 extend outward to deploy the second wing 6860. The flexible strap 6890, connected opposite the hinge, unfolds. Once the hinged structures 6854-6857 reach a maximum extension the flexible strap 6890 becomes taut and resists further extension, locking the first wing 6830 in place. A stop 6882 (or alternatively some other mechanism such as a pin) can be fixed to the rod 6715 to create interference between the stop 6882 and the hinged structures 6832,6834 of the first wing 6830 that resists movement of the rod 6715. The flexible straps 6890 can be made from a biocompatible material. In an embodiment, the flexible straps 6890 can be made from a braided polyester suture material. Braided polyester suture materials include, for example, Ethibond, Ethiflex, Mersilene, and Dacron, and are non-absorbable, having high tensile strength, low tissue reactivity and improved handling. In other embodiments, the flexible straps 6890 can be made from stainless steel (i.e., surgical steel), which can be woven into a strap, for example. In still other embodiments, flexible straps 6890 can be made from some other material (or combination of materials) having similar properties.
  • FIG. 67 is a posterior view of the implant 6800 positioned between adjacent spinous processes 2,4 demonstrating an embodiment of a method for deploying the implant 6800 between the spinous processes 2,4. The first wing 6830 can be deployed to limit movement of the implant 6800 relative to the spinous processes 2,4. To deploy the first wing 6830 the rod 6715 can be held fixed in position or urged in a direction opposite the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 6825 while a force is applied to the hinged structures 6854-6857 (FIG. 66A) of the first wing 6830 to cause the upper end 6832 of the first wing and the lower end 6834 of the first wing to extend away from the rod 6715, thereby deploying the first wing 6830. The rod 6715 can be further urged in the direction opposite the direction of insertion so that the proximal end of the rod 6715 pivotably connected with the hinged structures 6852,6853 that comprise the distraction guide 6710, is drawn toward the spacer 6720, causing the upper end 6862 of the spacer, and the lower end 6864 of the spacer to extend away from the rod 6715. Once the second wing 6860 and the first wing 6830 are deployed, the rod 6715 can be fixed in position relative to the spacer 6720. As above, this can be accomplished using myriad different mechanisms. For example, as shown a first stop 6882 can be interference fit to the rod 6715 and positioned against the first wing 6830 along the rod 6715. The first stop 6882 can grip the rod 6715 so that the rod 6715 is prevented from moving by a friction fit between the first stop 6882 and the rod 6715. In other embodiments, some other mechanism can be used, such as a pin (e.g., a cotter pin), a latch system, etc. One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate the myriad different mechanisms for fixing a rod 6715 in position relative to the spacer 6720. With the first wing 6830 and the second wing 6860 deployed, movement of the implant 6800 along the longitudinal axis 6825 can be limited or blocked, thereby resisting undesirable displacement of the implant 6800.
  • Referring to FIGS. 68A and 68B, in still other embodiments, implants in accordance with the present invention can comprise a “matchbox”-like structure having a rounded, collapsed first configuration and a second, deployed configuration. Arranged in the first configuration, such implants 6900 can have a shape allowing the implant 6900 to be more naturally inserted through a cannula. As shown, such a shape includes a substantially circular cross-section, though in other embodiments the implant can have an ovoid or elliptical cross-section, thereby allowing a spacer shape to be employed that generally accommodates a space between adjacent spinous processes. However, it will be appreciated that an implant 6900 having a circular cross-section can most efficiently use the space of a cannula, where the cannula includes a circular cross-section; therefore, it may be preferable to employ an implant 6900 having a circular cross-section where a physician desired to minify the diameter of the cannula inserted into the surgical site.
  • The cross-section of the implant 6900 in a first configuration is generally consistent along the implant's length, having a diameter generally the thickness of a spacer 6920 of the implant 6900. The implant 6900 can comprise a distraction guide 6910 at a proximal end of the implant 6900, the distraction guide 6910 having a rounded (as shown) or tapered shape to pierce and/or distract a space between adjacent spinous processes. However, where a cannula is employed to deliver an implant to a surgical site, the implant 6900 can optionally include a distraction guide 6910 at the proximal end. The surgical site, and associated tissues and structures can be distracted and repositioned by the cannula, allowing substantially unobstructed access to the surgical site by the implant 6900. In such circumstance a distraction guide 6910 may not be necessary.
  • The implant 6900 can further comprise a plurality of hinged structures 6950-6957, the hinged structures 6950-6957 being collapsed so as to facilitate the substantially collapsed profile. The hinged structures 6950-6957 are pivotally connected with the spacer 6920 and extend from both sides of the spacer 6920. A rod 6915 (or alternatively some other mechanism such as a tab) can be connected with the proximal end of the implant 900 and can extend through the hinged structures 6950-6953, and through the spacer 6920 so that the rod 6915 is accessible to a physician. Referring to FIGS. 68B and 68C, once the implant 6900 is positioned as desired between adjacent spinous processes, the rod 6915 can be drawn in a direction opposite the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 6925 so that the hinged structures 6950-6957 fold outward to form a first wing 6930 and a second wing 6960 between which is arranged the spacer 6920 and a portion of the spinous processes. As the hinged structures 6950-6957 fold outward, the height of the first and second wings 6930,6960 increases from approximately the same as the thickness of the spacer 6920 to a height such that the first and second wing 6930,6960 can limit or block movement of the implant 6900 along the longitudinal axis 6925 when positioned between adjacent spinous processes. As can be seen, the second wing 6960 includes four hinged structures 6950-6953: an upper first structure 6950 connected by a hinge to an upper second structure 6952, and a lower first structure 6951 connected by a hinge to a lower second structure 6953. The hinged structures 6950-6953 pivot outward to form an upper end 6962 of the second wing and a lower end 6964 of the second wing. Likewise, the first wing 6930 includes four hinged structures 6954-6957: an upper first structure 6954 connected by a hinge to an upper second structure 6956, and a lower first structure 6955 connected by a hinge to a lower second structure 6957.
  • Embodiments as described above in reference to FIGS. 64A and 64B included a support structure 6722 extending from the spacer 6720. Likewise, a support structure can optionally extend from the spacer 6920 of the cannula delivered implant 6900. However, such a structure need not be necessary where the first wing 6930 is prevented from deploying during deployment of the second wing 6960 by the cannula 6995 itself (see FIG. 69B). Referring to FIGS. 69A and 69B, once the cannula is positioned at the surgical site, the implant 6900 can be urged through the cannula so that the hinged structures 6950-6953 are clear of the cannula. The rod 6915 can then be urged in an opposite direction (relative to insertion) along the longitudinal axis 6925 to deploy the second wing 6960. As the rod 6915 is drawn through the spacer 6920, the hinged structures 6952,6953 are drawn toward the spacer 6920. The hinged structures 6950-6953 pivot outward to accommodate the relative movement between the rod 6915 and the spacer 6920. Accordingly, the second wing 6960 has been satisfactorily deployed.
  • Once the second wing 6960 is deployed, the cannula 6995 can be retracted from the surgical site, thereby allowing the hinged structures 6956,6957 of the first wing 6930 to deploy by urging the hinged structures 6956,6957 toward the spacer 6920. The urging can be applied by a stop 6982 that can fit around the rod 6915 and can be interference fit or otherwise selectively fixed with the rod 6915. As the stop 6982 is pushed along the longitudinal axis 6925, along the rod 6915, the hinged structures 6954-6957 pivot outward to accommodate the relative movement between the stop 6982 and the spacer 6920. Accordingly, the first wing 6930 has been satisfactorily deployed.
  • Once the second wing 6960 and the first wing 6930 are deployed, the rod 6915 can be fixed in position relative to the spacer 6920. As above, this can be accomplished using myriad different mechanisms. For example, as shown a stop 6982 can be interference fit to the rod 6915 and positioned against the first wing 6930 along the rod 6915. The stop 6982 can grip the rod 6915 so that the rod 6915 is prevented from moving by a friction fit between the stop 6982 and the rod 6915. In other embodiments, some other mechanism can be used, such as a pin (e.g., a cotter pin), a latch system, etc. One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate the myriad different mechanisms for fixing a rod 6915 in position relative to the spacer 6920. With the first wing 6930 and the second wing 6960 deployed, movement of the implant 6900 along the longitudinal axis 6925 can be limited or blocked, thereby resisting undesirable displacement of the implant 6900.
  • It should be noted that with implants as described above in reference to FIGS. 68A-69B the rod 6915 can optionally be trimmed or otherwise partially detached to decrease a space required to accommodate the implant 6900 within the patient's spine. For example, the structure of the rod 6915 can be beveled or otherwise weakened near a distal end of the rod 6915 to allow the rod 6915 to be snapped off when the first and second wings 6930,6960 are deployed and the rod 6915 is fixed in place. In other embodiments, a tool (not shown) can be used to cut the rod 6915 after the first and second wings 6930,6960 are deployed and the rod 6915 is fixed in place. Still further, the rod 6915 need not comprise a rigid structure, but rather alternatively can include a tether, string, or similarly flexible structure that can be placed in tension to retain the second wing 6960 and/or first wing 6930 in a deployed position.
  • Referring to FIGS. 68B, 68C and 69B, the implant 6900 is shown having operably connected “hinged” structures 6950-6957. Such structures can be hinged in any way that permits relative movement. For example, the structures may be hinged by way of flexible straps, for example as described above in reference to FIG. 66B. Alternatively, the structures can be hinged using some other technique. For example, referring to FIG. 70C, one or a pair of cords 6996 can connect pairs of hinged structures so that relative movement is restricted, thereby permitting hinging motion, while resisting separation of the structures. In still other embodiments, some other mechanism can be employed to define a range of movement of the hinged structures 6950-6957. One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate the myriad different techniques for defining a range of motion of two mechanical parts.
  • As with the flexible straps 6890 above, the cord 6996 can be made from a biocompatible material. In an embodiment, the cord 996 can be made from a braided polyester suture material. Braided polyester suture materials include, for example, Ethibond, Ethiflex, Mersilene, and Dacron, and are non-absorbable, having high tensile strength, low tissue reactivity and improved handling. In other embodiments, the cords 6996 can be made from stainless steel (i.e., surgical steel), which can be woven into a strap, for example. In still other embodiments, the cords 6996 can be made from some other material (or combination of materials) having similar properties.
  • Materials for Use in Implants of the Present Invention
  • In some embodiments, the implant can be fabricated from medical grade metals such as titanium, stainless steel, cobalt chrome, and alloys thereof, or other suitable implant material having similar high strength and biocompatible properties. Additionally, the implant can be at least partially fabricated from a shape memory metal, for example Nitinol, which is a combination of titanium and nickel. Such materials are typically radiopaque, and appear during x-ray imaging, and other types of imaging. Implants in accordance with the present invention, and/or portions thereof can also be fabricated from somewhat flexible and/or deflectable material. In these embodiments, the implant and/or portions thereof can be fabricated in whole or in part from medical grade biocompatible polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers. A copolymer is a polymer derived from more than one species of monomer. A polymer composite is a heterogeneous combination of two or more materials, wherein the constituents are not miscible, and therefore exhibit an interface between one another. A polymer blend is a macroscopically homogeneous mixture of two or more different species of polymer. Many polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers are radiolucent and do not appear during x-ray or other types of imaging. Implants comprising such materials can provide a physician with a less obstructed view of the spine under imaging, than with an implant comprising radiopaque materials entirely. However, the implant need not comprise any radiolucent materials.
  • One group of biocompatible polymers are the polyaryl ester ketones which has several members including polyetheretherketone (PEEK), and polyetherketoneketone (PEKK). PEEK is proven as a durable material for implants, and meets the criterion of biocompatibility. Medical grade PEEK is available from Victrex Corporation of Lancashire, Great Britain under the product name PEEK-OPTIMA. Medical grade PEKK is available from Oxford Performance Materials under the name OXPEKK, and also from CoorsTek under the name BioPEKK. These medical grade materials are also available as reinforced polymer resins, such reinforced resins displaying even greater material strength. In an embodiment, the implant can be fabricated from PEEK 450G, which is an unfilled PEEK approved for medical implantation available from Victrex. Other sources of this material include Gharda located in Panoli, India. PEEK 450G has the following approximate properties:
    Property Value
    Density 1.3 g/cc
    Rockwell M 99
    Rockwell R 126
    Tensile Strength 97 MPa
    Modulus of Elasticity 3.5 GPa
    Flexural Modulus 4.1 GPa
  • PEEK 450G has appropriate physical and mechanical properties and is suitable for carrying and spreading a physical load between the adjacent spinous processes. The implant and/or portions thereof can be formed by extrusion, injection, compression molding and/or machining techniques.
  • It should be noted that the material selected can also be filled. Fillers can be added to a polymer, copolymer, polymer blend, or polymer composite to reinforce a polymeric material. Fillers are added to modify properties such as mechanical, optical, and thermal properties. For example, carbon fibers can be added to reinforce polymers mechanically to enhance strength for certain uses, such as for load bearing devices. In some embodiments, other grades of PEEK are available and contemplated for use in implants in accordance with the present invention, such as 30% glass-filled or 30% carbon-filled grades, provided such materials are cleared for use in implantable devices by the FDA, or other regulatory body. Glass-filled PEEK reduces the expansion rate and increases the flexural modulus of PEEK relative to unfilled PEEK. The resulting product is known to be ideal for improved strength, stiffness, or stability. Carbon-filled PEEK is known to have enhanced compressive strength and stiffness, and a lower expansion rate relative to unfilled PEEK. Carbon-filled PEEK also offers wear resistance and load carrying capability.
  • As will be appreciated, other suitable similarly biocompatible thermoplastic or thermoplastic polycondensate materials that resist fatigue, have good memory, are flexible, and/or deflectable, have very low moisture absorption, and good wear and/or abrasion resistance, can be used without departing from the scope of the invention. As mentioned, the implant can be comprised of polyetherketoneketone (PEKK). Other material that can be used include polyetherketone (PEK), polyetherketoneetherketoneketone (PEKEKK), polyetheretherketoneketone (PEEKK), and generally a polyaryletheretherketone. Further, other polyketones can be used as well as other thermoplastics. Reference to appropriate polymers that can be used in the implant can be made to the following documents, all of which are incorporated herein by reference. These documents include: PCT Publication WO 02/0215S A1, dated Jan. 10, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials;” PCT Publication WO 02/00275 A1, dated Jan. 3, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials;” and, PCT Publication WO 02/00270 A1, dated Jan. 3, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials.” Other materials such as Bionate®, polycarbonate urethane, available from the Polymer Technology Group, Berkeley, Calif., may also be appropriate because of the good oxidative stability, biocompatibility, mechanical strength and abrasion resistance. Other thermoplastic materials and other high molecular weight polymers can be used.
  • As described above, the binder can be made from a biocompatible material. In an embodiment, the binder can be made from a braided polyester suture material. Braided polyester suture materials include, for example, Ethibond, Ethiflex, Mersilene, and Dacron, and are nonabsorbable, having high tensile strength, low tissue reactivity and improved handling. In other embodiments, the binder can be made from stainless steel (i.e., surgical steel), which can be braided into a tether or woven into a strap, for example. In still other embodiments, the binder can be made from some other material (or combination of materials) having similar properties. It is to be understood that embodiments in accordance with the present invention can be constructed without a pliant material. It is also to be understood that the embodiments in accordance with the present invention can have other dimensions.
  • Methods for Implanting Interspinous Implants
  • A minimally invasive surgical method for implanting an implant 6400 in the cervical spine is disclosed and taught herein. In this method, as shown in FIG. 70, preferably a guide wire 80 is inserted through a placement network or guide 90 into the neck of the implant recipient. The guide wire 80 is used to locate where the implant is to be placed relative to the cervical spine, including the spinous processes. Once the guide wire 80 is positioned with the aid of imaging techniques, an incision is made on the side of the neck so that an implant in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, can be positioned in the neck thorough an incision and along a line that is about perpendicular to the guide wire 80 and directed at the end of the guide wire 80. In one embodiment, the implant can be a sized implant 400 (i.e., having a body that is not distractible), such as described above in FIGS. 7-23 and including a distraction guide 6410, a spacer 6420, and a first wing 6430. The implant 6400 is inserted into the neck of the patient. Preferably during insertion, the distraction guide 6410 pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue.
  • Once the implant 6400 is satisfactorily positioned, a second wing 6460 can be optionally inserted along a line that is generally collinear with the line over which the implant 6400 is inserted but from the opposite side of the neck. The anatomy of the neck is such that it is most convenient and minimally invasive to enter the neck from the side with respect to the implant 6400 and the second wing 6460. The second wing 6460 is mated to the implant and in this particular embodiment, the second wing 6460 is attached to the implant 6400 by the use of a fastener, for example by a screw 6442. Where a screw is used, the screw 6442 can be positioned using a screw driving mechanism that is directed along a posterior to anterior line somewhat parallel to the guide wire 80. This posterior to anterior line aids the physician in viewing and securing the second wing 6460 to the implant. The second wing 6460 is positioned so that a bore 6463 formed in a lip 6461 of the second wing 6460 is aligned with a bore 6440 of the implant 6400, as described above. The screw 6442 is positioned within both bores and secured, at least, to the bore 6440 of the implant 6400. In other embodiments, the second wing can be interference fit with the implant, as described above, or fastened using some other mechanism, such as a flexible hinge and protrusion.
  • A minimally invasive surgical method for implanting an alternative embodiment of an implant 6700 in the cervical spine is disclosed and taught herein. In this method, as shown in FIG. 25, preferably a guide wire 80 is inserted through a placement network or guide 90 into the neck of the implant recipient. The guide wire 80 is used to locate where the implant 6700 is to be placed relative to the cervical spine, including the spinous processes. Once the guide wire 80 is positioned with the aid of imaging techniques, an incision is made on the side of the neck so that an implant 700 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, can be positioned in the neck thorough an incision and along a line that is about perpendicular to the guide wire 80 and directed at the end of the guide wire 80. In an embodiment, the implant 6700 can include a distraction guide 6710, a spacer 6720, a rod 6715 extending through the spacer 6720, and deployable first and second wings 6730,6760. The implant 6700 can have a substantially flat profile to ease implantation, as described above. The implant 6700 is inserted into the neck of the patient. Preferably during insertion, the distraction guide 6710 pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue.
  • Once the implant 6700 is satisfactorily positioned, the first wing 6730 and the second wing 6760 can be deployed. As described above, the second wing 6760 can be deployed by urging the rod 6715 in a direction opposite the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 6725. As the rod 6715 travels through the spacer 6720, hinged structures 6750-6753 contact the spacer 66720, buckle and extend away from the rod 6715 two form an upper end 6762 of the second wing and a lower end 6764 of the second wing. When second wing 6760 is satisfactorily deployed, the rod 6715 can be fixed in place relative to the spacer 6720 using a first stop 6782, a pin, or some other mechanism. The first wing 6730 can be deployed by urging the hinged structures 6754-6757 toward the spacer 6720, causing the hinged structures 6754-6757 to buckle and extend away from one another to form an upper end 6732 of the second wing and a lower end 6734 of the second wing. The anatomy of the neck is such that it is most convenient and minimally invasive to enter the neck from the side with respect to the implant 6700. A minimally invasive surgical method for implanting an alternative embodiment of an implant 6900 in the cervical spine is disclosed and taught herein. In this method, as shown in FIG. 72, preferably a guide wire 80 is inserted through a placement network or guide 90 into the neck of the implant recipient. The guide wire 80 is used to locate where the implant 6900 is to be placed relative to the cervical spine, including the spinous processes. Once the guide wire 80 is positioned with the aid of imaging techniques, an incision is made on the side of the neck along a line that is about perpendicular to the guide wire 80 and directed at the end of the guide wire 80. The cannula 6995 is fed through the incision and positioned between the targeted adjacent spinous processes. In an embodiment, the implant 6900 can include a distraction guide 6910, a spacer 6920, a rod 6915 extending through the spacer 6920, and deployable first and second wings 6930,6960. The implant 6900 can have a substantially circular cross-section to roughly conform with an inside surface of the cannula 6995. The implant 6900 is urged through the cannula 6995 and into position between the adjacent spinous processes so that the second wing 6960 hinge structures are clear of the cannula 6995, as described above in reference to FIG. 68B. The second wing 6960 is then deployed by urging the rod 6915 in a direction opposite the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 6925. As the rod 6915 travels through the spacer 6920, hinged structures 6950-6953 contact the spacer 6920, buckle and extend away from the rod 6915 two form an upper end 6962 of the second wing and a lower end 6964 of the second wing. When second wing 6960 is satisfactorily deployed, the cannula 6995 can be retracted to expose the hinged structures 6954-6957 of the first wing 6930. The first wing 6930 can be deployed by urging the hinged structures 6954-6957 toward the spacer 6920, causing the hinged structures 6954-6957 to buckle and extend away from one another to form an upper end 6932 of the second wing and a lower end 6934 of the second wing. Once the first wing 6930 is deployed, the rod 6915 can optionally be shortened, and the cannula 6995 can be withdrawn from the incision. The incision can then be closed.
  • The foregoing description of the present invention have been presented for purposes of illustration and description. It is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations will be apparent to practitioners skilled in this art. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the invention and its practical application, thereby enabling others skilled in the art to understand the invention for various embodiments and with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated. It is intended that the scope of the invention be defined by the following claims and their equivalents.
  • Interspinous Implants
  • FIG. 73A is a perspective view of an implant as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/850,267, filed May 20, 2004, incorporated herein by reference. The implant 7100 comprises a first wing 7130, a spacer 7120, and a lead-in tissue expander (also referred to herein as a distraction guide) 7110. The distraction guide 7110 in this particular embodiment is wedge-shaped, i.e., the implant has an expanding cross-section from a proximal end of the implant 7100 to a region 7150 where the guide 7110 joins with the spacer 7120 (referencing for the figures is based on the point of insertion of the implant between spinous processes). As such, the distraction guide 7110 functions to initiate distraction of the soft tissue and the spinous processes when the implant 7100 is surgically inserted between the spinous processes. It is to be understood that the distraction guide 7110 can be pointed and the like, in order to facilitate insertion of the implant 7100 between the spinous processes of adjacent cervical vertebrae. It is advantageous that the insertion technique disturb as little of the bone and surrounding tissue or ligaments as possible in order to reduce trauma to the site and promote early healing, and prevent destabilization of the normal anatomy. For embodiments such as those of FIGS. 73A and 73B, there is no requirement to remove any of the bone of the spinous processes and no requirement to sever, or remove from the body, ligaments and tissues immediately associated with the spinous processes. For example, it is unnecessary to sever the supraspinal ligament of the lower vertebrae or the ligamentum nuchae (which corresponds to the supraspinal ligament) which partially cushions the spinous processes of the upper cervical vertebrae. As can be seen, the spacer 7120 can be teardrop-shaped in cross-section perpendicular to a longitudinal axis 7125 of the implant 7100. In this way, the shape of the spacer 7120 can roughly conform to a wedge-shaped space, or a portion of the space, between adjacent spinous processes within which the implant 7100 is to be positioned. As shown in FIG. 1A, the spacer 7120 (and the first wing 7108) is shaped to accommodate the anatomical form or contour of spinous processes (and/or laminae) of the C6 and C7 vertebra for placement between such spinous processes (i.e., the C6-C7 motion segment). The same shape or variations of this shape can be used to accommodate other motion segments, for example in the thoracic or lumbar regions. In other embodiments the spacer 7120 can have alternative shapes such as circular, wedge, oval, ovoid, football, and rectangular with rounded corners, and other shapes. The shape of the spacer 7120 can be selected for a particular patient so that the physician can position the implant 7100 as close as possible to the anterior portion of the surface of the spinous process. The shape selected for the spacer 7120 can affect the contact surface area of the implant 7100 and the spinous processes that are to be subject to distraction. Increasing the contact surface area between the implant 7100 and the spinous processes can distribute a load force between the spinous frame and the implant 7100. The first wing 7130 is likewise teardrop-shaped in cross-section perpendicular to a longitudinal axis 7125 of the spacer 7120 and distraction guide 7110. The dimensions of the first wing 7130 can be larger than that of the spacer 7120, particularly along the axis of the spine, and can limit or block lateral displacement of the implant 7100 in the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 7125. As with the spacer 7120, the first wing 7130 can have other cross-sectional shapes, such as elliptical, wedge, circular, oval, ovoid, football, and rectangular with rounded corners and other shapes.
  • The implant 7100 of FIG. 73A further includes an adjustable wing 7160 (also referred to herein as a second wing) separate from the distraction guide 7110, the spacer 7120 and the first wing 7130. The second wing 7160 is connectable with the distraction guide 7110 (and/or the spacer 7120) once the implant 7100 is positioned between adjacent spinous processes. The second wing 7160, similar to the first wing 7130, can limit or block lateral displacement of the implant 7100, however displacement is limited or blocked in the direction opposite insertion. When both the first wing 7130 and the second wing 7160 are connected with the implant 7100 and the implant 7100 is positioned between adjacent spinous processes, a portion of the spinous processes can be sandwiched between the first wing 7130 and the second wing 7160, limiting displacement along the longitudinal axis 7125. As can be seen, the second wing 7160 can be teardrop-shaped in cross-section. A lip 7180 defining a space 7170 through the second wing 7160 allows the second wing 7160 to pass over the distraction guide 7110 to meet and connect with the distraction guide 7110 and/or the spacer 7120. The second wing 7160 is then secured to the distraction guide 7110 and/or the spacer 7120. The second wing 7160, can be designed to be interference-fit onto the spacer 7120 or a portion of the distraction guide 7110 adjacent to the spacer 7120. Where the second wing 7160 is interference-fit, there is no additional attachment device to fasten the second wing 7160 relative to the remainder of the implant 7100.
  • Alternatively, various fasteners can be used to secure the second wing 7160 relative to the remainder of the implant 7100. For example, FIG. 73A illustrates an embodiment of an implant 7100 including a teardrop-shaped second wing 7160 having a tongue 7158 at the posterior end of the second wing 7160. A bore 7155 is disposed through the tongue 7158, and is aligned with a corresponding bore 7156 on the spacer 7120 when the second wing 7160 is brought into position by surgical insertion relative to the rest of the implant 7100. A threaded screw 7154 can be inserted through the aligned bores 7155,7156 in a posterior-anterior direction to secure the second wing 7160 to the spacer 7120. The direction of insertion from a posterior to an anterior direction has the screw 7154 engaging the bores 7155,7156 and the rest of the implant 7100 along a direction that is generally perpendicular to the longitudinal axis 7125. This orientation is most convenient when the physician is required to use a screw 7154 to secure the second wing 7160 to the rest of the implant 7100. The second wing 7160 can further be secured to the spacer 7120 by some other mechanism, for example such as a flexible hinge (not shown) with a protrusion that engages an indentation of one of the distraction guide 7110 and the spacer 7120. Alternatively, the second wing 7160 can be secured to one of the distraction guide 7110 and the spacer 7120 by still some other mechanism.
  • FIG. 73B is a perspective view of an implant as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,695,842 to Zucherman, et al, incorporated herein by reference. The implant 7200 has a main body that includes a spacer 7220, a first wing 7230, a lead-in tissue expander 7210 (also referred to herein as a distraction guide) and an alignment track 7203. The main body of the implant 7200 is inserted between adjacent spinous processes and remains in place (where desired) without attachment to the bone or ligaments.
  • The distraction guide 7210 includes a tip from which the distraction guide 7210 expands, the tip having a diameter sufficiently small such that the tip can pierce an opening in an interspinous ligament and/or can be inserted into a small initial dilated opening. The diameter and/or cross-sectional area of the distraction guide 7210 gradually increases until it is substantially similar to the diameter of the spacer 7220. The tapered front end eases the ability of a physician to urge the implant 7200 between adjacent spinous processes. When urging the main body of the implant 7200 between adjacent spinous processes, the front end of the distraction guide 7210 distracts the adjacent spinous processes and dilates the interspinous ligament so that a space between the adjacent spinous processes is approximately the diameter of the spacer 7220.
  • As shown in FIG. 73B, the spacer 7220 is elliptically shaped in cross-section, and can swivel so that the spacer 7220 can self-align relative to the uneven surfaces of the spinous processes. Self-alignment can ensure that compressive loads are distributed across the surface of the bone. As contemplated in Zucherman '842, the spacer 7220 can have, for example, a diameter of six millimeters, eight millimeters, ten millimeters, twelve millimeters and fourteen millimeters. These diameters refer to the height by which the spacer 7220 distracts and maintains apart the spinous process. For an elliptically shaped spacer 7220, the selected height (i.e., diameter) is the minor dimension measurement across the ellipse. The major dimension is transverse to the alignment of the spinous process, one above the other.
  • The first wing 7230 has a lower portion 7231 and an upper portion 7232. The upper portion 7232 is shaped to accommodate the anatomical form or contour of spinous processes (and/or laminae) of the L4 (for an L4-L5 placement) or L5 (for an L5-S 1 placement) vertebra. The same shape or variations of this shape can be used to accommodate other motion segments, such as motion segments in the cervical and thoracic regions. The lower portion 7231 can also be rounded to accommodate the spinous processes. The lower portion 7231 and upper portion 7232 of the first wing 7230 act as a stop mechanism when the implant 7200 is inserted between adjacent spinous processes. The implant 7200 cannot be inserted beyond the surfaces of the first wing 7230. Additionally, once the implant 7200 is inserted, the first wing 7230 can prevent some side-to-side, or posterior-to-anterior movement of the implant 7200. As with the implant 7100 of FIG. 73A, the implant 7200 of FIG. 73B further includes a second wing 7260. Similar to the first wing 7230, the second wing 7260 includes a lower portion 7261 and an upper portion 7262 sized and/or shaped to accommodate the anatomical form or contour of the spinous processes and/or lamina. The second wing 7260 can be secured to the main body of the implant 7200 with a fastener 7254. The second wing 7260 also has an alignment tab 7268. When the second wing 7260 is initially placed on the main body of the implant 7200, the alignment tab 7268 engages the alignment track 7203. The alignment tab 7268 slides within the alignment track 7203 and helps to maintain the adjustable wing 7260 substantially parallel with the first wing 7230. When the main body of the implant 7200 is inserted into the patient and the second wing 7260 has been attached, displacement along the longitudinal axis 7225 in either the direction of insertion or the direction opposite insertion can be limited or blocked.
  • Further, the second wing 7260 also can prevent some side-to-side, or posterior-to-anterior movement.
  • For both the implant 7100 of FIG. 73A and the implant 7200 of FIG. 73B, where a second wing 7160,7260 is connected with the implant 7100,7200 after the implant 7100,7200 is positioned between the spinous processes, a procedure for positioning such an implant 7100,7200 and subsequently connecting the second wing 7160,7260 with the implant 7100,7200 can require a bilateral approach wherein a physician must access both sides of the interspinous ligament, a first side to pierce and/or distract the interspinous ligament and position the implant 7100,7200 so that the movement in the direction of insertion is satisfactorily limited by the first wing 7130,7230, and a second side to attach the second wing 7160,7260 such that movement in the direction opposite insertion is satisfactorily limited by the second wing 7160,7260.
  • Implants Having a Lead-in Screw
  • Referring to FIGS. 74A through 75C, implants 7300 and methods for positioning such implants in accordance with the present invention can include, in an embodiment, a frame 7302 having a central body 7304 extending along a longitudinal axis 7325 of the implant 7300. The central body 7304 can include a distraction guide 7306 at a proximal end of the central body 7304. The distraction guide 7306 can have a tapered shape so that the distraction guide 7306 can pierce and/or distract an interspinous ligament associated with the targeted motion segment. A first wing 7330 extends from a distal end of the central body 7304 and acts to limit or block movement of the implant 7300 along the longitudinal axis 7325 in the direction of insertion.
  • A substantially thread-shaped lead-in screw (also referred to herein as a second wing) 7360 extends from the periphery of the central body 7304 distally located relative to the distraction guide 7306. For example, the second wing can be helical shaped, wherein a helical shape is generally a three-dimensional curve that lies on a cylinder or a cone, so that its angle to a plane perpendicular to the axis is constant. Helical shapes as described herein need not lie along a constant angle, but rather can lie along an angle that varies. A helical shape need only include a curve that has a gap 7361 (also referred to herein as a groove) between overlapping surfaces such that structures related to the adjacent spinous processes and the spinous processes can pass within the groove 7361. It is to be understood that a lead-in screw shape other than helical is within the spirit and scope of the invention. For example, a shape with a constant diameter thread, or with different or constant thread pitches can be used. Generally and preferably the second wing 7360 can have an outer diameter that steadily increases from near the proximal end of the central body 7304 distally toward the first wing 7330. The second wing 7360 terminates so that a spacer 7320 (FIG. 74B) can be arranged between the second wing 7360 and the first wing 7330. The helical shape of the second wing 7360 can facilitate implantation between adjacent spinous processes 2,4 (shown in FIGS. 75A-75E) from one or more incisions formed on one side of an interspinous ligament 6 extending between the adjacent spinous processes 2,4.
  • Implantation can be accomplished in such embodiments as described above by initially piercing or distracting the interspinous ligament 6 with the distraction guide 7306, and subsequently rotating the central body 7304. One or both of the interspinous ligament 6 and the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 slip within the groove 7361 of the helically shaped second wing 7360 as the central body 7304 is rotated and the central body 7304 is drawn or urged along the longitudinal axis 7325 in the direction of insertion. The interspinous ligament 6 and/or associated spinous processes 2,4 travels along the groove 7361 and therefore along the central body 7304, causing the second wing 7360 to be positioned, when the implant 7300 is seated, at an opposite side of the interspinous ligament 6 from the first wing 7330 such that the interspinous ligament 6 is disposed between the first wing 7330 and the second wing 7360 along the longitudinal axis 7325. Arranging the interspinous ligament 6, and/or the associated spinous processes 2,4 between the first wing 7330 and the second wing 7360 limits or blocks movement along the longitudinal axis 7325. In some embodiments, the distraction guide 7306 can have a generally conical shape, rather than a wedge-shape as described above in reference to FIGS. 73A and 73B. Where the distraction guide 7306 includes a wedge-shape, rotation of the central body 7304 can cause the distraction guide 7306 to distract the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 and/or interspinous ligament 6 a distance according to the major dimension of the distraction guide 7306. Referring to FIG. 74A, as with the distraction guide 7306, the first wing 7330 has a rounded shape, having substantially the same minor and major dimension. The first wing 7330 is shaped so that the first wing 7330 can rotate along with the central body 7304 while minifying interference from surrounding structures. Further, the rounded shape of the first wing 7330 can accommodate slots as described below, while providing a surface to contact the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 during implantation, thereby limiting movement along the longitudinal axis 7325 in the direction of insertion. However, in other embodiments, the first wing 7330 need not have a rounded shape.
  • The first wing 7330 can include one or more slots to receive a spacer 7320 so that the spacer 7320 can be arranged over the central body 7304 between the second wing 7360 and the first wing 7330. As shown, the first wing 7330 includes two slots 7332,7334 having a substantially arced shape, and arranged in opposition to one another. The maximum distance between the peripheries of the slots 7332,7334 can substantially define a minor (or alternatively a major) dimension of the spacer 7320. The slots 7332,7334 preferably have inner surfaces that transition to the outer surface of the central body 7304, so that when a spacer 7320 is urged through the slots 7332,7334, the spacer 7320 abuts the central body 7304, thereby allowing a portion of a load to be transferred to the central body 7304. In other embodiments, one or more slots can be disposed through the first wing 7330 and can be shaped as desired, such that the one or more slots having the same or different geometries.
  • FIG. 74B is a perspective view of the spacer 7320 having a geometry adapted to be received over the frame 7302 described above. The spacer 7320 includes a top portion 7322 and a bottom portion 7324. (It should be noted that some components of the implant are referred to herein as “top” and “bottom” components; however, positional modifiers are attached merely to distinguish between similar components and are not meant to limit use of the invention). The top portion 7322 and the bottom portion 7324 have outer surfaces that support a respective adjacent spinous process 2,4 and inner surfaces that abut the central body 7304. As shown, a portion of the inner surfaces of the top portion 7322 and the bottom portion 7324 are grooved so as to approximately conform with a shape of the central body 7304, thereby spreading a load across the outer surface of the central body 7304. The outer surfaces are arced, and generally shaped to resemble the outer periphery of the slots 7332,7334 of the first wing 7330. In other embodiments, for example where the central body is trapezoidal, or otherwise shaped, the top portion 7322, bottom portion 7324, and corresponding slots 7332,7334 can be similarly shaped to accommodate the central body 7304. Alternatively, the central body 7304 can have an irregular or non-symmetrical shape to prevent incorrect mating of the spacer 7320 with the frame 7302. One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate the myriad variations with which the structures can be shaped.
  • As can be seen, the top portion 7322 and the bottom portion 7324 include respective lead-in tissue expanders 7321,7323 (also referred to herein as a distraction guides). The distraction guide 7321,7323 for the top portion 7322 and the bottom portion 7324 can taper at the proximal end of the spacer 7320, thereby allowing the distraction guide 7306 to distract one or both of the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 and/or interspinous ligament 6.
  • As can be seen, the top portion 7322 and the bottom portion 7324, taken together in cross-section perpendicular to a longitudinal axis 7325, can have a split teardrop shape, similar to a cross-section of the spacer 7120 of FIG. 73A. In this way, the shape of the spacer 7320 can roughly conform to a wedge-shaped space, or a portion of the space, between adjacent spinous processes within which the implant 7300 is to be positioned. The same shape or variations of this shape can be used to accommodate different motion segments and/or different patients, as described above. In other embodiments the spacer 7320 can have alternative shapes such as circular, elliptical, wedge, oval, ovoid, football, and rectangular with rounded corners, and other shapes. The shape of the spacer 7320 can be selected for a particular patient so that the physician can position the implant 7300 as close as possible to the anterior portion of the surface of the spinous process. The shape selected for the spacer 7320 can affect the contact surface area of the implant 7300 and the spinous processes that are to be subject to distraction. Increasing the contact surface area between the implant 7300 and the spinous processes can distribute a load force between the spinous frame and the implant 7300.
  • The top portion 7322 and the bottom portion 7324 extend from a base 7326 and are fixed in relative position by the base 7326. As can be seen, the bottom portion 7324 extends farther than the top portion 7322. As will be described in further detail below, the top portion 7322 is truncated in length along the longitudinal axis 7325 relative to the bottom portion 7324 to avoid contacting the second wing 7360 which in the embodiment shown in FIG. 74A spirals to a termination point at the upper surface of the central body 7304. An additional advantage with the truncated top portion 7322 is that the spinous processes are distracted more gradually, first with the bottom portion 7324 and then with the top portion 7322 as the spacer 7320 is inserted into the frame 7302. The base 7326 can have a length along the longitudinal axis 7325 as desired, and preferably having a length sufficient to support the top portion 7322 and the bottom portion 7324 in an at least semi-rigid position relative to one another. The base 7326 can include a cavity 7329 for receiving one or both of an insertion tool and a fastener (not shown). The cavity 7329 can correspond to a threaded cavity 7309 disposed in the central body 7304 so that, for example, the frame 7302 and the spacer 7320 can be fixedly attached, with by way of example only a screw, once the spacer 7320 is seated.
  • FIG. 74C is a perspective view of the implant 7300 wherein the spacer 7320 is seated within the frame 7302 and arranged over the central body 7304. As can be seen, the bottom portion 7324 of the spacer 7320 extends further than the top portion 7322, and is unobstructed by the second wing 7360, which spirals partially above the bottom portion 7324. The first wing 7330 and the second wing 7360 have major dimensions approximately along the axis of the spine that are larger than the major dimension of the spacer 7320, thereby blocking or limiting movement of the implant 7300 along the longitudinal axis 7325.
  • FIGS. 75A through 75E are partial cross-sectional posterior views illustrating the implant 7300 being positioned between adjacent spinous processes. FIG. 75A illustrates the distraction guide of the frame 7302 positioned adjacent to the interspinous ligament 6 of the targeted motion segment. The frame 7302 can be urged against the interspinous ligament 6 to pierce and/or distract the interspinous ligament 6. The frame 7302 can further be urged into the interspinous ligament 6 along the longitudinal axis 7325 until the second wing 7360 contacts the interspinous ligament 6. Referring to FIG. 75B, the frame 7302 can then be rotated and urged toward the interspinous ligament 6 so that the second wing 7360 passes through the interspinous ligament 6, which is thereby positioned between a portion of the second wing 7360 and the first wing 7330 along the longitudinal axis 7325. The interspinous ligament 6 and the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 are substantially disposed within a groove 7361 between the surfaces of the second wing 7360 that overlap along the longitudinal axis 7325. Referring to FIG. 75C, the frame 7302 can be further rotated and urged into the interspinous ligament 6 until the entire second wing 7360 is substantially arranged so that the interspinous ligament 6 is disposed between the first wing 7330 and the second wing 7360. The frame 7302 can be further rotated so that the slots 7332,7334 are arranged to receive the spacer 7320 such that a load applied to the spacer 7320 is sufficiently distributed across the surface of the spacer 7320 (i.e., the spacer 7320 approximately conforms to a space between the contact surfaces of adjacent spinous processes 2,4 of the targeted motion segment). Referring to FIGS. 75D and 75E, once the frame 7304 is arranged as desired, the top portion 7322 and the bottom portion 7324 can be positioned within the corresponding slots 7332,7334 and urged over the central body 7304 so that the top portion 7322 and bottom portion 7324 further distract the interspinous ligament 6 and/or the adjacent spinous processes 2,4. The spacer 7320 can be urged in the direction of insertion until the base 7326 is seated against the first wing 7330. In a preferred embodiment, the top portion 7322 and the bottom portion 7324 can be arranged so that the top portion 7322 and bottom portion 7324 are approximately in contact or near-contact with the second wing 7360, so that the spacer 7320 fully supports a load applied by the adjacent spinous processes 2,4, without slippage.
  • FIG. 76A is an end view of the implant 7300 positioned between the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 of the targeted motion segment. As can be seen, the base 7326 is arranged at a slight angle relative to the axis of the spine. As can be seen, the upper spinous process 2 includes a lower contact surface that arcs slightly downward, and the lower spinous process 4 includes an upper contact surface that also arcs slightly downward. Arranging the implant 7300 as shown can increase the overall contact surface between the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 and the spacer 7320 over, for example, inserting the implant 7300 so that the base 7326 is aligned perpendicular to the axis of the spine. Increasing overall contact surface can reduce the stress applied from the motion segment to the spacer 7320, and from the spacer to the adjacent spinous processes 2,4.
  • As can further be seen, the base 7326 can include a cavity 7329 that in an embodiment is a bore having a diameter larger than a diameter of a corresponding cavity 7309 of the first wing 7330. Such a feature can be receive an insertion tool (not shown) for assisting in implantation, or such a feature can receive a fastener (not shown), such as a screw or bolt to secure the spacer 7320 to the frame 7302. A bore 7329 having a larger diameter than the cavity 7309 of the frame 7302 can allow a head of the fastener to be received so that the head does not extend beyond a distal face of the base 7326. In other embodiments, the base 7326 can include one or more additional cavities for receiving lock pins, or other features of an insertion tool (not shown), for example as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,712,819, entitled “Mating Insertion Instruments for Spinal Implants and Methods of Use,” issued Mar. 30, 2004 to Zucherman, et al.
  • FIG. 76B is a front view of the implant 7300 positioned between the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 of the targeted motion segment. As can be seen, the second wing 7360 is helical in shape and can limit or block motion in a direction opposite insertion by contacting the upper spinous process 2.
  • Further, a portion of the second wing 7360 can contact the lower spinous process 4. Although the second wing 7360 as shown includes a helical shape somewhat similar to that of a conch shell, in other embodiments the second wing 7360 can have a shape that varies from the shape shown. For example, the distal end of the second wing 7360 can overlap the proximal end of the second wing 7360 more or less than as shown. Alternatively, the second wing 7360 can be formed in two or more broken sections, rather than an unbroken spiral. Still further, the second wing 7360 can include slots for receiving a proximal piece of the upper and lower portions 7322,7324 of the spacer 7320. Myriad different variations of the shape shown in FIGS. 75A-76B will be readily apparent to one of skill in the art upon understanding the structure shown. Implants in accordance with the present invention are not intended to be limited to those described and shown herein, but rather apply to all such implants that utilize a wing having a major dimension larger than a major dimension of a space between spinous processes, wherein the wing can be appropriately positioned by rotating the implant while urging the implant in a direction of insertion.
  • Referring now to FIGS. 77A through 77C, an alternative embodiment of an implant 7400 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention is shown. FIG. 77A is a perspective view of the frame 7402 including a central body 7404 having a distraction guide 7406 at a proximal end, and an alignment protrusion 7408 at a distal end. As can be seen, the second wing 7460 is similar to the second wing 7460 described above. The alignment protrusion 7408 extends from the central body 7404 to align a spacer 7420 as the spacer 7420 is arranged over the central body 7404, and to prevent the spacer 7420 from subsequently rotating relative to the frame 7402 once implanted. Thus, the alignment protrusion 7408 corresponds to a notch 7427 within the spacer 7420 within which the central body 7404 is partially disposed.
  • FIG. 77B is a perspective view of the spacer 7420. The spacer 7420 includes a bore 7428 disposed at least partially through the spacer 7420, and including a notch 7427 along the length of the bore 7428 to receive the alignment protrusion 7408 of the frame 7402. The proximal end of the spacer 7420 can be tapered to form a distraction guide 7426 to distract the interspinous ligament 6 and/or the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 of the motion segment. Similarly to the rotatable spacer 7220 of FIG. 73B, and the implant 7300 of FIGS. 74A-74C, the implant 7400 can be further rotated or adjusted to distribute a load once the spacer 7420 is positioned over the frame 7404 and between the spinous processes 2,4. As above, the spacer 7420 can have a cross-section perpendicular to the longitudinal axis 7425 that is teardrop-shaped, similar to a cross-section of the spacer 7120,7320 of FIGS. 73A and 74A. In this way, the shape of the spacer 7420 can roughly conform to a wedge-shaped space, or a portion of the space, between adjacent spinous processes 2,4 within which the implant 7400 is to be positioned. The same shape or variations of this shape can be used to accommodate different motion segments and/or different patients, as described above. In other embodiments the spacer 7420 can have alternative shapes such as circular, elliptical, wedge, oval, ovoid, football, and rectangular with rounded corners, and other shapes. The shape of the spacer 7420 can be selected for a particular patient so that the physician can position the implant 7400 as close as possible to the anterior portion of the surface of the spinous process 2,4. The shape selected for the spacer 7420 can affect the contact surface area of the implant 7400 and the spinous processes 2,4 that are to be subject to distraction. Increasing the contact surface area between the implant 7400 and the spinous processes 2,4 can distribute a load force between the spinous frame and the implant 7400.
  • The spacer 7420 of FIG. 77B extends from a first wing 7430 integrally formed or connected with the spacer 7420. As can be seen, a proximal end of the spacer 7420 varies in length, extending farther near the bottom section of the spacer 7420 to correspond roughly with the helical shape of the second wing 7460, thereby avoiding contacting the second wing 7460 which in the embodiment shown in FIG. 77A spirals to a termination point at the upper surface of the central body 7404. As above, once the frame 7404 is arranged as desired, the spacer 7420 can be positioned over the central body 404 and urged over the central body 7404 so that the spacer 7420 further distracts the interspinous ligament and/or the adjacent spinous processes. The spacer 7320 can be urged in the direction of insertion until the central body 7404 is seated within the bore 7428. In a preferred embodiment, the shape of the proximal end of the spacer 7420 is shaped such that when seated, the proximal end is approximately in contact or near-contact with the second wing 7460, so that the spacer 7420 fully supports a load applied by the adjacent spinous processes, without slippage.
  • The first wing 7430 can have a depth along the longitudinal axis 7425 as desired, and a width such that the first wing 7430 can contact one or both of the adjacent spinous processes 2,4, thereby limiting or blocking moving of the implant 7400 in the direction of insertion along the longitudinal axis 7425. As shown, the first wing 7430 has a rounded shape, having substantially the same minor and major dimension. Unlike the embodiment of the implant 7300 of FIGS. 74A-74C, the first wing 7430 need not rotate to properly arrange the second wing 7460, therefore the first wing 7430 need not have a round shape, where it is desired that the second wing 7460 have some other shape. For example, the first wing 7430 can include a shape similar to that shown in FIG. 73B. The first wing 7430 can include a cavity 7429 for receiving one or both of an insertion tool (not shown). Further, the central body 7404 can optionally include a cavity 7409 so that, for example, the frame 7402, the spacer 7420, and the first wing 7430 can be fixedly attached once the spacer 7420 is seated.
  • FIG. 77C is a perspective view of the implant 7400 wherein the spacer 7420 is positioned to be seated on the frame 7402 and arranged over the central body 7404. The first wing 7430 and the second wing 7460 have major dimensions approximately along the axis of the spine that are larger than the major dimension of the spacer 7420, thereby blocking or limiting movement of the implant 7400 along the longitudinal axis 7425. FIG. 78 is a posterior view of an implant 7400 as described in FIGS. 77A-77C disposed between the adjacent spinous processes.
  • In some embodiments of systems including implants 7300,7400 similar to those shown in FIGS. 74A-77C, multiple different spacers 7320,7420 can be selectively associated with a single frame 7302,7402 so that a physician can choose an appropriately sized and shaped spacer 7320,7420 to accommodate a patient's anatomy. In embodiments including a central body 7304 extending from a first wing 7330, the distance between the outer peripheries of the two slots 7332,7334 can correspond to a maximum spacer size (e.g., 14 mm). In embodiments including a central body 7404 having an alignment protrusion 7408, a series of spacer 7420 can have varying dimensions and/or shapes, and can have similarly sized cavities 7428 to receive the central body 7404. As can be readily understood from this description, a system in accordance with embodiments of the present invention can include a frame 7302,7402 and a plurality of spacers 7320,7420 having varying sizes and/or shapes.
  • As mentioned above, implants, and systems and methods for positioning such implants between spinous processes in accordance with the present invention are not meant to be limited to embodiments as described above and otherwise herein, but rather are meant to include all such implants that utilize a wing having a major dimension larger than a major dimension of a space between spinous processes, wherein the wing can be appropriately positioned by rotating the implant while urging the implant in a direction of insertion. Myriad different variations may be readily apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art. For example, as shown in FIGS. 79A through 79C, in still another embodiment of an implant 7500 in accordance with the present invention, the frame 7502 can include an inner central body 7504 disposed within an outer central body 7505, with a proximal portion of a second wing 7560 being connected with, or extending from the inner central body 7504, and the distal portion of the second wing 7560 being connected with, or extending from the outer central body 7505. Once the frame 7502 is arranged as desired, such that the interspinous ligament is disposed between a first wing 7330 and the second wing 7560, the inner central body 7504 can be shifted to a position more fully received in the outer central body 7505 so that the second wing 7560 collapses, reducing the space occupied by the second wing 7560.
  • In such embodiments as shown in FIGS. 79A through 79C, the second wing 7560 can be made from a more ductile material so that the second wing 7560 can be readily collapsed. Alternatively, the second wing 7560 can be made from a shape memory material, for example such as Nitinol, so that once the frame is positioned the second wing 7560 collapses, urging the inner central body 7504 to shift within the outer central body 7505. Additionally the second wing 7560 can be made in two parts, one part fastened to the inner central body 7504, and one part fastened to the outer central body 7505. When the inner central body 7504 is more fully received into the outer central body 7505, the portion of the second wing 7560 secure to the inner central body 7504 becomes nested in the portion of the second wing 7560 connected to the outer central body 7505.
  • As shown in FIG. 80, in a still further embodiment an implant 7600 in accordance with the present invention can include a distraction guide 7606 that tapers more gradually, so that the adjacent spinous processes and/or related tissues are distracted as the lead-in screw 7660 is rotated and urged toward a direction of insertion, as described above.
  • In still further embodiments, the spacer need not be fixed, but rather can be rotatably disposed over the central body. For example, the spacer can include an alignment notch, as described above with reference to FIG. 73B, so that when the central body is rotated, thereby threading the adjacent spinous processes and related structures within the groove of the thread-shaped wing and positioning the thread-shaped wing on an opposite side of the adjacent spinous processes, the spacer can be held in a fixed positioned. By fixing the spacer is position, the spacer can be arranged as desired between the adjacent spinous processes. Once the implant is positioned between adjacent spinous processes, the rotatable spacer can be released to conform within the space between spinous processes. These and other variations are within the scope of the invention as contemplated.
  • Materials for Use in Implants of the Present Invention
  • In some embodiments, the implant, and components of the implant (i.e., the spacer, the frame) can be fabricated from medical grade metals such as titanium, stainless steel, cobalt chrome, and alloys thereof, or other suitable implant material having similar high strength and biocompatible properties. Additionally, the implant can be at least partially fabricated from a shape memory metal, for example Nitinol, which is a combination of titanium and nickel. Such materials are typically radiopaque, and appear during x-ray imaging, and other types of imaging. Implants in accordance with the present invention, and/or portions thereof can also be fabricated from somewhat flexible and/or deflectable material. In these embodiments, the implant and/or portions thereof can be fabricated in whole or in part from medical grade biocompatible polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers. A copolymer is a polymer derived from more than one species of monomer. A polymer composite is a heterogeneous combination of two or more materials, wherein the constituents are not miscible, and therefore exhibit an interface between one another. A polymer blend is a macroscopically homogeneous mixture of two or more different species of polymer. Many polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers are radiolucent and do not appear during x-ray or other types of imaging. Implants comprising such materials can provide a physician with a less obstructed view of the spine under imaging, than with an implant comprising radiopaque materials entirely. However, the implant need not comprise any radiolucent materials.
  • One group of biocompatible polymers is the polyaryletherketone group which has several members including polyetheretherketone (PEEK), and polyetherketoneketone (PEKK). PEEK is proven as a durable material for implants, and meets the criterion of biocompatibility. Medical grade PEEK is available from Victrex Corporation of Lancashire, Great Britain under the product name PEEK-OPTIMA. Medical grade PEKK is available from Oxford Performance Materials under the name
  • OXPEKK, and also from CoorsTek under the name BioPEKK. These medical grade materials are also available as reinforced polymer resins, such reinforced resins displaying even greater material strength.
  • In an embodiment, the implant can be fabricated from PEEK 450G, which is an unfilled PEEK approved for medical implantation available from Victrex. Other sources of this material include Gharda located in Panoli, India. PEEK 450G has the following approximate properties:
    Property Value
    Density 1.3 g/cc
    Rockwell M 99
    Rockwell R 126
    Tensile Strength 97 MPa
    Modulus of Elasticity 3.5 GPa
    Flexural Modulus 4.1 GPa
  • PEEK 450G has appropriate physical and mechanical properties and is suitable for carrying and spreading a physical load between the adjacent spinous processes. The implant and/or portions thereof can be formed by extrusion, injection, compression molding and/or machining techniques.
  • It should be noted that the material selected can also be filled. Fillers can be added to a polymer, copolymer, polymer blend, or polymer composite to reinforce a polymeric material. Fillers are added to modify properties such as mechanical, optical, and thermal properties. For example, carbon fibers can be added to reinforce polymers mechanically to enhance strength for certain uses, such as for load bearing devices. In some embodiments, other grades of PEEK are available and contemplated for use in implants in accordance with the present invention, such as 30% glass-filled or 30% carbon-filled grades, provided such materials are cleared for use in implantable devices by the FDA, or other regulatory body. Glass-filled PEEK reduces the expansion rate and increases the flexural modulus of PEEK relative to unfilled PEEK. The resulting product is known to be ideal for improved strength, stiffness, or stability. Carbon-filled PEEK is known to have enhanced compressive strength and stiffness, and a lower expansion rate relative to unfilled PEEK. Carbon-filled PEEK also offers wear resistance and load carrying capability.
  • As will be appreciated, other suitable similarly biocompatible thermoplastic or thermoplastic polycondensate materials that resist fatigue, have good memory, are flexible, and/or deflectable, have very low moisture absorption, and good wear and/or abrasion resistance, can be used without departing from the scope of the invention. As mentioned, the implant can be comprised of polyetherketoneketone (PEKK). Other material that can be used include polyetherketone (PEK), polyetherketoneetherketoneketone (PEKEKK), polyetheretherketoneketone (PEEKK), and generally a polyaryletheretherketone. Further, other polyketones can be used as well as other thermoplastics. Reference to appropriate polymers that can be used in the implant can be made to the following documents, all of which are incorporated herein by reference. These documents include: PCT Publication WO 02/02158 A1, dated Jan. 10, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials;” PCT Publication WO 02/00275 A1, dated Jan. 3, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials;” and, PCT Publication WO 02/00270 A1, dated Jan. 3, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials.” Other materials such as Bionate®, polycarbonate urethane, available from the Polymer Technology Group, Berkeley, Calif., may also be appropriate because of the good oxidative stability, biocompatibility, mechanical strength and abrasion resistance. Other thermoplastic materials and other high molecular weight polymers can be used.
  • Methods for Implanting Interspinous Implants
  • A minimally invasive surgical method for implanting an implant 7300 in the cervical spine is disclosed and taught herein. In this method, as shown in FIG. 81, preferably a guide wire 7680 is inserted through a placement network 7690 into the neck of the implant recipient. The guide wire 7680 is used to locate where the implant 7300 is to be placed relative to the cervical spine, including the spinous processes. Once the guide wire 7680 is positioned with the aid of imaging techniques, an incision is made on the side of the neck so that an implant 7300 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, can be positioned in the neck thorough an incision and along a line that is about perpendicular to the guide wire 7680 and directed at the end of the guide wire 7680. A frame 7302 of the implant 7300 is inserted into the neck of the patient. The frame 7302 includes a distraction guide 7306 extending from the proximal end of a central body 7304 and a first wing 7330 extending from the distal end of the central body 7304. The frame 7302 further includes a helical-shaped second wing 7360 extending distally from the distraction guide 7306 some distance along the central body 7304. Preferably during insertion, the distraction guide 7306 pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue. The frame 7302 can be arranged so that the second wing 7360 extending from the central body 7304 is in contact or near contact with the interspinous ligament. The frame 7302 is then rotated in a direction so that the spiraling extension of the second wing 7360 “grows” and the frame 7302 is urged forward such that the adjacent spinous processes fit within a groove between spiraled surfaces of the second wing 7360. The frame 7302 is continuously rotated until the second wing 7360 has passed the adjacent spinous processes 2,4.
  • The frame 7302 can be further rotated until slots 7332,7334 of the first wing 7330 are arranged as desired between the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 of the targeted motion segment. Once the frame 7302 is satisfactorily positioned, a spacer 7320 can be mated with the frame 7302 so that an upper portion 7322 and a lower portion 7324 of the spacer 7320 is received through the respective slot 7332,7334 of the first wing 7330 (or simply received over the central body 7304 for example where the first wing 7330 extends from the spacer 7320 rather than extending form the central body 7304). The spacer 7320 can be inserted along a line that is generally collinear with the line over which the frame 7302 is inserted. The anatomy of the neck is such that it is most convenient and minimally invasive to enter the neck from the side with respect to the frame 7302 and the spacer 7320.
  • Further, a minimally invasive surgical method for implanting an implant 7300 in the lumbar spine is disclosed and taught herein. In this method, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 82, preferably a unilateral incision can be made using a posterior-anterior approach. The unilateral incision can be made, for example, at a location some distance to the right of an axis along the spinous process 2,4 (Step 7702). The incision can be enlarged, and a distraction tool can be positioned within the incision so that the proximal end of the distraction tool can access an exposed side of the interspinous ligament 6. The distraction tool can be urged through the interspinous ligament 6 and distracted, thereby distracting the interspinous ligament 6 so as to receive the implant 7300 (Step 7704). Once the interspinous ligament 6 is sufficiently distracted, the distraction tool can be disengaged and removed from the incision.
  • Once the distraction tool has been removed from the incision, the frame 7302 can be positioned at the dilated opening, and the distraction guide 7306 of the frame 7302 can be urged through the dilated opening (Step 7706). As above, the frame 7302 can be arranged so that the second wing 7360 extending from the central body 7304 is in near contact with the interspinous ligament 6. The frame 7302 is then rotated in direction so that the spiraling extension of the second wing 7360 “grows”, and the frame 7302 urged forward such that the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 fit within a groove between surface of the second wing 7360 (Step 7708). The frame 7302 is continuously rotated until the second wing 7360 has passed the adjacent spinous processes 2,4. The frame 7300 can be further rotated until the slots 7332,7334 are arranged as desired between the adjacent spinous processes of the targeted motion segment. The frame 7302 is free to rotate so that the load can be distributed more evenly over the surface of the spinous processes. Once the frame 7302 is satisfactorily positioned, a spacer 7320 can be inserted with slots 7322,7324 of a first wing 7330 extending from the distal end of the central body 7304 (or simply received over the central body for example where the first wing extends from the spacer). The spacer 7320 can be inserted along a line that is generally collinear with the line over which the frame 7302 is inserted (Step 7710). The remaining tools can be removed from the incision, and the incision can be closed. Preferably during insertion, the distraction end pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue (Step 7712). The foregoing description of the present invention have been presented for purposes of illustration and description. It is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations will be apparent to practitioners skilled in this art. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the invention and its practical application, thereby enabling others skilled in the art to understand the invention for various embodiments and with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated. It is intended that the scope of the invention be defined by the following claims and their equivalents.
  • Interspinous Implant Having Slide-in Distraction Piece
  • FIG. 83 is a perspective end view of an alternative embodiment of an implant 8700 in accordance with the present invention. The implant 8700 can include an initiating piece 8704 and a slide-in distraction piece 8702 adapted to be slidably coupled with the initiating piece 8704.
  • The initiating piece 8704 and the slide-in distraction piece 8702, when positioned between adjacent spinous processes and coupled together, can resemble implants 7100 as described above with reference to FIGS. 7-23. For example, the implant 8700 of FIG. 83 includes a first wing 8730 at a distal end of the implant 8700, a fixed spacer 8720 extending from the first wing 8730, a second wing 8760 extending from the spacer 8720 so that the spacer 8720 is disposed between the first wing 8730 and the second wing 8760, and a distraction guide 8710 at a proximal end 8716 of the implant 8700. FIG. 84A is a perspective view of the initiating piece 8704. The initiating piece 8704 includes a slot 8784 within a lower sliding surface 8794 that extends through a substantial portion of the length of the initiating piece 8704, the slot 8784 being adapted to receive a rail 8782 of the slide-in distraction piece 8702. The slot 8784 extends a length at least as long as the rail 8782 and preferably does not extend through the entire initiating piece 8704 so that the distraction piece 8702 is prevented from sliding out of position in the direction of insertion. As shown, the slot 8784 includes a flange 8785 along the periphery of the slot 8784 to retain the rail 8782 within the slot 8784. The slot 8784 is thus shaped to substantially conform with a “T” shaped cross-section of the rail 8782 so that when the slide-in distraction piece 8702 is mated with the initiating piece 8704 and the rail 8782 is seated within the slot 8784, relative movement between the distraction piece 8702 and the initiating piece 8704 is limited or substantially blocked, except along the longitudinal axis 8725 in a direction opposite the direction of insertion. To limit or block movement along the longitudinal axis 8725 in a direction opposite the direction of insertion, the slot 8784 can include a recess 8787 adapted to receive a catch 8781 of the rail 8782 so that when the catch 8781 passes over the recess 8787, the catch 8781 is extended, locking the distraction piece 8702 in place, and limiting or blocking movement in a direction opposite insertion. Alternatively, the catch 8781 can be extendably associated with the slot 8784, while the recess 8787 is formed within the rail 8782 for receiving the catch 8781.
  • The initiating piece 8704 includes a lower distraction element 8714 having a contact surface that tapers to the proximal end 8716 from above as well as below the proximal end 8716 so that the lower distraction element 8714 has a “V” shape in cross-section along an axis of the spine. Such a geometry can ease implantation when compared with a distraction element 8714 that tapers to the proximal end only from below (or above) the proximal end 8716 by more evenly distributing a load force applied to the lower distraction element 8714 by the interspinous ligament 6 during initial piercing and/or distraction of the interspinous ligament 6. The initiating piece 8704 further includes a lower portion 8734 of the first wing, a lower portion 8764 of the second wing, and a lower portion 8724 of the spacer. In an embodiment, the lower portions 8734,8764,8724 can be integrally formed as the lower distraction element 8714, thereby avoiding discontinuities in a lower sliding surface 8794 of the initiation piece 8704. The lower sliding surface 8794 of the initiating piece 8704 is substantially flat and preferably smooth to ease receipt of the rail 8782 within the slot 8784. The lower sliding surface 8794 slopes upward relative to the longitudinal axis 8725 from the distal end of the initiating piece 8704 to the proximal end of the initiating piece 8704. The slope of the lower sliding surface 8794 causes variation in thickness of the lower portion 8724 of the spacer from the distal end of the spacer to the proximal end of the spacer. This slope aids in the distraction of the spinous processes upon insertion of the distraction piece 8702. Referring again to FIG. 83, the contact surfaces of the implant 8700 include relatively smooth transitions from the distraction guide 8710 to the second wing 8760, and from the second wing 8760 to the spacer 8720. As described in greater detail below, during implantation the initiating piece 8704 and the distraction piece 8702 are positioned as separate, single pieces. A relatively continuous surface with smooth transitions improves ease of implantation and minifies obstruction of the initiating piece 8704 and the distraction piece 8702 by the adjacent spinous processes and/or related tissues. In contrast to implants as described with reference to FIGS. 7-23, it is preferable that the distraction piece 8702 and the initiating piece 8704 have smoother transitions between the distraction guide 8710, the second wing 8760, and the spacer 8720, as such transitions even further lessen the obstruction to the movement of the implant during implantation.
  • The lower portion 8734 of the first wing can further optionally include one or more cavities 8770 for receiving prongs of an insertion tool. As shown in FIGS. 84A through 84C, the initiating piece 8704 includes two cavities 8770 extending from the distal end of the initiating piece 8704 toward the proximal end 8716, with one cavity 8770 being arranged on each side of the lower portion 8734 of the first wing. Each cavity 8770 can be sized to receive a prong of the insertion tool. The cavity 8770 can further include a groove 8772 extending perpendicular to the cavity 8770. Referring to FIGS. 84B and 84C, a prong 8795 of an insertion tool 8794 can include, in an embodiment, a protrusion 8796 that fits within the groove 8772. When the prong is inserted into the cavity 8770 and rotated approximately 90 degrees (FIG. 84C) so that the protrusion is rotated into the groove 8772, the prong is “locked” within the cavity 8770. Once the prongs of the insertion tool are arranged in a locked configuration, the implant 8700 can be releasably guided into position between the adjacent spinous processes.
  • FIG. 85A is a posterior view of the initiating piece 8704 positioned adjacent to the interspinous ligament 6. As can be seen, the initiating piece 8704 has a maximum thickness T from the lower sliding surface 8794 to the lower portion 8764 of the second wing. In a preferred embodiment, the maximum thickness T of the initiating piece 8704 is approximately the same as, or less than the thickness of the spacer 8720 when the initiating piece 8704 and the distraction piece 8702 are mated and the implant 8700 is positioned between the adjacent spinous processes 2,4. Referring to FIG. 85B, as the initiating piece 8704 is urged into the interspinous ligament 6, the lower distraction element 8714 pierces and/or distracts the fibers of the interspinous ligament 6. As shown in FIG. 85C, the initiating piece 8704 is further urged through the interspinous ligament 6 so that the lower portion 8764 of the second wing passes between the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 but preferably does not distract the space between the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 beyond the maximum distraction height of the spacer 8720. As shown in FIG. 85D, the initiating piece 8704 is further urged through the interspinous ligament 6 so that the lower portion 8724 of the spacer is approximately positioned between the adjacent spinous processes 2,4. Note that in other embodiments, the maximum thickness T from the lower sliding surface 8794 to the lower portion 8764 of the second wing can be greater than the ultimate thickness of the spacer 8720 so that when the initiating piece 8704 is positioned between adjacent spinous processes 2,4, the space between the spinous processes 2,4 is distracted to a height greater than the distraction height of the spacer 8720. In such embodiments, the second wing 8760 can potentially provide greater range of flexion motion (wherein the space between adjacent spinous processes increases) while assuring that the movement of the implant 8700 will be limited or blocked in a direction opposite insertion by the second wing 8760.
  • FIG. 86 is a flipped perspective end view of the slide-in distraction piece 8702. The distraction piece 8702 includes a rail 8782 extending over a substantial portion of the length of the distraction piece 8702, roughly corresponding to a length of the slot 8784 of the initiating piece 8704, within which the rail 8782 is adapted to be received. The height of the rail 8782 from the upper sliding surface 8792 to the flange 8783 of the rail 8782 approximately corresponds to the depth of the slot 8784 from the lower sliding surface 8794 to the bottom of the flange 8785 of the slot, so that when the rail 8782 is received within the slot 8784, the upper sliding surface 8792 of the distraction piece 8702 is substantially flush with the lower sliding surface 8794. In other embodiments, a gap can exist between the upper sliding surface 8792 and the lower sliding surface 8794. As described above, the surface of the rail 8782 includes a catch 8781 arranged along the length of the rail 8782 so that the catch 8781 roughly corresponds to the recess 8787 disposed within the slot 8784. The catch 8781 can have a sloped leading edge (from the proximal end to a distal end of the catch 8781) and can be spring loaded, or otherwise biased so that the catch 8781 collapses when the distraction piece 8702 slides along the lower sliding surface 8794 of the initiating piece 8704 and extends when passing over the recess 8787. The catch 8781 can have a trailing edge substantially perpendicular to the slot 8784 so that the catch 8781 resists movement of the distraction piece 8702 in a direction opposite insertion. In other embodiments, the catch 8781 can be some other mechanism. For example, in an alternative embodiment, the catch 8781 can be a flexible hinge and protrusion similar in operation to that described in FIGS. 19A-20B. Still further the pieces 8702,8704 can be flexible enough that the catch 8781 is molded into the piece 8702,8704 and can snap into the recess 8787 in the other piece 8702,8704. The distraction piece 8702 includes an upper distraction element 8712 having a contact surface that tapers so that the upper distraction element 712 has a ramp shape. The distraction piece 8702 further includes an upper portion 8732 of the first wing, an upper portion 8762 of the second wing, and an upper portion 8722 of the spacer. In an embodiment, the upper portions 8732,8762,8722 can be integrally formed with the upper distraction element 8712, thereby avoiding discontinuities in an upper sliding surface 8792 of the distraction piece 8702. As with the lower sliding surface 8790, the upper sliding surface 8792 of the distraction piece 8702 is substantially flat and preferably smooth to ease positioning of the rail 8782 within the slot 8784. The upper sliding surface 8792 slopes upward relative to the longitudinal axis 8725 from the distal end of the distracting piece 8702 to the proximal end of the distraction piece 8702, the slope of the upper sliding surface 8792 being substantially similar to the slope of the lower sliding surface 8794 so that the two surfaces 8792,8794 are substantially parallel, and mate when the rail 8782 is positioned within the slot 8784. The slope of the upper sliding surface 8792 causes variation in thickness of the upper portion 8722 of the spacer from the distal end of the spacer to the proximal end of the spacer so that the upper portion 8722 of the spacer is thicker at the distal end. When the distraction piece 8702 is mated with the initiating piece 8704 so that the rail 8782 is seated within the slot 8784, the thickness of the spacer 8720 is approximately the same across the length of the spacer 8720.
  • FIGS. 87A through 87D are a series of posterior views of the distraction piece 8702 mating with the initiating piece 8704 so that the implant 8700 is positioned between adjacent spinous processes 2,4 to support a load applied by the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 during an extension motion. As can be seen, the distraction piece 8702 is positioned so that the proximal end of the rail flange 8783 fits within the slot 8784. The distraction piece 8702 can then be urged toward the interspinous ligament 6 so that the rail 8782 is further received within the slot 8784. The thickness of the implant 8700 increases as the initiating piece 8704 is mated with the distraction piece 8702. FIG. 87B illustrates the distraction piece 8702 arranged so that the upper distraction element 8782 is adjacent to the interspinous ligament 6. As the distraction piece 8702 is urged further toward the interspinous ligament 6, the upper distraction element 8782 wedges between the lower sliding surface 8794 and the interspinous ligament 6 and/or the adjacent spinous processes 2,4, gradually distracting the interspinous ligament 6 and the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 as the distraction piece 8702 is further urged in the direction of insertion. As shown in FIG. 87C, as the upper portion 8762 of the second wing passes between the adjacent spinous processes 2,4, the space between the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 is distracted beyond the maximum distraction height of the spacer 8720. The distraction piece 8702 is further urged in the direction of insertion until the rail 8782 is seated within the slot 8784 and the upper portion 8762 of the second wing is arranged so that the interspinous ligament 6 and/or adjacent spinous processes 2,4 are disposed between the upper portion 8762 of the second wing and the upper portion 8732 of the first wing (see FIG. 87D). As the catch 8781 passes over the recess 8787, the catch 8781 extends into the recess 8787, locking the distraction piece 8702 in position, mated with the initiation piece 8704.
  • Interspinous Implant Having Slide-in Distraction Piece
  • FIGS. 88A and 88B are perspective end views of an alternative embodiment of an implant 8800 in accordance with the present invention. The implant 8800 can include an initiating piece 8804 and a slide-in distraction piece 8802 that can be slidably coupled with the initiating piece 8804. The initiating piece 8804 and the slide-in distraction piece 8802, when positioned between adjacent spinous processes and coupled together as shown in FIG. 88B, has a saddle shape including a first wing 8830 and a second wing 8860 that straddle one of the adjacent spinous processes. The implant 8800 approximates implants as shown above in FIGS. 7-23. For example, the implant 8800 includes the first wing 8830 at a distal end of the implant 8800, a fixed spacer 8820 extending from the first wing 8830, the second wing 8860 extending from the spacer 8820 so that the spacer 8820 is disposed between the first wing 8830 and the second wing 8860, and a distraction guide 8810 at a proximal end 8816 of the implant 8800.
  • The initiating piece 8804 includes a slot 8884 within a lower sliding surface 8886 that extends through a substantial portion of the length of the initiating piece 8804, the slot 8884 being adapted to receive a rail 8882 of the slide-in distraction piece 8802. The slot 8884 can optionally include a flange or some other structure to retain the rail 8882 within the slot 8884. One of the slot 8884 and the rail 8882 can further optionally include a recess (not shown) adapted to receive a catch (not shown) of the other of the slot 8884 and the rail 8882 so that when the catch passes over the recess, the catch is extended, locking the distraction piece 8802 in place, and limiting or blocking movement along the longitudinal axis 8825.
  • As shown, the initiating piece 8804 includes a first tab 8894 extending from the first wing 8834, the first tab 8894 including a first perforation 8893. The distraction piece 8802 likewise includes a second tab 8892 including a second perforation 8891 adapted to be aligned with the first perforation 8893 so that when the slide-in distraction piece 8802 is mated with the initiating piece 8804 and the rail 8882 is seated within the slot 8884, the first perforation 8893 and the second perforation 8891 are aligned and can be pegged together so that relative movement between the distraction piece 8802 and the initiating piece 8804 is limited or substantially blocked, hi other embodiments, the initiating piece 8804 and distraction piece 8802 need not include tabs 8892,8894, for example where a catch and recess of the slot and rail is employed. Further, where a first tab 8894 or other structure protrudes from the initiating piece 8804, the distraction piece 8802 can include a slot for receiving the tab 8894, rather than a second tab 8892 abutting the first tab 8894. As will be obvious to one of ordinary skill in the art, tabs having myriad different shapes and sizes can extend from one or both of the initiating piece 8804 and the distraction piece 8802, and perforations having myriad different shapes and sizes can be formed within such tabs to limit relative movement between the initiating piece 8804 and the distraction piece 8802. Further, myriad different locking mechanisms (e.g., a tab and slot arrangement) can be employed with one or both of the initiating pieces 8804 and the distraction piece 8802 to limit relative movement. Embodiments of implants 8800 in accordance with the present invention are not intended to be limited to those arrangements shown in FIGS. 88A-89E.
  • The initiating piece 8804 includes a lower distraction element 8814 having a contact surface that tapers to the proximal end 8816 from above as well as below the proximal end 8816 so that the lower distraction element 8814 has a “V” shape in cross-section along an axis of the spine. The initiating piece 8804 further includes a first portion 8834 of the first wing, the second wing 8860, and a lower portion 8824 of the spacer. In an embodiment, the lower portions 8824,8834 and the second wing 8860 can be integrally formed with the lower distraction element 8814, thereby avoiding discontinuities in a lower sliding surface 8888 of the initiating piece 8804.
  • A relatively continuous sliding surface 8888 with smooth transitions improves ease of implantation and minifies obstruction of the initiating piece 8804 by the adjacent spinous processes and/or related tissues. It is preferable that the initiating piece 8804 include smooth transitions between the lower distraction element 8814, the second wing 8860, and the lower portion 8824 of the spacer, as such transitions can increase obstruction of implant movement during implantation. The lower sliding surface 8888 of the initiating piece 8804 is substantially flat and preferably smooth to ease receipt of the rail 8882 within the slot 8884.
  • As described above, the slide-in distraction piece 8802 includes the rail 8882 extending over a substantial portion of the length of the distraction piece 8802, roughly corresponding to a length of the slot 8884 of the initiating piece 8804 within which the rail 8882 is adapted to be received. The height of the rail 8882 from the upper sliding surface 8886 approximately corresponds to the depth of the slot 8884 so that when the rail 8882 is received within the slot 8884, the upper sliding surface 8886 of the distraction piece 8802 is substantially flush with the lower sliding surface 8888. In other embodiments, a gap can exist between the upper sliding surface 8886 and the lower sliding surface 8888. As described above, the surface of the rail 8882 can include a catch (or a recess) arranged along the length of the rail 8882 so that the catch (or recess) roughly corresponds to the recess (or catch) disposed within the slot 8884. In other embodiments, the rail 8882 and slot 8884 need not include a catch and recess arrangement, but rather the initiating piece 8804 and the distraction piece 8802 can be held in relative position along the longitudinal axis 8825 when the first and second holes 8891,8893 are pegged together. In still other embodiments, some other mechanism can be used to limit or block relative movement of the initiating piece 8804 and the distraction piece 8802.
  • The distraction piece 8802 further includes an upper distraction element 8812, a second portion 8832 of the first wing and an upper portion 8822 of the spacer. The upper distraction element 8812 has a contact surface that tapers at a proximal end of the distraction piece 8802 so that the upper distraction element 8812 has a ramp shape. The second portion 8832 of the first wing can have a shape that roughly conforms to the shape of the first portion 8834 of the first wing so that when the distraction piece 8802 is coupled to the initiating piece 8804, the first and second portions 8832,8834 form a first wing 8830, as shown in FIG. 88B. The upper portion 8822 of the spacer can have a thickness greater or less than that of the lower portion 8824 of the spacer. As shown, the upper portion 8822 is thicker than the lower portion 8824. By minifying the thickness of the lower portion 8824, distraction of the adjacent spinous processes during implantation of the initiation piece 8804 can be minified to cause less distraction at the surgical site by the second wing 8860 as the second wing 8860 is urged between the adjacent spinous processes. Alternatively, a plurality of distraction pieces 8802 can be provided each having an upper portion 8822 of the spacer having a different thickness. Thus the doctor can select the appropriate distraction piece 8802 for the amount of distraction desired. As with the lower sliding surface 8888, the upper sliding surface 8886 of the distraction piece 8802 is substantially flat and preferably smooth to ease positioning of the rail 8882 within the slot 8884. Embodiments of systems in accordance with the present invention can include a initiating piece 8804 and a plurality of distraction pieces 8802, the distraction pieces 8802 having a variety of thicknesses. In such a system, a distraction piece 8802 can be chosen so that the overall spacer 8820 thickness is suitable for the patient and the motion segment targeted.
  • FIG. 89A is a posterior view of the initiating piece 8804 positioned adjacent to the interspinous ligament 6. As can be seen, the initiating piece 8804 has a maximum thickness from the lower sliding surface 8888 to the second wing 8860. As the initiating piece 8804 is urged into the interspinous ligament 6, the lower distraction element 8814 pierces and/or distracts the fibers of the interspinous ligament 6. As shown in FIG. 89B, the initiating piece 8804 is further urged through the interspinous ligament 6 so that the second wing 8860 passes between the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 and can distract the space between the adjacent spinous processes 2,4 to accommodate the second wing 8860. The distraction of the space between the adjacent spinous processes is reduced by positioning the initiating piece 8804 prior to coupling the distraction piece 8802 to the initiating piece 8804. Referring to FIG. 89C, the initiating piece 8804 is further urged through the interspinous ligament 6 so that the lower portion 8824 of the spacer is positioned between the adjacent spinous processes 2,4. The second wing 8860 and the first portion 8834 of the first wing straddle the lower spinous process 4. Once the initiating piece 8804 is properly positioned, the rail 8882 of the distracting piece 8802 can be positioned within the distal end of the slot 8884, as shown in FIG. 89D. The distraction piece 8804 can then be urged along the lower sliding surface 8888 so that the upper distraction element 8812 distracts the space between the adjacent spinous processes. As shown in FIG. 89E, the initiating piece 8804 is further urged along the lower sliding surface 8888 until the distraction piece 8802 is mated with the initiating piece 8804.
  • Materials for Use in Implants of the Present Invention
  • In some embodiments, the implant can be fabricated from medical grade metals such as titanium, stainless steel, cobalt chrome, and alloys thereof, or other suitable implant material having similar high strength and biocompatible properties. Additionally, the implant can be at least partially fabricated from a shape memory metal, for example Nitinol, which is a combination of titanium and nickel. Such materials are typically radiopaque, and appear during x-ray imaging, and other types of imaging. Implants in accordance with the present invention, and/or portions thereof can also be fabricated from somewhat flexible and/or deflectable material. In these embodiments, the implant and/or portions thereof can be fabricated in whole or in part from medical grade biocompatible polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers. A copolymer is a polymer derived from more than one species of monomer. A polymer composite is a heterogeneous combination of two or more materials, wherein the constituents are not miscible, and therefore exhibit an interface between one another. A polymer blend is a macroscopically homogeneous mixture of two or more different species of polymer. Many polymers, copolymers, blends, and composites of polymers are radiolucent and do not appear during x-ray or other types of imaging. Implants comprising such materials can provide a physician with a less obstructed view of the spine under imaging, than with an implant comprising radiopaque materials entirely. However, the implant need not comprise any radiolucent materials.
  • One group of biocompatible polymers are the polyaryletherketone group which has several members including polyetheretherketone (PEEK), and polyetherketoneketone (PEKK). PEEK is proven as a durable material for implants, and meets the criterion of biocompatibility. Medical grade PEEK is available from Victrex Corporation of Lancashire, Great Britain under the product name PEEK-OPTIMA. Medical grade PEKK is available from Oxford Performance Materials under the name OXPEKK, and also from CoorsTek under the name BioPEKK. These medical grade materials are also available as reinforced polymer resins, such reinforced resins displaying even greater material strength. In an embodiment, the implant can be fabricated from PEEK 450G, which is an unfilled PEEK approved for medical implantation available from Victrex. Other sources of this material include Gharda located in Panoli, India. PEEK 450G has the following approximate properties:
    Property Value
    Density 1.3 g/cc
    Rockwell M 99
    Rockwell R 126
    Tensile Strength 97 MPa
    Modulus of Elasticity 3.5 GPa
    Flexural Modulus 4.1 GPa
  • PEEK 450G has appropriate physical and mechanical properties and is suitable for carrying and spreading a physical load between the adjacent spinous processes. The implant and/or portions thereof can be formed by extrusion, injection, compression molding and/or machining techniques. It should be noted that the material selected can also be filled. Fillers can be added to a polymer, copolymer, polymer blend, or polymer composite to reinforce a polymeric material. Fillers are added to modify properties such as mechanical, optical, and thermal properties. For example, carbon fibers can be added to reinforce polymers mechanically to enhance strength for certain uses, such as for load bearing devices, hi some embodiments, other grades of PEEK are available and contemplated for use in implants in accordance with the present invention, such as 30% glass-filled or 30% carbon-filled grades, provided such materials are cleared for use in implantable devices by the FDA, or other regulatory body. Glass-filled PEEK reduces the expansion rate and increases the flexural modulus of PEEK relative to unfilled PEEK. The resulting product is known to be ideal for improved strength, stiffness, or stability. Carbon-filled PEEK is known to have enhanced compressive strength and stiffness, and a lower expansion rate relative to unfilled PEEK. Carbon-filled PEEK also offers wear resistance and load carrying capability.
  • As will be appreciated, other suitable similarly biocompatible thermoplastic or thermoplastic polycondensate materials that resist fatigue, have good memory, are flexible, and/or deflectable, have very low moisture absorption, and good wear and/or abrasion resistance, can be used without departing from the scope of the invention. As mentioned, the implant can be comprised of polyetherketoneketone (PEKK). Other material that can be used include polyetherketone (PEK), polyetherketoneetherketoneketone (PEKEKK), polyetheretherketoneketone (PEEKK), and generally a polyaryletheretherketone. Further, other polyketones can be used as well as other thermoplastics. Reference to appropriate polymers that can be used in the implant can be made to the following documents, all of which are incorporated herein by reference. These documents include: PCT Publication WO 02/02158 A1, dated Jan. 10, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials;” PCT Publication WO 02/00275 A1, dated Jan. 3, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials;” and, PCT Publication WO 02/00270 A1, dated Jan. 3, 2002, entitled “Bio-Compatible Polymeric Materials.” Other materials such as Bionate®, polycarbonate urethane, available from the Polymer Technology Group, Berkeley, Calif., may also be appropriate because of the good oxidative stability, biocompatibility, mechanical strength and abrasion resistance. Other thermoplastic materials and other high molecular weight polymers can be used.
  • It is to be understood that embodiments in accordance with the present invention can be constructed without a pliant material. It is also to be understood that the embodiments in accordance with the present invention can have other dimensions
  • Methods for Implanting Interspinous Implants
  • In other embodiments of methods in accordance with the present invention, the implant can include an initiating piece 8704 and a distraction piece 8702, such as described above in FIGS. 83-87D. In such embodiments, as shown in FIG. 90, preferably a guide wire 80 is inserted through a placement network or guide 90 into the neck of the implant recipient (as shown and described above). Once the guide wire 80 is positioned with the aid of imaging techniques, an incision is made on the side of the neck so that an initiating piece 8704 of the implant 8700 can be positioned in the neck thorough an incision and along a line that is about perpendicular to the guide wire 80 and directed at the end of the guide wire. The initiating piece 8704 can include a lower distraction element 8714, a lower portion 8764 of the second wing, a lower portion 8724 of the spacer, and a lower portion 8734 of the first wing. The implant 8700 is inserted into the neck of the patient, between adjacent spinous processes. Preferably during insertion, the lower distraction element 8714 pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue, and the implant 8700 is positioned so that the upper portion 8724 of the spacer is disposed between the adjacent spinous processes.
  • Once the initiating piece 8704 is satisfactorily positioned, a distracting piece 8702 can be inserted along a line that is approximately collinear with the line over which the initiating piece 8704 is inserted, but positioned so that a rail 8782 of the distracting piece 8702 mates with a slot 8784 of the initiating piece 8704. The anatomy of the neck is such that it is most convenient and minimally invasive to enter the neck from the side with respect to the implant 8700. The distracting piece 8702 can be mated to the initiating piece 8704 through an interference fit, or using a catch 8781 and recess 8787 as described above, alternatively by connecting the distracting piece 8704 with the initiating piece 8702 using a fastener, or by some other device, as described above. It is to be understood that the embodiment described herein can be used between any of the spinous processes of the spine.
  • In other embodiments of methods in accordance with the present invention, the implant can include an initiating piece 8804 and a distraction piece 8802, such as described above in FIGS. 88A-89E. In such embodiments, as shown in FIG. 91, preferably a guide wire 80 is inserted through a placement network or guide 90 into the neck of the implant recipient (as shown and described above). Once the guide wire 80 is positioned with the aid of imaging techniques, an incision is made on the side of the neck so that an initiating piece 8804 of the implant 8800 can be positioned in the neck thorough an incision and along a line that is about perpendicular to the guide wire 80 and directed at the end of the guide wire. The initiating piece 8804 can include a lower distraction element 8814, the second wing 8860, a lower portion 8824 of the spacer, and a lower portion 8834 of the first wing. The implant 8800 is inserted into the neck of the patient, between adjacent spinous processes. Preferably during insertion, the lower distraction element 8814 pierces or separates the tissue without severing the tissue, and the implant 8800 is positioned so that the upper portion 8824 of the spacer is disposed between the adjacent spinous processes. Once the initiating piece 8804 is satisfactorily positioned, a distracting piece 8802 can be inserted along a line that is approximately collinear with the line over which the initiating piece 8804 is inserted, but positioned so that a rail 8882 of the distracting piece 8802 mates with a slot 8884 of the initiating piece 8804. The anatomy of the neck is such that it is most convenient and minimally invasive to enter the neck from the side with respect to the implant 8800. The distracting piece 8802 can be mated to the initiating piece 8804, by pegging the first and second perforations 8891,8893, through an interference fit, or using a catch 8881 and recess 8887 as described above, or, alternatively by connecting the distracting piece 8804 with the initiating piece 8802 using a fastener, or by some other device, as described above.
  • The foregoing description of the present invention have been presented for purposes of illustration and description. It is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations will be apparent to practitioners skilled in this art. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the invention and its practical application, thereby enabling others skilled in the art to understand the invention for various embodiments and with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated. It is intended that the scope of the invention be defined by the following claims and their equivalents.

Claims (29)

1. An apparatus, comprising:
a first implant member configured to be inserted into a location of a body including a space between adjacent spinous processes, the first implant member defining a saddle associated with a first spinous process from the adjacent spinous processes; and
a second implant member configured to be inserted into the body and slidably moved along the first implant member until a central portion of the second implant member is substantially aligned with a central portion of the first implant member, the second implant member defining a saddle associated with a second spinous process from the adjacent spinous processes.
2. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein:
the central portion of the first implant member and the central portion of the second implant member are collectively configured to limit extension of a spine including the adjacent spinous processes when the central portion of the second implant member is substantially aligned with the central portion of the first implant member;
a distal end portion of the first implant member and a distal end portion of the second implant member are collectively configured to limit lateral motion of the first implant member and the second implant member relative to the adjacent spinous processes in a first direction when the central portion of the second implant member is substantially aligned with the central portion of the first implant member; and
a proximal end portion of the first implant member and a proximal end portion of the second implant member are collectively configured to limit lateral motion of the first implant member and the second implant member relative to the adjacent spinous processes in a second direction opposite the first direction when the central portion of the second implant member is substantially aligned with the central portion of the first implant member.
3. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein:
a size of a distal end portion of the first implant member along a dimension is greater than a size of a distal end portion of the second implant member along the dimension; and
a size of a proximal end portion of the first implant member along the dimension is less than a size of a proximal end portion of the second implant member along the dimension.
4. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein:
a size of a distal end portion of the first implant member along a dimension is greater than a size of a distal end portion of the second implant member along the dimension;
a size of a proximal end portion of the first implant member along the dimension is less than a size of a proximal end portion of the second implant member along the dimension; and
the size of the distal end portion of the first implant member plus the size of the distal end portion of the second implant member substantially corresponding to the size of the proximal end portion of the first implant member plus the size of the proximal end portion of the second implant member.
5. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein:
a size of a distal end portion of the first implant member along a dimension is greater than a size of a distal end portion of the second implant member along the dimension;
a size of a proximal end portion of the first implant member along the dimension is less than a size of a proximal end portion of the second implant member along the dimension;
the size of the distal end portion of the first implant member plus the size of the distal end portion of the second implant member is greater than a size of the central portion of the first implant member along the dimension plus a size of the central portion of the second implant member along the dimension; and
the size of the proximal end portion of the first implant member plus the size of the proximal end portion of the second implant member is greater than the size of the central portion of the first implant member plus the size of the central portion of the second implant member.
6. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the first implant member has an interface surface including a locking portion configured to complimentarily fit with a locking portion of an interface surface of the second implant member.
7. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the first implant member has an interface surface including a slot portion configured to mate with a rail portion of an interface surface of the second implant member.
8. An apparatus, comprising:
a first implant member configured to be inserted into a location of a body including a space between adjacent spinous processes along a path in a direction, the first implant member having a distal end portion larger than a proximal end portion along a dimension substantially perpendicular to a longitudinal axis of the first implant member; and
a second implant member configured to be inserted along the path and moved in the direction along the first implant member until substantially aligned with the first implant member, the second implant member having a distal end portion smaller than a proximal end portion along the dimension.
9. The apparatus of claim 8, wherein the second implant member is configured to be slidably moved along the first implant member until substantially aligned with the first implant member.
10. The apparatus of claim 8, wherein:
the first implant member is elongate having a length between a distal end of the distal end portion of the first implant member and a proximal end of the proximal end portion of the second implant member;
the second implant member is elongate having a length between a distal end of the distal end portion of the second implant member and a proximal end of the proximal end portion of the second implant member; and
the length of the first implant member is less than the length of the second implant member.
11. The apparatus of claim 8, wherein:
the distal end portion of the first implant member and the distal end portion of second implant member collectively having a size along a dimension substantially corresponding to a size of the proximal end portion of the first implant member and the proximal end portion of the second implant member collectively along the dimension.
12. The apparatus of claim 8, wherein:
the distal end portion of the first implant member and the distal end portion of second implant member collectively having a size along a dimension greater than a size of a central portion of the first implant member and a central portion of the second implant member collectively; and
the proximal end portion of the first implant member and the proximal end portion of the second implant member collectively having a size along the dimension greater than the size of the central portion of the first implant member and the central portion of the second implant member collectively.
13. The apparatus of claim 8, wherein:
a central portion of the first implant member and a central portion of the second implant collectively configured to limit extension of a spine including the adjacent spinous processes;
the distal end portion of the first implant member and the distal end portion of the second implant member collectively configured to limit lateral motion of the first implant member and the second implant member relative to the adjacent spinous processes in a first direction; and
the proximal end portion of the first implant member and the proximal end portion of the second implant member collectively configured to limit lateral motion of the first implant member and the second implant member relative to the adjacent spinous processes in a second direction opposite the first direction.
14. The apparatus of claim 8, wherein the first implant member has an interface surface including a locking portion configured to complimentarily fit with a locking portion of an interface surface of the second implant member.
15. The apparatus of claim 8, wherein the first implant member has an interface surface including a slot portion configured to mate with a rail portion of an interface surface of the second implant member.
16. The apparatus of claim 8, wherein:
an interface surface of the first implant member has a distal end proximate to a distal end of the first implant member, the interface surface of the first implant has a proximate end corresponding to a proximate end of the first implant member; and
an interface surface of the second implant member has a distal end corresponding to a distal end of the second implant member, the interface surface of the second implant has a proximate end corresponding to a proximate end of the second implant member.
17. The apparatus of claim 8, wherein:
the distal end portion of the first implant member is configured to distract the adjacent spinous processes when inserted into the location of the body along a first direction; and
the proximal end portion of the second implant member configured limit movement of the first implant member and the second implant member collectively along the first direction.
18. An apparatus, comprising:
a first implant member having an interface surface, the first implant member configured to be inserted into a location of a body through a space between adjacent spinous processes from a first side of the adjacent spinous processes until at least a distal end of the first implant member exits the space from a second side of the adjacent spinous processes; and
a second implant member configured to be inserted into the body from the first side of the adjacent spinous processes after the first implant member is inserted, the second implant member having an interface surface configured to moveably mate with the interface surface of the first implant member to collectively form an interspinous process implant.
19. The apparatus of claim 18, wherein:
the first implant member has an outer surface opposite its interface surface, the outer surface of the first implant member defining a saddle associated with a first spinous process from the adjacent spinous processes; and
the second implant member has an outer surface opposite its interface surface, the outer surface of the second implant member defining a saddle associated with a second spinous process from the adjacent spinous processes
20. The apparatus of claim 18, wherein the interspinous process implant has a midline offset from a boundary defined by the interface surface of the first implant member and the interface surface of the second implant member
21. The apparatus of claim 18, wherein the interface surface of the first implant member includes a locking portion configured to complimentarily fit with a locking portion of the interface surface of the second implant member.
22. The apparatus of claim 18, wherein the interface surface of the first implant member includes a slot portion configured to mate with a rail portion of the interface surface of the second implant member.
23. The apparatus of claim 18, wherein:
the interface surface of the first implant member has a distal end proximate to the distal end of the first implant member, the interface surface of the first implant has a proximate end corresponding to a proximate end of the first implant member; and
the interface surface of the second implant member has a distal end corresponding to a distal end of the second implant member, the interface surface of the second implant has a proximate end corresponding to a proximate end of the second implant member.
24. The apparatus of claim 18, wherein:
a distal end portion of the first implant member is configured to distract the adjacent spinous processes when inserted into the location of the body along a first direction; and
a proximal end portion of the second implant member configured limit movement of the first implant member and the second implant member collectively along the first direction.
25. The apparatus of claim 18, wherein the second implant member is configured to slidably move with the first implant member until a central portion of the first implant member is substantially aligned with a central portion of the second implant member.
26. The apparatus of claim 18, wherein:
a central portion of the first implant member and a central portion of the second implant member are collectively configured to limit extension of a spine including the adjacent spinous processes when the central portion of the second implant member is substantially aligned with the central portion of the first implant member;
a distal end portion of the first implant member and a distal end portion of the second implant member are collectively configured to limit lateral motion of the first implant member and the second implant member relative to the adjacent spinous processes in a first direction when the central portion of the second implant member is substantially aligned with the central portion of the first implant member; and
a proximal end portion of the first implant member and a proximal end portion of the second implant member are collectively configured to limit lateral motion of the first implant member and the second implant member relative to the adjacent spinous processes in a second direction opposite the first direction when the central portion of the second implant member is substantially aligned with the central portion of the first implant member.
27. The apparatus of claim 18, wherein:
a size of a distal end portion of the first implant member along a dimension is greater than a size of a distal end portion of the second implant member along the dimension; and
a size of a proximal end portion of the first implant member along the dimension is less than a size of a proximal end portion of the second implant member along the dimension.
28. The apparatus of claim 18, wherein:
a size of a distal end portion of the first implant member along a dimension is greater than a size of a distal end portion of the second implant member along the dimension;
a size of a proximal end portion of the first implant member along the dimension is less than a size of a proximal end portion of the second implant member along the dimension; and
the size of the distal end portion of the first implant member plus the size of the distal end portion of the second implant member substantially corresponding to the size of the proximal end portion of the first implant member plus the size of the proximal end portion of the second implant member.
29. The apparatus of claim 18, wherein:
a size of a distal end portion of the first implant member along a dimension is greater than a size of a distal end portion of the second implant member along the dimension;
a size of a proximal end portion of the first implant member along the dimension is less than a size of a proximal end portion of the second implant member along the dimension;
the size of the distal end portion of the first implant member plus the size of the distal end portion of the second implant member is greater than a size of the central portion of the first implant member along the dimension plus a size of the central portion of the second implant member along the dimension; and
the size of the proximal end portion of the first implant member plus the size of the proximal end portion of the second implant member is greater than the size of the central portion of the first implant member plus the size of the central portion of the second implant member.
US11/806,528 2002-10-29 2007-05-31 Interspinous process implants and methods of use Abandoned US20080021468A1 (en)

Priority Applications (14)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/806,526 US8221463B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-05-31 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/806,528 US20080021468A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-05-31 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/768,222 US8092535B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-26 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/768,223 US20080065212A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-26 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/768,224 US20080065213A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-26 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,924 US20080046081A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/771,092 US8454659B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/771,099 US7662187B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/771,046 US20080051899A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/771,087 US8894686B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,934 US20080221692A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,931 US20080065214A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,915 US8007537B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,943 US20080051898A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use

Applications Claiming Priority (26)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US42191502P 2002-10-29 2002-10-29
US47281703P 2003-05-22 2003-05-22
US10/694,103 US20050075634A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2003-10-27 Interspinous process implant with radiolucent spacer and lead-in tissue expander
US10/816,173 US7549999B2 (en) 2003-05-22 2004-04-01 Interspinous process distraction implant and method of implantation
US10/850,267 US7695513B2 (en) 2003-05-22 2004-05-20 Distractible interspinous process implant and method of implantation
US61258204P 2004-09-23 2004-09-23
US61246504P 2004-09-23 2004-09-23
US66391805P 2005-03-21 2005-03-21
US66392205P 2005-03-21 2005-03-21
US66388505P 2005-03-21 2005-03-21
US66407605P 2005-03-22 2005-03-22
US66404905P 2005-03-22 2005-03-22
US66431105P 2005-03-22 2005-03-22
US11/095,440 US20060064165A1 (en) 2004-09-23 2005-03-31 Interspinous process implant including a binder and method of implantation
US11/095,680 US7909853B2 (en) 2004-09-23 2005-03-31 Interspinous process implant including a binder and method of implantation
US67240205P 2005-04-18 2005-04-18
US11/234,555 US8048117B2 (en) 2003-05-22 2005-09-23 Interspinous process implant and method of implantation
US11/378,894 US20060271194A1 (en) 2005-03-22 2006-03-17 Interspinous process implant having deployable wing as an adjunct to spinal fusion and method of implantation
US11/378,108 US7749252B2 (en) 2005-03-21 2006-03-17 Interspinous process implant having deployable wing and method of implantation
US11/377,971 US7931674B2 (en) 2005-03-21 2006-03-17 Interspinous process implant having deployable wing and method of implantation
US11/384,055 US20060264939A1 (en) 2003-05-22 2006-03-17 Interspinous process implant with slide-in distraction piece and method of implantation
US11/378,893 US8070778B2 (en) 2003-05-22 2006-03-17 Interspinous process implant with slide-in distraction piece and method of implantation
US11/378,892 US8147548B2 (en) 2005-03-21 2006-03-17 Interspinous process implant having a thread-shaped wing and method of implantation
US11/389,002 US7959652B2 (en) 2005-04-18 2006-03-24 Interspinous process implant having deployable wings and method of implantation
US11/806,526 US8221463B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-05-31 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/806,528 US20080021468A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-05-31 Interspinous process implants and methods of use

Related Parent Applications (17)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/694,103 Continuation-In-Part US20050075634A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2003-10-27 Interspinous process implant with radiolucent spacer and lead-in tissue expander
US10/816,173 Continuation-In-Part US7549999B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2004-04-01 Interspinous process distraction implant and method of implantation
US10/850,267 Continuation-In-Part US7695513B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2004-05-20 Distractible interspinous process implant and method of implantation
US11/095,680 Continuation-In-Part US7909853B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2005-03-31 Interspinous process implant including a binder and method of implantation
US11/095,440 Continuation-In-Part US20060064165A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2005-03-31 Interspinous process implant including a binder and method of implantation
US11/234,555 Continuation-In-Part US8048117B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2005-09-23 Interspinous process implant and method of implantation
US11/384,055 Continuation-In-Part US20060264939A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2006-03-17 Interspinous process implant with slide-in distraction piece and method of implantation
US11/378,892 Continuation-In-Part US8147548B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2006-03-17 Interspinous process implant having a thread-shaped wing and method of implantation
US11/378,108 Continuation-In-Part US7749252B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2006-03-17 Interspinous process implant having deployable wing and method of implantation
US11/378,894 Continuation-In-Part US20060271194A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2006-03-17 Interspinous process implant having deployable wing as an adjunct to spinal fusion and method of implantation
US11/378,893 Continuation-In-Part US8070778B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2006-03-17 Interspinous process implant with slide-in distraction piece and method of implantation
US11/377,971 Continuation-In-Part US7931674B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2006-03-17 Interspinous process implant having deployable wing and method of implantation
US11/389,002 Continuation-In-Part US7959652B2 (en) 1997-01-02 2006-03-24 Interspinous process implant having deployable wings and method of implantation
US11/806,526 Continuation US8221463B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-05-31 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/768,222 Continuation-In-Part US8092535B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-26 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,915 Continuation-In-Part US8007537B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/771,087 Continuation-In-Part US8894686B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use

Related Child Applications (12)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/768,224 Continuation US20080065213A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-26 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/768,222 Continuation US8092535B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-26 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/768,223 Continuation US20080065212A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-26 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,943 Continuation US20080051898A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/771,092 Continuation US8454659B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,915 Continuation US8007537B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,934 Continuation US20080221692A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/771,046 Continuation US20080051899A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/771,087 Continuation US8894686B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,924 Continuation US20080046081A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,931 Continuation US20080065214A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/771,099 Continuation US7662187B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20080021468A1 true US20080021468A1 (en) 2008-01-24

Family

ID=46328813

Family Applications (13)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/806,528 Abandoned US20080021468A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-05-31 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/806,526 Active 2027-06-29 US8221463B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-05-31 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/768,222 Active 2026-10-15 US8092535B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-26 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/768,223 Abandoned US20080065212A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-26 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/768,224 Abandoned US20080065213A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-26 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/771,099 Expired - Lifetime US7662187B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/771,087 Active 2026-06-13 US8894686B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/771,046 Abandoned US20080051899A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,931 Abandoned US20080065214A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,924 Abandoned US20080046081A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,915 Expired - Fee Related US8007537B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/771,092 Active 2027-06-08 US8454659B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,943 Abandoned US20080051898A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use

Family Applications After (12)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/806,526 Active 2027-06-29 US8221463B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-05-31 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/768,222 Active 2026-10-15 US8092535B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-26 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/768,223 Abandoned US20080065212A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-26 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/768,224 Abandoned US20080065213A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-26 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/771,099 Expired - Lifetime US7662187B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/771,087 Active 2026-06-13 US8894686B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/771,046 Abandoned US20080051899A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,931 Abandoned US20080065214A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,924 Abandoned US20080046081A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,915 Expired - Fee Related US8007537B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/771,092 Active 2027-06-08 US8454659B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US11/770,943 Abandoned US20080051898A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-06-29 Interspinous process implants and methods of use

Country Status (1)

Country Link
US (13) US20080021468A1 (en)

Cited By (36)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060084983A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-04-20 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US20060085070A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-04-20 Vertiflex, Inc. Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US20060122620A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-06-08 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for stabilizing the motion or adjusting the position of the spine
US20060211920A1 (en) * 2005-03-16 2006-09-21 Minnesota Scientific, Inc. Polymer or plastic load bearing surface for cam actuated retractor clamp
US20070173832A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2007-07-26 Vertiflex, Inc. Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US20070276370A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2007-11-29 Vertiflex, Inc. Minimally invasive tooling for delivery of interspinous spacer
US20080287997A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2008-11-20 Moti Altarac Interspinous spacer
US20080294263A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2008-11-27 Moti Altarac Interspinous spacer
US20080319550A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2008-12-25 Moti Altarac Interspinous spacer
US20090125030A1 (en) * 2006-10-18 2009-05-14 Shawn Tebbe Dilator
US20090138055A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2009-05-28 Moti Altarac Spacer insertion instrument
US20090138046A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2009-05-28 Moti Altarac Interspinous spacer
US20090198241A1 (en) * 2008-02-04 2009-08-06 Phan Christopher U Spine distraction tools and methods of use
US20090198337A1 (en) * 2008-02-04 2009-08-06 Phan Christopher U Medical implants and methods
US20090222043A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2009-09-03 Moti Altarac Interspinous process spacer instrument system with deployment indicator
EP2184021A1 (en) * 2008-11-05 2010-05-12 Kyphon SÀRL Interspinous devices
US20110046673A1 (en) * 2009-05-04 2011-02-24 Pixis S.A Interspinous distraction implant
US20110106160A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2011-05-05 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US8012207B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2011-09-06 Vertiflex, Inc. Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US8123807B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2012-02-28 Vertiflex, Inc. Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US8152837B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2012-04-10 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US8292922B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2012-10-23 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US8317864B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2012-11-27 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US8425560B2 (en) 2011-03-09 2013-04-23 Farzad Massoudi Spinal implant device with fixation plates and lag screws and method of implanting
US8496689B2 (en) 2011-02-23 2013-07-30 Farzad Massoudi Spinal implant device with fusion cage and fixation plates and method of implanting
US8740948B2 (en) 2009-12-15 2014-06-03 Vertiflex, Inc. Spinal spacer for cervical and other vertebra, and associated systems and methods
US9119680B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2015-09-01 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US9161783B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2015-10-20 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US9247968B2 (en) 2007-01-11 2016-02-02 Lanx, Inc. Spinous process implants and associated methods
US9393055B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2016-07-19 Vertiflex, Inc. Spacer insertion instrument
US9675303B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-06-13 Vertiflex, Inc. Visualization systems, instruments and methods of using the same in spinal decompression procedures
US20170189078A1 (en) * 2007-01-11 2017-07-06 Zimmer Biomet Spine, Inc. Interspinsous implants and methods
US9907581B2 (en) * 2009-03-13 2018-03-06 Spinal Simplicity Llc. Interspinous process implant and fusion cage spacer
US10335207B2 (en) 2015-12-29 2019-07-02 Nuvasive, Inc. Spinous process plate fixation assembly
US10524772B2 (en) 2014-05-07 2020-01-07 Vertiflex, Inc. Spinal nerve decompression systems, dilation systems, and methods of using the same
US11311388B2 (en) * 2020-08-20 2022-04-26 Spinal Simplicity, Llc Interspinous process implant

Families Citing this family (60)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7722644B2 (en) 2003-06-11 2010-05-25 Medicine Lodge, Inc. Compact line locks and methods
US9055981B2 (en) 2004-10-25 2015-06-16 Lanx, Inc. Spinal implants and methods
US8241330B2 (en) 2007-01-11 2012-08-14 Lanx, Inc. Spinous process implants and associated methods
WO2006058221A2 (en) 2004-11-24 2006-06-01 Abdou Samy M Devices and methods for inter-vertebral orthopedic device placement
US8357181B2 (en) * 2005-10-27 2013-01-22 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Intervertebral prosthetic device for spinal stabilization and method of implanting same
EP1968466A2 (en) * 2005-12-19 2008-09-17 M. S. Abdou Devices for inter-vertebral orthopedic device placement
US8758409B2 (en) * 2006-01-23 2014-06-24 Pioneer Surgical Technology, Inc. Interlaminar stabilizing system
GB2436293A (en) * 2006-03-24 2007-09-26 Galley Geoffrey H Spinous processes insertion device
GB0605960D0 (en) * 2006-03-24 2006-05-03 Galley Geoffrey H Expandable spinal prosthesis
CA2658934A1 (en) * 2006-07-25 2008-01-31 Musculoskeletal Transplant Foundation Packed demineralized cancellous tissue forms for disc nucleus augmentation, restoration, or replacement and methods of implantation
US8303630B2 (en) * 2006-07-27 2012-11-06 Samy Abdou Devices and methods for the minimally invasive treatment of spinal stenosis
WO2008106140A2 (en) 2007-02-26 2008-09-04 Abdou M Samy Spinal stabilization systems and methods of use
US8142479B2 (en) * 2007-05-01 2012-03-27 Spinal Simplicity Llc Interspinous process implants having deployable engagement arms
US8075593B2 (en) * 2007-05-01 2011-12-13 Spinal Simplicity Llc Interspinous implants and methods for implanting same
CN101715323A (en) * 2007-06-22 2010-05-26 西普瑞卡-斯宾尼公司 Methods and devices for controlled flexion restriction of spinal segments
US20100036424A1 (en) 2007-06-22 2010-02-11 Simpirica Spine, Inc. Methods and systems for increasing the bending stiffness and constraining the spreading of a spinal segment
US20110172708A1 (en) * 2007-06-22 2011-07-14 Simpirica Spine, Inc. Methods and systems for increasing the bending stiffness of a spinal segment with elongation limit
EP2352450A2 (en) * 2008-08-28 2011-08-10 Synthes GmbH Bone-derived interspinous spacer
US20100114147A1 (en) * 2008-10-30 2010-05-06 The University Of Toledo Directional soft tissue dilator and docking pin with integrated light source for optimization of retractor placement in minimally invasive spine surgery
US8021393B2 (en) * 2008-12-12 2011-09-20 Globus Medical, Inc. Lateral spinous process spacer with deployable wings
US8133280B2 (en) * 2008-12-19 2012-03-13 Depuy Spine, Inc. Methods and devices for expanding a spinal canal
US10045860B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2018-08-14 Amicus Design Group, Llc Interbody vertebral prosthetic device with self-deploying screws
US8182533B2 (en) * 2009-01-19 2012-05-22 Richard Perkins Annular repair device and method
CH700268A2 (en) * 2009-01-21 2010-07-30 Med Titan Spine Gmbh Lumbar support relief.
US9861399B2 (en) 2009-03-13 2018-01-09 Spinal Simplicity, Llc Interspinous process implant having a body with a removable end portion
US9757164B2 (en) 2013-01-07 2017-09-12 Spinal Simplicity Llc Interspinous process implant having deployable anchor blades
US8764806B2 (en) 2009-12-07 2014-07-01 Samy Abdou Devices and methods for minimally invasive spinal stabilization and instrumentation
US20110160772A1 (en) * 2009-12-28 2011-06-30 Arcenio Gregory B Systems and methods for performing spinal fusion
WO2012040627A1 (en) * 2010-09-24 2012-03-29 Medicinelodge, Inc. Dba Imds Co-Innovation System for intra -operative tension and fixation of zipknot acl fixation
US9358122B2 (en) 2011-01-07 2016-06-07 K2M, Inc. Interbody spacer
US9265620B2 (en) 2011-03-18 2016-02-23 Raed M. Ali, M.D., Inc. Devices and methods for transpedicular stabilization of the spine
WO2012129119A2 (en) 2011-03-18 2012-09-27 Raed M. Ali, M.D., Inc. Transpedicular access to intervertebral spaces and related spinal fusion systems and methods
US9149306B2 (en) 2011-06-21 2015-10-06 Seaspine, Inc. Spinous process device
US8845728B1 (en) 2011-09-23 2014-09-30 Samy Abdou Spinal fixation devices and methods of use
US11812923B2 (en) 2011-10-07 2023-11-14 Alan Villavicencio Spinal fixation device
US9956007B2 (en) 2011-11-17 2018-05-01 Howmedica Osteonics Corp. Interspinous spacers and associated methods of use and manufacture
US20130226240A1 (en) 2012-02-22 2013-08-29 Samy Abdou Spinous process fixation devices and methods of use
US9566165B2 (en) 2012-03-19 2017-02-14 Amicus Design Group, Llc Interbody vertebral prosthetic and orthopedic fusion device with self-deploying anchors
EP2827807B1 (en) 2012-03-19 2019-12-11 Amicus Design Group, LLC Interbody vertebral prosthetic and orthopedic fusion device with self-deploying anchors
US9693876B1 (en) 2012-03-30 2017-07-04 Ali H. MESIWALA Spinal fusion implant and related methods
US10154914B2 (en) 2012-08-08 2018-12-18 Spectrum Spine Ip Holdings, Llc Expandable intervertebral cage assemblies
US20160022434A1 (en) 2012-08-08 2016-01-28 James C. Robinson Expandable intervertebral cage assemblies
JP6463677B2 (en) 2012-08-08 2019-02-06 ジェームズ シー. ロビンソン, Expandable intervertebral cage assembly and method
US9198767B2 (en) 2012-08-28 2015-12-01 Samy Abdou Devices and methods for spinal stabilization and instrumentation
US9320617B2 (en) 2012-10-22 2016-04-26 Cogent Spine, LLC Devices and methods for spinal stabilization and instrumentation
US9549666B2 (en) 2012-11-10 2017-01-24 Curvo Medical, Inc. Coaxial micro-endoscope
US9233225B2 (en) 2012-11-10 2016-01-12 Curvo Medical, Inc. Coaxial bi-directional catheter
US9861495B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2018-01-09 Raed M. Ali, M.D., Inc. Lateral interbody fusion devices, systems and methods
US10687962B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2020-06-23 Raed M. Ali, M.D., Inc. Interbody fusion devices, systems and methods
JP2016043442A (en) * 2014-08-21 2016-04-04 株式会社荏原製作所 Polishing device
US10166022B2 (en) 2014-09-29 2019-01-01 Biomet C.V. Method and apparatus for bone fixation
US9452056B2 (en) 2014-09-29 2016-09-27 Biomet C.V. Implants for fixation of the distal tibia
US10383733B2 (en) 2014-10-22 2019-08-20 Biomet C.V. Method and apparatus for bone fixation
US10857003B1 (en) 2015-10-14 2020-12-08 Samy Abdou Devices and methods for vertebral stabilization
WO2018009671A1 (en) 2016-07-07 2018-01-11 Stern Mark S Spinous laminar clamp assembly
US10973648B1 (en) 2016-10-25 2021-04-13 Samy Abdou Devices and methods for vertebral bone realignment
US10744000B1 (en) 2016-10-25 2020-08-18 Samy Abdou Devices and methods for vertebral bone realignment
WO2018156563A1 (en) 2017-02-21 2018-08-30 William Scott Van Dyke Implants for bridging osseous defects
US11179248B2 (en) 2018-10-02 2021-11-23 Samy Abdou Devices and methods for spinal implantation
US11872357B2 (en) 2020-11-09 2024-01-16 Agile Devices, Inc. Devices for steering catheters

Citations (97)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2677369A (en) * 1952-03-26 1954-05-04 Fred L Knowles Apparatus for treatment of the spinal column
US3648691A (en) * 1970-02-24 1972-03-14 Univ Colorado State Res Found Method of applying vertebral appliance
US4011605A (en) * 1973-12-12 1977-03-15 Hykon-Patent Aktiebolag Flushing and refilling apparatuses
US4047055A (en) * 1974-12-24 1977-09-06 Ing. C. Olivetti & C., S.P.A. Line control unit for teleprinters
US4257409A (en) * 1978-04-14 1981-03-24 Kazimierz Bacal Device for treatment of spinal curvature
US4573454A (en) * 1984-05-17 1986-03-04 Hoffman Gregory A Spinal fixation apparatus
US4604995A (en) * 1984-03-30 1986-08-12 Stephens David C Spinal stabilizer
US4657550A (en) * 1984-12-21 1987-04-14 Daher Youssef H Buttressing device usable in a vertebral prosthesis
US4686970A (en) * 1983-12-15 1987-08-18 A. W. Showell (Surgicraft) Limited Devices for spinal fixation
US4827918A (en) * 1985-08-15 1989-05-09 Sven Olerud Fixing instrument for use in spinal surgery
US4863476A (en) * 1986-08-29 1989-09-05 Shepperd John A N Spinal implant
US4931055A (en) * 1986-05-30 1990-06-05 John Bumpus Distraction rods
US5011484A (en) * 1987-11-16 1991-04-30 Breard Francis H Surgical implant for restricting the relative movement of vertebrae
US5092866A (en) * 1989-02-03 1992-03-03 Breard Francis H Flexible inter-vertebral stabilizer as well as process and apparatus for determining or verifying its tension before installation on the spinal column
US5098433A (en) * 1989-04-12 1992-03-24 Yosef Freedland Winged compression bolt orthopedic fastener
US5201734A (en) * 1988-12-21 1993-04-13 Zimmer, Inc. Spinal locking sleeve assembly
US5306275A (en) * 1992-12-31 1994-04-26 Bryan Donald W Lumbar spine fixation apparatus and method
US5390683A (en) * 1991-02-22 1995-02-21 Pisharodi; Madhavan Spinal implantation methods utilizing a middle expandable implant
US5395370A (en) * 1991-10-18 1995-03-07 Pina Vertriebs Ag Vertebral compression clamp for surgical repair to damage to the spine
US5415661A (en) * 1993-03-24 1995-05-16 University Of Miami Implantable spinal assist device
US5437672A (en) * 1992-11-12 1995-08-01 Alleyne; Neville Spinal cord protection device
US5496318A (en) * 1993-01-08 1996-03-05 Advanced Spine Fixation Systems, Inc. Interspinous segmental spine fixation device
US5518498A (en) * 1992-10-09 1996-05-21 Angiomed Ag Stent set
US5554191A (en) * 1994-01-26 1996-09-10 Biomat Intersomatic vertebral cage
US5609635A (en) * 1988-06-28 1997-03-11 Michelson; Gary K. Lordotic interbody spinal fusion implants
US5609634A (en) * 1992-07-07 1997-03-11 Voydeville; Gilles Intervertebral prosthesis making possible rotatory stabilization and flexion/extension stabilization
US5628756A (en) * 1993-01-06 1997-05-13 Smith & Nephew Richards Inc. Knotted cable attachment apparatus formed of braided polymeric fibers
US5645599A (en) * 1994-07-26 1997-07-08 Fixano Interspinal vertebral implant
US5665122A (en) * 1995-01-31 1997-09-09 Kambin; Parviz Expandable intervertebral cage and surgical method
US5707390A (en) * 1990-03-02 1998-01-13 General Surgical Innovations, Inc. Arthroscopic retractors
US5716416A (en) * 1996-09-10 1998-02-10 Lin; Chih-I Artificial intervertebral disk and method for implanting the same
US5810815A (en) * 1996-09-20 1998-09-22 Morales; Jose A. Surgical apparatus for use in the treatment of spinal deformities
US5860977A (en) * 1997-01-02 1999-01-19 Saint Francis Medical Technologies, Llc Spine distraction implant and method
US6022376A (en) * 1997-06-06 2000-02-08 Raymedica, Inc. Percutaneous prosthetic spinal disc nucleus and method of manufacture
US6048342A (en) * 1997-01-02 2000-04-11 St. Francis Medical Technologies, Inc. Spine distraction implant
US6068630A (en) * 1997-01-02 2000-05-30 St. Francis Medical Technologies, Inc. Spine distraction implant
US6190414B1 (en) * 1996-10-31 2001-02-20 Surgical Dynamics Inc. Apparatus for fusion of adjacent bone structures
US6214050B1 (en) * 1999-05-11 2001-04-10 Donald R. Huene Expandable implant for inter-bone stabilization and adapted to extrude osteogenic material, and a method of stabilizing bones while extruding osteogenic material
US6293949B1 (en) * 2000-03-01 2001-09-25 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Superelastic spinal stabilization system and method
US6352537B1 (en) * 1998-09-17 2002-03-05 Electro-Biology, Inc. Method and apparatus for spinal fixation
US6364883B1 (en) * 2001-02-23 2002-04-02 Albert N. Santilli Spinous process clamp for spinal fusion and method of operation
US6375682B1 (en) * 2001-08-06 2002-04-23 Lewis W. Fleischmann Collapsible, rotatable and expandable spinal hydraulic prosthetic device
US6402750B1 (en) * 2000-04-04 2002-06-11 Spinlabs, Llc Devices and methods for the treatment of spinal disorders
US6419704B1 (en) * 1999-10-08 2002-07-16 Bret Ferree Artificial intervertebral disc replacement methods and apparatus
US6440169B1 (en) * 1998-02-10 2002-08-27 Dimso Interspinous stabilizer to be fixed to spinous processes of two vertebrae
US6451019B1 (en) * 1998-10-20 2002-09-17 St. Francis Medical Technologies, Inc. Supplemental spine fixation device and method
US6520991B2 (en) * 1999-05-11 2003-02-18 Donald R. Huene Expandable implant for inter-vertebral stabilization, and a method of stabilizing vertebrae
US6554833B2 (en) * 1998-10-26 2003-04-29 Expanding Orthopedics, Inc. Expandable orthopedic device
US6582467B1 (en) * 2000-10-31 2003-06-24 Vertelink Corporation Expandable fusion cage
US6582433B2 (en) * 2001-04-09 2003-06-24 St. Francis Medical Technologies, Inc. Spine fixation device and method
US20030153915A1 (en) * 2002-02-08 2003-08-14 Showa Ika Kohgyo Co., Ltd. Vertebral body distance retainer
US6685742B1 (en) * 2002-11-12 2004-02-03 Roger P. Jackson Articulated anterior expandable spinal fusion cage system
US6695842B2 (en) * 1997-10-27 2004-02-24 St. Francis Medical Technologies, Inc. Interspinous process distraction system and method with positionable wing and method
US6709435B2 (en) * 2002-03-20 2004-03-23 A-Spine Holding Group Corp. Three-hooked device for fixing spinal column
US6723126B1 (en) * 2002-11-01 2004-04-20 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Laterally expandable cage
US6730126B2 (en) * 2000-11-13 2004-05-04 Frank H. Boehm, Jr. Device and method for lumbar interbody fusion
US6733534B2 (en) * 2002-01-29 2004-05-11 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. System and method for spine spacing
US6736818B2 (en) * 1999-11-11 2004-05-18 Synthes (U.S.A.) Radially expandable intramedullary nail
US20040097931A1 (en) * 2002-10-29 2004-05-20 Steve Mitchell Interspinous process and sacrum implant and method
US6758863B2 (en) * 2000-10-25 2004-07-06 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Vertically expanding intervertebral body fusion device
US20040133204A1 (en) * 2001-01-27 2004-07-08 Davies John Bruce Clayfield Expandable bone nails
US6761720B1 (en) * 1999-10-15 2004-07-13 Spine Next Intervertebral implant
US20040167625A1 (en) * 1999-01-27 2004-08-26 Disc-O-Tech Orthopedic Technologies Inc. Spacer filler
US20050010293A1 (en) * 2003-05-22 2005-01-13 Zucherman James F. Distractible interspinous process implant and method of implantation
US6905512B2 (en) * 1998-12-14 2005-06-14 Phoenix Biomedical Corporation System for stabilizing the vertebral column including deployment instruments and variable expansion inserts therefore
US20050165398A1 (en) * 2004-01-26 2005-07-28 Reiley Mark A. Percutaneous spine distraction implant systems and methods
US6981975B2 (en) * 2002-02-02 2006-01-03 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Method for inserting a spinal fusion implant having deployable bone engaging projections
US20060004455A1 (en) * 2004-06-09 2006-01-05 Alain Leonard Methods and apparatuses for bone restoration
US20060004447A1 (en) * 2004-06-30 2006-01-05 Depuy Spine, Inc. Adjustable posterior spinal column positioner
US20060015181A1 (en) * 2004-07-19 2006-01-19 Biomet Merck France (50% Interest) Interspinous vertebral implant
US7011685B2 (en) * 2003-11-07 2006-03-14 Impliant Ltd. Spinal prostheses
US20060064165A1 (en) * 2004-09-23 2006-03-23 St. Francis Medical Technologies, Inc. Interspinous process implant including a binder and method of implantation
US20060084983A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-04-20 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US20060084988A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-04-20 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US20060084987A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-04-20 Kim Daniel H Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US20060084985A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-04-20 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US20060085069A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-04-20 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US20060089719A1 (en) * 2004-10-21 2006-04-27 Trieu Hai H In situ formation of intervertebral disc implants
US20060089654A1 (en) * 2004-10-25 2006-04-27 Lins Robert E Interspinous distraction devices and associated methods of insertion
US7041136B2 (en) * 2000-11-29 2006-05-09 Facet Solutions, Inc. Facet joint replacement
US20060106397A1 (en) * 2004-10-25 2006-05-18 Lins Robert E Interspinous distraction devices and associated methods of insertion
US20060106381A1 (en) * 2004-11-18 2006-05-18 Ferree Bret A Methods and apparatus for treating spinal stenosis
US7048736B2 (en) * 2002-05-17 2006-05-23 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Device for fixation of spinous processes
US20060111728A1 (en) * 2004-10-05 2006-05-25 Abdou M S Devices and methods for inter-vertebral orthopedic device placement
US20060116690A1 (en) * 2004-02-12 2006-06-01 Pagano Paul J Surgical instrumentation and method for treatment of a spinal structure
US20060122620A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-06-08 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for stabilizing the motion or adjusting the position of the spine
US20060136060A1 (en) * 2002-09-10 2006-06-22 Jean Taylor Posterior vertebral support assembly
US7081120B2 (en) * 1999-04-26 2006-07-25 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Instrumentation and method for delivering an implant into a vertebral space
US7087083B2 (en) * 2001-03-13 2006-08-08 Abbott Spine Self locking fixable intervertebral implant
US20060184247A1 (en) * 2005-02-17 2006-08-17 Edidin Avram A Percutaneous spinal implants and methods
US20060184248A1 (en) * 2005-02-17 2006-08-17 Edidin Avram A Percutaneous spinal implants and methods
US20060195102A1 (en) * 2005-02-17 2006-08-31 Malandain Hugues F Apparatus and method for treatment of spinal conditions
US7163558B2 (en) * 2001-11-30 2007-01-16 Abbott Spine Intervertebral implant with elastically deformable wedge
US7201751B2 (en) * 1997-01-02 2007-04-10 St. Francis Medical Technologies, Inc. Supplemental spine fixation device
US7217293B2 (en) * 2003-11-21 2007-05-15 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Expandable spinal implant
US7238204B2 (en) * 2000-07-12 2007-07-03 Abbott Spine Shock-absorbing intervertebral implant
US20070151116A1 (en) * 2005-07-12 2007-07-05 Malandain Hugues F Measurement instrument for percutaneous surgery

Family Cites Families (320)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US56273A (en) * 1866-07-10 Improvement in hay-stackers
US1193725A (en) * 1916-08-08 smith
US624969A (en) * 1899-05-16 Peter peterson
US868070A (en) * 1904-11-23 1907-10-15 Boles Friction Fastener Company Separable carpet-fastener.
US1230603A (en) * 1914-07-21 1917-06-19 Julian Richmond Screw-anchor.
US1153797A (en) 1915-04-29 1915-09-14 Jules Emile Kegreisz Expansion-anchor.
US1516347A (en) 1923-08-30 1924-11-18 Pataky Anton Coupling pin
US1870942A (en) 1928-05-26 1932-08-09 Gynex Corp Syringe
US2077804A (en) * 1936-05-19 1937-04-20 Morrison Gordon Monroe Device for treating fractures of the neck of the femur
US2201930A (en) * 1938-01-04 1940-05-21 Kastar Inc Self-locking bolt for automobile license plates
US2299308A (en) 1941-08-15 1942-10-20 Russell A Creighton Self-locking spike
US2485531A (en) 1948-01-13 1949-10-18 Dzus William Surgical toggle bolt
US2607370A (en) 1948-07-13 1952-08-19 Oscar F Anderson Pipe plug
US2685877A (en) 1952-03-20 1954-08-10 Dobelle Martin Femoral head prosthesis
US3065659A (en) 1959-09-28 1962-11-27 Superior Concrete Accessories Expansion bolt
US3108595A (en) 1960-08-08 1963-10-29 Alfred P Overment Retention catheter
US3093222A (en) * 1960-09-22 1963-06-11 Glen R Christoffersen Captivated fastening means
DE1860813U (en) * 1962-02-22 1962-10-25 Josef Attenberger BORDER MARK FOR MARKING BORDER POINTS.
US3302509A (en) * 1964-04-03 1967-02-07 Henry J Modrey Expansion anchor
US3397699A (en) 1966-05-05 1968-08-20 Gerald C. Kohl Retaining catheter having resiliently biased wing flanges
US3426364A (en) * 1966-08-25 1969-02-11 Colorado State Univ Research F Prosthetic appliance for replacing one or more natural vertebrae
US3509670A (en) * 1969-03-07 1970-05-05 Richmond Screw Anchor Co Inc Structural concrete insert or anchor
DE2112139B2 (en) 1971-03-13 1973-02-01 Fischer, Artur, 7241 Tumhngen SLEEVE-SHAPED CONNECTOR FOR COMPRESSION OSTEOSYNTHESIS IN TUBE BONE Fractures
US3688454A (en) * 1971-03-31 1972-09-05 Serge Wolfcarius Landmark
US4011602A (en) 1975-10-06 1977-03-15 Battelle Memorial Institute Porous expandable device for attachment to bone tissue
US4704057A (en) 1976-09-15 1987-11-03 Mechanical Plastics Corp. Fastening element
DE2758374A1 (en) * 1977-12-28 1979-07-12 Hilti Ag EXPANSION DOWEL
US4274324A (en) * 1978-04-18 1981-06-23 Giannuzzi Louis Hollow wall screw anchor
CH628803A5 (en) 1978-05-12 1982-03-31 Sulzer Ag Implant insertable between adjacent vertebrae
US4237875A (en) 1979-02-23 1980-12-09 Towmotor Corporation Dynamic intramedullary compression nailing
US4327736A (en) 1979-11-20 1982-05-04 Kanji Inoue Balloon catheter
US4289123A (en) 1980-03-31 1981-09-15 Dunn Harold K Orthopedic appliance
GB2083754B (en) * 1980-09-15 1984-04-26 Rezaian Seyed Mahmoud Spinal fixator
SU988281A1 (en) 1981-06-26 1983-01-15 За витель Vertical column fixing device
US4646998A (en) * 1981-11-20 1987-03-03 Clairson International Corporation Wall-mounted shelf support clip
US4479491A (en) * 1982-07-26 1984-10-30 Martin Felix M Intervertebral stabilization implant
US4519100A (en) * 1982-09-30 1985-05-28 Orthopedic Equipment Co. Inc. Distal locking intramedullary nail
US4499636A (en) * 1983-05-06 1985-02-19 Nifco Inc. Removable two-piece retaining means
US4822226A (en) * 1983-08-08 1989-04-18 Kennedy Arvest G Wing nut retainer and extractor
US4554914A (en) 1983-10-04 1985-11-26 Kapp John P Prosthetic vertebral body
US4553273A (en) * 1983-11-23 1985-11-19 Henry Ford Hospital Vertebral body prosthesis and spine stabilizing method
US4611582A (en) 1983-12-27 1986-09-16 Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation Vertebral clamp
JPS60187737U (en) * 1984-05-23 1985-12-12 オリンパス光学工業株式会社 Indwelling tube guide device
US4632101A (en) 1985-01-31 1986-12-30 Yosef Freedland Orthopedic fastener
US4721103A (en) 1985-01-31 1988-01-26 Yosef Freedland Orthopedic device
US4636217A (en) * 1985-04-23 1987-01-13 Regents Of The University Of Minnesota Anterior spinal implant
US4599086A (en) * 1985-06-07 1986-07-08 Doty James R Spine stabilization device and method
US4662808A (en) * 1985-10-02 1987-05-05 Lee-Rowan Company Wall anchor
US4759670A (en) 1986-06-16 1988-07-26 Phillips Plastics Corporation Multi-purpose two-piece plastic fastener
US4787378A (en) 1986-09-08 1988-11-29 Sodhi Jitendra S Self-retaining nail for fracture of neck of femur
US4969887A (en) * 1986-09-08 1990-11-13 Sodhi Jitendra S Self-retaining nail kit for repairing a fractured neck of femur
CA1283501C (en) * 1987-02-12 1991-04-30 Thomas P. Hedman Artificial spinal disc
SU1484348A1 (en) 1987-03-04 1989-06-07 Белорусский научно-исследовательский институт травматологии и ортопедии Spinal column fixing device
FR2625097B1 (en) 1987-12-23 1990-05-18 Cote Sarl INTER-SPINOUS PROSTHESIS COMPOSED OF SEMI-ELASTIC MATERIAL COMPRISING A TRANSFILING EYE AT ITS END AND INTER-SPINOUS PADS
CH674709A5 (en) * 1988-04-27 1990-07-13 Sulzer Ag
US4892545A (en) * 1988-07-14 1990-01-09 Ohio Medical Instrument Company, Inc. Vertebral lock
IT215084Z2 (en) * 1988-08-03 1990-07-30 Torino A VARIABLE EXCURSION CAMBRA
AU624627B2 (en) 1988-08-18 1992-06-18 Johnson & Johnson Orthopaedics, Inc. Functional and biocompatible intervertebral disc spacer containing elastomeric material of varying hardness
US4834600A (en) * 1988-08-25 1989-05-30 Lemke Stuart H Fastener assembly
GB8825909D0 (en) 1988-11-04 1988-12-07 Showell A W Sugicraft Ltd Pedicle engaging means
US4886405A (en) * 1989-01-27 1989-12-12 Blomberg Ingvar M Wall mounting device
DE3922044A1 (en) 1989-07-05 1991-02-07 Richter Turtur Matthias Dr Treatment of fractured vertebra - by instrument which avoids any force on intact adjacent to vertebrae
US5458638A (en) 1989-07-06 1995-10-17 Spine-Tech, Inc. Non-threaded spinal implant
US4932975A (en) * 1989-10-16 1990-06-12 Vanderbilt University Vertebral prosthesis
US5059193A (en) 1989-11-20 1991-10-22 Spine-Tech, Inc. Expandable spinal implant and surgical method
US5454365A (en) 1990-11-05 1995-10-03 Bonutti; Peter M. Mechanically expandable arthroscopic retractors
DE4012622C1 (en) 1990-04-20 1991-07-18 Eska Medical Luebeck Medizintechnik Gmbh & Co, 2400 Luebeck, De Two-part metal vertebra implant - has parts locked by two toothed racks, pre-stressed by elastic cushion between both implant parts
US5047055A (en) 1990-12-21 1991-09-10 Pfizer Hospital Products Group, Inc. Hydrogel intervertebral disc nucleus
US5171278A (en) 1991-02-22 1992-12-15 Madhavan Pisharodi Middle expandable intervertebral disk implants
JP3390431B2 (en) 1991-02-22 2003-03-24 マドハヴァン、ピシャロディ Centrally expandable disc implant and method
SE470047B (en) 1991-05-15 1993-11-01 Sven Olerud Clamp jaw intended for surgical use
DE4128332A1 (en) * 1991-08-27 1993-03-04 Man Ceramics Gmbh SPINE BONE REPLACEMENT
US5290312A (en) * 1991-09-03 1994-03-01 Alphatec Artificial vertebral body
FR2681525A1 (en) 1991-09-19 1993-03-26 Medical Op Device for flexible or semi-rigid stabilisation of the spine, in particular of the human spine, by a posterior route
JPH05241220A (en) * 1992-02-28 1993-09-21 Kokusai Denshin Denwa Co Ltd <Kdd> Optical logic element
DE4208116C2 (en) * 1992-03-13 1995-08-03 Link Waldemar Gmbh Co Intervertebral disc prosthesis
ATE141149T1 (en) 1992-04-21 1996-08-15 Sulzer Medizinaltechnik Ag ARTIFICIAL DISC BODY
US5316422A (en) 1992-06-01 1994-05-31 Qualcomm Incorporated Blind fastener
US5312405A (en) * 1992-07-06 1994-05-17 Zimmer, Inc. Spinal rod coupler
FR2695026B1 (en) 1992-08-25 1994-10-28 Alexandre Worcel Device for maintaining compression of a fractured bone.
US5562735A (en) 1992-11-09 1996-10-08 Hospital For Joint Diseases Spinal stabilization system and improved method
US5702395A (en) 1992-11-10 1997-12-30 Sofamor S.N.C. Spine osteosynthesis instrumentation for an anterior approach
US5527314A (en) 1993-01-04 1996-06-18 Danek Medical, Inc. Spinal fixation system
FR2700941A1 (en) 1993-02-03 1994-08-05 Felman Daniel Monobloc interspinal intervertebral fixation implant
US5336223A (en) * 1993-02-04 1994-08-09 Rogers Charles L Telescoping spinal fixator
FR2703239B1 (en) 1993-03-30 1995-06-02 Brio Bio Rhone Implant Medical Clip for interspinous prosthesis.
EP0621020A1 (en) * 1993-04-21 1994-10-26 SULZER Medizinaltechnik AG Intervertebral prosthesis and method of implanting such a prosthesis
FR2704745B1 (en) 1993-05-07 1995-11-24 Erpios Device for connecting the ends of a ligament for osteosynthesis, in particular for vertebral osteosynthesis.
FR2705227B1 (en) 1993-05-18 1995-07-28 Felman Daniel Inter-thorny implant with double metal shell.
DE4417629B4 (en) * 1993-06-24 2006-03-16 SDGI Holdings, Inc., Wilmington Implant for the replacement of vertebral bodies
FR2707864B1 (en) 1993-07-23 1996-07-19 Jean Taylor Surgical forceps for tensioning an osteosynthesis ligament.
US5360430A (en) 1993-07-29 1994-11-01 Lin Chih I Intervertebral locking device
FR2708461B1 (en) 1993-08-06 1995-09-29 Advanced Technical Fabrication Interbody implant for spine.
US5458641A (en) * 1993-09-08 1995-10-17 Ramirez Jimenez; Juan J. Vertebral body prosthesis
US5454812A (en) 1993-11-12 1995-10-03 Lin; Chih-I Spinal clamping device having multiple distance adjusting strands
US5439463A (en) 1993-11-12 1995-08-08 Lin; Chih-I Spinal clamping device
US5403316A (en) * 1993-12-02 1995-04-04 Danek Medical, Inc. Triangular construct for spinal fixation
US5723012A (en) 1993-12-09 1998-03-03 Bioland Uses for a current of supercritical carbon dioxide as an antiviral agent
US5653762A (en) 1994-03-18 1997-08-05 Pisharodi; Madhavan Method of stabilizing adjacent vertebrae with rotating, lockable, middle-expanded intervertebral disk stabilizer
US6093207A (en) * 1994-03-18 2000-07-25 Pisharodi; Madhavan Middle expanded, removable intervertebral disk stabilizer disk
US5658336A (en) * 1994-03-18 1997-08-19 Pisharodi; Madhavan Rotating, locking, middle-expanded intervertebral disk stabilizer
FR2717675B1 (en) 1994-03-24 1996-05-03 Jean Taylor Interspinous wedge.
FR2719763B1 (en) 1994-05-11 1996-09-27 Jean Taylor Vertebral implant.
FR2721501B1 (en) 1994-06-24 1996-08-23 Fairant Paulette Prostheses of the vertebral articular facets.
DE4423257C2 (en) 1994-07-02 2001-07-12 Ulrich Heinrich Implant to be inserted between the vertebral body of the spine as a placeholder
FR2722087A1 (en) 1994-07-08 1996-01-12 Cahlik Marc Andre Surgical implant for limiting relative movement of vertebrae
FR2722088B1 (en) 1994-07-08 1998-01-23 Cahlik Marc Andre SURGICAL IMPLANT FOR STABILIZING THE INTERVERTEBRAL SPACE
DE9413471U1 (en) 1994-08-20 1995-12-21 Schaefer Micomed Gmbh Ventral intervertebral implant
DE69522060T2 (en) 1994-09-08 2002-05-29 Stryker Technologies Corp Intervertebral disc core made of hydrogel
FR2724554B1 (en) 1994-09-16 1997-01-24 Voydeville Gilles DEVICE FOR FIXING A LIGAMENT PROSTHESIS
EP0786963B1 (en) 1994-10-17 2004-04-07 RayMedica, Inc. Prosthetic spinal disc nucleus
FR2725892A1 (en) 1994-10-21 1996-04-26 Felman Daniel Vertebral implant insertion process using shape memory material
FR2728159B1 (en) 1994-12-16 1997-06-27 Tornier Sa ELASTIC DISC PROSTHESIS
FR2729556B1 (en) 1995-01-23 1998-10-16 Sofamor SPINAL OSTEOSYNTHESIS DEVICE WITH MEDIAN HOOK AND VERTEBRAL ANCHOR SUPPORT
FR2730156B1 (en) 1995-02-03 1997-04-30 Textile Hi Tec INTER SPINOUS HOLD
FR2730158B1 (en) * 1995-02-06 1999-11-26 Jbs Sa DEVICE FOR MAINTAINING A NORMAL SPACING BETWEEN VERTEBRES AND FOR THE REPLACEMENT OF MISSING VERTEBRES
US5658335A (en) 1995-03-09 1997-08-19 Cohort Medical Products Group, Inc. Spinal fixator
FR2731643A1 (en) 1995-03-16 1996-09-20 Jbs Sa Angular screwdriver for access of awkwardly placed screws for use in surgery
US5630816A (en) * 1995-05-01 1997-05-20 Kambin; Parviz Double barrel spinal fixation system and method
US5702391A (en) * 1995-05-16 1997-12-30 Lin; Chih-I Intervertebral fusion device
WO1996039090A1 (en) * 1995-06-06 1996-12-12 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Device for linking adjacent rods in spinal instrumentation
US6264655B1 (en) * 1995-06-07 2001-07-24 Madhavan Pisharodi Cervical disk and spinal stabilizer
JPH0975381A (en) 1995-09-18 1997-03-25 Nippon Electric Glass Co Ltd Block for spine fusion
US5690649A (en) 1995-12-05 1997-11-25 Li Medical Technologies, Inc. Anchor and anchor installation tool and method
US5653763A (en) 1996-03-29 1997-08-05 Fastenetix, L.L.C. Intervertebral space shape conforming cage device
US5743914A (en) 1996-06-06 1998-04-28 Skiba; Jeffry B. Bone screw
AU3021897A (en) 1996-06-18 1998-01-07 Marc D. Grynpas Bone prosthesis fixation device and methods of using same
US5746762A (en) * 1996-06-24 1998-05-05 Bass; Lawrence S. Device and method for surgical flap dissection
US5702455A (en) 1996-07-03 1997-12-30 Saggar; Rahul Expandable prosthesis for spinal fusion
US5849004A (en) 1996-07-17 1998-12-15 Bramlet; Dale G. Surgical anchor
US5893850A (en) * 1996-11-12 1999-04-13 Cachia; Victor V. Bone fixation device
AU7178698A (en) 1996-11-15 1998-06-03 Advanced Bio Surfaces, Inc. Biomaterial system for in situ tissue repair
US5827285A (en) 1996-12-12 1998-10-27 Bramlet; Dale G. Multipiece interfragmentary fixation assembly
DE19652608C1 (en) 1996-12-18 1998-08-27 Eska Implants Gmbh & Co Prophylaxis implant against fractures of osteoporotically affected bone segments
US20020143331A1 (en) 1998-10-20 2002-10-03 Zucherman James F. Inter-spinous process implant and method with deformable spacer
US6514256B2 (en) 1997-01-02 2003-02-04 St. Francis Medical Technologies, Inc. Spine distraction implant and method
US5836948A (en) 1997-01-02 1998-11-17 Saint Francis Medical Technologies, Llc Spine distraction implant and method
US7306628B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-12-11 St. Francis Medical Technologies Interspinous process apparatus and method with a selectably expandable spacer
US7959652B2 (en) 2005-04-18 2011-06-14 Kyphon Sarl Interspinous process implant having deployable wings and method of implantation
US20050245937A1 (en) * 2004-04-28 2005-11-03 St. Francis Medical Technologies, Inc. System and method for insertion of an interspinous process implant that is rotatable in order to retain the implant relative to the spinous processes
US7101375B2 (en) 1997-01-02 2006-09-05 St. Francis Medical Technologies, Inc. Spine distraction implant
US5725341A (en) * 1997-01-08 1998-03-10 Hofmeister; Oskar Self fusing fastener
US6039761A (en) * 1997-02-12 2000-03-21 Li Medical Technologies, Inc. Intervertebral spacer and tool and method for emplacement thereof
JP2001527437A (en) 1997-03-07 2001-12-25 ベイヤー、モルデキイ System for percutaneous bone and spine stabilization, fixation and repair
US20070282443A1 (en) 1997-03-07 2007-12-06 Disc-O-Tech Medical Technologies Ltd. Expandable element
WO2001054598A1 (en) 1998-03-06 2001-08-02 Disc-O-Tech Medical Technologies, Ltd. Expanding bone implants
FR2762778B1 (en) * 1997-05-02 1999-07-16 Stryker France Sa IMPLANT, IN PARTICULAR FOR THE REPLACEMENT OF A VERTEBRAL BODY IN RACHIS SURGERY
US5980523A (en) 1998-01-08 1999-11-09 Jackson; Roger Transverse connectors for spinal rods
US5941881A (en) 1998-01-09 1999-08-24 Medidea, Llc Bone fastening apparatus and related procedures
FR2775183B1 (en) 1998-02-20 2000-08-04 Jean Taylor INTER-SPINOUS PROSTHESIS
DE19816782A1 (en) * 1998-04-16 1999-10-28 Ulrich Gmbh & Co Kg Implant for insertion between the vertebral body of the spine
DE19818143A1 (en) * 1998-04-23 1999-10-28 Medinorm Ag Device for connecting vertebrae of the spine
US6126689A (en) 1998-06-15 2000-10-03 Expanding Concepts, L.L.C. Collapsible and expandable interbody fusion device
US6264658B1 (en) * 1998-07-06 2001-07-24 Solco Surgical Instruments Co., Ltd. Spine fixing apparatus
FR2782632B1 (en) 1998-08-28 2000-12-29 Materiel Orthopedique En Abreg EXPANSIBLE INTERSOMATIC FUSION CAGE
US7029473B2 (en) 1998-10-20 2006-04-18 St. Francis Medical Technologies, Inc. Deflectable spacer for use as an interspinous process implant and method
US6261289B1 (en) 1998-10-26 2001-07-17 Mark Levy Expandable orthopedic device
ATE322868T1 (en) 1998-10-30 2006-04-15 Ian Ross Griggs FIXATION DEVICE
US7621950B1 (en) 1999-01-27 2009-11-24 Kyphon Sarl Expandable intervertebral spacer
US6214037B1 (en) 1999-03-18 2001-04-10 Fossa Industries, Llc Radially expanding stent
US6245107B1 (en) * 1999-05-28 2001-06-12 Bret A. Ferree Methods and apparatus for treating disc herniation
US6770096B2 (en) 1999-07-01 2004-08-03 Spinevision S.A. Interbody spinal stabilization cage and spinal stabilization method
US7815590B2 (en) * 1999-08-05 2010-10-19 Broncus Technologies, Inc. Devices for maintaining patency of surgically created channels in tissue
EP1328221B1 (en) 1999-08-18 2009-03-25 Intrinsic Therapeutics, Inc. Devices for nucleus pulposus augmentation and retention
US6964674B1 (en) 1999-09-20 2005-11-15 Nuvasive, Inc. Annulotomy closure device
ATE285207T1 (en) 1999-10-22 2005-01-15 Archus Orthopedics Inc FACET ARTHROPLASTY DEVICES
FR2799948B1 (en) 1999-10-22 2002-03-29 Transco Esquisse CONNECTION BAR FOR ANCHORING AN INTER-THINNING PROSTHESIS
US6974478B2 (en) 1999-10-22 2005-12-13 Archus Orthopedics, Inc. Prostheses, systems and methods for replacement of natural facet joints with artificial facet joint surfaces
US6461359B1 (en) * 1999-11-10 2002-10-08 Clifford Tribus Spine stabilization device
US7097654B1 (en) 2000-01-03 2006-08-29 Yosef Freedland Flip-wing tissue retainer
US6336930B1 (en) * 2000-03-07 2002-01-08 Zimmer, Inc. Polymer filled bone plate
FR2806616B1 (en) 2000-03-21 2003-04-11 Cousin Biotech INTERPINEUSE SHIM AND FASTENING DEVICE ON THE SACRUM
FR2808025A1 (en) * 2000-04-25 2001-10-26 Michelin Soc Tech PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION BY ANIONIC ROUTE OF A BRANCHED DIENE ELASTOMER
US6645207B2 (en) 2000-05-08 2003-11-11 Robert A. Dixon Method and apparatus for dynamized spinal stabilization
US6964667B2 (en) 2000-06-23 2005-11-15 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Formed in place fixation system with thermal acceleration
US6511508B1 (en) * 2000-08-04 2003-01-28 Environmental Robots, Inc. Surgical correction of human eye refractive errors by active composite artificial muscle implants
US6733531B1 (en) * 2000-10-20 2004-05-11 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Anchoring devices and implants for intervertebral disc augmentation
FR2816197B1 (en) 2000-11-07 2003-01-10 Jean Taylor INTER-SPINABLE PROSTHESIS, TOOL AND PROCESS FOR PREPARING THE SAME
US6419703B1 (en) 2001-03-01 2002-07-16 T. Wade Fallin Prosthesis for the replacement of a posterior element of a vertebra
US6743257B2 (en) * 2000-12-19 2004-06-01 Cortek, Inc. Dynamic implanted intervertebral spacer
FR2818530B1 (en) 2000-12-22 2003-10-31 Spine Next Sa INTERVERTEBRAL IMPLANT WITH DEFORMABLE SHIM
US6393949B1 (en) * 2000-12-27 2002-05-28 Yen Hsing Enterprise Co., Ltd. Ratchet screwdriver
EP1427341A1 (en) * 2001-07-20 2004-06-16 Spinal Concepts Inc. Spinal stabilization system and method
CN1835720B (en) 2001-07-25 2011-09-28 Disc整形外科技术股份有限公司 Deformable tools and implants
FR2828398B1 (en) 2001-08-08 2003-09-19 Jean Taylor VERTEBRA STABILIZATION ASSEMBLY
JP4947879B2 (en) 2001-08-20 2012-06-06 ジンテーズ ゲゼルシャフト ミト ベシュレンクテル ハフツング Interspinous prosthesis
EP1287794B1 (en) 2001-08-24 2008-06-18 Zimmer GmbH Artificial spinal disc
JP4539900B2 (en) 2001-09-12 2010-09-08 Hoya株式会社 Atlantoaxial fixation spacer
US20030114853A1 (en) 2001-10-12 2003-06-19 Ian Burgess Polyaxial cross connector
US6656155B2 (en) * 2001-12-17 2003-12-02 Scimed Life Systems, Inc. Catheter for endoluminal delivery of therapeutic agents that minimizes loss of therapeutic
WO2003057055A1 (en) 2001-12-27 2003-07-17 Osteotech Inc. Orthopedic/neurosurgical system and method for securing vertebral bone facets
FR2835173B1 (en) 2002-01-28 2004-11-05 Biomet Merck France INTERTEPINEOUS VERTEBRAL IMPLANT
US6702239B2 (en) * 2002-01-29 2004-03-09 Jim R. Boucher Apparatus and method for supporting the trunk of a tree
US6669729B2 (en) 2002-03-08 2003-12-30 Kingsley Richard Chin Apparatus and method for the replacement of posterior vertebral elements
AU2003228391A1 (en) * 2002-03-30 2003-10-20 Cool Brace Intervertebral device and method of use
US20030220643A1 (en) 2002-05-24 2003-11-27 Ferree Bret A. Devices to prevent spinal extension
US7087055B2 (en) * 2002-06-25 2006-08-08 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Minimally invasive expanding spacer and method
US7070598B2 (en) * 2002-06-25 2006-07-04 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Minimally invasive expanding spacer and method
US20040010312A1 (en) * 2002-07-09 2004-01-15 Albert Enayati Intervertebral prosthesis
US20040087947A1 (en) * 2002-08-28 2004-05-06 Roy Lim Minimally invasive expanding spacer and method
US20050075634A1 (en) 2002-10-29 2005-04-07 Zucherman James F. Interspinous process implant with radiolucent spacer and lead-in tissue expander
US7931674B2 (en) 2005-03-21 2011-04-26 Kyphon Sarl Interspinous process implant having deployable wing and method of implantation
JP2006507090A (en) 2002-11-21 2006-03-02 エスディージーアイ・ホールディングス・インコーポレーテッド System for intravertebral reduction
WO2004047689A1 (en) 2002-11-21 2004-06-10 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Systems and techniques for intravertebral spinal stablization with expandable devices
FR2850009B1 (en) 2003-01-20 2005-12-23 Spine Next Sa TREATMENT ASSEMBLY FOR THE DEGENERATION OF AN INTERVERTEBRAL DISC
US7335203B2 (en) 2003-02-12 2008-02-26 Kyphon Inc. System and method for immobilizing adjacent spinous processes
FR2851154B1 (en) 2003-02-19 2006-07-07 Sdgi Holding Inc INTER-SPINOUS DEVICE FOR BRAKING THE MOVEMENTS OF TWO SUCCESSIVE VERTEBRATES, AND METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING THE SAME THEREOF
US20050049590A1 (en) * 2003-03-07 2005-03-03 Neville Alleyne Spinal implant with securement spikes
US7824444B2 (en) 2003-03-20 2010-11-02 Spineco, Inc. Expandable spherical spinal implant
ITFI20030084A1 (en) 2003-03-28 2004-09-29 Cousin Biotech S A S INTERLAMINARY VERTEBRAL PROSTHESIS
USD494812S1 (en) * 2003-05-13 2004-08-24 Les Expositions E.R.A. Co. Ltee Cover for salt and pepper shaker
KR100582768B1 (en) 2003-07-24 2006-05-23 최병관 Insert complement for vertebra
CN2638760Y (en) 2003-08-04 2004-09-08 邹德威 Dilator for forming cavity in pyramid
US7377942B2 (en) 2003-08-06 2008-05-27 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Posterior elements motion restoring device
US20050085814A1 (en) * 2003-10-21 2005-04-21 Sherman Michael C. Dynamizable orthopedic implants and their use in treating bone defects
WO2005044118A1 (en) 2003-10-24 2005-05-19 Cousin Biotech, S.A.S. Inter-blade support
WO2005048856A1 (en) 2003-11-10 2005-06-02 Umc Utrecht Holding B.V. Expandable implant for treating fractured and/or collapsed bone
US8636802B2 (en) 2004-03-06 2014-01-28 DePuy Synthes Products, LLC Dynamized interspinal implant
US7763073B2 (en) 2004-03-09 2010-07-27 Depuy Spine, Inc. Posterior process dynamic spacer
DE102004011685A1 (en) 2004-03-09 2005-09-29 Biedermann Motech Gmbh Spine supporting element, comprising spiraled grooves at outer surface and three plain areas
US7458981B2 (en) 2004-03-09 2008-12-02 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Spinal implant and method for restricting spinal flexion
US7507241B2 (en) 2004-04-05 2009-03-24 Expanding Orthopedics Inc. Expandable bone device
FR2870107B1 (en) 2004-05-11 2007-07-27 Spine Next Sa SELF-LOCKING DEVICE FOR FIXING AN INTERVERTEBRAL IMPLANT
SG142309A1 (en) 2004-05-17 2008-05-28 Wooridul Spine Health Inst Co Spine insert
US7585316B2 (en) 2004-05-21 2009-09-08 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US7344564B2 (en) 2004-06-08 2008-03-18 Spinal Generations, Llc Expandable spinal stabilization device
CN101001587A (en) 2004-08-13 2007-07-18 斯恩蒂斯有限公司 Intervertebral implant
US7763053B2 (en) * 2004-08-30 2010-07-27 Gordon Jeffrey D Implant for correction of spinal deformity
US20060085073A1 (en) 2004-10-18 2006-04-20 Kamshad Raiszadeh Medical device systems for the spine
US7763074B2 (en) * 2004-10-20 2010-07-27 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US8409282B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2013-04-02 Vertiflex, Inc. Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US8241330B2 (en) 2007-01-11 2012-08-14 Lanx, Inc. Spinous process implants and associated methods
US20060095136A1 (en) * 2004-11-03 2006-05-04 Mcluen Design, Inc. Bone fusion device
US7655044B2 (en) 2004-12-13 2010-02-02 Depuy Spine, Inc. Artificial facet joint device having a compression spring
WO2006066228A2 (en) * 2004-12-16 2006-06-22 Innovative Spinal Technologies Expandable implants for spinal disc replacement
US8403959B2 (en) 2004-12-16 2013-03-26 Med-Titan Spine Gmbh Implant for the treatment of lumbar spinal canal stenosis
US20060149242A1 (en) 2004-12-17 2006-07-06 Gary Kraus Spinal stabilization systems supplemented with diagnostically opaque materials
DE102005005694A1 (en) 2005-02-08 2006-08-17 Henning Kloss Spine vertebra support device for twpporting two sucessive vertebras, useful in implantation processes has two supoirts and two suppor holders
US8007521B2 (en) * 2005-02-17 2011-08-30 Kyphon Sarl Percutaneous spinal implants and methods
US8096994B2 (en) 2005-02-17 2012-01-17 Kyphon Sarl Percutaneous spinal implants and methods
US8100943B2 (en) 2005-02-17 2012-01-24 Kyphon Sarl Percutaneous spinal implants and methods
US7611316B2 (en) 2005-02-17 2009-11-03 Illinois Tool Works Inc. Heavy duty toggle bolt fastener for accommodating long screws and having properly positioned toggle nut component
US20070276493A1 (en) 2005-02-17 2007-11-29 Malandain Hugues F Percutaneous spinal implants and methods
US7927354B2 (en) * 2005-02-17 2011-04-19 Kyphon Sarl Percutaneous spinal implants and methods
US7998174B2 (en) 2005-02-17 2011-08-16 Kyphon Sarl Percutaneous spinal implants and methods
EP1863415A4 (en) 2005-03-31 2012-04-04 Life Spine Inc Expandable spinal interbody and intravertebral body devices
US20060241757A1 (en) 2005-03-31 2006-10-26 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Intervertebral prosthetic device for spinal stabilization and method of manufacturing same
US8066742B2 (en) 2005-03-31 2011-11-29 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Intervertebral prosthetic device for spinal stabilization and method of implanting same
FR2884136B1 (en) 2005-04-08 2008-02-22 Spinevision Sa INTERVERTEBRAL SURGICAL IMPLANT FORMING BALL
US8470000B2 (en) 2005-04-08 2013-06-25 Paradigm Spine, Llc Interspinous vertebral and lumbosacral stabilization devices and methods of use
US7780709B2 (en) 2005-04-12 2010-08-24 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Implants and methods for inter-transverse process dynamic stabilization of a spinal motion segment
US7789898B2 (en) 2005-04-15 2010-09-07 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Transverse process/laminar spacer
US9237908B2 (en) 2005-04-21 2016-01-19 Spine Wave, Inc. Dynamic stabilization system for the spine
US7727233B2 (en) 2005-04-29 2010-06-01 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Spinous process stabilization devices and methods
US20060247623A1 (en) 2005-04-29 2006-11-02 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Local delivery of an active agent from an orthopedic implant
US7951169B2 (en) 2005-06-10 2011-05-31 Depuy Spine, Inc. Posterior dynamic stabilization cross connectors
US7837688B2 (en) 2005-06-13 2010-11-23 Globus Medical Spinous process spacer
US20070005064A1 (en) 2005-06-27 2007-01-04 Sdgi Holdings Intervertebral prosthetic device for spinal stabilization and method of implanting same
FR2887434B1 (en) 2005-06-28 2008-03-28 Jean Taylor SURGICAL TREATMENT EQUIPMENT OF TWO VERTEBRATES
FR2889438B1 (en) 2005-08-04 2008-06-06 Scient X Sa DOUBLE-SHAPED INTERVERTEBRAL IMPLANT
US7753938B2 (en) * 2005-08-05 2010-07-13 Synthes Usa, Llc Apparatus for treating spinal stenosis
EP1968465A1 (en) 2005-09-21 2008-09-17 Sintea Biotech S.p.A. Device, kit and method for intervertebral stabilization
US20080183209A1 (en) 2005-09-23 2008-07-31 Spinal Kinetics, Inc. Spinal Stabilization Device
US7879074B2 (en) * 2005-09-27 2011-02-01 Depuy Spine, Inc. Posterior dynamic stabilization systems and methods
US7604652B2 (en) 2005-10-11 2009-10-20 Impliant Ltd. Spinal prosthesis
US8357181B2 (en) 2005-10-27 2013-01-22 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Intervertebral prosthetic device for spinal stabilization and method of implanting same
WO2007052975A1 (en) 2005-11-03 2007-05-10 Dong-Kyu Chin Fixing device for spinous process
US7862591B2 (en) 2005-11-10 2011-01-04 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Intervertebral prosthetic device for spinal stabilization and method of implanting same
US7998173B2 (en) 2005-11-22 2011-08-16 Richard Perkins Adjustable spinous process spacer device and method of treating spinal stenosis
WO2007067547A2 (en) 2005-12-06 2007-06-14 Globus Medical, Inc. Facet joint prosthesis
US20070173822A1 (en) 2006-01-13 2007-07-26 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Use of a posterior dynamic stabilization system with an intradiscal device
US20070173823A1 (en) 2006-01-18 2007-07-26 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Intervertebral prosthetic device for spinal stabilization and method of implanting same
US8083795B2 (en) 2006-01-18 2011-12-27 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Intervertebral prosthetic device for spinal stabilization and method of manufacturing same
US7837711B2 (en) 2006-01-27 2010-11-23 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Artificial spinous process for the sacrum and methods of use
US7691130B2 (en) 2006-01-27 2010-04-06 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Spinal implants including a sensor and methods of use
US7682376B2 (en) 2006-01-27 2010-03-23 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Interspinous devices and methods of use
US20070233088A1 (en) 2006-01-27 2007-10-04 Edmond Elizabeth W Pedicle and non-pedicle based interspinous and lateral spacers
US20070191838A1 (en) 2006-01-27 2007-08-16 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Interspinous devices and methods of use
US20070233089A1 (en) 2006-02-17 2007-10-04 Endius, Inc. Systems and methods for reducing adjacent level disc disease
US20070233068A1 (en) 2006-02-22 2007-10-04 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Intervertebral prosthetic assembly for spinal stabilization and method of implanting same
US8262698B2 (en) 2006-03-16 2012-09-11 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Expandable device for insertion between anatomical structures and a procedure utilizing same
US7985246B2 (en) 2006-03-31 2011-07-26 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Methods and instruments for delivering interspinous process spacers
US20070270874A1 (en) 2006-04-24 2007-11-22 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Surgical distraction device and procedure
US8118844B2 (en) 2006-04-24 2012-02-21 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Expandable device for insertion between anatomical structures and a procedure utilizing same
US20070270823A1 (en) 2006-04-28 2007-11-22 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Multi-chamber expandable interspinous process brace
US7846185B2 (en) 2006-04-28 2010-12-07 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Expandable interspinous process implant and method of installing same
US8252031B2 (en) 2006-04-28 2012-08-28 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Molding device for an expandable interspinous process implant
US8348978B2 (en) 2006-04-28 2013-01-08 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Interosteotic implant
US8105357B2 (en) 2006-04-28 2012-01-31 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Interspinous process brace
US20070270824A1 (en) 2006-04-28 2007-11-22 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Interspinous process brace
US8048118B2 (en) 2006-04-28 2011-11-01 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Adjustable interspinous process brace
US8062337B2 (en) 2006-05-04 2011-11-22 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Expandable device for insertion between anatomical structures and a procedure utilizing same
US20070276496A1 (en) 2006-05-23 2007-11-29 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Surgical spacer with shape control
US8147517B2 (en) 2006-05-23 2012-04-03 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Systems and methods for adjusting properties of a spinal implant
US20070276497A1 (en) 2006-05-23 2007-11-29 Sdgi Holdings. Inc. Surgical spacer
US20070272259A1 (en) 2006-05-23 2007-11-29 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Surgical procedure for inserting a device between anatomical structures
US20070276369A1 (en) 2006-05-26 2007-11-29 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. In vivo-customizable implant
US20080021457A1 (en) * 2006-07-05 2008-01-24 Warsaw Orthopedic Inc. Zygapophysial joint repair system
US8048119B2 (en) 2006-07-20 2011-11-01 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Apparatus for insertion between anatomical structures and a procedure utilizing same
US20080114358A1 (en) 2006-11-13 2008-05-15 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Intervertebral Prosthetic Assembly for Spinal Stabilization and Method of Implanting Same
US7879104B2 (en) 2006-11-15 2011-02-01 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Spinal implant system
US20080114357A1 (en) 2006-11-15 2008-05-15 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Inter-transverse process spacer device and method for use in correcting a spinal deformity
US20080271360A1 (en) 2006-11-28 2008-11-06 Troy Barfield Device for holding fish
US7955392B2 (en) 2006-12-14 2011-06-07 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Interspinous process devices and methods
US20080167685A1 (en) 2007-01-05 2008-07-10 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. System and Method For Percutanously Curing An Implantable Device
US8435268B2 (en) * 2007-01-19 2013-05-07 Reduction Technologies, Inc. Systems, devices and methods for the correction of spinal deformities
US20080183218A1 (en) 2007-01-31 2008-07-31 Nuvasive, Inc. System and Methods for Spinous Process Fusion
US8034081B2 (en) 2007-02-06 2011-10-11 CollabComl, LLC Interspinous dynamic stabilization implant and method of implanting
AU2008241447B2 (en) 2007-04-16 2014-03-27 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US7799058B2 (en) 2007-04-19 2010-09-21 Zimmer Gmbh Interspinous spacer
US20080281361A1 (en) 2007-05-10 2008-11-13 Shannon Marlece Vittur Posterior stabilization and spinous process systems and methods
US8840646B2 (en) 2007-05-10 2014-09-23 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Spinous process implants and methods
US8348976B2 (en) 2007-08-27 2013-01-08 Kyphon Sarl Spinous-process implants and methods of using the same
AU2008298938A1 (en) 2007-09-14 2009-03-19 Synthes Gmbh Interspinous spacer
US8551171B2 (en) * 2007-10-12 2013-10-08 Globus Medical, Inc. Methods of stabilizing the sacroiliac joint
US20090105773A1 (en) 2007-10-23 2009-04-23 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Method and apparatus for insertion of an interspinous process device
WO2009083276A1 (en) 2008-01-03 2009-07-09 Andrea Fontanella Percutaneous interspinous process spacer
ITPI20080010A1 (en) 2008-02-07 2009-08-08 Giuseppe Calvosa INTERSTEIN VERTEBRAL DISTRACTOR FOR PERCUTANEOUS INSERTION
TW200938157A (en) 2008-03-11 2009-09-16 Fong-Ying Chuang Interspinous spine fixing device
US8114136B2 (en) 2008-03-18 2012-02-14 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Implants and methods for inter-spinous process dynamic stabilization of a spinal motion segment

Patent Citations (99)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2677369A (en) * 1952-03-26 1954-05-04 Fred L Knowles Apparatus for treatment of the spinal column
US3648691A (en) * 1970-02-24 1972-03-14 Univ Colorado State Res Found Method of applying vertebral appliance
US4011605A (en) * 1973-12-12 1977-03-15 Hykon-Patent Aktiebolag Flushing and refilling apparatuses
US4047055A (en) * 1974-12-24 1977-09-06 Ing. C. Olivetti & C., S.P.A. Line control unit for teleprinters
US4257409A (en) * 1978-04-14 1981-03-24 Kazimierz Bacal Device for treatment of spinal curvature
US4686970A (en) * 1983-12-15 1987-08-18 A. W. Showell (Surgicraft) Limited Devices for spinal fixation
US4604995A (en) * 1984-03-30 1986-08-12 Stephens David C Spinal stabilizer
US4573454A (en) * 1984-05-17 1986-03-04 Hoffman Gregory A Spinal fixation apparatus
US4657550A (en) * 1984-12-21 1987-04-14 Daher Youssef H Buttressing device usable in a vertebral prosthesis
US4827918A (en) * 1985-08-15 1989-05-09 Sven Olerud Fixing instrument for use in spinal surgery
US4931055A (en) * 1986-05-30 1990-06-05 John Bumpus Distraction rods
US4863476A (en) * 1986-08-29 1989-09-05 Shepperd John A N Spinal implant
US5011484A (en) * 1987-11-16 1991-04-30 Breard Francis H Surgical implant for restricting the relative movement of vertebrae
US5609635A (en) * 1988-06-28 1997-03-11 Michelson; Gary K. Lordotic interbody spinal fusion implants
US5201734A (en) * 1988-12-21 1993-04-13 Zimmer, Inc. Spinal locking sleeve assembly
US5092866A (en) * 1989-02-03 1992-03-03 Breard Francis H Flexible inter-vertebral stabilizer as well as process and apparatus for determining or verifying its tension before installation on the spinal column
US5098433A (en) * 1989-04-12 1992-03-24 Yosef Freedland Winged compression bolt orthopedic fastener
US5707390A (en) * 1990-03-02 1998-01-13 General Surgical Innovations, Inc. Arthroscopic retractors
US5390683A (en) * 1991-02-22 1995-02-21 Pisharodi; Madhavan Spinal implantation methods utilizing a middle expandable implant
US5395370A (en) * 1991-10-18 1995-03-07 Pina Vertriebs Ag Vertebral compression clamp for surgical repair to damage to the spine
US5609634A (en) * 1992-07-07 1997-03-11 Voydeville; Gilles Intervertebral prosthesis making possible rotatory stabilization and flexion/extension stabilization
US5518498A (en) * 1992-10-09 1996-05-21 Angiomed Ag Stent set
US5437672A (en) * 1992-11-12 1995-08-01 Alleyne; Neville Spinal cord protection device
US5306275A (en) * 1992-12-31 1994-04-26 Bryan Donald W Lumbar spine fixation apparatus and method
US5628756A (en) * 1993-01-06 1997-05-13 Smith & Nephew Richards Inc. Knotted cable attachment apparatus formed of braided polymeric fibers
US5496318A (en) * 1993-01-08 1996-03-05 Advanced Spine Fixation Systems, Inc. Interspinous segmental spine fixation device
US5415661A (en) * 1993-03-24 1995-05-16 University Of Miami Implantable spinal assist device
US5554191A (en) * 1994-01-26 1996-09-10 Biomat Intersomatic vertebral cage
US5645599A (en) * 1994-07-26 1997-07-08 Fixano Interspinal vertebral implant
US5665122A (en) * 1995-01-31 1997-09-09 Kambin; Parviz Expandable intervertebral cage and surgical method
US5716416A (en) * 1996-09-10 1998-02-10 Lin; Chih-I Artificial intervertebral disk and method for implanting the same
US5810815A (en) * 1996-09-20 1998-09-22 Morales; Jose A. Surgical apparatus for use in the treatment of spinal deformities
US6190414B1 (en) * 1996-10-31 2001-02-20 Surgical Dynamics Inc. Apparatus for fusion of adjacent bone structures
US7201751B2 (en) * 1997-01-02 2007-04-10 St. Francis Medical Technologies, Inc. Supplemental spine fixation device
US5860977A (en) * 1997-01-02 1999-01-19 Saint Francis Medical Technologies, Llc Spine distraction implant and method
US6048342A (en) * 1997-01-02 2000-04-11 St. Francis Medical Technologies, Inc. Spine distraction implant
US6068630A (en) * 1997-01-02 2000-05-30 St. Francis Medical Technologies, Inc. Spine distraction implant
US6022376A (en) * 1997-06-06 2000-02-08 Raymedica, Inc. Percutaneous prosthetic spinal disc nucleus and method of manufacture
US6695842B2 (en) * 1997-10-27 2004-02-24 St. Francis Medical Technologies, Inc. Interspinous process distraction system and method with positionable wing and method
US6440169B1 (en) * 1998-02-10 2002-08-27 Dimso Interspinous stabilizer to be fixed to spinous processes of two vertebrae
US6352537B1 (en) * 1998-09-17 2002-03-05 Electro-Biology, Inc. Method and apparatus for spinal fixation
US6451019B1 (en) * 1998-10-20 2002-09-17 St. Francis Medical Technologies, Inc. Supplemental spine fixation device and method
US6554833B2 (en) * 1998-10-26 2003-04-29 Expanding Orthopedics, Inc. Expandable orthopedic device
US6905512B2 (en) * 1998-12-14 2005-06-14 Phoenix Biomedical Corporation System for stabilizing the vertebral column including deployment instruments and variable expansion inserts therefore
US20040167625A1 (en) * 1999-01-27 2004-08-26 Disc-O-Tech Orthopedic Technologies Inc. Spacer filler
US7097648B1 (en) * 1999-01-27 2006-08-29 Disc-O-Tech Medical Technologies Ltd. Expandable element delivery system
US7081120B2 (en) * 1999-04-26 2006-07-25 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Instrumentation and method for delivering an implant into a vertebral space
US6520991B2 (en) * 1999-05-11 2003-02-18 Donald R. Huene Expandable implant for inter-vertebral stabilization, and a method of stabilizing vertebrae
US6214050B1 (en) * 1999-05-11 2001-04-10 Donald R. Huene Expandable implant for inter-bone stabilization and adapted to extrude osteogenic material, and a method of stabilizing bones while extruding osteogenic material
US6419704B1 (en) * 1999-10-08 2002-07-16 Bret Ferree Artificial intervertebral disc replacement methods and apparatus
US6761720B1 (en) * 1999-10-15 2004-07-13 Spine Next Intervertebral implant
US6736818B2 (en) * 1999-11-11 2004-05-18 Synthes (U.S.A.) Radially expandable intramedullary nail
US6293949B1 (en) * 2000-03-01 2001-09-25 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Superelastic spinal stabilization system and method
US6402750B1 (en) * 2000-04-04 2002-06-11 Spinlabs, Llc Devices and methods for the treatment of spinal disorders
US20050049708A1 (en) * 2000-04-04 2005-03-03 Atkinson Robert E. Devices and methods for the treatment of spinal disorders
US7238204B2 (en) * 2000-07-12 2007-07-03 Abbott Spine Shock-absorbing intervertebral implant
US6758863B2 (en) * 2000-10-25 2004-07-06 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Vertically expanding intervertebral body fusion device
US6582467B1 (en) * 2000-10-31 2003-06-24 Vertelink Corporation Expandable fusion cage
US6730126B2 (en) * 2000-11-13 2004-05-04 Frank H. Boehm, Jr. Device and method for lumbar interbody fusion
US7041136B2 (en) * 2000-11-29 2006-05-09 Facet Solutions, Inc. Facet joint replacement
US20040133204A1 (en) * 2001-01-27 2004-07-08 Davies John Bruce Clayfield Expandable bone nails
US6364883B1 (en) * 2001-02-23 2002-04-02 Albert N. Santilli Spinous process clamp for spinal fusion and method of operation
US7087083B2 (en) * 2001-03-13 2006-08-08 Abbott Spine Self locking fixable intervertebral implant
US6582433B2 (en) * 2001-04-09 2003-06-24 St. Francis Medical Technologies, Inc. Spine fixation device and method
US6375682B1 (en) * 2001-08-06 2002-04-23 Lewis W. Fleischmann Collapsible, rotatable and expandable spinal hydraulic prosthetic device
US7163558B2 (en) * 2001-11-30 2007-01-16 Abbott Spine Intervertebral implant with elastically deformable wedge
US6733534B2 (en) * 2002-01-29 2004-05-11 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. System and method for spine spacing
US6981975B2 (en) * 2002-02-02 2006-01-03 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Method for inserting a spinal fusion implant having deployable bone engaging projections
US20030153915A1 (en) * 2002-02-08 2003-08-14 Showa Ika Kohgyo Co., Ltd. Vertebral body distance retainer
US6709435B2 (en) * 2002-03-20 2004-03-23 A-Spine Holding Group Corp. Three-hooked device for fixing spinal column
US7048736B2 (en) * 2002-05-17 2006-05-23 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Device for fixation of spinous processes
US20060136060A1 (en) * 2002-09-10 2006-06-22 Jean Taylor Posterior vertebral support assembly
US20040097931A1 (en) * 2002-10-29 2004-05-20 Steve Mitchell Interspinous process and sacrum implant and method
US6723126B1 (en) * 2002-11-01 2004-04-20 Sdgi Holdings, Inc. Laterally expandable cage
US6685742B1 (en) * 2002-11-12 2004-02-03 Roger P. Jackson Articulated anterior expandable spinal fusion cage system
US20050010293A1 (en) * 2003-05-22 2005-01-13 Zucherman James F. Distractible interspinous process implant and method of implantation
US7011685B2 (en) * 2003-11-07 2006-03-14 Impliant Ltd. Spinal prostheses
US7217293B2 (en) * 2003-11-21 2007-05-15 Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. Expandable spinal implant
US20050165398A1 (en) * 2004-01-26 2005-07-28 Reiley Mark A. Percutaneous spine distraction implant systems and methods
US20060116690A1 (en) * 2004-02-12 2006-06-01 Pagano Paul J Surgical instrumentation and method for treatment of a spinal structure
US20060004455A1 (en) * 2004-06-09 2006-01-05 Alain Leonard Methods and apparatuses for bone restoration
US20060004447A1 (en) * 2004-06-30 2006-01-05 Depuy Spine, Inc. Adjustable posterior spinal column positioner
US20060015181A1 (en) * 2004-07-19 2006-01-19 Biomet Merck France (50% Interest) Interspinous vertebral implant
US20060064165A1 (en) * 2004-09-23 2006-03-23 St. Francis Medical Technologies, Inc. Interspinous process implant including a binder and method of implantation
US20060111728A1 (en) * 2004-10-05 2006-05-25 Abdou M S Devices and methods for inter-vertebral orthopedic device placement
US20060084988A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-04-20 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US20060122620A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-06-08 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for stabilizing the motion or adjusting the position of the spine
US20060085069A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-04-20 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US20060084985A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-04-20 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US20060084987A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-04-20 Kim Daniel H Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US20060084983A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-04-20 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US20060089719A1 (en) * 2004-10-21 2006-04-27 Trieu Hai H In situ formation of intervertebral disc implants
US20060106397A1 (en) * 2004-10-25 2006-05-18 Lins Robert E Interspinous distraction devices and associated methods of insertion
US20060089654A1 (en) * 2004-10-25 2006-04-27 Lins Robert E Interspinous distraction devices and associated methods of insertion
US20060106381A1 (en) * 2004-11-18 2006-05-18 Ferree Bret A Methods and apparatus for treating spinal stenosis
US20060184248A1 (en) * 2005-02-17 2006-08-17 Edidin Avram A Percutaneous spinal implants and methods
US20060195102A1 (en) * 2005-02-17 2006-08-31 Malandain Hugues F Apparatus and method for treatment of spinal conditions
US20060184247A1 (en) * 2005-02-17 2006-08-17 Edidin Avram A Percutaneous spinal implants and methods
US20070151116A1 (en) * 2005-07-12 2007-07-05 Malandain Hugues F Measurement instrument for percutaneous surgery

Cited By (90)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9119680B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2015-09-01 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US8123782B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2012-02-28 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US20060122620A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-06-08 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for stabilizing the motion or adjusting the position of the spine
US11076893B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2021-08-03 Vertiflex, Inc. Methods for treating a patient's spine
US10835295B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2020-11-17 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US20070276370A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2007-11-29 Vertiflex, Inc. Minimally invasive tooling for delivery of interspinous spacer
US20080287997A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2008-11-20 Moti Altarac Interspinous spacer
US20080294263A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2008-11-27 Moti Altarac Interspinous spacer
US20080319550A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2008-12-25 Moti Altarac Interspinous spacer
US10835297B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2020-11-17 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US20090138055A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2009-05-28 Moti Altarac Spacer insertion instrument
US9125692B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2015-09-08 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US10709481B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2020-07-14 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US10610267B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2020-04-07 Vertiflex, Inc. Spacer insertion instrument
US10292738B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2019-05-21 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for stabilizing the motion or adjusting the position of the spine
US10278744B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2019-05-07 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US20090222043A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2009-09-03 Moti Altarac Interspinous process spacer instrument system with deployment indicator
US10258389B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2019-04-16 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US10166047B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2019-01-01 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US20110106160A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2011-05-05 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US8012207B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2011-09-06 Vertiflex, Inc. Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US10080587B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2018-09-25 Vertiflex, Inc. Methods for treating a patient's spine
US8123807B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2012-02-28 Vertiflex, Inc. Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US20060084983A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-04-20 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US8128662B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2012-03-06 Vertiflex, Inc. Minimally invasive tooling for delivery of interspinous spacer
US8152837B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2012-04-10 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US8167944B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2012-05-01 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US8273108B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2012-09-25 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US8277488B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2012-10-02 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US8292922B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2012-10-23 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US8317864B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2012-11-27 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US8409282B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2013-04-02 Vertiflex, Inc. Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US10058358B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2018-08-28 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US8425559B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2013-04-23 Vertiflex, Inc. Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US10039576B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2018-08-07 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US8613747B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2013-12-24 Vertiflex, Inc. Spacer insertion instrument
US8628574B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2014-01-14 Vertiflex, Inc. Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US9956011B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2018-05-01 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US9877749B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2018-01-30 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US8864828B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2014-10-21 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US8900271B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2014-12-02 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US8945183B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2015-02-03 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous process spacer instrument system with deployment indicator
US9023084B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2015-05-05 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for stabilizing the motion or adjusting the position of the spine
US9039742B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2015-05-26 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US20070173832A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2007-07-26 Vertiflex, Inc. Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US20060085070A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2006-04-20 Vertiflex, Inc. Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US20090138046A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2009-05-28 Moti Altarac Interspinous spacer
US9155570B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2015-10-13 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US9155572B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2015-10-13 Vertiflex, Inc. Minimally invasive tooling for delivery of interspinous spacer
US9161783B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2015-10-20 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US9861398B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2018-01-09 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US9211146B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2015-12-15 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US9572603B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2017-02-21 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US9283005B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2016-03-15 Vertiflex, Inc. Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US9314279B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2016-04-19 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US9393055B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2016-07-19 Vertiflex, Inc. Spacer insertion instrument
US9445843B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2016-09-20 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Systems and methods for posterior dynamic stabilization of the spine
US9532812B2 (en) 2004-10-20 2017-01-03 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US10653456B2 (en) 2005-02-04 2020-05-19 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US20060211920A1 (en) * 2005-03-16 2006-09-21 Minnesota Scientific, Inc. Polymer or plastic load bearing surface for cam actuated retractor clamp
US8845726B2 (en) 2006-10-18 2014-09-30 Vertiflex, Inc. Dilator
US11013539B2 (en) 2006-10-18 2021-05-25 Vertiflex, Inc. Methods for treating a patient's spine
US10588663B2 (en) 2006-10-18 2020-03-17 Vertiflex, Inc. Dilator
US20090125030A1 (en) * 2006-10-18 2009-05-14 Shawn Tebbe Dilator
US9566086B2 (en) 2006-10-18 2017-02-14 VeriFlex, Inc. Dilator
US11229461B2 (en) 2006-10-18 2022-01-25 Vertiflex, Inc. Interspinous spacer
US9247968B2 (en) 2007-01-11 2016-02-02 Lanx, Inc. Spinous process implants and associated methods
US20170189078A1 (en) * 2007-01-11 2017-07-06 Zimmer Biomet Spine, Inc. Interspinsous implants and methods
US20090198241A1 (en) * 2008-02-04 2009-08-06 Phan Christopher U Spine distraction tools and methods of use
US20090198245A1 (en) * 2008-02-04 2009-08-06 Phan Christopher U Tools and methods for insertion and removal of medical implants
US20090198338A1 (en) * 2008-02-04 2009-08-06 Phan Christopher U Medical implants and methods
US8105358B2 (en) 2008-02-04 2012-01-31 Kyphon Sarl Medical implants and methods
US20090198337A1 (en) * 2008-02-04 2009-08-06 Phan Christopher U Medical implants and methods
EP2184021A1 (en) * 2008-11-05 2010-05-12 Kyphon SÀRL Interspinous devices
US9907581B2 (en) * 2009-03-13 2018-03-06 Spinal Simplicity Llc. Interspinous process implant and fusion cage spacer
US20110046673A1 (en) * 2009-05-04 2011-02-24 Pixis S.A Interspinous distraction implant
US8740948B2 (en) 2009-12-15 2014-06-03 Vertiflex, Inc. Spinal spacer for cervical and other vertebra, and associated systems and methods
US9186186B2 (en) 2009-12-15 2015-11-17 Vertiflex, Inc. Spinal spacer for cervical and other vertebra, and associated systems and methods
US8496689B2 (en) 2011-02-23 2013-07-30 Farzad Massoudi Spinal implant device with fusion cage and fixation plates and method of implanting
US9084639B2 (en) 2011-02-23 2015-07-21 Farzad Massoudi Spinal implant device with fusion cage and fixation plates and method of implanting
US10080588B2 (en) 2011-02-23 2018-09-25 Farzad Massoudi Spinal implant device with fixation plates and method of implanting
US10052138B2 (en) 2011-02-23 2018-08-21 Farzad Massoudi Method for implanting spinal implant device with fusion cage
US8425560B2 (en) 2011-03-09 2013-04-23 Farzad Massoudi Spinal implant device with fixation plates and lag screws and method of implanting
US9675303B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-06-13 Vertiflex, Inc. Visualization systems, instruments and methods of using the same in spinal decompression procedures
US10524772B2 (en) 2014-05-07 2020-01-07 Vertiflex, Inc. Spinal nerve decompression systems, dilation systems, and methods of using the same
US11357489B2 (en) 2014-05-07 2022-06-14 Vertiflex, Inc. Spinal nerve decompression systems, dilation systems, and methods of using the same
US10335207B2 (en) 2015-12-29 2019-07-02 Nuvasive, Inc. Spinous process plate fixation assembly
US11382670B2 (en) 2015-12-29 2022-07-12 Nuvasive, Inc. Spinous process plate fixation assembly
US11311388B2 (en) * 2020-08-20 2022-04-26 Spinal Simplicity, Llc Interspinous process implant
US11311389B2 (en) * 2020-08-20 2022-04-26 Spinal Simplicity, Llc Interspinous process implant

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US7662187B2 (en) 2010-02-16
US8007537B2 (en) 2011-08-30
US20080051898A1 (en) 2008-02-28
US20080027545A1 (en) 2008-01-31
US20080033558A1 (en) 2008-02-07
US20080046081A1 (en) 2008-02-21
US8894686B2 (en) 2014-11-25
US20080065212A1 (en) 2008-03-13
US20080051899A1 (en) 2008-02-28
US8221463B2 (en) 2012-07-17
US20080065214A1 (en) 2008-03-13
US20080039947A1 (en) 2008-02-14
US20080065213A1 (en) 2008-03-13
US20080033553A1 (en) 2008-02-07
US20080033559A1 (en) 2008-02-07
US20080033560A1 (en) 2008-02-07
US8092535B2 (en) 2012-01-10
US8454659B2 (en) 2013-06-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7662187B2 (en) Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US20080221692A1 (en) Interspinous process implants and methods of use
US7695513B2 (en) Distractible interspinous process implant and method of implantation
US7959652B2 (en) Interspinous process implant having deployable wings and method of implantation
US8012209B2 (en) Interspinous process implant including a binder, binder aligner and method of implantation
EP1804732B1 (en) Interspinous process implant including a binder
US8048117B2 (en) Interspinous process implant and method of implantation
US8591546B2 (en) Interspinous process implant having a thread-shaped wing and method of implantation
US7909853B2 (en) Interspinous process implant including a binder and method of implantation
US20060264939A1 (en) Interspinous process implant with slide-in distraction piece and method of implantation

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: ST. FRANCIS MEDICAL TECHNOLOGIES, INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:ZUCHERMAN, JAMES F.;HSU, KEN Y.;KLYCE, HENRY A.;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:020179/0614;SIGNING DATES FROM 20070913 TO 20070927

Owner name: ST. FRANCIS MEDICAL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.,CALIFORNIA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:ZUCHERMAN, JAMES F.;HSU, KEN Y.;KLYCE, HENRY A.;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20070913 TO 20070927;REEL/FRAME:020179/0614

Owner name: ST. FRANCIS MEDICAL TECHNOLOGIES, INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:ZUCHERMAN, JAMES F.;HSU, KEN Y.;KLYCE, HENRY A.;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20070913 TO 20070927;REEL/FRAME:020179/0614

AS Assignment

Owner name: KYPHON INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: MERGER;ASSIGNOR:ST. FRANCIS MEDICAL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.;REEL/FRAME:020393/0260

Effective date: 20071128

Owner name: KYPHON INC.,CALIFORNIA

Free format text: MERGER;ASSIGNOR:ST. FRANCIS MEDICAL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.;REEL/FRAME:020393/0260

Effective date: 20071128

AS Assignment

Owner name: MEDTRONIC SPINE LLC, CALIFORNIA

Free format text: CHANGE OF NAME;ASSIGNOR:KYPHON INC;REEL/FRAME:020993/0042

Effective date: 20080118

Owner name: MEDTRONIC SPINE LLC,CALIFORNIA

Free format text: CHANGE OF NAME;ASSIGNOR:KYPHON INC;REEL/FRAME:020993/0042

Effective date: 20080118

AS Assignment

Owner name: KYPHON SARL, SWITZERLAND

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:MEDTRONIC SPINE LLC;REEL/FRAME:021070/0278

Effective date: 20080325

Owner name: KYPHON SARL,SWITZERLAND

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:MEDTRONIC SPINE LLC;REEL/FRAME:021070/0278

Effective date: 20080325

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION